DASH 8 Q400

MAINTENANCE TRAINING
MANUAL
VOLUME 1
ATA 100, 5-12, 20, 24, 31 & 45
REVISION 0.5

FlightSafety International, Inc.

Marine Air Terminal, LaGuardia Airport
Flushing, New York 11371
(718) 565-4100
www.FlightSafety.com
 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

NOTICE

The material contained in this training manual is based on information obtained from
the aircraft manufacturer’s Maintenance Manuals and Pilot Manuals. It is to be used for
familiarization and training purposes only.

At the time of printing it contained then-current information. In the event of conflict between
data provided herein and that in publications issued by the manufacturer or the FAA, that
of the manufacturer or the FAA shall take precedence.

We at FlightSafety want you to have the best training possible. We welcome any suggestions
you might have for improving this manual or any other aspect of our training program.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

NOTICE These commodities, t echnology o r softwar e were exported from t he U nited States i n acco rdance w ith t he Expor t
Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
Courses for the Dash 8 Series and other deHavilland aircraft are taught at the following
FlightSafety International learning centers:

FlightSafety International Toronto Learning Center

95 Garratt Boulevard
Downsview, Ontario
M3K 2A5

For course information please contact us:

1-416-638-9313
1-877-FLY-DASH
[email protected]
www.flightsafety.com

Copyright © 2012 FlightSafety International, Inc.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution is prohibited.
All rights reserved.
 INSERT LATEST REVISED PAGES, DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Second Edition..... 0.............. August 2013 Revision............... 0.3............... April 2015

Revision............... 0.1............... April 2014 Revision............... 0.4......... October 2015
Revision............... 0.2........... August 2014 Revision............... 0.5...... November 2015

THIS PUBLICATION CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page *Revision Page *Revision

No. No. No. No.

Cover....................................................... 0.4 31-5 - 31-136.......................................... 0.4

100-i - 100-13.......................................... 0.4 45-i - 45-57.............................................. 0.4
5-12-i - 11-2............................................ 0.4
20-i - 20-20.............................................. 0.4
24-i.......................................................... 0.4
24-ii.......................................................... 0.5
24-iii - 24-vi............................................. 0.4
24-vii - 24-viii........................................... 0.5
24-ix - 24-20............................................ 0.4
24-21....................................................... 0.5
24-22 - 24-23.......................................... 0.4
24-24....................................................... 0.5
24-25 - 24-59.......................................... 0.4
24-60....................................................... 0.5
24-61 - 24-85.......................................... 0.4
24-86 - 24-87.......................................... 0.5
24-88 - 24-212........................................ 0.4
31-i - 31-vi............................................... 0.4
31-vii........................................................ 0.5
31-viii - 31-1............................................ 0.4
31-2......................................................... 0.5
31-3......................................................... 0.4
31-4......................................................... 0.5
 CONTENTS
VOLUME 1
Chapter Title ATA Number
INTRODUCTION 100
AIRCRAFT GENERAL 5-12
STANDARD PRACTICES AIRFRAME 20
ELECTRICAL POWER 24
INDICATING AND RECORDING 31
CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 45
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
CHAPTER 100
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................... 100-1
GENERAL................................................................................................................ 100-2
General.............................................................................................................. 100-3
Engines.............................................................................................................. 100-3
Propellers........................................................................................................... 100-3
Avionics............................................................................................................. 100-3
Navigation.......................................................................................................... 100-3
Communication.................................................................................................. 100-3
Other Systems.................................................................................................... 100-3
Audio Integrating System................................................................................... 100-3
Dimensions External.......................................................................................... 100-4
Internal.............................................................................................................. 100-4
Doors and Exits.................................................................................................. 100-4
Weights.............................................................................................................. 100-4
Fuel and Oil Capacity........................................................................................ 100-5
Performance Range............................................................................................ 100-5
Speeds................................................................................................................ 100-5
Ceiling............................................................................................................... 100-5
Maintenance Program......................................................................................... 100-5
Structural Integrity............................................................................................. 100-5
Bombardier Q400 MI Course Objectives............................................................ 100-6

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
ATA 100

Page
Maintenance Training Manual (MTM)............................................................... 100-6
Aircraft Maintenance Manual............................................................................. 100-7
Correspondence........................................................................................... 100-7
Translation.................................................................................................. 100-7
Safe Life Limits.......................................................................................... 100-7
AMM Temporary Revisions......................................................................... 100-7
Organization of Manual............................................................................... 100-7
Standard Numbering System....................................................................... 100-9
Page Number Assignment/Page Block Assignment...................................... 100-9
Page Features.............................................................................................. 100-9

100-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page

100-1 DASH 8 Q400.........................................................................................100-2

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
CHAPTER 100
INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
The Q400 NextGen turboprop aircraft interior was brightened with the introduction of LED lighting
while highlighting the improved aesthetics with new ceiling panels and dished window sidewalls.

The interior has been enhanced with the introduction of larger overhead bins that accommodate
standard roller bags. Combining these features with the Active Noise and Vibration Suppression
(ANVS) system gives the passenger a pleasant cabin experience.

Operating costs are lowered by increasing the scheduled maintenance intervals and further
optimizing maintenance tasks to reduce downtime during the life cycle.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
ATA 100

GENERAL
The Q400 is fitted with an avionics suite from
Thales. With less weight and fewer parts,
the Thales suite offers higher reliability than
comparable older technology avionics.

The Q400 avionics suite also features

a centralized diagnostic system to help
technicians quickly resolve problems. Its
modular design makes the system easy to
upgrade or to add optional equipment.

An optional Head Up Guidance System allows

single-engine approaches to Category III
weather minima.

The Pratt & Whitney PW150A engine blends

smart technology and low complexity, offering
a new standard in reliability, durability,
and operating economics. Features include
Full Authority Digital Electronic Control
(FADEC), centralized diagnostics and low fuel
consumption & emissions.

While the PW150A produces nearly twice the

take-off power of older turboprop engines, it is
nearly 50 percent more fuel-efficient.

The six-bladed all composite Dowty propellers

deliver more thrust and less noise than smaller
propellers turning at higher RPMs. These slow
moving propellers are mounted further out on
the wing to help reduce noise levels.

The Q400 aircraft is already the most

technologically advanced turboprop airliner
and the NextGen features will make it even
more so. The Q400 NextGen aircraft is the
turboprop airliner for the twenty-first century.

Figure 100-1.  DASH 8 Q400

100-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
GENERAL AVIONICS
Crew 2 Automatic Flight Control System Autopilot
Flight Attendants 2 or 3
Passengers 68 to 78 Automatic Flight Control System Autopilot with Flight
Director
Seat Pitch 30 - 34 in (76 - 86 cm)
Dual Attitude and Heading Reference System
Dual Air Data Computers
ENGINES EFIS (Electronic Flight Instrument System)
Two Pratt & Whitney Canada Corp. PW150A Cat II capability
turboprops Cat III with HGS
Engine and Systems Integrated Display (ESID)
Normal Takeoff Power 4,580 shp
Max. Power 5,071 shp NAVIGATION
Max. Cruise Power 3,947 shp
Max. Climb Power 4,058 shp Dual VHF (VOR, Glideslope and Marker)
Dual ADF, DME and ATC Mode S
Single or Dual Flight Management System* with GPS
PROPELLERS
Cat IIIA Head-Up Guidance Display*
Dowty model R408 six-bladed, reversible ACARS*
pitch; composite.
COMMUNICATION
Diameter 13 ft 6 in (4.11m)
Dual VHF System
* - Denotes optional equipment Service Interphone and Passenger Address System
HF System*

OTHER SYSTEMS
Standby Instruments
Radio Altimeter
Color Weather Radar
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System
(EGPWS)*
TCAS II/ACAS* (change 7)

AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM

Cockpit Voice Recorder
Emergency Locator Transmitter (3 frequency
optional)
Flight Data Recorder
Centralized Maintenance and Diagnostic System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
ATA 100

NOTE DOORS AND EXITS

* Dimensions with respect
to ground reference line are Passenger door (LH, fwd)
approximate and will vary Height 5 ft 5 in (1.65 m)
with aircraft configuration and
Width 2 ft 6 in (0.76 m)
loading conditions.
Height to sill 4 ft 0.5 in (1.23 m)

DIMENSIONS EXTERNAL Passenger door (LH, aft)

Height 5 ft 5 in (1.65 m)
Length overall 107 ft 9 in (32.84 m) Width 2 ft 4 in (0.71 m)
Wingspan 93 ft 3 in (28.42 m) Height to sill* 5 ft 1 in (1.56 m)
Height overall 27 ft 5 in (8.34 m) Baggage door (LH, aft)
Fuselage maximum Height 4 ft 8 in (1.43 m)
8 ft 10 in (2.69 m)
diameter
Width 4 ft 2 in (1.27 m)
Wing area (gross) 679 ft² (63.08 m²)
Height to sill* 5 ft 1 in (1.55 m)
Horizontal tail area 180 ft² (16.72 m²)
Baggage door (LH, fwd)
Vertical tail area 152 ft² (14.1 m²)
Height 4 ft 9 in (1.45 m)
Width 2 ft 4 in (0.71 m)
INTERNAL Height to sill* 4 ft 2 in (1.27 m)

Cabin length (excluding

cockpit)
61 ft 8 in (18.80 m) NOTE
Maximum height 6 ft 5 in (1.95 m) Dimensions with respect to
Cabin volume 2,740 ft³ (77.60 m³) ground reference line are
Cabin pressurization 5.5 psi (37.9 KPa) approximate and will vary
Baggage volume, total 502 ft³ (14.22 m³)
with aircraft configuration and
loading conditions.
Forward Compartment 91 ft³ (2.58 m³)
Aft Compartment 411 ft³ (11.64 m³)
WEIGHTS
Baggage weight, total 4,710 lbs (2,136 kg)
Forward Compartment 910 lbs (413 kg) Maximum takeoff
64,500 lb (29,257 kg)
Aft Compartment 3,000 lbs (1,363 kg) weight
Maximum landing
61,750 lb (28,009 kg)
weight
Maximum zero fuel
57,000 lb (25,855 kg)
weight
Operating weight empty 37,888 lb (17,185 kg)
Maximum payload 19,112 lb (8,670 kg)

100-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
FUEL AND OIL CAPACITY NOTE
* These numbers are for general
Fuel capacity 1,724 U.S. gal (6,526 L) reference only. Refer to the
1,436 Imp. gal
Aircraft Maintenance Manual
Oil capacity per engine 8.0 U.S. gal (30 liters) for exact values.

PERFORMANCE RANGE
Maximum range
1,362 nm (1,567sm,
(70 pax @ 200 lb)
2,522 km)
MCR, ISA, SL

SPEEDS
360 kts
Maximum cruise speed
(414 mph, 667 km/h)

CEILING
Maximum operating
25,000 ft (7,620 m)
altitude
Maximum operating
27,000 ft (8,230 m)
ceiling (optional)

MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
Daily checks None
Every 50 flight
Line checks
hours
Structural
Every 40,000 flights
inspection
*Equalized Maintenance Program available.

STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
40,000 flights / 32,670
Crack Free Life
flt. hrs.
80,000 flights / 65,340
Design Life
flt. hrs.

*Assumes a 50 minute flight time

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
ATA 100

BOMBARDIER Q400 MI MAINTENANCE TRAINING

COURSE OBJECTIVES MANUAL (MTM)
1. Upon completion of the course, you will be This Maintenance Training Manual (MTM) gives
able to identify safety precautions related to a description of the airframe, systems and engine.
the airframe, systems and powerplant. This information is for training purposes only. It
does not supersede and is not a substitution for
2. Identify maintenance practices related to
any of the manufacturer’s documentation.
the airframe, systems and powerplant.
3. Define the general layout of the aircraft’s The MTM material is continuously updated and
major systems including terminology, and all changes in appearance or system operation,
nomenclature. will be discussed during academic training.
4. Identify special tooling and test equipment.
The presented systems are in Air Transport
5. Demonstrate knowledge of the main ramp Association (ATA) format and each chapter
and transit activities including servicing. has bleed guide marks to divide the individual
chapters. For training purposes, some tabs have
6. Describe in detail systems and aircraft
more than one ATA chapter.
handling.
7. E x p l a i n t h e n o r m a l a n d a b n o r m a l
functioning of each major system, including
NOTE
fault diagnostics. Maintenance Tasks and
Procedures that appear in the
8. Demonstrate proficiency in the use of
MTM are condensed and are
documentation (MEL/CDL) to determine
for training purposes only. Any
aircraft airworthiness.
maintenance that is performed
9. Identify and use appropriate documentation. on the aircraft MUST be
accomplished utilizing approved
OEM documentation.

100-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE Correspondence
MANUAL Send all correspondence concerning the AMM to:
The Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM),
Bombardier Inc.
for the Bombardier Inc., Dash 8 Q400, is in
Bombardier Aerospace, Regional Aircraft
agreement with the Air Transport Association
Customer Support
of America Specification No. 100 (ATA-100),
Mail Stop N42-25
revision 34, dated February 15, 1996.
123 Garratt Blvd., Downsview, Ontario
Canada
The AMM contains two parts:
M3K 1Y5
•• Part 1 - System Description Section
Translation
•• Part 2 - Practices and Procedures.
If all or part of the Dash 8 Q400 AMM is
The information given in this introduction is translated, the official version is the English
applicable to Part 2 of the AMM, Practices language version by Bombardier Aerospace,
and Procedures, reference is made to the SDS Regional Aircraft.
as necessary.
Safe Life Limits
The AMM gives instructions to service, replace,
Safe Life Limits are given in Part 2 of
adjust, test, inspect, check, clean, paint, and
the Maintenance Requirements Manual
repair the aircraft systems and equipment.
(PSM 1-84-7) and are recognized by the
The AMM gives structure inspection criteria,
Airworthiness Authorities.
however, instructions to repair the structure
are in the Dash 8 Q400 Structural Repair
Manual (PSM 1-84-3). Instructions and data to AMM Temporary Revisions
inspect and repair equipment off the aircraft are Bombardier Aerospace, Regional Aircraft
contained in vendor Component Maintenance will supply temporary revisions service to
Manuals or the Dash 8 Q400 Component this manual as necessary. The Temporary
Maintenance Manual (PSM 1-84-6). Revisions supply revised instructions before
the next scheduled revision. The content of
Bombardier Aerospace, Regional Aircraft each Temporary Revision will be included in
publications use both American and metric the next normal revision.
systems of measurement. The system used in
the original reference document is given first, Temporary Revisions are not revised. If changes
followed by the conversion in parenthesis. are necessary to the Temporary Revision, a new
Temporary Revision is supplied.
If the data or procedures written in this manual
are different from those given by the regulatory
authority, obey the data and procedures of the
Organization of Manual
regulatory authority.
General
The maintenance manual is organized in levels
as specified by ATA-100. These levels are
usually referred to as a chapter, section, and
subject. Each page contains the chapter-section-
subject number and revision date of the page.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-7

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
ATA 100

Chapter/System Auxiliary Power 49

Standard
This level is usually known as the chapter. It Practices-Structures
51
has inter-related components arranged to do
a specific function: It is further divided into Doors 52
subsystems usually known as sections. Each Fuselage 53
chapter is assigned its number and title by Nacelles/Pylons 54
ATA-100 and is identified by the first element Stabilizers 55
in the standard numbering system. The table Windows 56
that follows shows the chapter titles and their
related numbers. Wings 57
Propellers 61
Power Plant 71
CHAPTER TITLE CHAPTER NUMBER Engine and Fuel Control 73
AIRCRAFT GENERAL Ignition 74
Time Limits/ Air 75
5
Maintenance Checks
Engine Controls 76
Dimensions and Areas 6
Engine Indicating 77
Lifting and Shoring 7
Exhaust 78
Leveling and Weighing 8
Oil 79
Towing and Taxiing 9
Starting 80
Parking and Mooring 10
Placards and Markings 11
Servicing 12 Section/Subsystem
Standard
20
This level is usually known as the section.
Practices–Airframe It permits the chapter to be divided into
Air Conditioning 21 subsystems and is identified by the second
Auto Flight 22 element in the standard numbering system.
Communications 23
Electrical Power 24 Subject/Unit
Equipment/Furnishings 25 This level is usually known as the subject. It
Fire Protection 26 permits the identification of individual units in
Flight Controls 27 a system or section and is identified by the third
Fuel 28
element in the standard numbering system.
Hydraulic Power 29
Ice and Rain Protection 30
Indicating/Recording
31
Systems
Landing Gear 32
Lights 33
Navigation 34
Oxygen 35
Pneumatics 36
Water/Waste 38
CHAPTER TITLE CHAPTER NUMBER

100-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
Standard Numbering System Page Features
The manual numbering system is specified
by ATA-100. It is a three-element numbering
System Description Section (1 to 99)
system that divides the manual into chapter/ The System Description Section comprises Part 1
section/subject. Each element has two digits and of the Aircraft Maintenance Manual. This section
is given as follows: gives the function, operation, configuration, and
control of the system and components in the
aircraft. The information is given in sufficient
detail to let the technician know the function and
construction of the system.

Maintenance Practices (201 to 299)

This page block is used when:

•• The content of individual pages is brief

Page Number Assignment/ and it can be combined into one topic
Page Block Assignment
•• The procedure does not agree with any
The subjects in the maintenance manual are specific block assignment.
divided into page blocks with the headings
specified by ATA-100. The page blocks are
identified as follows: Servicing (301 to 399)
Servicing page blocks are used in Chapter 12
HEADING PAGE NUMBER and system chapters.
System Description
1 to 99 Chapter 12 contains scheduled and unscheduled
Section
Maintenance Practices 201 to 299
servicing applications to the whole aircraft.
Included in this chapter are replenishment of
Servicing 301 to 399
items such as fuel, oil, hydraulic fluid, water,
Removal/Installation 401 to 499 tire pressure, etc.
Adjustment/Test 501 to 599
Inspection/Check 601 to 699 Servicing which is necessary to complete other
Cleaning/Painting 701 to 799
maintenance tasks is found in related chapters.
This includes tasks such as bleeding a component.
Repairs 801 to 899

If additional pages are necessary, the page

Removal/Installation (401 to 499)
numbers stop at 98 and continue with 98.1, Removal/installation procedures have two
98.2, 98.3, etc. independent tasks, one for the removal and one
for the installation. However, the job set-up and
The page blocks are usually written close out procedure are not given in both tasks.
independently, but if page blocks are short, they
are combined into one heading: Maintenance The job close out procedures are not given
Practices, page block 201 to 299. in the removal task because the installation
usually follows it. If the installation task does
General maintenance instructions, that are not not immediately follow the removal task,
identified by one of the heading given above, it is assumed that the operator will use the
are put into the Maintenance Practices, page applicable close out procedures.
block 201 to 299.

Revision 0.5 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-9

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
ATA 100

The step “Make sure the aircraft is in same Inspection/Check (601 to 699)
configuration as in the removal task” is given
as a reminder to the operator that the aircraft This page block contains information and
configuration, from steps done in the removal instructions to inspect or perform a check of:
task, is still the same.
•• System
These steps can include such items as: •• Component
•• Removal of hydraulic power •• Area (Zone)
•• Circuit breaker adjustment •• Connected parts.
•• Removal of access panels Inspection/check specifies the rejection criteria
•• Safety practices/precautions for the related equipment. The categories of
inspection/check are as follows:
•• Installation of maintenance stands, etc.
Inspection/Check on the Aircraft:
Adjustment/Test (501 to 599)
•• Visual inspections or checks for cracks,
There are three types of tests: operational, damage, corrosion, etc.
functional, and system. The tests are specified
in ATA-100 as follows: •• Inspection or checks with measurements
of displacement, travel, clearances, rate
of leakage, etc.
Operational Test
These procedures only ascertain that a system Inspection/Check of Component Removed from
or unit is operable. These tests should require Aircraft:
no special equipment or facilities other than
that installed on the aircraft. •• This inspection/check category includes
visual inspections of components that
It is not intended that the operational test of the are removed from the aircraft and the
unit shall meet the specifications and tolerances connections between the aircraft and the
ordinarily established for overhaul or major removed components.
maintenance periods.
Cleaning/Painting (701 to 799)
Functional Test This page block gives the necessary procedures
These procedures ascertain that a system or to clean and/or paint a part or area of the aircraft.
unit is functioning within design specifications.
These tests may require supplemental ground Repairs (801 to 899)
support equipment and should be more specific
and detailed than an operational test. This page block gives all the approved repair
procedures for the aircraft. It does not include
those repairs contained in the Component
System Test Maintenance Manual and the Structural
T his pr ocedure cont ai ns al l adj ustme nt Repair Manual.
specifications and tolerances required to
maintain system and/or unit performance at
maximum efficiency and design specifications.
It shall be self-contained and may duplicate
other tests, it is normally used at major
maintenance periods.

100-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
Maintenance Topics table of contents gives an index for the quick
location of information in a chapter. All sub-
Topics are high level headings used to divide subsystem are given with the maintenance
the Task into groups of sub-tasks (steps). They function indented below each unit. The
permit recognition of major parts of the Task. component units are arranged in alphabetical
order by the key noun of the component. The
One or more topics are always contained in a chapter/section/subject number and the first
Task and are given in the sequence that follows: page number is adjacent to each section or
subject for which information is given.
•• Job Set-Up Information
•• Job Set-Up Illustrations
•• Procedure The standard orientation of illustrations is a
•• Close Out. front-left-side, aerial view, but other views are
used for clarity. Illustrations show the details
These are the usual topics found in the AMM. and the location of a component.
Other topics are used as applicable.
Definition of Warning, Caution and Note
Front Matter/Manual Front Matter/ ATA-100 defines warning, cautions, and notes
Title Pages as follows:
The title page contains the Bombardier Inc.,
Dash 8 Q400 masthead, the identification, and •• WARNING: Calls attention to the
the initial date of the manual. use of materials, processes, methods,
procedures, or limits which must be
followed precisely to prevent injury
Record of Revisions to persons.
The record of revision is located after the title •• CAUTION: Calls attention to methods
page. This record must be completed whenever and procedures which must be followed
a revision to the AMM is received. to prevent damage to the equipment.
•• NOTE: Calls attention to methods that
Record of Temporary Revisions make the job easier.
The Record of Temporary Revisions follows
the Record of Revisions. The Record of Equivalent Tools, Fixtures
Temporary Revisions must be updated each and Test Equipment
time a Temporary Revision is added to or
removed from the manual. The tools, fixtures, and test equipment which are
necessary to do a maintenance task are supplied
in a table (in the related maintenance procedure)
Chapter Front Matter/Effective Pages with the heading Tools and Equipment. These
A list of effective pages is located at the items are the tools recommended by Bombardier
beginning of each chapter. It identifies each Aerospace, Regional Aircraft to do the given
chapter/section/subject and page individually maintenance procedure. The aircraft operator
and gives the number and the date of each page. can use equivalent tools, fixtures, or test
equipment as alternatives to those given in the
table (unless specified differently) if those items
Table of Contents agree with the conditions that follow:
A table of contents, for each chapter, follows
the list of effective pages and is identified by •• Functionally interchangeable
the chapter number and the CONTENTS. The with those given in the table

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-11

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
ATA 100

•• Applicable to the given Numbering System

maintenance procedure
The numbering system is an expansion of the
•• Equally safe for the equipment ATA-100 three element numbering system and
and for the person or persons has seven elements. Maintenance procedures
who do the maintenance are divided into Tasks. The numbers are
defined as follows:
Consumable Materials
Some of the maintenance procedures in the ELEMENT TASK
AMM have consumable materials tables. NUMBER 29–00-01–400–801–A00–XXX
These tables identify the consumable materials 1, 2, & 3 Chapter-Section-Subject
that are necessary to do the maintenance. A This three digit numerical function code
consumable material is an item that is used identifies/defines the maintenance
once and is subsequently replaced. 4 being performed. The definition of all
function codes can be found in the
AMTOSS Function Code Index
The Consumable Products Manual, PSM1-
84-18, supplies lists which identify all of the This three digit unique numerical
identifier lets similarly identified TASKS
consumable materials that are used in the AMM. 5
be unique when elements 1 to 4 are
the same.
The first two digits of the REFERENCE number This element is not used unless
identify the section where the maintenance necessary. Element 6 is used to identify
technician can find the consumable material. a TASK effectivity or to identify sheet
numbers for illustration Task numbers.
The last two digits are the sequence number for When element 6 is used to identify a
TASK effectivity, the code is alpha-
the specific consumable material. numeric and starts with A00, B00, etc.
The first digit is alphabetic. It identifies
The Consumable Products Manual, PSM 1-84- 6 the differences in procedure within
18, gives the data that follows: the TASK due to the incorporation of
modifications, service bulletins, etc.
When element 6 is used to identify a
•• Reference number of consumable sheet number, the code is numeric and
material starts at 001, 002, etc. The value of
element 6 is 000 when a customer code
•• Name of the consumable material (element 7) is created and the related
•• Manufacturer’s reference and/or TASK did not have a sixth element
specification. This element is not used unless
necessary. This three digit alphabetic
7 identifier is used to identify airline
Aircraft Maintenance Task Oriented unique data. The airline is responsible
Support System (AMTOSS) TASK for the identified TASK content.
Numbering System General
The function of AMTOSS is to improve the
organization of the AMM and to permit the use
of an automated data retrieval system. It uses a
standard and unique numbering system to give a
numerical identity to maintenance Tasks usually
done in an airline maintenance program.

100-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATA 100
Definition of TASK NOTES
A TASK is a complete procedure to be performed
on the aircraft. It includes all the information
necessary to do the work, from job set-up to
close out. TASKS also include references to other
TASKS where related procedures can be found.

ALL maintenance tasks begin with the aircraft set

up in the same configuration.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 100-13

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 5-12
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CONTENTS
Page

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

05-00-00 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS................................................... 5-1
Part 1 - Maintenance Review Board (MRB) Report................................................ 5-2
Revision Process.................................................................................................... 5-2
Maintenance Program............................................................................................. 5-2
Part 2 - Airworthiness Limitation Items (ALI)........................................................ 5-3
Unscheduled Maintenance Checks......................................................................... 5-3
06-00-00 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS......................................................................... 6-1
06-10-00 DIMENSIONS............................................................................................... 6-3
General.................................................................................................................. 6-3
Overall Dimensions......................................................................................... 6-3
06-20-00 AIRCRAFT STATIONS................................................................................. 6-3
General.................................................................................................................. 6-3
06-30-00 AIRCRAFT ZONES....................................................................................... 6-4
General.................................................................................................................. 6-4
06-41-00/06-43-00 EXTERNAL & INTERNAL ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS....... 6-8
General.................................................................................................................. 6-8
07-00-00 LIFTING AND SHORING............................................................................. 7-1
07-00-00 LIFTING AND SHORING............................................................................. 7-2
Introduction........................................................................................................... 7-2
General.................................................................................................................. 7-2
07-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT........................................................ 7-5

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 5-12-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
07-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS........................................................................... 7-5
08-00-00 LEVELING AND WEIGHING...................................................................... 8-1
08-10-00 WEIGHING OF THE AIRCRAFT.................................................................. 8-3
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

Introduction........................................................................................................... 8-3
General.................................................................................................................. 8-3
08-20-00 LEVELING OF THE AIRCRAFT.................................................................. 8-5
Introduction........................................................................................................... 8-5
General.................................................................................................................. 8-5
08-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT........................................................ 8-6
08-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS........................................................................... 8-6
09-00-00 TOWING AND TAXIING.............................................................................. 9-1
09-10-00 TOWING OF THE AIRCRAFT...................................................................... 9-3
Introduction........................................................................................................... 9-3
General.................................................................................................................. 9-3
09-20-00 TAXIING OF THE AIRCRAFT...................................................................... 9-9
Introduction........................................................................................................... 9-9
General.................................................................................................................. 9-9
09-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT...................................................... 9-11
09-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS......................................................................... 9-11
10-00-00 PARKING, MOORING AND RETURN TO SERVICE................................. 10-1
10-11-00 PARKING.................................................................................................... 10-2
Introduction......................................................................................................... 10-2
General................................................................................................................ 10-2
10-12-00 AIRCRAFT STORAGE................................................................................ 10-6
Introduction......................................................................................................... 10-6

5-12-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
General................................................................................................................ 10-6
Terms and References................................................................................... 10-6
Humidity Indicators...................................................................................... 10-6

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

Engine Preservation...................................................................................... 10-6
Environmental Considerations....................................................................... 10-6
Storage Records............................................................................................ 10-7
10-13-00 ENGINE PRESERVATION/DEPRESERVATION......................................... 10-8
Introduction......................................................................................................... 10-8
General................................................................................................................ 10-8
10-20-00 MOORING OF THE AIRCRAFT............................................................... 10-10
Introduction....................................................................................................... 10-10
General.............................................................................................................. 10-11
10-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT.................................................... 10-13
10-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS....................................................................... 10-14
11-00-00 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS................................................................... 11-1
11-00-00 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS................................................................... 11-2
Introduction......................................................................................................... 11-2
General................................................................................................................ 11-2

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 5-12-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page

6-1 Aircraft Axis................................................................................................ 6-2
6-2 Major Zones................................................................................................ 6-4

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

6-3 Major Zone 100 (Lower Fuselage) Sub-Zones............................................. 6-5
6-4 Major Zone 200 (Upper Fuselage) Sub-Zones.............................................. 6-6
6-5 Major Zone 300 (Empennage) Sub-Zone..................................................... 6-7
6-6 Major Zone 400 (Nacelles) Sub-Zones......................................................... 6-7
6-7 Access Panels and Doors............................................................................. 6-8
7-1 Jacking of the Aircraft................................................................................. 7-3
7-2 
Jacking of the Aircraft at the NLG Axle....................................................... 7-4
7-3 
Jacking of the Aircraft at the MLG Axle...................................................... 7-4
8-1 Weighing of the Aircraft.............................................................................. 8-2
8-2 Method to Determine the Center Line of Main Wheels................................ 8-2
8-3 Leveling of the Aircraft............................................................................... 8-4
9-1 Towing the Aircraft with a Towbar............................................................... 9-2
9-2 Towing/Moving Aircraft with Flat Tires ...................................................... 9-4
9-3 Towing of the Aircraft (Towbar-less Method)............................................... 9-6
9-4 Aircraft Taxiing........................................................................................... 9-8
9-5 Aircraft Taxiing Turning Radii with Minimum Power................................9-10
9-6 Propeller/Engine Exhaust Danger Areas....................................................9-12
10-1 Engaging the Nose Gear Ground Lock.......................................................10-2
10-2 Installation of the Main Landing Gear (MLG) Lock Pins...........................10-3
10-3 Static Grounding of the Aircraft................................................................10-4
10-4 Mooring the Aircraft at the Nose Landing Gear.......................................10-11

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 5-12-v

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

10-5 Mooring the Aircraft at the Main Landing Gears.....................................10-12
11-1 Left Fuselage Placards and Markings (Example Configuration)................11-2
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

TABLES

Table Title Page

10-1 Wind Speed and Direction Limitations for Aircraft Mooring............................ 10-10

5-12-vi FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 5-12
AIRCRAFT GENERAL

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

05-00-00 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS
The Maintenance Requirements Manual contains the scheduled maintenance tasks performed on
the Dash 8 Q400 aircraft. Unscheduled maintenance tasks are included in the Aircraft Maintenance
Manual Part 2, Chapter 05.

The Maintenance Requirements Manual (MRM) consists of two parts:

•• Part 1 - Maintenance Review Board (MRB) Report

•• Part 2 - Airworthiness Limitation Items (ALI)

For non-scheduled maintenance tasks refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual, Chapter 5.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 5-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PART 1 - MAINTENANCE receive adequate inspection to

determine security of installation and
REVIEW BOARD (MRB) REPORT general condition.
The MRB report outlines the initial minimum •• Electrical Wiring Interconnection
scheduled maintenance/inspection requirements System Inspection Program (EWIS):
used in the development of an approved Provides a means by which the aircraft
maintenance program for the airframe, engines wiring is examined on a scheduled basis.
(on-wing), systems and components of the
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

DHC-8 400 aircraft. The MRB requirements are •• Corrosion Prevention and Control
the basis from which each air carrier develops Program (CPCP): A program of
its own maintenance program. The responsible maintenance tasks implemented at
Regulatory Authority inspector shall ascertain a threshold designed to control an
that all of the applicable scheduled maintenance/ aircraft structure to Corrosion Level
inspection requirements in this report are 1 (Corrosion damage that does not
included in the air carrier’s initial continuous require structural reinforcement or
airworthiness maintenance program. replacement) or better.
•• L i g h t n i n g A n d H i g h I n t e n s i t y
REVISION PROCESS Radiated Fields (L/Hirf): This
program makes sure that L/HIRF
The DHC-8-400 Maintenance Review Board protection is maintained for each Line
Report is subject to regular review and Replaceable Unit (LRU) and wiring
amendments. Changes may be initiated by, disconnect within a specified system.
the manufacturer, industry, and/or the MRB.
These changes may result from in service Tasks have a specific interval listed as
experience, manufacturer’s test data, analysis hours, cycles, calendar, engine change,
and/or changes in utilization or configuration. etc. and may have abbreviations as
follows:
MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
°° Flight Cycles FC
The maintenance program lists scheduled °° Flight Hours FH
maintenance tasks arising from analysis in the
following sections: °° Engine Hours EH
An air carrier may do any task listed individually
•• Systems/Powerplant Program: This or in packages, provided the interval for each
section covers all the aircraft systems task is not exceeded.
including the Engine and Propeller.
Only Maintenance Significant Items
(MSI’s) are in this section.
•• Structural Maintenance Program:
This program supplies the air carrier
with a basic structural inspection
schedule based on Environmental
Damage (ED), Accidental Damage
(AD), and Fatigue Damage (FD).
•• Zonal Inspection Program: The Zonal
Inspection Program provides a means
by which the entire aircraft is examined
on a scheduled basis. The program
assures that all systems/powerplant,
components, installations and structures

5-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PART 2 - AIRWORTHINESS maintain the design features required to

preclude the existence or development of an
LIMITATION ITEMS (ALI) ignition source within the fuel tank system.
To meet Type certification requirements the 5. Critical Design Configuration Control
certification program identifies maintenance Limitations (CDCCL): Design features
tasks where the task must be performed at or that must be preserved to prevent the
before the required interval. The information occurrence of an unsafe condition that
contained in Part 2 may change to reflect

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

was identified in the fuel tank assessment
service and/or test experience or new analysis analysis (SFAR 88). The purpose of the
methods. Any change(s) are generated by CDCCL is to provide instructions to retain
Bombardier and approved by Transport Canada. the critical ignition source prevention
feature during configuration change that
Five types of maintenance tasks are included may be caused by alterations, repairs or
in the ALI: maintenance actions.
1. Certification Maintenance Requirement UNSCHEDULED
(CMR): A CMR is a required task, MAINTENANCE CHECKS
established during the design certification
of the airplane as an operating limitation ATA chapter 05 of the AMM contains
of the type certificate. CMR’s usually unscheduled maintenance tasks that must be
result from an analysis conducted to completed after non-normal operations have
show compliance with catastrophic and occurred before the aircraft may be returned
hazardous failure conditions. Their intent to service.
is to detect significant latent failures that
would, in combination with one or more
other specific failures or events, result in a
hazardous or catastrophic failure condition.
2. Structural Maintenance (ALI): The
identification of Fatigue inspection tasks for
each Principal Structural Element (PSE) is
an integral part of certification for a damage
tolerant aircraft. Transport Canada (TC) has
a requirement that damage tolerant PSE’s
cannot go uninspected for more than half of
the aircraft design lifetime (40,000 flights).
3. Safe Life Component (Discard Tasks):
Operators must monitor the accumulated
flight cycles and generate task cards to
replace the safe life component, listed
in the SAFE LIFE COMPONENTS or
SUPPLEMENTS section, at or before a Safe
Life Component reaches its Discard Time.
4. Fuel System Limitations (FSL): This
section gives a list of the Fuel System
Limitations (FSL) that are mandated by
the Special Federal Aviation Regulation
(SFAR) 88. FSLs are limitation
requirements that identify all the necessary
maintenance and inspection tasks to

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 5-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

06-00-00 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 6-1

6-2 05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

BULLET FAIRING
ORIGIN
(Xp,Yp,Zp=0)

DASH 8 Q400
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
ORIGIN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

(X H, YH, Z H = 0)

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

VERTICAL STABILIZER
WING ORIGIN
ORIGIN (X V, Y V, Z V = 0)
(X W , Y W, Z W = 0)

NACELLE
ORIGIN
(X N, YN , Z N = 0)

Z (VERTICAL) FUSELAGE ORIGIN PRIMARY

AXIS REFERENCE FOR AIRCRAFT
X (LONGITUDINAL) STATIONS (X, Y, Z = 0)
Y (LATERAL)
AXIS AXIS
fsh78a01.cgm

ORIGIN
3-AXIS CO-ORDINATE SYSTEM

Figure 6-1.  Aircraft Axis

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

06-10-00 DIMENSIONS These ordinates are identified by:

•• XW, YW and ZW (Wings)

GENERAL
•• XH, YH, and ZH (Horizontal stabilizer)
Overall Dimensions •• XV, YV, and ZV (Vertical stabilizer)
Span............................... 93 ft - 3 in (28.42 m) •• XN, YN, and ZN (Nacelles)

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

Length.......................... 107 ft - 9 in (32.83 m) •• XP, YP and ZP (Bullet fairing).
Height............................... 27 ft - 4 in(8.34 m)
Propeller Ground Clearance.... 38.67 in (98.22 m)

06-20-00 AIRCRAFT
STATIONS
GENERAL
Refer to Figure 6-1. Aircraft Axis.

The three primary axes are given X, Y and Z

and the ordinates are identified along these
axes from a point of origin. The longitude axis
is X, the lateral axis is Y and the vertical axis
is Z. The point of origin for the three axes is in
front of the forward passenger door, centerline
and below the ground reference line of the
aircraft. Identification of the ordinates is by the
dimension in inches from the point of origin.

The X, Y, Z axis system has more points of

origin that are set in the aircraft. These datum
points show the location of primary assemblies.
The wings, horizontal stabilizer, nacelles and
vertical stabilizer are primary assemblies.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 6-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

06-30-00 AIRCRAFT The aircraft is divided into eight major zones.

ZONES •• Zone 100...................... Lower fuselage

•• Zone 200.......................Upper fuselage
GENERAL •• Zone 300............................ Empennage
Refer to: •• Zone 400....... Powerplants and nacelles
•• Figure 6-2. Major Zones. •• Zone 500............................... Left wing
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• Figure 6-3. Major Zone 100 (Lower •• Zone 600............................. Right wing
Fuselage) Sub-Zones.
•• Zone 700................... Landing gear and
•• Figure 6-4. Major Zone 200 (Upper landing gear doors
Fuselage) Sub-Zones.
•• Zone 800.....................................Doors
•• Figure 6-5. Major Zone 300
(Empennage) Sub-Zone. Each major zone is further broken down into
subzones for ease of location components and
•• Figure 6-6. Major Zone 400 (Nacelles)
panels. Some examples of these are:
Sub-Zones.
•• Subzone 120..........Flight compartment
under floor area
•• Subzone 130.................Fuselage under
floor area
600

500
400
300
700

400
800

300

200 800
800

100
100 400

fsh79a01.cgm
800

Figure 6-2.  Major Zones

6-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 X783.10 X836.452
X714.600

145

144

DASH 8 Q400
X428.500 142

143

141
132 X428.500
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

133 140

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

X70.500 131
X-39.000 134

130

X-111.000

X-155.000
122

112 121

111
120
113

110
X-178.000

fsh90a01.cgm
6-5

Figure 6-3.  Major Zone 100 (Lower Fuselage) Sub-Zones

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

6-6 05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

X 714.600

X 829.548
263 262
264
245
243
244
261

X 428.500
260 251

DASH 8 Q400
235
242
233

X 39.000
250
234
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

X -0.750 241

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

X -33.000

232
X -39.000

X 70.500 240

X 714.600

224 231
222
211 230

212
225

223 220
210
221

X -39.000

X -111.000
X -155.000
fsi06a01.cgm

Figure 6-4.  Major Zone 200 (Upper Fuselage) Sub-Zones

 344 340
343
342 330
341

333 XN-12.907 XN123.060

XN210.000
332
XN315.093
331
334

DASH 8 Q400
411 412

413
414
325
XN257.500
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

LH SIDE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

414

410
324

X846.623 323 LH NACELLE 412

322
320
X1044.103
321
415
X469.500
352 X980.178
312
351 350 X829.548
413

310 411 fsh94a01.cgm

311

fsh92a01.cgm
X836.452
6-7

Figure 6-5.  Major Zone 300 (Empennage) Sub-Zone Figure 6-6.  Major Zone 400 (Nacelles) Sub-Zones

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

06-41-00/06-43-00 A three digit numeric group indicates the Major

zone and sub zone where the panel, door or
EXTERNAL & INTERNAL fairing is located. A two digit letter group gives
ACCESS PANELS AND the position of the panel, door or fairing in
relation to the aircraft as follows:
DOORS
•• The first letter identifies the general
GENERAL position. This starts with the letter A
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

and goes from the inboard to outboard

Refer to Figure 6-7. Access Panels and Doors. and from the front to the rear.
•• The second letter identifies the location
The access panels and doors are identified by
of the panel, door or fairing in relation
an alphanumeric code. The identification code
to the aircraft as follows:
makes it easier to find the different access
panels, doors and fairings. Each panel, door °° T (Top)
and fairing has a two-group code to indicate its
position on the aircraft. °° B (Bottom)
°° L (Left side)
325 FR °° R (Right side)
325 ET 325 DT 325 CT 325 BR °° Z (Internal).
325 AT

325 GB
322 ER
322 FR
322 DR
323 DR
322 AR
324 DR
321 FT
322 GR

323 CR

324 CR 321 CT

323 BR
323 AR 321 BR

324 BR
321 AR
324 AR

RIGHT SIDE 312 AB 311 CZ

311 BZ
311 AB 311DR

Figure 6-7.  Access Panels and Doors

fsh77a01.cgm

6-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

07-00-00 LIFTING AND SHORING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 7-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

07-00-00 LIFTING AND To lift the aircraft on all three jacks at the
wing and forward fuselage, the procedure is
SHORING as follows:

•• The top door of the forward emergency

INTRODUCTION exit is removed and the lower door is
opened
There are three jacking points on the aircraft
•• A plumb bob line is put through the
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

structure. There are two jacking points on the

wing rear spar and one jacking point on the hole in the plumb bob hanger
forward fuselage, aft of the nose landing gear
•• The parking brake is released
(NLG).
•• The chocks are moved clear of the nose
There is a jacking point at the nose landing landing gear (NLG) tires
gear axle and another at each of the two main
•• A nose fuselage jack is put at the nose
landing gear axles.
fuselage jacking point
GENERAL •• The front fuselage jack adapter is put
in the front fuselage receptacle and
Refer to Figure 7-1. Jacking of the Aircraft. held there
•• The jack height is increased until the
The complete aircraft can be lifted without
jack correctly engages the adapter
payload (engines and propellers or equivalent
weight installed). •• A tail stand is positioned approximately 4
to 6 in. (101 to 152 mm) from the adapter
The engines can be removed when the aircraft on the bottom of the AFT fuselage
is on the jacks. Ballast is distributed equally on
•• The nose jack is raised continuously
the floor of the cockpit / cabin area forward of
and the NLG jack locking collar is
the lavatory (see MTM Chapter 71).
moved down while the aircraft is lifted
If necessary, the aircraft nose landing gear •• The plumb bob is monitored and lifting
(NLG) can be lifted only using the structural of the aircraft is stopped when the
jacking point aft of the NLG. The two main plumb bob aligns with the longitudinal
landing gears (MLG) must stay on the ground. level mark on the target plate
The aircraft weight must be less than 48,792 lb
•• A wing jack is put at each wing jacking
(22,132 kg) and the areas above and below the
point
aircraft are clear.
•• The wing jack adapter is put in the right
The aircraft can be lifted with axle jacks for the wing receptacle and held there and the
nose gear or for the two main gears. jack height is increased until the jack
touches the adapter.
The aircraft can be lifted at the nose fuselage •• The wing jack adapter is put in the
and the main landing gear Axles for weighing left wing receptacle and held and the
the aircraft. jack height is increased until the jack
touches the adapter
If one of the main landing gear OLEO is
depleted of its nitrogen and oil and requires •• The aircraft is carefully lifted on the
replacement of the lower bearing seal, the wing jacks at the three positions, at the same
of the effected main landing gear can be lifted time
until both wings level is achieved.
•• The jacks are adjusted as required to
align with the plumb bob

7-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• T h e N L G j a c k l o c k i n g c o l l a r i s The aircraft is lowered as follows:

tightened and wing jack locking collar
on each jack to lock the jack extensions •• The tail stand is removed from the
bottom of the aft fuselage
•• A tail stand is attached to the bottom
of the aft fuselage and the tail stand •• The NLG jack locking collar is loosened
extension is locked. and the wing jack locking collar on
each jack to unlock the jack extension.

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• The three jacks are lowered gradually
and at the same time until the main
landing gear has weight on wheels
•• The wing jack adapters are removed
from the wing receptacles
•• The wing jacks are moved clear of the
aircraft
•• The nose fuselage jack is lowered until
the nose landing gear has weight on
wheels
•• The front fuselage jack adapter is
removed from the receptacle of the
NLG jacking point
•• The nose fuselage jack is moved clear
of the aircraft
•• Chocks are put at the NLG and MLG
tires
•• The parking brake is set.
5
3
2

1 6
4

LEGEND
1. NLG Jack Locking Collar
2. Jack Adapter
3. Nose Fuselage Jack Point
4. NLG Door (Reference)
5. Wing Jack Point
6. Wing Jack Locking Collar NOSE FUSELAGE WING JACKING
JACKING POINT POINTS

Figure 7-1.  Jacking of the Aircraft

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 7-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 7-2. J acking of the Aircraft at Refer to Figure 7-3. J acking of the Aircraft at
the NLG Axle. the MLG Axle.

A jack at the NLG axle is used to lift the A jack at the MLG axle is used to lift the
aircraft as follows: aircraft as follows:

•• The nosewheel centerd and caster lock- •• The MLG axle jack is put at the MLG
pin installed axle jacking point
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• The nosewheel steering is set off •• The jack height is increased until the
jack correctly engages the jacking point
•• The NLG axle jack is put at the NLG
jacking point •• T h e a x l e j a c k i s u s e d t o l i f t t h e
aircraft until the related wheels are
•• The jack height is increased until the
approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) clear of
jack correctly engages the jacking point
the ground.
•• The axle jack is used to lift the aircraft
until the related wheel is approximately The aircraft is lowered as follows:
2 in. (5.1 cm) clear of the ground.
•• Lower the aircraft until the MLG has
The aircraft is lowered as follows: weight on wheels
•• Move the jack clear of the aircraft.
•• Lower the aircraft until the NLG has
weight on wheels
•• The jack is moved clear of the aircraft. LEGEND
•• Caster lock-pin removed. 1. MLG axle jack
2. MLG axle jacking point

LEGEND
FWD
1. NLG axle jack
2. NLG axle
jacking point

FWD

2
1
1

NOTE
Left MLG is shown 2
A Right MLG is similar

Figure 7-2.  Jacking of the Aircraft at the Figure 7-3.  Jacking of the Aircraft at the
NLG Axle MLG Axle

7-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

07-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• GSB0700007 Front Fuselage Adapter Jack (Qty 1)
•• GSB0700016 NLG Axle Jack
•• GSB0700017 Wing Adapters Jack (Qty 2)
•• GSB0700019 Wing Jacks (Qty 2)

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• GSB0700020 Front Fuselage Jack
•• GSB0700023 MLG Axle Jack
•• GSB0700024 Tail-stand
•• GSB1000031 Wheel Chocks MLG & NLG
•• GSB0800001 Plumb Bob Aircraft Leveling
•• GSB0700023 MLG axle jack.

07-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS

CAUTION
If it is possible, defuel the aircraft to decrease the weight. This will help to prevent
damage to the aircraft structure.

CAUTION
Do not lift the aircraft in an open area if the wind speed is more than 20 mph (32 km/h).

WARNING

Do not lift the aircraft on jacks if you think the load at the nose-fuselage jacking
point will be 4700 lbs (2132 kg) or more.

WARNING

Do not lift the aircraft at the jacking points of the wing and the nose fuselage if the
weight is more than 48,792 lbs (22,132 kg).

WARNING

Before you lift the aircraft on jacks, make sure that:

• No person is in/on the aircraft

• You release the parking brake
• You remove the chocks from the wheels
• There is sufficient clearance around/above the aircraft.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 7-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

WARNING

Before you lower the aircraft on jacks, make sure that:

• No person is in/on the aircraft

• You release the parking brake
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

• You engage the down lock of the nose landing gear

• You install the ground lock-pins of the main landing gear
• There is sufficient clearance around/above the aircraft.

If you do not do this, you can cause injuries to persons and damage to the equipment.

WARNING

Make sure you remove the jack adapter from the wing immediately after the jack is
clear of the adapter.

7-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

08-00-00 LEVELING AND WEIGHING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 8-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Sta. X 0.00
(Reference Datum)
Sta. X 428.00
Sta. X-39.7 Main L/G
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

428.0 In. Jacking Point

Point Z

F Airplane
Measuring 0.50 In.
Nose - Fuselage Datum Plane Point Y
Jacking Point B

Figure 8-1.  Weighing of the Aircraft

NOTE
Nose Landing Gear Not Shown For Clarity.

Hub-Cap Centering String Hub-Cap Centering

Tools. (GSB 0800003) Tools. (GSB 0800003)

(REFER TO SHEET 2) Plumb Bob

and String (Ref.)

Figure 8-2.  Method to Determine the Center Line of Main Wheels

8-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

08-10-00 WEIGHING OF •• All doors and panels are installed and

closed (the forward right emergency exit
THE AIRCRAFT door not included)
•• The aircraft is at a level position
INTRODUCTION
•• Make sure the external, internal areas
Electronic load sensing devices, at the nose and the windows are clean and dry
fuselage and the axles of the main landing gear,
•• The food supplies are removed from

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

must be used to weigh the aircraft. The weights
the galley
are recorded to calculate the total weight and
the center of gravity of the aircraft. •• The galley liquid containers are drained
•• All emergency equipment is stowed in
The basic weight of the aircraft is that weight
its correct location.
that includes all fixed operating equipment
(both standard and optional), trapped and •• The aircraft is pressure defueled
unusable fuel, and full engine oil.
•• The fuel left in the tanks and surge bays
are drained through their related drain
To calculate the weight and the center of
valves on the bottom of the wings
gravity of the aircraft, refer to PSM 1-84-8,
Weight and Balance Manual. •• Make sure that the engine oil is full
•• Make sure that the reservoirs for the No.
If it is necessary to use the metric system, the
1 and No. 2 hydraulic systems are full
same procedure is applicable. To calculate the
metric weight and the center of gravity of the •• Make sure that the reservoir for the No.
aircraft, refer to PSM 1-84-8M, Weight and 3 hydraulic system is full
Balance Manual (Metric).
•• Make sure that the reservoir for the
auxiliary hydraulic is full
GENERAL
•• The lavatory is serviced as necessary
Refer to:
•• The wash water is serviced as necessary.
•• Figure 8-1. Weighing of the Aircraft.
Ensure that all tools and equipment not included
•• Figure 8-2. Method to Determine the in the basic weight configuration are removed
Center Line of Main Wheels. (Refer to PSM 1-84-8, Weight and Balance
Before the aircraft is weighed it must be at the Manual, Chapter 2).
basic weight and in the configuration as follows:
Weigh the aircraft on jacks with the electronic
•• The landing gear is extended load sensing Kit as per PSM 1-84-8, Weight
and Balance Manual, Chapter 2.
•• The MLG lockpins are installed and the
nose-landing-gear ground lock is engaged
•• The flaps are fully retracted
•• The flight controls are in the neutral
position with the gust lock applied

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 8-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

X83.000

Y39.700

NOTE:
ATTACH
PLUMB BOB LINE
WITH MASKING
TAPE.

5 3
A
X83.000

Y39.700
D
W
F

LEGEND
1. Type II/III Emergency Exit
Door Opening.
2. Plumb Bob Line.
3. Plumb Bob.
4. Hanger.
5. Target Plate.

Figure 8-3.  Leveling of the Aircraft

8-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

08-20-00 LEVELING OF NOTES

THE AIRCRAFT
INTRODUCTION
A plumb bob hanger and a target plate are used
to make the aircraft level.

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

The plumb bob hanger is on the top surface of
the Type II/III emergency-exit-door on the right
side of the fuselage. The target plate is on the
bottom surface of the emergency exit door. The
center mark of the target plate is at STA. X83.00
and Y39.70.

The aircraft level must be made by adjustment

of the jack heights. The jacks are put at the nose
fuselage and the axles of the main landing gear.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 8-3. Leveling of the Aircraft.

The aircraft is leveled as follows:

•• The upper door of the forward right

emergency exit is removed
•• The lower door is opened
•• The filler panel at the top of the opening
of the emergency exit door is removed
to get access to the plumb bob hanger
•• The plumb bob line is put through the
hole in the hanger
•• Masking tape is used to attach the
plumb bob line to the external fuselage
at the forward side of the emergency
exit door.
•• The point of the plumb bob is put 0.25 in
(0.64 cm) or less above the target plate
•• Jacks are put at the jacking points of the
nose fuselage and the axles of the main
landing gear
•• The jacks are adjusted until the plumb
bob aligns with the lateral mark on the
target plate.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 8-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

08-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• GSB0811001 E
 lectronic Weighing kit
•• GSB0800003 M
 ain Wheel Measuring Adapters
•• GSB1210015 F
 uel Sample Unit - 1/4 Quart
•• GSB2810001 F
 uel Drain Valve Tool
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• GSB0700024 Tailstand
•• GSB0800001 Plumb Bob Aircraft Leveling.

08-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS

WARNING

Do the leveling and weighing procedure in a closed hangar. If you do not do this,
wind can cause incorrect results.

WARNING

Do not use the wing jacking points to lift the aircraft when you do the leveling and
weighing procedure. This will cause side loads to occur, which will give incorrect
indications from the load-cells.

WARNING

Failure to follow all procedures and safety procedures may result in the aircraft not
being in a safe balanced condition for take-off flight and landing.

WARNING

Do not use the wing jacking points to lift the aircraft when leveling and weighing. If
you do, you will cause side loads to occur. This will give you incorrect indications
from the load-cells and the aircraft may not be in a safe balanced condition for take
off, flight, and landing.

8-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

09-00-00 TOWING AND TAXIING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 9-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

1
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

2
3 4

5 5

LEGEND
1. Tow Bar.
2. Towhead.
3. Locking Handle.
4. Tow Spool Attachment Point.
5. Towing Spool.
fsk46a01.cgm

Figure 9-1.  Towing the Aircraft with a Towbar

9-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

09-10-00 TOWING OF •• Make sure the aircraft is not towed at

more than a maximum speed of 5 mph
THE AIRCRAFT (8.05 kph).
•• The aircraft turning radii is kept in
INTRODUCTION the limits of 120 ºs each side of center
(Painted arrows on the two aft NLG
The aircraft is towed or pushed from the nose
doors show these limits).
landing gear with a tow vehicle and a towbar

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

or with a towbar-less tow vehicle. •• The parking brake is engaged after the
aircraft is towed.
GENERAL •• The nosewheel is straight before the
towbar is disconnected.
Refer to Figure 9-1. Towing the Aircraft with
a Towbar. •• The towbar eye is disconnected from
the tow vehicle.
•• A pressure check of the parking brake
•• The towbar head is disconnected from
system is done at the accumulator gauge
the towing spools.
in the right wing root. Make sure that
the pressure is a minimum of 1000 psi •• The aircraft is parked.
(6895 kPa).
•• The engine lower cowls for both the
engines are installed and secured.
• • If towing is to be done with one or
both engines removed, make sure
that ballast weights are loaded and
uniformly distributed on the floor of
the cockpit and forward cabin area
forward of the lavatory.
•• The grounding wire from the aircraft is
disconnected.
•• The external servicing connections are
removed from the aircraft.
•• A visual inspection of the landing gear
tires is done.
•• All external doors of the aircraft are
closed
•• The Nosewheel Steering is set to OFF.
•• The towbar head is connected to the
towing spools. Connect the towbar eye
to the tow vehicle.
•• The chocks are removed from the
landing gear wheels.
•• The Parking Brake is set to OFF.
•• The aircraft is slowly towed from its
parked position.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 9-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ITEM MAIN GEAR TIRE FOOTPRINT IS TAXIING IS TOWING DISTANCE ALLOWED NOSE WHEEL REMARKS
NO. CONDITION EXAMPLES ALLOWED? ALLOWED? (TAXIING & TOWING) ANGLE OF TURN
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

ONLY ONE FLAT SEE NOTES

1 YES YES UNLIMITED NORMAL
TIRE (ANY TIRE) 1., 2., 6., 8.

TWO FLAT TIRES SEE NOTES

2 YES YES UNLIMITED NORMAL
(ONE ON EACH AXLE) 1., 3., 4., 6., 8.

TWO FLAT TIRES SEE NOTES

3 YES YES MINIMUM TO 10 MAXIMUM
(ON ONE AXLE) 1., 3., 4., 5.,
CLEAR RUNWAY
6., 7., 9.

THREE FLAT TIRES SEE NOTES

4 YES YES MINIMUM TO 10 MAXIMUM
(ANY COMBINATION) 1., 3., 4., 5.,
CLEAR RUNWAY
6., 7., 9.

SEE NOTES
5 FOUR FLAT TIRES YES YES MINIMUM TO 10 MAXIMUM 1., 3., 4., 5.,
CLEAR RUNWAY
6., 7., 9.

NOSE GEAR
CONDITION

SEE NOTES
6 ONE FLAT TIRE YES YES UNLIMITED NORMAL
1., 2., 4., 8.

SEE NOTES
7 TWO FLAT TIRES YES YES MINIMUM TO 10 MAXIMUM 1., 3., 4., 5., 6.,
CLEAR RUNWAY
7., 8. or 9.

= FLAT TIRE

NOTES
1. Avoid sharp turns, abrupt starts and stops. 6. After any tire failure or excessive heat condition, the affected
2. Maximum taxiing or towing speed = 5 mph (8 kmh). wheel assembly must be inspected per applicable
Vendor Manual prior to further use.
3. Maximum taxiing or towing speed = 2 mph (3 kmh).
4. After clearing runway, or if additional tire fails, aircraft 7. Under multiple failed tire condition, the affected landing gear
should be stopped and serviceable wheel/tire assembly(ies) assemblies and linkages must be inspected for possible
installed to satisfy conditions in Item No. 2 or 6. structural damage.
8. Towbar required.
5. Taxiing or towing with two flat tires on same gear 9. Use of rope on both main landing gear required.
can result in wheel damage.

Figure 9-2.  Towing/Moving Aircraft with Flat Tires

9-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 9-2. Towing/Moving Aircraft NOTES

with Flat Tires.

An aircraft with a flat tire or a combination of

flat tires, on the runway, taxiway or apron, is
allowed to be moved with the use of towbar
or using suitable rope to clear the runway or
taxiway using the following procedure:

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• Make sure that the rims of the wheel
with flat tires are not damaged and the
aircraft is still supported by its own
main and nose landing gears
•• Make sure the nose landing gear ground
lock is engaged
•• Make sure the main landing gear ground
lock pins are installed
•• The precautions that follow are obeyed
when an aircraft is towed with two flat
tires on one or more axles:
Refer to the table that follows for maximum
allowable towing loads with flat tires:

Maximum Allowable Maximum Allowable

Towing Load for ONE Towing Load for TWO
deflated tire (lb) deflated tires (lb)
7185 5987

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 9-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

3
CAPTURE OF AIRCRAFT
NOSEWHEEL IN CRADLE TOW SPOOL 4
ADAPTER INSTALLATION

LEGEND NOTE
1. Tow vehicle 3. Tow spool adapter The Lektro Model Tow Vehicle is illustrated.
2. Cradle 4. Winch strap.

Figure 9-3.  Towing of the Aircraft (Towbar-less Method)

9-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 9-3. Towing of the Aircraft •• The aircraft is slowly towed from its
(Towbar-less Method). parked position
•• The aircraft turning radii is kept in the
The aircraft is towed as follows:
limits
•• A pressure check of the parking brake •• Large turns are made when possible
system is done at the accumulator gauge
•• Changes to speed or directions are done
in the right wing root. Make sure that

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

slowly
the pressure is a minimum of 1000 psi
(6895 kPa). •• Turn limits must not be more than 90°
right and left from the center
•• The engine lower cowls for both the
engines are installed and secured. •• The parking brake is engaged, as
necessary, after the aircraft is towed
• • If towing is to be done with one or
both engines removed, make sure •• The nosewheel is set straight
that ballast weights are loaded and
•• The cradle is lowered to the ground level
uniformly distributed on the floor of
and release the tension on the winch strap
the cockpit and forward cabin area
forward of the lavatory. •• The tow spool adapter is removed from
the NLG tow spools
•• The grounding wire from the aircraft is
disconnected •• The tow vehicle is slowly moved away
from the aircraft.
•• The external servicing connections are
removed from the aircraft
•• A visual inspection of the landing gear
tires is done
•• All external doors of the aircraft are
closed
•• The Nosewheel Steering is set to OFF
•• The large rear gate is installed in the
applicable slot on the nosewheel cradle
of the tow vehicle
•• The vehicle is moved to the front of the
aircraft such that the nosewheel cradle
is aligned with the nosewheel
•• The tow spool adapter is installed on
the NLG tow spools
•• Make sure that the tow vehicle is parked
with the brakes on
•• The winch strap is connected to the adapter
•• The parking brake on the aircraft is set
to OFF
•• The aircraft is winched on the cradle
•• The cradle is lifted sufficiently to
prevent damage from obstacles while
the aircraft is towed

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 9-7

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOSEWHEEL STEERING MICROPHONE

HAND CONTROL PTT PUSH
For use during low speed taxi. BUTTON
A Controls steering angle over a
140° range.
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

HIGH SPEED TAXI MODE

LOW SPEED TAXI MODE 8º LEFT AND RIGHT FROM STALL
70º LEFT AND RIGHT RUDDER PEDALS WARNING
FROM STEERING CONTROL TEST 1 STEERING
HANDLE OFF
TEST 2

8o 8o

o o
70 70 NOSEWHEEL STEERING SWITCH
Activates nosewheel steering system
if weight is on nose gear and gear is
within 70º of centre. At STEERING,
system is engaged. At OFF, system
is in passive damped caster mode.
o o
120 120

UNPOWERED (CASTER)
MODE 120° LEFT AND
RIGHT

THE NOSEWHEEL STEERING SYSTEM INCORPORATES THREE MODES OF OPERATION FOR TAXIING:
1. A high speed mode, controlled by the rudder pedals, gives a steering angle of 8° each side of centre.
2. A low speed mode, controlled by a steering hand control found on the pilot's side console, gives a steering angle of 70° each
side of centre.
3. A free castering (unpowered) mode, controlled by differential engine thrust and/or braking gives a steering angle of 120° each
side of centre.

Figure 9-4.  Aircraft Taxiing

9-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

09-20-00 TAXIING OF •• W i t h t h e c o n d i t i o n l e v e r s s e t t o
MAX/1020 rpm, the POWER levers are
THE AIRCRAFT used to apply sufficient engine power to
start aircraft movement
INTRODUCTION •• Pressure is applied to the brakes to
make sure that the brake system is
The aircraft is moved with engine power,
serviceable
Nosewheel steering, and brakes by a crew

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

member in the pilot seat. •• W i t h t h e c o n d i t i o n l e v e r s s e t t o
MAX/1020 rpm, the POWER levers are
GENERAL used to apply sufficient engine power to
start aircraft movement
Refer to:
•• The aircraft is taxied to the necessary area.
•• Figure 9-4. Aircraft Taxiing.
There are three taxi modes as follows:
•• Figure 9-5. Aircraft Taxiing Turning
Radii with Minimum Power. •• The high speed taxi mode gives a
Nosewheel steering angle of 8° each
The aircraft is taxied as follows: side of center. Control the aircraft with
the rudder pedals when you are in the
•• Make sure that the tires are serviceable high speed taxi mode
•• The pressure of the parking brake system •• The low speed taxi mode gives a
on the accumulator gauge installed in Nosewheel steering angle of 70° each
the right wing root is checked side of center. Control the aircraft with
the Nosewheel steering hand-control on
•• M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e p r e s s u r e i s a
the pilot’s side console
minimum of 1000 psi (6895 kPa).
•• T h e f r e e - c a s t e r i n g m o d e g i v e s a
•• The parking brake is set
Nosewheel steering angle of 120° each
•• The ground wire is removed from the side of center. Control the aircraft with
aircraft differential thrust and/or brakes.
•• The chocks are removed from the
When the taxi operation is completed, the
landing gear
engine power is decreased to the DISC position
•• All external doors of the aircraft are and the aircraft is stopped in a straight line.
closed
Make sure that the Nosewheel is straight.
•• Make sure that the area around the
aircraft is clear of personnel and
contamination that may get ingested in
the engines
•• The aircraft engines are started
•• All external servicing connections to
the aircraft are removed
•• The Nosewheel steering is set to ON
•• The parking brake is set to OFF
•• Get the applicable ground crew and/or
ground control clearance to taxi

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 9-9

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

STA. X 443.050

R-4
R-6
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

R-1

o
o 70 R-2
APPROX. 2
84 ft. 5 in. (25.7m)
DUE TO TIRE
R-5 MINIMUM PAVEMENT
SLIP
WIDTH FOR 180 TURN
(WITHOUT BACKING UP)
R-3

ITEM RADIUS
R-1 INNER GEAR 4 ft. 9 in. (1.52 m)
R-2 OUTER GEAR 33 ft. 10 in. (10.32 m)
R-3 NOSE GEAR 50 ft. 7 in. (15.41 m)
R-4 WING TIP 64 ft. 9 in. (19.74 m)
R-5 NOSE 54 ft. 10 in. (16.73 m)
R-6 ELEVATOR TIP 62 ft. 9 in. (19.13 m)

NOTES
1. Dimensions noted are for dry, hard, level surfaces at these tire pressures: 220 psi (loaded), 32 x 8.8-16 standard main-wheel tires,
and 87 psi (loaded) for 22 x 6.50-10 standard nose-wheel tires.
2. Nose gear steering limit is approximately 70° left and right.
3. Slip angle of 2 is approximate only and may vary with aircraft configuration, loading and tire wear.
4. Dimensions given for maneuvering clearance and turning radii are minimum recommended limits.
5. Tire pressures shown are for calculation purposes only.
Refer to AMM Ch. 12 for service pressures.

Figure 9-5.  Aircraft Taxiing Turning Radii with Minimum Power

9-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

09-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• GSB0900004 Towhead Assembly
•• GSB0900005 Towbar
•• None specified Tow Vehicle
•• Lektro Model AP8750B-AL Tow Vehicle

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• Lektro Model AP8850SDA Tow Vehicle
•• Kalmar AB TBL 50 Tow Vehicle.

09-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS

CAUTION
Obey the precautions that follow when you tow the aircraft:

• Do not tow at more than 5 mph (8 kph)

• Do not use the emergency/parking brakes to stop the aircraft unless there is an
emergency

• Make turns large when possible

• Make all changes to speeds or directions slowly

• When you stop the tow vehicle, do not make a sudden change to the opposite
direction

• Turn limits must not be more than 120° right and left from the center.

CAUTION
Do not tow at more than 3.5 MPH (5.6 KPH) for the model AP8750B-AL or 4.0
MPH (6.5 KPH) for the model AP8850SDA or 15.5 MPH (25 KPH) for the Kalmar
Motor AB TBL 50.

CAUTION
Do not stop and then start the tow vehicle with the nose landing gear at the 90º position.

CAUTION
Limit the applied torque to 10,000 lbf in (1130 Nm) or 7,500 lbf in (847 Nm) for
the Kalmar Motor AB TBL 50.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 9-11

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

108 ft. 35 m
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

100
30

20

50

10
HOT ENGINE
EXHAUST GASES
VENTED
REAR WARDS

0 0

APU EXHAUST

LEGEND

Personnel danger areas

when engines are operating 0 50 93 ft.
(areas shown are approximate).
0 10 20 28.4 m

Figure 9-6.  Propeller/Engine Exhaust Danger Areas

9-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CAUTION
For the Kalmar Motor AB TBL 50, do not exceed the maximum fore-aft tow load of
5,513 lbs (24,532 N) tension and 5,884 lbs (26,180 N) compression.

CAUTION

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

Make sure that you obey the instructions for tow vehicle operation given by the
manufacturer of the tow vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not use power lever settings above flight idle or aft of disc when you are around
areas of contamination on ground. If you do, you can cause the contamination to go
into the engine intake and cause damage (Figure 9-6).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 9-13

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

10-00-00 PARKING, MOORING AND
RETURN TO SERVICE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 10-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

10-11-00 PARKING GENERAL

The steps that follow are done at all times when
INTRODUCTION the aircraft is parked in or out of the hangar:
While the aircraft is parked, safety is the prime
•• The parking brake is set
concern. Bombardier has documented procedure
for parking the aircraft that will be described in this •• The ground lock for the nose landing
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

chapter. Bombardier does understand that parking gear is engaged

conditions may vary such as during a quick
•• The lockpins are installed in the main
turnaround. During such events, the operators
landing gear
may choose to omit certain tasks at their discretion.
•• The control lock is set
•• The aircraft is grounded
•• The wheel chocks are installed at the
nose landing gear and at the main
landing gear.

Refer to Figure 10-1. Engaging the Nose Gear

2 1 Ground Lock.

The nose gear ground lock is engaged as

follows:

•• The pushbutton is pushed in to release

the door of the NLG ground lock
TO REL EA SE
PRESS B UTTON
TO GROUND L OCK
NOSE GEA R

PUL L A ND TURN

•• The door of the nose gear ground lock

is pulled away from the fuselage
•• The door of the nose gear ground lock
is turned 90 ºs clockwise to engage the
ENGAGED
ground lock.
A (FULLY EXTENDED)
If the nose gear ground lock cannot be engaged
1 2 correctly, install a jack adapter and put a jack
below at the forward fuselage jacking point.

PRESS BUTTON
TO RELEASE
PULL AND TURN
TO GROUND LOCK
NOSE GEAR

DISENGAGED
A LEGEND
(FULLY EXTENDED)
1. Release button 2. Nose gear ground lock door.

Figure 10-1.  Engaging the Nose Gear Ground Lock

10-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 10-2. Installation of the Main

Landing Gear (MLG) Lock Pins.

The MLG lockpins are installed in the lockpin

holes of the stabilizer down-lock mechanism.

If the MLG lockpin cannot be put in its hole

easily, install a jack adapter and put a jack

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

below the applicable wing jacking point.

The jack can be extended sufficiently to

remove the weight of the aircraft from the
main landing gear.

LEGEND
1. MLG lockpin hole
2. MLG lockpin. 1

Figure 10-2.  Installation of the Main Landing Gear (MLG) Lock Pins

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 10-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

D
FW

1. Ground stud
2. Ground cable
3. Main landing gear drag strut.

Figure 10-3.  Static Grounding of the Aircraft

10-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 10-3. Static Grounding of the NOTES

Aircraft.

There is a ground point on the drag brace of

each main landing-gear assembly. There is no
ground point on the nose landing gear.

One end of the grounding cable is attached to

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

a correct ground point in a hangar or the ramp
area.

The alligator clamp of the grounding cable is

attached to the ground stud on the applicable
main landing gear drag brace.

If for any reason the main landing gear is

retracted, the aircraft may be grounded through
these alternate grounding points:

•• Pressure refuelling panel.

•• Over the left or right wing.
If the MLG are retracted but the MLG door is
open, the aircraft should be grounded through
the ground stud.

When the aircraft is parked outdoors, the

following steps should be done:

•• The aircraft nose is pointed into the

wind
•• The engine intake and exhaust covers
are installed
•• The wheel chocks at the nose landing
gear and at the main landing gear are
installed
•• The covers for the pitot-static probes
are installed
•• The covers for the angle-of-attack vanes
are installed
•• The propeller restraints are installed
•• The wheel covers on the nose landing
gear and the main landing gear are
installed as necessary
•• All other supplied covers and plugs are
installed as necessary.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 10-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

10-12-00 AIRCRAFT When fly-screen cover is installed over

recessed area, such as the emergency exit door
STORAGE handle, the screen shall cover the recessed area
such that allows collected moisture to drain.
INTRODUCTION The tape that holds the cover in place shall not
overlap the recessed area.
An aircraft must be in an airworthy condition
before it is put into storage. This means that hourly Humidity Indicators
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

and calender inspections must be done before the

aircraft is put into storage. This does not apply if Humidity control is maintained through the use
storage becomes necessary to complete extensive of desiccant in sealed compartments. Humidity
repairs. For example, if an aircraft has major level is shown by humidity indicator cards.
damage to various components and repairs are These cards show a blue color when humidity is
estimated to take 14 days, scheduled tasks that less than 40% and a pink color when humidity
become due during storage must be completed is more than 40%.
before the aircraft is returned to service.
Engine Preservation
GENERAL Aircraft that are stored for 28 consecutive
days or less do not require engine preservation
Terms and References protection if the engine is sheltered, humidity
AS NECESSARY: The step depends on local is not too high, and the engine is not subject
conditions. Do these steps at the discretion of to extreme temperature changes. The engine
the Director of Maintenance. must be operated on the ground every 7 days.
Refer to the WEEKLY REPETITIVE TASKS
DESICCANT: Where desiccant is used, it must table for details.
be put on a non-porous tray or wooden rack.
This will make sure that the moisture absorbed Environmental Considerations
by the desiccant will not cause corrosion on the
The storage schedules listed in this procedure
structure or mildew on the fabric.
include steps for all types of environmental
conditions.
ENGINE OIL ANALYSIS: This is a report of
the content of an oil sample taken from a specific
The general intent of these storage schedules is
engine. The report identifies various components
to make sure that the aircraft is correctly;
of the oil sample. The total acid number (TAN)
and percent water content are important for
•• Preserved to readily return the aircraft
engines being prepared for storage.
to service
An engine oil analysis is necessary to make •• Equipped to absorb and show the
sure that oil remaining in a stored engine presence of excessive moisture
does not have too much water or acid that
•• Ventilated to prevent the collection of
could cause damage to the engine. Engine oil
condensation
analysis laboratories are listed in the World
Aviation Directory. •• S e a le d a ga inst dif f e r e nt ty p es o f
precipitation, insects, and wildlife
FLY-SCREEN COVERS: This term is used where
•• Cycled to give necessary maintenance
it is intended that an orifice be covered to prevent
for engines/propellers, hydraulic
insects or small birds from entering, but will allow
systems, flight controls, de-icing/anti-
ventilation of the area. Fly-screen covers are held in
icing systems, etc.
place with pressure sensitive tape. Use a tape color
that is in contrast with the aircraft paint scheme.

10-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

The Director of Maintenance must decide if all Refer to the manuals that follow as necessary:
steps are necessary based on local conditions.
•• Aircraft Maintenance Manual, PSM
The nacelles must be sealed to permit sufficient 1-84-2
air flow and inspection, but stop insects or
•• Fault Isolation Manual, PSM 1-84-5
other wildlife which could go into the nacelle.
•• Maintenance Task Card Manual, PSM
Insects can assemble nests in important drains. 1-84-7TC

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

Birds can also assemble nests in the aircraft.
•• Consumable Products Manual, PSM
This can cause structural deterioration and
1-84-18
is also dangerous to personnel. Examine the
aircraft for evidence of insects, birds, or other If you prepare the aircraft for storage for a
animal infestation. maximum of 28 days and it is necessary to
store it for a longer period of time, refer to the
Storage Records table STORAGE TRANSITION PROCEDURE
FROM MAXIMUM 28 DAYS TO MAXIMUM
The individual aircraft storage record must be 90 DAYS. This table gives the necessary
kept current by the storage agency to show additional instructions to extend the storage
compliance. Send copies of the record to the period to 90 days maximum.
airline’s Director of Maintenance or his delegate.

The maintenance procedures that follow

are given in a checklist form with space for
the mechanic’s initials (MECH INIT), an
inspection/check stamp (I/C STAMP), and the
date the STEP was done.

At the discretion of the airline’s Director of

Maintenance or his delegate, certain steps
may be marked as not applicable (N/A) due to
environmental considerations or operational
requirements.

If a step is not applicable (N/A), the MECH

INIT block should be marked N/A and the
inspector should stamp the I/C STAMP block.

Certain materials listed in the DESCRIPTION

can be substituted, at the discretion of the
airline’s Director of Maintenance, because
of environmental considerations, operational
requirements, or the local availability of the
materials. Only equivalent materials may be used.

Additional procedures and materials may

become necessary for the completion of certain
checklist STEPS given in this procedure. It is
not practical for this procedure to include all
possible references.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 10-7

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

10-13-00 ENGINE •• If the TAN analysis shows no oil

acidity, or water content, there is no
PRESERVATION/ action required.
DEPRESERVATION If the aircraft will be stored outside the
following is done:
INTRODUCTION
•• All the openings to the engine are
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

Two procedures are given to preserve the engine.

closed and sealed
The first gives the preservation instructions for
engines that are stored on the aircraft or stored •• Every 7 days, the engine is started
off the aircraft or in a Quick Engine Change and run until the oil temperature is
(QEC) unit for a time limit that is known. a minimum of 70°C (158°F) for 10
The second procedure gives the preservation minutes between GI and TO power or
instructions for engines that are stored on the until the oil temperature becomes stable
aircraft for a time limit that is not known. at TO power.

GENERAL If the engine will be stored in a hangar:

During engine preservation, all the openings to •• Desiccant and a humidity indicator
the engine are closed and sealed. The engine are put on racks made of wood in the
is put in a sheltered location that has a stable engine inlet duct
temperature and a low level of humidity.
•• All the openings to the engine are
closed and sealed
If an engine is stored on the aircraft for 8 to
28 days: •• While the engine is stored, the humidity
indicator is viewed every seven days
•• The following is done prior the engine is
•• If the color changes to pink, it must be
started and run until the oil temperature
reactivated or replaced
is a minimum of 70°C (158°F) for 10
minutes between GI and TO power or •• The visual inspections are recorded and
until the oil temperature becomes stable attached to the engine.
at TO power
If the engines are stored off the aircraft or in
•• The engine is shut down
a QEC unit:
•• A TAN oil analysis is done to find the
acidity and calculate the water content •• Desiccant is put on wood racks in the
of the oil air inlet and in the exhaust duct
•• If the TAN analysis shows oil acidity or •• All the openings to the engine are
water content, the engine oil is drained closed and sealed
and new oil is put into the engine
•• The engine is put in a sheltered location
•• The engine is started, run and shutdown that has a stable temperature and a low
again level of humidity to keep condensation
to a minimum.
•• A TAN analysis is done
•• If the TAN analysis shows oil, or water
content, by weight or by volume, the
engine run and the oil change procedure
is done again

10-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

If the engines are stored for 29 to 90 days on If an engine is installed on the aircraft for a
or off the aircraft or in a QEC unit: time limit that is not known, it is preserved as
follows:
•• A visual inspection of the humidity
indicator is to be conducted every 7 days •• The engine is started and run until the
engine oil temperature is a minimum of
•• The oil system is preserved
70°C (158°F)
•• The fuel system preserved
•• The engine is shut down

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• Desiccant and a humidity indicator are
•• A TAN oil analysis is done to find the
put on racks, made of wood, in the air
acidity and calculate the water content
inlet and in the exhaust duct
of the oil
•• All the openings to the engine are
•• If the TAN analysis shows acidity, or
closed and sealed.
the water content; the engine is drained,
new oil is put into the engine, the engine
If the engines are stored for over 90 days, on
started and run and then the engine is
or off the aircraft or in a QEC unit:
shut down
•• A visual inspection of the humidity •• If the TAN analysis shows oil acidity
indicator is to be conducted every 7 days. or water, the engine run and oil change
procedure is conducted again
•• The outside area of the engine is washed
•• If the TAN analysis shows no oil
•• A visual inspection of the engine
acidity, or the water content, there is
externals are done
no action required.
•• A n t i c o r r o s i o n f l u i d i n h i b i t o r i s
applied to the engine external surfaces The engine is depreserved as follows:
(including the propeller shaft)
•• Desiccant bags, shipping covers, caps
•• The oil system is preserved
and plugs are removed from the engine
•• The fuel system is preserved
•• The aircraft fuel supply tube is connected
•• Desiccant and a humidity indicator are to the FMU
put on wood racks in the air inlet and in
•• New oil is put into the engine.
the exhaust duct
•• The fuel supply tube at the flow divider
•• All the openings to the engine are
disconnected
closed and sealed
•• A container is put below the fuel supply
•• A spray of engine oil is applied to
tube
the accessory drive pads and shipping
covers are installed. •• A wet motoring run is done to see if a
solid stream of fuel comes out of the fuel
supply tube
•• The condition lever is moved to FUEL
OFF to see if the fuel flow stops
•• The condition lever is moved to START/
FEATHER to see if a solid stream of
fuel comes out of the fuel supply tube
•• The fuel supply tube is connected to the
flow divider.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 10-9

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

10-20-00 MOORING OF Wind Speed (knots) Wind Angle (knots)

THE AIRCRAFT 65
66
90
80

INTRODUCTION 68 70
71 60
Mooring of the aircraft is done to secure the 74 50
aircraft to the ground while the aircraft is in a
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

78 70
parked position. Mooring is done during high wind
conditions or when the aircraft is parked on snow or 83 40
ice covered surfaces. Rope and ground attachment 88 30
rings are used to moor the aircraft at the nose 95 25
landing gear and at both the main landing gears. 110 15
130 10-0
Bombardier recommends that the aircraft must
be moored after being placed in the parked
condition outside or relocated to a protected Table 10-1. W
 ind Speed and Direction
location for the following conditions: Limitations for Aircraft Mooring
•• When it is parked on dry concrete
or asphalt and the winds are (or are
forecast to be) 63 mph (102 km/h =
34.02 Knots) or more
•• When it is parked on wet concrete
or asphalt and the winds are (or are
forecast to be) 46 mph (74 km/h = 40
knots) or more
•• When it is parked on snow or ice
covered surfaces.
Refer to Table 10-1. W
 ind Speed and Direction
Limitations for Aircraft
Mooring.

The wind speed and the wind direction limitations

given in table 10-1 pertains to a moored aircraft
regardless of ramp surface conditions.

10-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

GENERAL NOTES
Refer to Figure 10-4. Mooring the Aircraft at
the Nose Landing Gear.

The aircraft is moored at the nose landing gear

as follows:

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• A loop is made with the rope and the
rope is put around the tow spools of the
nosewheel and put through the ground
attachment rings
•• A t t a c h t h e r o p e s t o t h e g r o u n d
attachment rings with tension
•• A bungee cord is installed between the
rope and the middle ground attachment
ring to ensure that the rope has tension.

TOW
SPOOLS

ROPE
GROUND
ATTACHMENT
RING

APPROX. 3 ft
(1 m)
BUNGEE
CORD
APPROX. 3 ft
(1 m) GROUND
ATTACHMENT
RING

Figure 10-4.  Mooring the Aircraft at the Nose Landing Gear

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 10-11

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 10-5. Mooring the Aircraft at •• A double loop is made with the rope
the Main Landing Gears. around the protective spool on the outer
web of the main landing gear and put
The aircraft is moored at the main landing gears through the attachment rings
as follows:
•• The ropes are attached to the ground
attachment rings with tension.
•• A protective spool is installed at each
main landing gear shock strut outer web
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

OUTBOARD APPROX. 40 in.

(1 m)

APPROX. 80 in.
L.H. GEAR (2 m)

CL

APPROX. 80 in.
(2 m)

MLG TIE DOWN

NOTE
Right MLG similar.

Figure 10-5.  Mooring the Aircraft at the Main Landing Gears

10-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

10-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• 14-6882-6010 Covers, Main Wheels
•• 14-6882-6000 Covers, Hi-flt MLG wheels
•• 400-76200-13 Plug, APU Exhaust
•• 400-76200-15 Cover, APU Intake

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

•• AOA 100 Cover, Angle of Attack Vane
•• ACS 28001 Cover, Engine Intake
•• ACS 28002 Cover, Engine Exhaust
•• ACS 28010 Plug, Oil Cooler Vent Scoop
•• GSB1000004 Wheel Chocks - MLG and NLG
•• GSB1000016 Cover, Nosewheel
•• GSB1000033 Covers, Pitot Static
•• GSB1000031 Propeller Restraint
•• GSB1011007 Covers, ECS Exhaust
•• GSB1011008 & GSB1011009 Covers, ECS RAM Air Duct
•• GSB1011010 or equivalent protective spool
•• GSB5411003 Cover, Engine Lower Cowl
•• ACS28003 Cooler Intake Plug
•• ACS28010 Plug, Oil Cooler Vent Scoop
•• GSB0700016 Jack-Axle Nose Landing Gear
•• GSB0700023 Jack-Axle Main Landing Gear
•• GSB1000029 Pins, MLG Ground Lock (2)
•• GSB1000037 Cover, APU
•• None specified Humidity Indicator (Hygrometer)
•• None specified Flashlight (non-explosive), with Batteries.
•• Non specified Ropes, nylon or polypropylene 0.75 inch (19 mm) diameter minimum
•• Non specified 7 ground attachment rings
•• Non specified Bungee cord.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 10-13

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

10-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS

WARNING

Do not install the covers when the pitot static probes are hot. The cover may melt
and cause a blockage of the holes in the pitot static probe.
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

WARNING

Do not use force when you engage the ground lock of the nose landing gear. If force
is necessary, the landing gear may not be safe and can retract accidentally.

WARNING

Do not use force when you install or remove the lockpin. If force is necessary, the
landing gear may not be safe and can retract accidentally.

CAUTION
Do not put engine oil into the engine air inlet or exhaust. Rotor and stator components
that are wet with oil can cause dirt particles to attach to their surfaces. This can
change the airfoil shapes and have an effect on the efficiency of the engine.

NOTE
To reduce any pitching tendencies during high winds, it is recommended that the
aircraft flaps are set to 0 ºs, the aircraft be fully fueled and the center of gravity be
moved as far forward as possible.

10-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

11-00-00 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 11-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

11-00-00 PLACARDS GENERAL

AND MARKINGS Refer to Figure 11-1. Left Fuselage Placards and
Markings (Example Configuration).
INTRODUCTION
Some placards are mandatory because of local
The aircraft has placards, labels, and markings. airworthiness regulations. Please refer to your
local regulation authority requirements.
05 - 12  AIRCRAFT GENERAL

The aircraft has exterior placards and markings

on the following:

•• Fuselage
•• Landing Gear
•• Wing
•• Nacelles and Propellers.

The aircraft also has interior placards and

markings on the following:
PUSH
•• Flight Compartment
•• Lavatory
•• Cabin
PULL HANDLE
•• Galley PULL HANDLE
AND TURN
•• Baggage Compartments. TO OPEN AND TURN
TO OPEN

PUSH

EXTERIOR OF AFT
PASSENGER DOOR
WARNING
KEEP CLEAR
DOOR
OF DOOR
LOWERING
PULL HANDLE
ASSIST
OUT AND DOWN
TO OPEN
SUPPORT DOOR
EXTERIOR OF FWD PASSENGER DOOR
WHILE LOWERING
(CLOSED)

Figure 11-1.  Left Fuselage Placards and Markings (Example Configuration)

11-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICE
CONTENTS
Page
20-00-00 STANDARD PRACTICE............................................................................. 20-1
20-00-01 MARKING OF THE AIRCRAFT PARTS AND MATERIALS..................... 20-1
Introduction......................................................................................................... 20-1
General................................................................................................................ 20-2
Marking of the Aircraft Parts and Materials with Markers.................................... 20-3
Cleaning the Drain Hole on the Pitot Static Probes.............................................. 20-3

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

Inspection of Seven-by-Nineteen and Seven-by-Seven Control Cables................. 20-5
Guidelines for Rigid Line Repairs........................................................................ 20-7

AIRFRAME
Permanent Repairs........................................................................................ 20-7
Task Removal & Installation of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices......... 20-11
Metal Case.................................................................................................. 20-11
Printed Circuit Board.................................................................................. 20-11
Cleaning of Electrical Connectors, Switches or Relays............................... 20-13
Cleaning of the Wiring Harness Connectors (Engine).................................. 20-13
Demagnetization of the Aircraft Components and/or Structures.................. 20-15
Replacement of the Lens Cap Assembly and Switch Light Bulb.................. 20-15
Electrical Test of the Aircraft Wiring........................................................... 20-17
Installation of the Aircraft Antennas & Application
of Sealant to Antenna Connectors................................................................ 20-17
Removal/Installation of the
Instrument Panel Integral Lamp Assembly.................................................. 20-17
Vacuum Anchor System..................................................................................... 20-17

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
20-30-00 REMOVAL OF ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES....................................................................... 20-19
Introduction....................................................................................................... 20-19
General.............................................................................................................. 20-19
20-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT.................................................... 20-20
20-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS....................................................................... 20-20
20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

20-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page

20-1 Pitot Static Probe Drain Hole Cleaning......................................................20-3
20-2 Inspection of Control Cables......................................................................20-4
20-3 Permaswage Fittings..................................................................................20-6
20-4 Sierracin/Harrison Quickfit and Harrison H-Fittings.................................20-6
20-5 Aeroquip Rynglok Unions.........................................................................20-6
20-6 CryoFit and Cryolive Couplings................................................................20-8
20-7 Deutsch Miniature End (DME) Fittings.....................................................20-8
20-8 Flexible Hoses...........................................................................................20-9

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

20-9 ESDS Labels............................................................................................20-10
20-10

AIRFRAME
Conductive Dust Caps..............................................................................20-10
20-11 Conductive Work Surface, Wrist Strap/Cord and Conductive Bag............20-11
20-12 Lubricants and Corrosion Inhibitors........................................................20-12
20-13 Contact Enhancer.....................................................................................20-12
20-14 Geltek Tape..............................................................................................20-12
20-15 Degaussing Equipment............................................................................20-14
20-16 Lens Cap Assembly and Switch Light Bulb.............................................20-14
20-17 Instrument Panel Integral Lamp Assembly...............................................20-16
20-18 Vacuum Anchor System...........................................................................20-16
20-19 Removal of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices.............................20-18

TABLES

Table Title Page

20-1 Approved Permanent and Non-Permanent Type Markers............................20-2

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICE

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME
20-00-00 STANDARD PRACTICE
20-00-01 MARKING OF THE AIRCRAFT PARTS AND
MATERIALS
INTRODUCTION
Markers are used to identify the parts, materials and assemblies of the aircraft. Identification
markings that are done correctly will not cause damage to the function or the surface of the parts.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

GENERAL NOTES
If necessary, identification marks are put on
titanium, plastics, composite material or painted
surfaces, as follows:

•• Identification marks are made on a tag

or label
•• The tag or label is attached to the
surface of the part
•• If the part is in a bag, the tag or label is
attached to the bag.
The temporary identification marks are
removed from the parts with a clean, lint-free
cloth and water.

If it is necessary to put non-destructive testing

(NDT) defect indication marks on painted
surfaces, the approved temporary marker in
20  STANDARD PRACTICES

Table 20-1 is used.

AIRFRAME

The marks are removed when no longer required

by solvent cleaning.

Approved permanent markers are used for

permanent identification on surfaces that are
not titanium, plastics, composite materials or
painted surfaces.

The permanent identification marks are removed

from the parts by solvent cleaning.

Type Point Marker Color - Part Number

Permanent Marks-a-lot (Carter’s) Black - C85201
(removed by solvent cleaning) Thick
Action Marker (Mark Tex Corp.) Black - MK-DALO-B3
Thin Sharpie (Sanford’s) Black - 30001
Temporary (removed with water) Thick 6000 (Faber Castell) Black - 6001
Thin Vis-a-Vis (Sanford’s) Black - 1601
Temporary
Dixon Ticonderoga Co., Phano
(removed by solvent cleaning) - “China” Marker
No. 71, red.
See Note 1.
NOTE 1: Acceptable for use on painted surfaces for marking defect indications revealed through non-destructive
testing (NDT) only.

Table 20-1.  Approved Permanent and Non-Permanent Type Markers

20-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

MARKING OF THE AIRCRAFT PERMANENT OR TEMPORARY

MARKERS, IF THE BAGS
PARTS AND MATERIALS WITH CONTAIN TITANIUM,
MARKERS PLASTICS, COMPOSITE
MATERIALS, PAINTED
You can use markers to identify parts, materials PARTS OR FABRIC AND
and assemblies of the aircraft. Identification UPHOLSTERY MATERIALS,
markings that are done correctly will not cause YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
damage to the function or the surface of the parts. TO THE PARTS.
CAUTION If it is necessary to put identification marks on
titanium, plastics, composite material or painted
DO NOT USE A PENCIL ON surfaces, make the identification marks on a tag
THE AIRCRAFT PARTS, or label and attach the tag or label to the part.
MATERIALS, OR ASSEMBLIES.
CLEANING THE DRAIN HOLE
CAUTION
ON THE PITOT STATIC PROBES
DO NOT USE THE PERMANENT
OR TEMPORARY MARKERS Refer to Figure 20-1. Pitot Static Probe Drain Hole
Cleaning.

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

ON TITANIUM, PLASTICS,
COMPOSITE MATERIALS,
PAINTED SURFACES OR Put a light on the drain hole of the probe and

AIRFRAME
FABRIC AND UPHOLSTERY make sure that you can see the light in the pitot
MATERIALS. chamber through the pitot entry of the probe.

CAUTION Use a smooth nylon wire (do not use a metallic

rod or wire) with a diameter of 0.023 in
DO NOT WRITE DIRECTLY (0.6mm) to clean the drain hole. Do not put
ON POLYETHYLENE, OR more than 0.118 in (3 mm) of the nylon wire
THIN PAPER BAGS WITH THE into the drain hole.

INLET
PORT

DRAIN

STATIC 1

STATIC 2

Figure 20-1.  Pitot Static Probe Drain Hole Cleaning

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

TYPICAL WORN AREA ON THE

EXTERNAL SURFACE
OF A CABLE

WORN AREA IS LESS THAN 40%

(PERMITTED)
20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

TYPICAL WIRE

WORN AREA IS 40% TO 50%

NOTE: WORN AREAS OF ADJACENT
WIRES BECOME ONE SMOOTH SURFACE
(NOT PERMITTED)

WORN AREA IS MORE THAN 59%

(NOT PERMITTED)

Figure 20-2.  Inspection of Control Cables

20-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

INSPECTION OF NOTES
SEVEN-BY-NINETEEN AND
SEVEN-BY-SEVEN CONTROL
CABLES
Refer to Figure 20-2. Inspection of Control
Cables.

The 7-by-19 cables have seven groups of wires

with 19 wires in each group. The 7-by-7 cables
have seven groups of wires with seven wires
in each group. The flight control system, the
landing gear system, and the doors use these
types of cables. The control cables usually wear
where the cables go through fairleads, or on
pulleys and quadrants.

When carbon steel cables that are corrosion

resistant are made, the cable strands are plated

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

with tin and zinc and an internal lubricant
is applied by the manufacturer. For carbon
steel cables that are manufactured without

AIRFRAME
an external jacket, the manufacturer also
externally applies a lubricant to the cable. The
lubricant will usually stay on the cable for its
full service life.

DO NOT REMOVE THE LUBRICANT

FROM THE EXTERNAL SURFACES OF
THE CONTROL CABLES WITH VAPOR,
STEAM, OR SOLVENTS.

Use a thick cloth to give protection to your

hands when you examine the control cables for
broken wires.

Examine the cables for the following and

replace if the discrepancy exceed published
AMM limits:

•• Damage
•• Wear
•• Broken Strands
•• Corrosion

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure 20-3.  Permaswage Fittings

20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

Figure 20-4.  Sierracin/Harrison Quickfit and Harrison H-Fittings

Figure 20-5.  Aeroquip Rynglok Unions

20-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

GUIDELINES FOR RIGID LINE Aeroquip Rynglok Unions

REPAIRS
Refer to Figure 20-5. Aeroquip Rynglok Unions.
Several AMM tasks address the repair of rigid
lines based on their application and material This maintenance practice gives the data for the
construction. Repairs can be of a permanent or repair of hydraulic and pneumatic lines with
temporary nature. Aeroquip Rynglok Fittings. Rynglok fittings are
made from 6AL-4V titanium and can be used
on aluminum, corrosion resistant steel (CRES)
Permanent Repairs or titanium hydraulic tubes. These fitings are
Permaswage Fittings used on different tubes and pressure ratings to
a maximum of 8000 psig (55200 kPa).
Refer to Figure 20-3. Permaswage Fittings.
The fittings are swaged to the tube with a
This task procedure gives data for the repair of hydraulic swage tool that can be operated by
rigid fuel lines (only Aluminum 6061-T4, T6, a manual hydraulic power unit or automated
Titanium and CRES tubes) with permaswage air-driven hydraulic power unit. The aluminum
fittings. The procedure is for the repair of any tubes must have their specified heat treatment
fuel tube in and out of the fuel tanks. before you swage the fitting.

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

Harrison H-Fittings The tubes can be bent before or after the swage
operation if tube bends are not less than 1 in
(25.4mm) from tube ends.

AIRFRAME
Refer to Figure 20-4. Sierracin/Harrison
Quickfit and Harrison H-Fittings.

This maintenance practice gives the procedures

and requirements necessary to use a Harrison
H-Fitting to repair a damaged or defective
hydraulic line. A Harrison H-Fitting is an
assembly of a union, a coupling, a sleeve and
a nut. The coupling assembly is suitable for
use on hydraulic high pressure tubes of 3000
psi (20,700 kPa) pressure by using Titanium
3AL-2.5, CRES 21-6-9 and CRES 304 1/8
hard tubing. The repair can be used on any
applicable hydraulic system tubing, except in
hot sections, and can be accomplished with two
end wrenches of suitable size.

Sierracin/Harrison Quickfit Fittings

Refer to Figure 20-4. Sierracin/Harrison
Quickfit and Harrison H-Fittings.

This maintenance practice gives the procedures

and requirements for the permanent repair of
damaged or defective tubing when you use
Sierracin/Harrison Quikfit fittings, straight
(union), shaped (tee and 90 degree elbow),
bulkhead (union, tee, 45 and 90 degree elbow) or
adapter (Quickfit to flared and flareless) fittings.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-7

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

Figure 20-6.  CryoFit and Cryolive Couplings

Figure 20-7.  Deutsch Miniature End (DME) Fittings

20-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CryoFit and Cryolive Couplings Deutsch Miniature End fittings series (DME).
DME is a tube fitting that is mechanically
Refer to Figure 20-6. CryoFit and Cryolive attached to the end of a tube by axially swaging.
Couplings. The procedure involves swaging the fitting into
the tube by using a Deutsch End fitting Tool
This maintenance practice gives the procedures (DET). This produces an interference fit and the
for the permanent repair of damaged or defective tube results in a leak-free metal-to-metal seal.
tubing using CryoFit and Cryolive couplings made
by Advance Metal Components Incorporated. The Procedure requires trained personnel to do
the work for the best results and safe handling
CryoFit-Cryolive fittings can be used on of the tooling. Training is provided by “Deutsch
aluminum, CRES, stainless steel and titanium Metal Components”.
tubes.
Repair of Hydraulic Lines Using
The fittings are shipped in special insulated Flexible Hoses
liquid nitrogen containers.
Refer to Figure 20-8. Flexible Hoses.
When correctly installed, the Cryo sleeve seals
around the tube. Compression of the tubes and This standard practice gives the procedures and
a permanent connection will occur. conditions for the temporary replacement and

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

repair of damaged or defective rigid hydraulic
When using these fittings, make sure the time tube using flexible hose assemblies. A total
the fittings are at room temperature is short as time of 5000 flight hours is allowed with

AIRFRAME
the fittings start to change their shape at room flexible hose inspection each 1000 flight hours.
temperature.
If necessary two or more flexible hoses
Deutsch Miniature End (DME) Fittings connected to each other may be used however,
they must be inspected every 50 hours and
Refer to Figure 20-7. Deutsch Miniature End replaced with an approved permanent rigid tube
(DME) Fittings. or with one length before 1000 FH.

This maintenance practice gives the procedures Flareless or flared type fittings, unions, adapters
and requirements for the permanent repair of and elbows may be used. The task includes some
damaged or defective tubing when you use of the applicable hardware for quick reference.

Figure 20-8.  Flexible Hoses

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-9

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure 20-9.  ESDS Labels

20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

Figure 20-10.  Conductive Dust Caps

20-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

TASK REMOVAL & Printed Circuit Board

INSTALLATION OF If the device is a printed circuit board a
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE conductive work surface, wrist strap/cord and
SENSITIVE DEVICES conductive bag will be required.

Provides instructions about how to identify Put the conductive work surface adjacent to
and remove/install a device that is electrostatic the area where you will remove the printed-
discharge sensitive (ESDS). An ESDS device circuit board. Attach the grounding cord to the
is a component that can be internally damaged conductive work surface and a good grounding
by an electrostatic discharge. Two procedures point on the aircraft structure. Attach the
are detailed in the tasks, one if the device has a wrist strap to your wrist and the grounding
metal case and the other if the device is a printed cord of the wrist strap to a good grounding
circuit board. Both of these devices will have a point on the aircraft structure. Remove the
typical ESDC label (Refer to Figure 20-9). printed-circuit board and immediately put the
printed-circuit board in the conductive bag.
Metal Case Seal the conductive bag and place an ESDS
label on the bag (Refer to Figure 20-11).
If the ESDS devise has a metal case once
removed from its mounting tray do not

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

touch any of the electrical pins or sockets
and immediately install conductive dust caps
(Black or Grey) (Refer to Figure 20-10).

AIRFRAME

Figure 20-11.  Conductive Work Surface, Wrist Strap/Cord and Conductive Bag

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-11

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
20  STANDARD PRACTICES

Figure 20-12.  Lubricants and Corrosion Inhibitors

AIRFRAME

Figure 20-13.  Contact Enhancer Figure 20-14.  Geltek Tape

20-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Cleaning of Electrical Connectors, Cleaning of the Wiring Harness

Switches or Relays Connectors (Engine)
This maintenance practice is not applicable The maintenance procedure is for the cleaning
for vendor components, such as power lever of the engine wiring harness electrical
module. For PW 150A engine wiring harness connectors. Any grease must be removed
connector cleaning procedures refer to task from the connectors using Acetone, Petroleum
70-00-15-110-801. solvent or a Cleaning solvent. See PSM 1-84-
18, Consumable Products Manual for details of
Refer to Figure 20-12. Lubricants and the approved products.
Corrosion Inhibitors.

These procedures approve the use of lubricants

for preventing corrosion and to remove
moisture from electrical connectors, switches
and relays.

•• Use Super Corr-A, Super Corr-B, ACF-

50 or LPS 2 as a lubricant and corrosion
inhibitor for electrical connectors or

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

relay base contacts.
•• Use ACF-50 and LPS 2 to remove

AIRFRAME
moisture as well as to prevent corrosion
on relays and switches.

Use Stabilant 22 or 22A to improve the

conductivity of contacts in connector pins,
card edge connectors, signal switches and
relay base pins. Stabilant 22 is undiluted
and not recommended to apply directly on
connector pins or sockets because of poor flow
of material. Dilute Stabilant 22 with alcohol.
Stabilant 22A is diluted with alcohol (4:1) and
recommended for connectors and relay pins
(Refer to Figure 20-13).

Use Geltek sealant tape for electrical connectors

to improve their corrosion resistance (Refer to
Figure 20-14).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-13

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure 20-15.  Degaussing Equipment

20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

Figure 20-16.  Lens Cap Assembly and Switch Light Bulb

20-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Demagnetization of the Aircraft Replace the lens cap assembly:

Components and/or Structures •• Hold the grip and remove the lens cap
assembly from the switch assembly.
Refer to Figure 20-15. Degaussing Equipment.
•• Disconnect the wire bail and remove the
Steel/iron components may become magnetized lens cap assembly.
when placed in the presence of a large magnetic
•• Connect the wire bail to the new lens
field or when a large electrical currents
cap assembly.
(lighting) are conducted through them. When
components are magnetized, they should •• Install the lens cap assembly on the
be degaussed to prevent system errors from switch assembly.
occurring. The strength of magnetic field is
measured in Gauss units.

Degaussing is the process of removing residual

magnetism from a component. The process
consists of placing the magnetized component
within a larger magnetic field of opposite
polarity and slowly reducing the magnitude of
the field strength to zero.

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

Replacement of the Lens Cap

AIRFRAME
Assembly and Switch Light Bulb
Refer to Figure 20-16. Lens Cap Assembly and
Switch Light Bulb.

This task describes the procedure for the

replacement of lens cap assembly and switch
light bulbs used in the illuminated switches.

Replace the bulb:

•• Hold the grip and remove the lens cap

assembly from the switch assembly.
•• Remove the lamp carrier from the lens
cap assembly.
•• Remove the bulb from the lamp carrier.
•• Insert a new bulb in the lamp carrier
and install it in the lens cap assembly.
•• Install the lens cap assembly on the
switch assembly.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-15

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

Figure 20-17.  Instrument Panel Integral Lamp Assembly

Figure 20-18.  Vacuum Anchor System

20-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Electrical Test of the Aircraft VACUUM ANCHOR SYSTEM

Wiring
Refer to Figure 20-18. Vacuum Anchor System.
The task procedures are for the electrical tests
of the aircraft wiring. These procedures include The vacuum anchor system provides a person-
connector inspections, continuity and isolation rated fall arrest anchorage point for maintenance
tests (to verify the integrity of the electrical crews as they perform maintenance and
wiring), with an ohmmeter and a mega ohmmeter servicing of the aircraft. The system consists
(high voltage insulation tester or Megger), DC of a vacuum anchor assembly with an on-board
and AC voltage checks and bonding tests. gas (Nitrogen) bottle, an energy absorbing
lanyard and a full body harness. This equipment
The task includes the following procedures: is listed in the Illustrated Tools and Equipment
Manual (ITEM) as P/N: GSB2000018.
•• Inspection of connectors for:
•• Corrosion NOTE
•• Mechanical damage The vacuum anchor system is a
part of a complete fall protection
•• Evidence of water ingress or any other
system. The user must read
liquid in the pin/socket area
and follow the manufacturer’s

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

•• Burned pin/socket or arcing damages Instructions for each component
of the system.
•• Bent pins

AIRFRAME
•• Loose connector parts The vacuum anchor system is designed for use
by persons with a combined weight (clothing,
Installation of the Aircraft tools, etc.) of no more than 310 lbs (140.6 kg).
Only one person fall arrest system may be
Antennas & Application of Sealant connected to a single vacuum anchor.
to Antenna Connectors
These tasks provide instructions for the
installation, (including torquing and sealing of
the aircraft antennas and their connectors.

Removal/Installation of the
Instrument Panel Integral Lamp
Assembly
Refer to Figure 20-18. Vacuum Anchor System.

The task procedure is for the removal &

installation of the instrument panel integral
lamp assemblies from the facing panels. The
procedure is applicable to all the integral lamp
assemblies installed with different facing
panels in the flight compartment.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-17

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONNECT THE WRIST STRAP-

GROUND CORD TO CONNECT THE
THE WORK SURFACE ALLIGATOR CLIP
AND THE ALLIGATOR TO ANY GOOD
CLIP TO A GOOD GROUND
GROUND
20  STANDARD PRACTICES
AIRFRAME

ATTENTION
Static Sensitive
Devices
Handle Only at
Static Safe Work
10 MIL CONDUCTIVE
WORK SURFACE Stations
Reusable Container
Do not Destroy

Figure 20-19.  Removal of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices

20-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

20-30-00 REMOVAL •• The grounding cord is attached to the

conductive work surface and a good
OF ELECTROSTATIC grounding point on the aircraft structure
DISCHARGE SENSITIVE •• The wrist strap is attached to your wrist
DEVICES and the grounding cord of the wrist strap
is attached to a good grounding point on
the aircraft structure
INTRODUCTION
•• The printed-circuit board is removed and
Instructions are given about how to identify immediately put in the conductive bag
and remove a device that is electrostatic
•• The conductive bag is sealed with a
discharge sensitive (ESDS). An ESDS device
cotton cord or an ESDS label
is a component that can be damaged by an
electrostatic discharge. •• Ensure that there is an ESDS label on
the bag
GENERAL •• The printed-circuit board and the bag
is put in a rigid container before it is
Refer to Figure 20-19. Removal of Electrostatic
sent to the shop to prevent damage to the
Discharge Sensitive Devices.
conductive bag
An ESDS device is removed as follows:

20  STANDARD PRACTICES

•• The wrist strap and conductive work
surface are disconnected from the
•• The electrical system power is removed
grounding points.

AIRFRAME
from the ESDS device
•• The necessary panels are removed to
get access to the equipment
•• Ensure that the device has a typical
ESDS label.
If the ESDS device has a metal case, the
following is done:

•• The electrical wire connectors are

disconnected from the ESDS device
•• Conductive dust caps are installed on
the electrical connectors
•• The clamps that attach the ESDS device
to the mounting tray are loosened
•• The ESDS device is removed from the
mounting tray.
If the ESDS device is a printed-circuit board,
the following is done:

•• The conductive work surface is put

adjacent to the area where the printed-
circuit board is removed

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 20-19

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

20-00-00 SPECIAL TOOL & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• Commercially available conductive work surface
•• Commercially available static wrist strap with ground cord; 1 MΩ resistor
•• Commercially available static ground cord with clip; 1 MΩ resistor.

20-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS

NOTE
If the ESDS device is a printed-circuit board it will have a STATIC SENSITIVE label.

NOTE
Conductive dust caps should be black or gray.

NOTE
20  STANDARD PRACTICES

Make sure that you do not touch the pins in the electrical connectors on the ESDS
device.
AIRFRAME

CAUTION
To prevent possible damage:

• Do not use a pencil on the aircraft parts, materials, or assemblies.

• Do not use the permanent or temporary markers on titanium, plastics, composite

materials, or painted surfaces.

• Do not write directly on polyethylene, or thin paper bags with the permanent or
temporary markers. If the bags contain titanium, plastics, composite materials,
or painted parts, damage can occur to the parts.

20-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 24
ELECTRICAL POWER
CONTENTS
Page
24-00-00 INTRODUCTION........................................................................................ 24-1

General................................................................................................................ 24-3

Safety Precautions......................................................................................... 24-3

24-32-00 BATTERY SYSTEM.................................................................................... 24-5

Introduction......................................................................................................... 24-5

General................................................................................................................ 24-9

System Description............................................................................................ 24-13

Component Description...................................................................................... 24-17

Main, Auxiliary, Standby Batteries and Box................................................ 24-17

Battery System Sump Jar............................................................................ 24-18

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 24-19

Operation........................................................................................................... 24-25

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Battery System Maintenance Practices........................................................ 24-25

Operational Check of the Battery System.................................................... 24-31

Introduction....................................................................................................... 24-33

General.............................................................................................................. 24-33

System Description............................................................................................ 24-37

DC Electrical System Maintenance Practices.............................................. 24-38

Fault Tolerant Logic.................................................................................... 24-43

Component Description...................................................................................... 24-62

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
DC Starter-Generators................................................................................. 24-62

Operational Check of the DC Generation System........................................ 24-63

DC Generator Maintenance Practices.......................................................... 24-64

Quick Attach/Detach QAD Housing............................................................ 24-65

DC Generator Control Units (GCU)............................................................ 24-67

Operational Test of the GCUs...................................................................... 24-69

Electrical Power Control Unit (EPCU)........................................................ 24-71

EPCU Fault Code Retrieval Procedure........................................................ 24-71

Operational Test of the EPCU...................................................................... 24-71

DC Control Panel........................................................................................ 24-75

DC Transformer Rectifier Units (TRU)....................................................... 24-77

DC Contactor Box (DCCB)......................................................................... 24-78

DC Contactor Box Contactors..................................................................... 24-81

Standby Contactor Box (SBCB).................................................................. 24-83

Standby Contactor Box Contactors.............................................................. 24-85

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Operational Test of the SBCB...................................................................... 24-85

DC Contactor Box (DCCB) Contactor Inspections...................................... 24-87

DC Current Transformers............................................................................ 24-89

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 24-92

Operation........................................................................................................... 24-97

24-33-00 APU 28 VDC GENERATION SYSTEM..................................................24-109

Introduction.....................................................................................................24-109

General ...........................................................................................................24-109

24-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
System Description..........................................................................................24-109

Component Description....................................................................................24-113

APU Starter-Generator..............................................................................24-113

APU Generator Maintenance Practices......................................................24-113

APU DC Generator Control Unit (GCU)...................................................24-114

QAD Adapter............................................................................................24-115

APU Current Transformer.........................................................................24-116

APU Current Shunt...................................................................................24-117

Controls and Indications..................................................................................24-118

Operation.........................................................................................................24-121

Operational Check of the APU 28 VDC Generating System......................24-123

24-42-00 DC EXTERNAL POWER SYSTEM .......................................................24-125

Introduction.....................................................................................................24-125

General ...........................................................................................................24-125

System Description..........................................................................................24-127

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Component Description....................................................................................24-128

DC External Power Receptacle..................................................................24-128

Controls and Indications..................................................................................24-129

DC External Power Indications..................................................................24-131

Operation.........................................................................................................24-133

Connect DC External Power to the Aircraft...............................................24-133

Remove DC External Power from the Aircraft...........................................24-135

24-60-00 DC ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION............................................24-137

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Introduction.....................................................................................................24-137

General............................................................................................................24-137

System Description .........................................................................................24-139

Component Description....................................................................................24-139

28 VDC Circuit Breaker Panels.................................................................24-139

28 VDC Avionics Circuit Breaker Panel....................................................24-141

Operation.........................................................................................................24-143

Relay Junction Boxes (RJB)......................................................................24-144

RJB Maintenance Practices.......................................................................24-145

24-21-00 AC VARIABLE FREQUENCY SYSTEM................................................24-149

Introduction.....................................................................................................24-149

General............................................................................................................24-149

System Description..........................................................................................24-153

Component Description....................................................................................24-165

AC Generators...........................................................................................24-165
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

AC Generator Adapter Plate......................................................................24-167

AC Generator and Adapter Maintenance Practices....................................24-167

AC Generator Control Units (GCU)..........................................................24-169

AC Control Panel......................................................................................24-171

AC Contactor Boxes..................................................................................24-173

AC Contactor Box Contactors...................................................................24-177

Operational Check of K2Y, K3 and K4 Contactors....................................24-177

Operational Check of K1 and K2 Contactors.............................................24-178

24-iv FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Controls And Indication...................................................................................24-180

Operation.........................................................................................................24-185

Voltage Regulation....................................................................................24-185

Protection..................................................................................................24-187

24-41-00 EXTERNAL AC POWER SYSTEM ........................................................24-195

Introduction.....................................................................................................24-195

General ...........................................................................................................24-195

System Description..........................................................................................24-197

Component Description....................................................................................24-198

External Power Receptacle........................................................................24-198

External AC Power Protection Unit...........................................................24-199

Controls and Indications............................................................................24-200

Operation.........................................................................................................24-203

AC External Power Maintenance Practices.......................................................24-203

Connect AC External Power to the Aircraft...............................................24-203

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Remove AC External Power from the Aircraft...........................................24-204

24-51-00 ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION .................................................24-207

Introduction.....................................................................................................24-207

General............................................................................................................24-207

System Description .........................................................................................24-207

Component Description....................................................................................24-207

115 VAC Variable Frequency Circuit Breaker Panel..................................24-207

Operation.........................................................................................................24-209

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-v

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
24-00-00 SPECIAL TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT...............................................24-210

24-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................24-210

24-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS.....................................................................24-212

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-vi FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page
24-1 Electrical System Controls and Indications................................................24-2

24-2 EPGDS Block Diagram.............................................................................24-4

24-3 EPGDS Block Schematic Diagram............................................................24-6

24-4 Battery System Block Diagram - Control...................................................24-8

24-5 Battery System Block Diagram - Indication.............................................24-10

24-6 Battery System Block Diagram - Operation.............................................24-12

24-7 Main, Auxiliary and Standby Batteries....................................................24-16

24-8 Battery System Sump Jar.........................................................................24-18

24-9 DC Control Panel....................................................................................24-19

24-10 EIS - Battery System Indications.............................................................24-20

24-11 Caution and Warning Panel, Battery

System Warning and Caution Indications.................................................24-22

24-12 Operation - Manual Control of the Battery Contactors.............................24-24

24-13 Operation - Battery System Indications...................................................24-26

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-14 Operation - Emergency............................................................................24-28

24-15 Main 28 VDC Generation System Block Diagram - Control....................24-30

24-16 Main 28 VDC Generation System - Indication.........................................24-32

24-17 Main 28 VDC Generation System - Normal Mode of Operation..............24-34

24-18 Main 28 VDC Generation System,

DC Starter-Generators No. 1 Source Fault...............................................24-38

24-19 Main 28 VDC Generation System, Left TRU Source Fault.......................24-40

24-20 Main 28 VDC Generation System,

Two DC Starter-Generator Source Fault...................................................24-44

Revision 0.5 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-vii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

24-21 Main 28 VDC Generation System, Two TRU Source Fault.......................24-46

24-22 Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Starter-Generator

No. 1 and Left TRU Source Fault.............................................................24-48

24-23 Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Starter-Generator

No. 1 and Two TRU Source Fault.............................................................24-50

24-24 Main 28 VDC Generation System, Two DC Starter-Generators

and Two TRU Source Fault.......................................................................24-52

24-25 Main 28 VDC Generation System, Left Main Feeder Bus Fault...............24-54

24-26 DC Starter-Generator No. 1 Source and Left Main Feeder Bus Faults......24-56

24-27 Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Starter-Generator

No. 1 Source and Right Main Feeder Bus Faults......................................24-58

24-28 DC Starter-Generator...............................................................................24-60

24-29 Quick Attach/Detach Housing..................................................................24-62

24-30 DC Generator Control Unit......................................................................24-64

24-31 Electrical Power Control Unit..................................................................24-68

24-32 EPCU Front Panel....................................................................................24-68

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-33 DC Control Panel....................................................................................24-73

24-34 DC Transformer Rectifier Units...............................................................24-74

24-35 DC Contactor Box...................................................................................24-76

24-36 DC Contactors.........................................................................................24-78

24-37 Standby Contactor Box............................................................................24-80

24-38 Standby Contactor Box Contactors..........................................................24-82

24-39 DC Current Transformers........................................................................24-84

24-40 Current Shunt (Typical)...........................................................................24-86

24-41 Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Control Panel..............................24-88

24-viii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

24-42 EIS Main 28 VDC Generation System Indications...................................24-89

24-43 Caution and Warning Panel, Main 28 VDC

Generation System Caution Indications...................................................24-90

24-44 Operation - Voltage Regulation................................................................24-92

24-45 Operation - Control of the Line Contactors (Sheet 1 of 2).......................24-94

24-46 Operation - Control of the Line Contactors (Sheet 2 of 2).......................24-96

24-47 Operation - Protective Functions..............................................................24-98

24-48 Operation - Voltage and Load Indication............................................... 24-100

24-49 Operation - CAWP Indications.............................................................. 24-102

24-50 Fault Codes - DC Generation and Distributing System........................ 24-103

24-51 APU 28 VDC Generation System Block Diagram - Control.................. 24-104

24-52 APU Mode of Operation....................................................................... 24-106

24-53 EIS Main 28 VDC Generation System Indications................................ 24-108

24-54 APU DC Generator Control Unit.......................................................... 24-110

24-55 QAD Adapter........................................................................................ 24-111

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-56 APU Current Transformer (CT)............................................................ 24-112

24-57 APU Current Shunt............................................................................... 24-113

24-58 APU Generation System - APU Control Panel...................................... 24-114

24-59 EIS, APU 28 VDC Generation System Indications................................ 24-115

24-60 Operation - APU Generation................................................................. 24-116

24-61 DC External Power System Block Diagram - Control........................... 24-118

24-62 DC External Power Operation............................................................... 24-120

24-63 DC External Power Receptacle............................................................. 24-122

24-64 External Power System - DC Control Panel.......................................... 24-123

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-ix

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

24-65 EIS DC External Power Indications...................................................... 24-124

24-66 DC External Power System Schematic.................................................. 24-126

24-67 DC Electrical Load Distribution........................................................... 24-128

24-68 Left 28 VDC Circuit Breaker Panels..................................................... 24-130

24-69 Right 28 VDC Circuit Breaker Panels................................................... 24-131

24-70 DC Avionics Circuit Breaker Panels...................................................... 24-132

24-71 DC Electrical Load Distribution - Operation......................................... 24-134

24-72 Relay Junction Box............................................................................... 24-136

24-73 AC Variable Frequency Block Diagram Control.................................... 24-138

24-74 AC Variable Frequency Block Diagram - Indication.............................. 24-140

24-75 AC Variable Frequency Block Diagram - Normal Operation................. 24-142

24-76 AC Variable Frequency System, AC Generator

No. 1 Source Fault K1 to Cross Tie....................................................... 24-144

24-77 AC Variable Frequency System Left AC Bus Fault................................ 24-146

24-78 AC Generator No. 1 and AC Bus Fault, Sequence 1.............................. 24-148

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-79 AC Generator No. 1 and AC Bus Fault, Sequence 2.............................. 24-150

24-80 AC Variable Frequency System, AC Generator

No. 1 and AC Bus Fault, Sequence 3...................................................... 24-152

24-81 AC Generator........................................................................................ 24-154

24-82 AC Generator Adapter Plate.................................................................. 24-156

24-83 AC Generator Control Unit................................................................... 24-158

24-84 AC CONTROL Panel............................................................................ 24-160

24-85 Left-Hand Side AC Contactor Box (ACCB).......................................... 24-162

24-86 AC Contactors...................................................................................... 24-166

24-x FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

24-87 AC Variable Frequency System - AC Control Panel.............................. 24-168

24-88 EIS, AC Variable Frequency System Indications................................... 24-169

24-89 Caution and Warning Panel - AC Variable

Frequency System Caution Indications................................................. 24-170

24-90 Voltage Regulation Schematic.............................................................. 24-172

24-91 Protection Unit Schematic.................................................................... 24-174

24-92 AC Generator Voltage and Load Indicator Schematic............................ 24-176

24-93 Caution Lights Illustration.................................................................... 24-178

24-94 Continuous Built-In Test Schematic...................................................... 24-180

24-95 Fault Codes - AC Generation and Distribution Systems........................ 24-181

24-96 External AC Power System Block Diagram - Control............................ 24-182

24-97 AC Variable Frequency System, External Power Operation................... 24-184

24-98 AC External Power Receptacle.............................................................. 24-186

24-99 External AC Power Protection Unit....................................................... 24-187

24-100 External AC Power System - AC Control Panel..................................... 24-188

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-101 EIS External AC Power System Indications.......................................... 24-189

24-102 AC External Power Receptacle.............................................................. 24-190

24-103 115 VAC Variable Frequency Circuit Breaker Panel.............................. 24-192

24-104 AC Electrical Load Distribution -

L ACCB and R ACCB (Sheet 1 of 2).................................................... 24-194

24-105 AC Electrical Load Distribution -

L ACCB and R ACCB (Sheet 2 of 2).................................................... 24-195

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-xi

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 24
ELECTRICAL POWER

24-00-00 INTRODUCTION

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The Electrical Power Generation and Distribution System (EPGDS) supplies electrical
energy for all aircraft electrical equipment. The EPGDS has Direct Current (DC) and
Alternating Current (AC) power systems. The DC power system includes a battery system.
The EPGDS provides for:
•• Energy conversion
•• Distribution
•• Storage
•• Control
•• Protection
•• Monitoring
•• Indication.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

MAIN

TIE

ELECTRICAL

MAIN 00
AUX 00
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

STBY 00

ESS
MAIN
SEC

PSI x 1000

Figure 24-1.  Electrical System Controls and Indications

24-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

GENERAL Safety Precautions

Refer to: Ensure the aircraft is grounded before
connecting electrical power. Not grounding
•• Figure 24-1. Electrical System Controls the aircraft can cause personnel and
and Indications. equipment damage.
•• Figure 24-2. EPGDS Block Diagram.
•• Figure 24-3. EPGDS Block Schematic
Diagram.

The EPGDS is divided into the systems that follow:

•• Batteries
•• Main 28 VDC generation
•• Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) 28 VDC
•• External DC ground power
•• DC electrical load distribution
•• Main 115 VAC variable generation
•• External AC ground power
•• AC electrical load distribution.

The battery system is energized by three nickel

cadmium batteries.

The main 28 VDC generation system is

energized by:

•• Two engine driven starter-generators

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• Two TRUs
•• Auxiliary power unit (APU) driven
starter-generator (on ground only).

The alternating current variable frequency

system is energized by two AC variable
frequency generators that provide 115 VAC
three phase electrical power.

The EPGDS also has provision for AC and / or

DC external power.

Electrical power is distributed by an electrical bus

system. If an electrical power source or bus fault
is sensed, the EPGDS closes and opens contactors
to automatically reconfigure the system.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-3

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

115 VAC, 3 PHASE

340 TO 560 Hz

EXTERNAL
AC VARIABLE
FREQUENCY
AC POWER
SYSTEM
LEFT
ENGINE

VARIABLE
TRANSFORMER FREQUENCY
RECTIFIER UNIT AC POWER
(TRU) DISTRIBUTION
PANEL

RIGHT
ENGINE

DC POWER
EXTERNAL DISTRIBUTION
DC PANEL
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

DC POWER
SYSTEM
BATTERIES

28 VDC

APU

fsg67a01.cg

Figure 24-2.  EPGDS Block Diagram

24-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-32-00 BATTERY NOTES

SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
There are three batteries on the Dash 8 Q400
aircraft. They are known as Main, Aux and
Standby. The Main and Aux batteries are 24
volt 40 amperes per hour batteries. The Standby
battery is 24 volt 17 amperes per hour. There
is an optional 24 volt 40 amperes per hour
standby battery available.

The battery is an electrical power source and

distribution system that supplies self-contained
direct current (DC). The batteries supply
electrical power during normal operations for
engine starting and aircraft system operation if
external ground power, APU or generators are
not available. In an emergency, the batteries
supply electrical power for essential services.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-5

24-6 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
#1 AC GEN #2 AC GEN

EXT PWR EXT PWR

CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
DC CONTROL PANEL (K3) (K4) AC CONTROL PANEL

DASH 8 Q400
BUS BUS
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
(K1) (K2)

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC B US RIGHT GALLEY BUS

GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD

L DC GCU
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR APU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU DC GEN

(K5) (K6) APU DC GEN
DC GEN R DC GCU DC GCU

FUSE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

F2
K1
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
K2 K26

K6
K5
K21

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS

CR6
S3 S4

K25 K8

K7
CR21 CR20

STANDBY K9
BATTERY POWER BUS
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC EPCU
RECEPTACLE
CR8 RIGHT BATTERY BUS
CR19
MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4
K24

CR5 CR4

LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsh40a01a.cgm

Figure 24-3.  EPGDS Block Schematic Diagram

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-7

24-8 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

OFF OFF OFF

STBY AUX MAIN

BATT BATT BATT

OFF
OFF OFF

MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT

DASH 8 Q400
TIE RESET PWR

LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS

K22 FUSE
EPCU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

F2
K6

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K5

PSEU
LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21

HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS

CR6
S3 S4

K25 K8
CR21 CR20
K7

BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY K9
EXTERNAL DC
BATTERY
RECEPTACLE
CR8 RIGHT BATTERY BUS
CR19 MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY OFF
K24 K4

BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg61a01a.cgm

Figure 24-4.  Battery System Block Diagram - Control

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

GENERAL NOTES
Refer to:

•• Figure 24-4. Battery System Block

Diagram - Control.
•• Figure 24-5. Battery System Block
Diagram - Indication.

The battery system supplies DC power to the

buses that follow:

•• Right battery power bus

•• Left battery power bus
•• Left and right essential buses
•• Left and right main feeder buses.

The hot battery buses on this aircraft are known

as left and right battery buses. The reason for the
left and right distinction is due to the fact that
the service circuit breakers powered from buses
are located on the Left and Right Circuit Breaker
panels in the flight compartment. The right
battery power bus is powered by the standby
battery. As long as there is power in the standby
battery, the right battery bus is powered.

The left battery bus is not a traditional “hot”

battery bus. To power this bus, either the Aux or
Main or Aux and Main battery switches must be

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

in the AUX BATT and MAIN BATT position.
During normal operation, the left battery bus is
powered by the Left and Right Essential buses.

Batteries are an integral part of the starting

process. If there is no external power
available, the engines can be started using
the aircraft internal batteries through the left
and right main feeder buses. These batteries
also provide power to the starter-generator
when external DC or APU is used.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-9

24-10 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

ESID

MFD 1 ED MFD 2

DASH 8 Q400
IFC

LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS

K22 FUSE
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

EPCU F2
K6

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

STBY STBY BAT AUX AUX BAT K21 MAIN BAT MAIN
BATTERY HOT BATTERY HOT HOT BATTERY

CR6 HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS

S3 S4

K25 K8
CR21 CR20
K7

BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY K9
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
RIGHT BATTERY BUS
CR8
CR19 MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY OFF
K24 K4

BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg62a01a.cgm

Figure 24-5.  Battery System Block Diagram - Indication

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Volt and load of the batteries can be observed NOTES

on the ELECTRICAL page (See Figure 24-5.
Battery System Block Diagram - Indication.).
If any of the batteries discharging, then a “−”
sign appears in front of the load. This signifies
that the battery is discharging. Conversely,
when the batteries are over-charging, then a
“+” sign appears in front of the load reading.
If the battery is charging at a normal rate then
no symbol will appear.

Battery temperature, in Celsius, is provided on

the ELECTRICAL page to monitor the battery
temperature during charging.

Normal battery temperature is displayed in

white. If the battery temperature is between
50°C and 65°C, the temperature display changes
color to yellow. When the temperature exceeds
65°C, the display color changes to red. The
respective BATT HOT warning light illuminates
on the Caution and Warning panel (CAWP)
when the battery temperature exceeds 71°C.

Three other caution lights on the CAWP (STDBY

BATTERY, AUX BATTERY and MAIN
BATTERY) are related to the batteries. The
illumination of these caution lights indicate that
relays K25, K7 and K8 are open.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-11

24-12 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

OFF OFF OFF

STBY AUX MAIN

BATT BATT BATT

OFF
OFF OFF

MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT

DASH 8 Q400
TIE RESET PWR

LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS

K22 FUSE
EPCU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

F2
K6

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K5

PSEU
LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21

HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS

CR6
S3 S4

K25 K8
CR21 CR20
K7

BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY K9
EXTERNAL DC
BATTERY
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY OFF
K24 K4

BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg65a01a.cgm

Figure 24-6.  Battery System Block Diagram - Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION charge current. The charging current decreases

to zero amperes when the battery is fully
Refer to Figure 24-6. Battery System Block charged.
Diagram - Operation.
A battery discharge condition is set when
The battery system is controlled by toggle the left and right main feeder buses are not
switches in the DC CONTROL Panel that follow: energized by a condition that follows:

•• BATTERY MASTER •• Initial aircraft power up and load

•• MAIN BATT •• Engine starting
•• AUX BATT •• Total loss of normal generated electrical
power.
•• STBY BATT.
Initial aircraft power up and load: The
DC electrical power is supplied from the connection of the standby, auxiliary, and main
standby, auxiliary, and main batteries through batteries to the left and right essential buses on
contactors K24, K3, and K4 and diodes CR8, initial power up of the aircraft let the batteries
CR5, and CR4 to the left and right essential energize these buses. The discharge rate is
buses when the BATTERY MASTER toggle dependent upon units installed in the aircraft.
switch is set. The diodes prevent the essential
buses from charging the batteries. Engine starting: The auxiliary and main batteries
are connected to the left and right main feeder
NOTE buses to energize these buses to start the engines
and auxiliary power unit (APU).
The left and right essential buses
are connected together.
NOTE
The left essential bus supplies electrical power The main bus tie contactor, K21
through diode CR19 to the left battery power bus. is closed before the start sequence
to put both batteries in parallel
Subsequently, the MAIN, AUX and STBY for the start of an engine.
toggle switches are set to connect the main,

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

auxiliary, and standby batteries to the left and The battery system can supply 1500 ampere
right main feeder buses through contactors K8, inrush current for the engine start sequence.
K7, and K25 for charging. This current gradually decreases as the engine
accelerates to approximately 400 amperes at
The left and right main feeder buses supply start termination. The relatively high in-rush
a continuous float charge (constant voltage) current during the engine start causes the
from the DC starter-generators or the battery voltage to decrease to less than 18 VDC
transformer rectifier units (TRUs) during for a short time.
normal mode of operation, or from the DC
external power when connected. The standby battery supplies power to the
essential buses but not to the main feeder
The DC starter-generator and TRU output buses. This makes sure that the units necessary
voltage is sufficient to charge the batteries to control the engine start sequence and other
to a satisfactory condition during normal important systems are not affected by the low
operation. The battery charging function has voltage of the auxiliary and main batteries
no control. As the battery is charged, the during the start.
internal electromotive force (EMF) of the
battery increases and this decreases the input

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-13

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE NOTES
Diodes CR6, CR3, and CR2
prevent current flow from the
standby battery to the main
feeder bus for engine starting.

NOTE
The standby battery is also
necessary for the operation of the
DC motor pump (DCMP) that is
used as a backup source of hydraulic
power to the elevator system.

Total loss of normal generated electrical power:

The battery system will continue to supply
electrical power to the essential buses for a limited
time during an emergency caused by a total loss of
generated electrical power on the aircraft.

NOTE
The minimum time is set by
the applicable airworthiness
authority such as TCA, FAA,
CAA, or CASA.

The essential buses are energized by the main

distribution buses through diodes CR3 and
CR2 during normal operation of the main 28
VDC electrical system. During an emergency,
when the voltage on the main bus is less than
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

the voltage on the essential buses, the diodes

become reverse biased and open the connection
to the main buses.

This condition is sensed by the EPCU and if

the aircraft is airborne, the operation of battery
contactors K25, K8 and K7 is inhibited to open
the connection between the batteries and the
main feeder buses.

One TRU cannot be used to charge the batteries.

If only one TRU is operating and the aircraft
is airborne, the operation of battery contactors
K25, K8 and K7 is also inhibited by the EPCU.

24-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-15

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A
A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

D FW
FW D

A MAIN AND AUXILIARY BATTERY B STANDBY BATTERY

Figure 24-7.  Main, Auxiliary and Standby Batteries

24-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Main, Auxiliary, Standby Batteries
and Box
Refer to Figure 24-7. Main, Auxiliary and
Standby Batteries.

The batteries are installed in the front left

electrical nose equipment bay. They are
attached to a platform with tie-down studs,
retaining bar and wing nuts. The main battery
connector is safety tied with copper lockwire.

The battery has an assembly of individual cells

contained in a steel case. The cells are connected
in series with solid copper alloy bus bars. The
batteries have two independent internal sensors
that sense battery temperature. A thermal sensor
supplies battery temperature data to the EPCU for
EIS indications. A bimetallic temperature switch
supplies temperature exceedance data to the caution
and warning system for warning indications. The
internal sensor wires are routed through a circular
connector attached to the battery case.

All three batteries are encased in a stainless

steel box with a removable cover that gives
access to the cells for servicing. The box has two
connectors and vent ports. One of the connectors
is used for main power; the other is a circular
MIL style used for temperature indication.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The batteries supply electrical power for
emergency and starting the engines. The 40 AH
battery has a rated discharge of 40 amperes for one
hour and the 17 AH battery has a rated discharge
of 17 amperes for one hour. The discharge rate is
not linear and changes with the load.

The nominal terminal voltage of the battery is 24

VDC. The usable capacity of the battery is more
than 18 VDC at the battery output terminals.

The batteries are required to be functionally

tested at overhaul shops at prescribed intervals.
The 40 AH batteries are 76 lbs and there are
battery lifting devices to support the unit for
removal and installation.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-17

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Battery System Sump Jar

Refer to Figure 24-8. Battery System Sump Jar.

The battery system sump jar is attached to the

battery shelf in the left nose compartment with
three mounting screws. The sump jar is connected
to the batteries with breather hoses and to an
overboard vent with an overflow vent hose.

If the sump jar or the pad inside is found

contaminated with electrolyte, clean the jar
with water and replace with a new pad soaked
in 3% solution by weight of boric acid.

The batteries make some hydrogen gas and

water during the charge cycle and is contained
in the battery case and released out the vent
ports through the sump jar overboard.

A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

fsf70a01.cgm

Figure 24-8.  Battery System Sump Jar

24-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS The standby, auxiliary and main batteries are
connected to the main feeder bus when the
Refer to Figure 24-9. DC Control Panel. conditions are as follows:

The DC CONTROL panel has the battery •• BATTERY MASTER toggle switch is
system controls that follow: set
•• MAIN BATT toggle switch is set
•• BATTERY MASTER lever-locked
switch •• AUX BATT toggle switch is set
•• MAIN BATT toggle switch •• STBY BATT toggle switch is set
•• AUX BATT toggle switch •• N o a i r b o r n e t o t a l l o s s o f n o r m a l
generated electrical power.
•• STBY BATT toggle switch.

The standby, auxiliary, and main batteries NOTE

are connected to the essential buses when the The BATTERY MASTER
BATTERY MASTER toggle switch is set. selection is necessary before the
MAIN BATT, AUX BATT, and
NOTE STBY BATT selection.
The essential buses energize the The toggle switches are set to the OFF position
left battery power bus. to disconnect the batteries from the buses.
The left battery power bus is energized
independently of the essential buses when
only the MAIN BATT or AUX BATT toggle
switch is set.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
MAIN

TIE

fsg64a01.cgm A

Figure 24-9.  DC Control Panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-19

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ELECTRICAL

2 MAIN +1. 00 +1. 00 115 . 06

AUX - . 34 115 . 06
STBY - . 34 115 . 06
3

+1. 00 . 06
4
ESS 115 . 06
5 MAIN 115 . 06
SEC +1. 00 +1. 00 115 . 06
6

PSI x 1000
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEGEND
1. Main Battery Temperature Digital Indication
2. Main Battery Load Digital Indication
3. Auxiliary Battery Load Digital Indication
4. Standby Battery Load Digital Indication
5. Auxiliary Battery Temperature Digital Indication
6. Standby Battery Temperature Digital Indication.

Figure 24-10.  EIS - Battery System Indications

24-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-10. EIS - Battery System NOTES

Indications..

The ELECTRICAL system page shows the

indications for the electrical system that follow:

•• Battery load
•• Battery temperature.

Battery load: The digital display of the battery

load is shown in Figure 24-10.

The numbers for the load can display from -1.99 to

+1.99 in 0.01 unit increments. A “+” symbol before
the numbers shows an overcharge condition and a
“-” symbol shows a discharge condition. The “+”
and “-” symbols go out of view when the battery is
being normally charged. The numbers relate to the
battery load as a percentage of the maximum rate.

For example, a .60 indication means that the

battery is charging at 60% of its maximum
rate. A -1.30 indication shows that the battery
is discharging at 30% more than its maximum
rate of discharge.

An open circuit in the shunt sensing circuitry

results in the load displaying "-1.99". A short
circuit results in the load displaying "0.00".

Battery temperature: The digital display of

the battery temperature is shown in Figure

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-10. The numbers for the battery temperature
can display from -99 to +99 in 1ºC increments.

The temperature changes color as follows in

the table below:

Color Range in ºC
White -99 through +49
Yellow +50 through +65
Red +66 through +99

If there is an open circuit between the battery

RTD and the EPCU, the temperature will show
+99. If there is a short circuit between the
battery RTD and the EPCU, the temperature
indication will show -99.

Revision 0.5 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-21

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

MAIN
BATTERY

MAIN BAT
HOT

A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

MAIN BAT
HOT

MAIN
BATTERY

Figure 24-11.  Caution and Warning Panel, Battery System Warning and Caution Indications

24-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-11. Caution and Warning NOTES

Panel, Battery System Warning and Caution
Indications.

The battery system malfunctions are shown

with these caution lights:

•• STBY BATTERY
•• AUX BATTERY
•• MAIN BATTERY.

The STBY BATTERY, AUX BATTERY

or MAIN BATTERY caution lights, when
illuminated, indicate that the battery is not
connected to its main feeder bus.

The caution lights receive their signal from the

related contactor K25, K7 and K8.

The battery overheat conditions are shown with

the following warning lights:

•• STBY BATT HOT

•• AUX BATT HOT
•• MAIN BATT HOT.

The STBY BATT HOT, AUX BATT HOT or

MAIN BATT HOT warning lights illuminate
when the battery temperature is more than
71°C. The warning lights extinguish when the
temperature is less than 63°C.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The inputs to these warning lights come directly
from the bimetal temperature switch located in
each battery.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-23

24-24 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

(J8) NOSE COMPARTMENT

+28 V DC BATT CONT STBY A B NOSE P/J6
ESS BUS 5A 3312−P/J3 CB2
19 MAIN BATT N− 5 13 J/P4
− P/J2 50A C CR4
RIGHT DC CBP P/J17 T6
24−61−00 23 MAIN BATT HOT 2 1 J/P1
SHUNT D MAIN 12 50A G
(J1) R4 BATT B1 CAUTION AND WARNING CB56 11 CB4 TO MN
VHF COM 1 PANEL (O/H CONSOLE) BATT 1
BATT &2

15A
10A 23−11−00 B 31−51−00
PWR BUS + P/J14 K4 BATTERY C/BKRS

DASH 8 Q400
STBY INSTR PWR SUPP I/P 2 A BUS
A (R ESS
P/J6 CONTACTOR BUS
LEFT DC CBP CR20 K− 24−61−00)
24−61−00 C
M−
P/J101 J/P101 B1 MAIN BATTERY
(K8) Z−
BATT CONT LL 6 5 EE
+28 V DC MAIN FF DD C− 5 13
ESS BUS 5A P/J100 3 2 L FUSE
R L C/BKR CONS. 2 1
(K3) BATTERY C H−
OFF S4 12
5A MASTER RJB3−P/J1E RJB3−J/P1E P/J12 J/P12 11
G− R MAIN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

+28 V DC (J3) BATTERY MAIN 9811 9811 39 K25 DRV SRC K4 STATUS 61
MASTER BATTERY A2 51 MAIN BATT TEMP RTN K8 DRV 56 P/J3 K8 BATTERY FEED BUS
BATTERY 5A A1 47 J/P11 N− BUS TIE 24−31−00
POWER (H3) BATTERY 46 66 MAIN BATT TEMP K7 DRV 113
BUS 41 MAIN BATT SHUNT CONTACTOR
5A MASTER ON J/P100 D2 K3 STATUS 43
8 9 D1 25 42 RTN AUX BATT SHUNT 63
(L3) BATTERY F A 34 34 K8 FS SRC
MASTER 11 12 RTN 64 A SHUNT P/O K3

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

5A J/P101 62 MASTER BATTERY RTN 51 B R3
E F C2 D− 13 5
2 3 C1 44 P/J11 AUX BATT TEMP 62
RIGHT DC CBP D K 43 89 K7 FS SRC NOSE
24−61−00 5 6 J/P100 B2 P/J12 −
B1
G B 37 40 17 STBY BATT CONTROL P/J18
OFF S7 36 STBY BATT TEMP SENSE C− 5 13
(L1) STORM/PLT 33−12−00 19 38 STBY BATT RTN
B
+28 V DC CBP LTS + 2 1
MASTER 39 STBY BATT TEMP T5
BATT 10A P/J11
PWR BUS BATTERY D H− 12
BATT 18 STBY BATT SHUNT 11
STBY INSTR PWR CR21 MASTER 22 19 RTN C G−
SUPP I/P 1 L MAIN
P/J101 ON J/P101
RELAY 3−K4 56 K24 STATUS FEED BUS
LEFT DC CBP 59 K25 DRIVE K7 BATTERY 24−31−00
AA 3 2 Y− RELAY JUNCTION BOX NO. 3 A BUS TIE
24−61−00 JJ Z− ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT (EPCU) CB57 CONTACTOR
OFF B2 AUXILIARY P/J13
(L8) 24−31−00 BATTERY A 15A CB1
AUX BATT CONT J/P5
+28 V DC 50A CR5
ESS BUS 5A C
ON 6 5 P/J3 2 1 J/P2
R7 G
LEFT DC CBP D M SHUNT M− 11 50A TO AUX
24−61−00 LEFT FUSELAGE S3 K− 12 CB3
A BATT
AUX B 1&2
9811− C/BKRS
B3 BATTERY K3 BATTERY BUS
B2 RJB3−J/P1C NOSE (L ESS
E4 T7 CONTACTOR BUS
F5 29−12−00 P/J19 C B D J P/J9 VK NOSE
− J/P10 A 24−61−00)
B1 E5 6 5 CB54 DC CONTACTOR BOX (NOSE
2921− X1 E2 V P P/J9 COMPARTMENT)
OFF 15 5A
2−K2 X2 A3 29−12−00 S9 T 6 24−31−00
CB55 CB50 15 6
STBY P/J10 CR8 J/P8 3312−P/J3
RELAY JUNCTION BOX NO. 3 BATTERY 1 2 20 AUX BATT
+ C 2 1 60A A
EMPENNAGE RH SIDE ON A 100A 18 STBY BATT
8 7
B3 STANDBY 11 P/J2
EMPENN. RH DC CONTROL PANEL 10 AUX BATT HOT

d4ss2_243200_a_001.dg, ro, apr19/2013

2921−J/P5 BATTERY
(O/H CONSOLE LH SIDE) 11 11 22 STBY BATT HOT
HI <> 3250 HIGH A 12
K23 DCMP K24 J/P9
MAX P/J9 RL4 POWER ESSENTIAL 12 12 L (M10)
LO < 2600 LOW C P CONTACTOR BUS CONTACTOR STBY BATT CAUTION AND
MIN R +28 V DC WARNING PANEL
B 29−12−00 5 13 S 7.5A
G ESS BUS (OH CONSOLE)
M
CB51 CR6 J/P8
HYD SYS #3 PRESS SW 1 2 C 31−51−00
29−12−00 75A
EMPENNAGE LH SIDE NOTES: CB52 (M1)
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE K25 MAIN BUS J/P10
EMPENN. 28 V DC +2921−J/P22 PREFIXED 2431−. CONTACTOR PA EMERG PWR +28 V DC
LH 2. PIN LOCATIONS SUFFIXED BY (−) DENOTES LOWER CASE LETTERS. 20A B
RTN − 3. THE FOLLOWING ENGINEERING DRAWINGS WERE USED: 7.5A BATT BUS
HYD SYS #3 DC MOTOR PUMP 82430050/1/AU, 82430050/4/R, 82430050/5/V, 82430050/6/W, 82430052/1/A, STANDBY CONTACTOR BOX (NOSE COMPARTMENT)
29−12−00 82430052/3/−, 82430060/2/L, 82430060/4/A, 1091225 Sheet 2 REV. AU 24−31−00 RIGHT DC CBP 24−61−00
Revision 0.5

Figure 24-12.  Operation - Manual Control of the Battery Contactors

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION •• A D C C O N T R O L P A N E L A U X
BATTERY toggle switch selection
Refer to Figure 24-12. Operation - Manual connects the AUX BATTERY to the
Control of the Battery Contactors. BATT PWR BUS in the LEFT DC CBP
through the DC CONTACTOR BOX,
For manual control of the battery contactors, toggle switch, and diode CR21.
the battery has the interfaces that follow:
Battery System Maintenance
•• The STANDBY BATTERY energizes Practices
the 28 VDC BATT (PWR) BUS in the
RIGHT DCCBP through the STANDBY Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
CONTACTOR BOX. detailed description of this maintenance practice.
•• A DC CONTROL PANEL MASTER •• Monitor the temperature of the batteries
BATTERY toggle switch selection during battery charging. If you do not do
energizes BATT MASTER this, you can cause damage to the batteries.
RELAY 3-K4, K4 BATTERY BUS
CONTACTOR, K3 BATTERY BUS •• M
onitor the external DC power source
CONTACTOR, and K24 ESSENTIAL at all times. If the external DC power
BUS CONTACTOR. source goes off line, this will decrease
battery power.
•• When BATT MASTER RELAY 3-K4
is energized, a DC CONTROL PANEL •• With AC or DC electrical power connected
MAIN BATTERY toggle switch selection to the aircraft, set the MAIN, AUX
energizes K8 BATTERY BUS TIE and STBY battery switches to the ON
CONTACTOR through the toggle switch, position. It will prevent battery depletion
BATT MASTER RELAY 3-K4 and [K8 and damage to the avionics and electrical
FS SRC] and [K8 RTN] of the EPCU component. However this requires the
continuous monitoring of the batteries.
•• When BATT MASTER RELAY 3-K4
is energized, a DC CONTROL PANEL •• T
he RAMP service manual provides the
AUX BATTERY toggle switch selection instructions to select the battery master
energizes K7 BATTERY BUS TIE switch to the OFF position after the AC
CONTACTOR through the toggle switch, or DC external power is connected to

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

BATT MASTER RELAY 3-K4 and [K7 the aircraft.
FS SRC] and [K8 RTN] of the EPCU
NOTE
•• When BATT MASTER RELAY 3-K4
is energized, a DC CONTROL PANEL The batteries act like the
STBY BATTERY toggle switch capacitor that absorbs the
selection energizes K25 MAIN BUS voltage spikes from the GPU. If
CONTACTOR through the toggle the GPU transmits voltage spikes
switch, BATT MASTER RELAY 3-K4 and the batteries are selected
and [STBY BATT CONTROL] and to OFF position, damage
[K25 DRIVE] of the EPCU may occur to the avionics or
electrical component.
•• A D C C O N T R O L P A N E L M A I N
BATTERY toggle switch selection •• I f the battery master switch is set to the
connects the MAIN BATTERY to the ON position, make sure that the standby
BATT PWR BUS in the LEFT DC CBP battery switch is selected to the ON
through the DC CONTACTOR BOX, position for charging. If the standby
toggle switch, and diode CR20. battery switch is in the OFF position for
a long time, it will get discharged.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-25

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE NOTES
The standby battery powers the
Electrical Power Control Unit
(EPCU). If the standby battery
is discharged, it will not provide
sufficient power to the EPCU and
the EPCU will not allow ground
power to energize the aircraft.

•• D u r i n g M a i n t e n a n c e , w h e n t h e
air craft i s i n AIR mode w ith the
engines OFF and DC external power
ON, the MAIN/AUX/STBY battery
contactors (K25/K7/K8) are opened by
the EPCU automatically (emergency
logic mode) that prevents the batteries
from charging. The batteries will be
discharged after a period of time.
•• Always use a socket wrench to remove
or install the terminal nuts on the
battery terminal block. If you use a
standard wrench, it may cause damage
to the terminal block separators and
result in denied warranty claims.
•• Check the battery receptacle cable
connections when they are opened and
visually inspect for signs of pitting or
burning. Clean the receptacle, reconnect
and torque the cable connections.
•• If the batteries are removed/installed,
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

the loose shunt wiring can cause the

intermittent or complete loss of battery
load indication. Check battery shunt
joints and sensor wires. Make sure that
the screws are torqued and Humiseal
is applied.

24-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-27

24-28 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOSE COMPARTMENT

A B NOSE
3312-P/J3 CB2
19 MAIN BATT N- 5 13
- C
P/J2 50A
P/J17 23 MAIN BATT HOT T6 2 1
SHUNT D 50A G
MAIN 12
R4 BATT B1 CAUTION AND WARNING CB56 11 CB4
PANEL (O/H CONSOLE)

15A
B 31-51-00
+ K4 BATTERY
A BUS
A
P/J6 CONTACTOR
K-
C
M-
B1 MAIN BATTERY Z-
C- 5 13

DASH 8 Q400
L C/BKR CONS. 2 1
H- 12
11
G- R MAIN
39 K25 DRV SRC
P/J3 K8 BATTERY FEED BUS
51 MAIN BATT TEMP RTN
N- BUS 24-31-00
66 MAIN BATT TEMP
41 MAIN BATT SHUNT CONTACTOR
42 RTN
AUX BATT SHUNT 63
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

RTN 64 A SHUNT P/O K3

RTN 51 B R3
D- 13 5
AUX BATT TEMP 62
NOSE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

-
P/J18
36 STBY BATT TEMP SENSE C- 5 13
B
38 STBY BATT RTN
39 STBY BATT TEMP + T5 2 1
18 STBY BATT SHUNT H-
D 12
19 RTN
G- 11
C L MAIN
56 K24 STATUS FEED BUS
59 K25 DRIVE K7 BATTERY
A 24-31-00
BUS
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT (EPCU) CB57 CONTACTOR
B2 AUXILIARY
24-31-00
BATTERY CB1
A 15A

50A C
2 1
R7
50A G
SHUNT M- 11
A K- 12 CB3
B
K3 BATTERY BUS
NOSE CONTACTOR
P/J19 C B D NOSE T7
- A J VK
CB54 DC CONTACTOR BOX (NOSE
COMPARTMENT)
T 15 6 5A
24-31-00
CB55 CB50 15 6
CR8
+ C 2 1 1 2 A 20 AUX BATT
A 60A 100A 18 STBY BATT
B3 STANDBY 8 7
11
BATTERY 10 AUX BATT HOT
12 11 11 22 STBY BATT HOT
RL4 K23 DCMP K24
P/J9 POWER ESSENTIAL 12
P BUS CONTACTOR 12 L CAUTION AND
CONTACTOR
R WARNING PANEL
G 5 13 S (OH CONSOLE)
CB51
M CR6 31-51-00
75A 1 2 C
CB52 K25 MAIN BUS
CONTACTOR B
20A

STANDBY CONTACTOR BOX (NOSE COMPARTMENT)

24-31-00

Figure 24-13.  Operation - Battery System Indications

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-13. Operation - Battery NOTES

System Indications.

For indication, the battery system has the

interfaces that follow:

•• A temperature switch in the MAIN

BATTERY, AUX BATTERY, and
STANDBY BATTERY closes when the
battery is hot to supply a ground signal
to the CAUTION AND WARNING
PANEL.
•• A resistive thermal device (RTD) in the
MAIN BATTERY, AUX BATTERY,
and STANDBY BATTERY supplies
temperature readings to the EPCU.
•• Auxiliary contacts in K8 BATTERY
BUS TIE CONTACTOR, K7 BATTERY
BUS TIE CONTACTOR, and K25
MAIN BUS CONTACTOR close when
the contactor is de-energized to supply
a ground signal to the CAUTION AND
WARNING PANEL.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-29

24-30 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOSE COMPARTMENT

NOSE
CB2
J/P4
N- 5 13
- C CR4
50A
P/J17 T6 2 1 J/P1
D 50A G
MAIN 12
(J1) BATT B1 CB56 11 CB4 TO MN
BATT 1
VHF COM 1

15A
BATT 10A 23-11-00 B &2
PWR BUS + K4 BATTERY C/BKRS
STBY INSTR PWR SUPP I/P 2 A BUS

DASH 8 Q400
A (R ESS
P/J6 CONTACTOR BUS
LEFT DC CBP CR20 K- 24-61-00)
24-61-00 C
M-
P/J1 01 B1 MAIN BATTERY Z-
(K8) BATT CONT LL 6 5 EE
+28 V DC MAIN C- 5 13
FF DD
ESS BUS 5A 3 2 L FUSE
L C/BKR CONS. 2 1
(K3) C R
BATTERY S4 H- 12
MASTER OFF
5A RJB3-P/J1E RJB3-J/P1E 11
(J3) 9811 9811 K4 STATUS 61 G- R MAIN
+28 V DC BATTERY MAIN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MASTER BATTERY A2 K8 RTN 56 K8 BATTERY FEED BUS

BATTERY 5A A1 47 N-
46 BUS TIE 24-31-00
POWER (H3) BATTERY K7 DRV 113
BUS
CONTACTOR
5A MASTER P/J100 ON 8 9 D2
(L3) D1 25
BATTERY F A 34 34 K8 FS SRC
MASTER 11 12 P/O K3
5A 62 MASTER BATTERY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

E F D- 13 5
C2
2 3 C1 44
RIGHT DC CBP 43
D K 89 K7 FS SRC NOSE
24-61-00 5 6 -
B2
G B B1 40 17 STBY BATT CONTROL P/J18
37
OFF S7 C- 5 13
(L1) STORM/PLT 33-12-00 B
+28 V DC 19
CBP LTS + T5 2 1
BATT 10A MASTER
PWR BUS BATTERY D H- 12
BATT
STBY INSTR PWR MASTER G- 11
CR21 22 C L MAIN
SUPP I/P 1
P/J101 ON RELAY 3-K4 FEED BUS
LEFT DC CBP 59 K25 DRIVE K7 BATTERY
AA 3 2 Y- A 24-31-00
24-61-00 RELAY JUNCTION BOX NO. 3 BUS TIE
JJ Z- CONTACTOR
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT (EPCU) B2 AUXILIARY CB57
OFF
24-31-00
(L8) BATTERY CB1
A 15A
J/P5
+28 V DC AUX BATT CONT
5A 50A C CR5
ESS BUS
ON 6 5 2 1 J/P2
LEFT DC CBP D M 50A G
M- 11 TO AUX
S3 CB3
K- 12 BATT
AUX 1&2
BATTERY K3 BATTERY BUS C/BKRS
NOSE CONTACTOR (L ESS
P/J19 C B D NOSE T7 BUS
- J/P10 A J P/J9 VK 24-61-00)
6 5
CB54 DC CONTACTOR BOX (NOSE
V P
OFF COMPARTMENT)
S9 T 15 6 5A
24-31-00
CB55 CB50 15 6
STBY P/J10 CR8
BATTERY + C 2 1 1 2 A
ON A 60A 100A
B3 STANDBY 8 7
DC CONTROL PANEL 11
(O/H CONSOLE LH SIDE) BATTERY
12 11 11
RL4 K23 DCMP K24
POWER ESSENTIAL 12 (M10)
P CONTACTOR BUS CONTACTOR 12 L
STBY BATT +28 V DC
R
G 5 13 S 7.5A ESS BUS
CB51
M CR6 J/P8
75A 1 2 C
CB52 (M1)
K25 MAIN BUS
CONTACTOR PA EMERG PWR +28 V DC
20A B
7.5A BATT BUS
STANDBY CONTACTOR BOX (NOSE COMPARTMENT)
24-31-00 RIGHT DC CBP 24-61-00

Figure 24-14.  Operation - Emergency

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-14. Operation - Emergency. •• Verify on the electrical system page that
the STBY BATT temperature shows
For emergency, the EPCU opens the circuit to approximate ambient temperature
the K8 BATTERY BUS TIE CONTACTOR,
•• Verify the STBY BATT load is less
K7 BATTERY BUS TIE CONTACTOR, and
than 1.00
K25 MAIN BUS CONTACTOR to de-energize
the contactors. •• Set the STBY BATT switch the OFF
position
Operational Check of the Battery
•• Repeat the above procedure for AUX
System and MAIN batteries.
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
Fault Diagnostics:
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
Refer to Figure 24-15. Fault Codes - Battery System.
•• This procedure is to perform a health check
on all 3 batteries as well as contactors K3, The highlighted fault codes 12, 13, 21, 29, 32,
K4, K7, K8, K24, and K25. 33 are associated with the battery system.
•• Set BATTERY MASTER switch to
Troubleshooting:
MATTERY MASTER position and observe,
the MAIN BATT, AUX BATT and STBY
There was no issue with the aircraft electrical
BATT caution lights are illuminated
system. However fault code 32 was displayed
•• Verify that only the left and right ESS on the EPCU even though you have cleared all
Buses are powered and voltages are fault codes an hour ago.
24±2 VDC on the electrical system page
1. What maintenance actions will you take?
•• Select STBY BATT switch to STBY
BATT position 2. I s it possible that when fault code 32
was a hard fault and the electrical system
continued to appear as fully functional?

Code Fault Aribuon Code Fault Aribuon

01 #1 DC FEEDER 19 K21 (DC) FAIL

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

02 #2 DC FEEDER 20 K22 (DC) FAIL
03 APU DC FEEDER 21 K24 (DC) FAIL
04 #1 DC GCU 22 K26 (DC) FAIL OPEN
05 #1 DC GEN 23 K3 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
24 K4 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
06 #2 DC GCU
25 #1 AC GEN FEEDER
07 #2 DC GEN
26 #2 AC GEN FEEDER
08 APU DC GCU
27 #1 AC GCU FAIL
09 APU DC GEN
28 #2 AC GCU FAIL
10 K1 FAIL OPEN
29 EPCU-K25 DRV FAIL
11 K2 FAIL OPEN
30 EPCU-K5 DRV FAIL
12 K3 (DC) FAIL
31 EPCU-K6 DRV FAIL
13 K4 (DC) FAIL 32 EPCU-K7 DRV FAIL
14 K5 (DC) FAIL OPEN 33 EPCU-K8 DRV FAIL
15 K5 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 34 EPCU-K9 DRV FAIL
16 K6 (DC) FAIL OPEN 35 EPCU-K21 DRV FAIL
17 K6 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 36 EPCU-K22 DRV FAIL
18 K9 (DC) FAIL 37 DC EP OVERVOLTAGE

Figure 24-15.  Fault Codes - Battery System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-31

24-32 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg37a01a.cgm

Figure 24-16.  Main 28 VDC Generation System Block Diagram - Control

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-31-00 MAIN 28 VDC The main 28 VDC generation system

incorporates the:
GENERATION SYSTEM
•• DC starter-generators
INTRODUCTION •• Quick attach/detach housing
The main 28 VDC generation system supplies •• DC generators control units
the electrical power load distribution system. •• Electrical power control unit
The main 28 VDC generation system interfaces •• DC control panel
with the battery system the APU 28 VDC •• D C t r a n s f o r m e r r e c t i f i e r u n i t s
generation system and the DC external power (TRU)
system.
•• DC contactor box
GENERAL •• DC contactor box contactors
•• Standby contactor box
Refer to Figure 24-16. Main 28 VDC
Generation System Block Diagram - Control. •• Standby contactor box contactors
•• DC current transformers
The main 28 VDC generation system has a
left and right system with bus-tie functions. •• Current shunts.
The primary buses are the main bus. It is
divided into a left and right system for isolated
operation of the DC starter-generators. The
system also has a secondary bus. It is similar to
the main bus. The secondary bus is divided into
a left and right system for isolated operation of
the DC transformer rectifier units (TRUs).

Two engine driven DC starter-generators

supply 28 VDC electrical power through DC
starter-generator line contactors to the left and

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

right DC electrical load distribution systems
and two TRUs supply electrical power directly.

The DC generator control units (GCU) regulate

their related DC starter-generator’s output
voltage and control the DC starter-generator
line contactors.

The system also has DC current transformers

in the DC contactor box and below the floor in
the cabin to measure DC current for control.

The toggle switches on the DC CONTROL

panel give manual control of the main 28 VDC
generation system.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-33

24-34 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg37a01a.cgm

Figure 24-17.  Main 28 VDC Generation System - Indication

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-17. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System - Indication.

The multi-function display (MFD),

ELECTRICAL system page and the caution
and warning panel (CAWP) show the main 28
VDC generation system indications.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-35

24-36 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU

DASH 8 Q400
GEN 1 DC GCU
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

Figure 24-18.  Main 28 VDC Generation System - Normal Mode of Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The source and bus faults are isolated. The
part of the system that continues to operate is
Refer to Figure 24-18. Main 28 VDC Generation automatically re-configured to give continued
System - Normal Mode of Operation. operation.

The main 28 VDC generation system has the The main 28 VDC generation system has
modes of operation that follow: passive protection and active protection.

•• Airborne (normal) Circuit breakers give passive protection.

•• APU The DC GCUs and EPCU give active protection.
•• DC external power. They control the DC starter-generator line
contactors and other contactors.
The main 28 VDC generation system operates in the
normal mode when the conditions are as follows: The main 28 VDC generation system also uses
the EPCU for Continuous Built-In Test (CBIT).
•• Two engines are operating
During the normal mode of operation, the DC
•• DC External power is not set GCU closes the related DC starter-generator
•• GEN 1 and GEN 2 toggle switches on line contactors, K1 and K2, to connect the DC
the DC CONTROL panel are set. starter-generators. The related main feeder bus
and the TRUs connect directly to the related
For a description of APU power, see 24-33-00 secondary feeder bus.
APU 28 VDC Generation System.
The contactors that follow stay open to isolate
For a description of DC external power, see the left and right part of the system:
24-42-00 DC External Power System.
•• The main bus tie contactor, K21
The DC starter-generators are monitored by the •• Secondary bus tie contactor, K22
DC GCUs to automatically control the operation of
the DC starter-generator line contactors. If a fault •• Main-secondary bus ties contactors, K5
is sensed, the contactors are opened automatically. and K6

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Also, this condition causes the electrical power
control unit (EPCU) to automatically open and NOTE
close other contactors to continue to reconfigure The main bus tie contactor, K21
the system. The fault is isolated from the remaining is usually open, but it can be
part of the main 28 VDC generation system to give closed when the MAIN BUS
continued operation. TIE toggle switch on the DC
CONTROL panel is set.
The main 28 VDC generation system has
protective functions to prevent damage to the DC power is supplied from the main and
DC starter-generators, TRUs, and batteries secondary feeder buses in the DC contactor
when there is a fault. box, through circuit breakers, to the main
and secondary distribution buses in the flight
The main 28 VDC generation system continuously compartment.
monitors for the fault conditions that follow:

•• Source
•• Bus.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-37

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC electrical power is supplied from the left •• O

bey all the electrostatic discharge
main distribution bus through isolation diode safety precautions when you do
CR3, to the left essential bus and from the maintenance on or near devices
right main distribution bus through isolation sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
diode CR2, to the right essential bus. The two If you do not do this, you can cause
essential buses are connected together through damage to the equipment.
two circuit breakers.

NOTE
The two isolation diodes, CR3
and CR2 make sure that the
essent i al di s t ri but i on bus e s
cannot energize the main
feeder buses.

The batteries do not energize the

essential buses during normal
mode of operation because the
DC starter-generator's voltage
is more than the battery voltage.

The main 28 VDC generation

system can also be energized
through the contactors that follow:

• Auxiliary battery contactor,

K7 and main battery
contactor, K8 for starting

• APU contactor, K26 for APU

28 VDC generation power
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

• External power contactor,

K9 for DC external power.

DC Electrical System
Maintenance Practices
•• O
bey all the safety precautions
when you do maintenance on or near
electrical/electronic equipment. If you
do not do this, you can cause injuries to
persons and damage to the equipment.
•• D
o not use electrical test equipment
that can cause a spark in areas where
explosive gases occur. This can cause
an explosion that will cause damage to
equipment and injuries to personnel.

24-38 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-39

24-40 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure 24-19.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Starter-Generators No. 1 Source Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-19. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System, DC Starter-Generators
No. 1 Source Fault.

If a No.1 DC Gen fault is sensed by the

associated GCU, the line contactor, K1, is
opened to disconnect the DC Gen from the left
main feeder bus.

This fault is also sensed by the EPCU. The EPCU

closes the main bus tie contactor, K21 to connect
the left and right main feeder buses to energize
both main buses from the No.2 DC Gen.

The associated No.1 DC GEN caution light will

illuminate.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-41

24-42 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU

DASH 8 Q400
GEN 1 DC GCU
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg42a01a.cgm

Figure 24-20.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, Left TRU Source Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-20. Main 28 VDC 3. Power Source Faults

Generation System, Left TRU Source Fault.
The EPCU monitors the power sources (DC
GENs and TRUs) for their output. It will then
If a left TRU fault is sensed by EPCU, the
determine a power source fault based on a loss
secondary bus tie contactor, K22, is closed to
of output power and configure the bus ties to
connect the left and right secondary feeder bus.
share power:
The left and right secondary feeder buses are
now energized by the serviceable TRU. •• The system will share using buses with
like power first. Main to main bus (K21)
The EPCU also makes the related L TRU or secondary to secondary bus (K22).
caution light illuminate.
•• The system will share using main to
secondary ties if required (K5 and K6)
Training Information Point:
Since each power source is only able to
The TRUs do not have switches for control. The power two buses the two sets of ties will
TRUs are connected directly to the AC electrical not be closed at the same time.
load distribution system through circuit breakers
on the 115 VAC variable frequency circuit 4. Main DC Bus Faults
breaker panel for all modes of operation. The EPCU monitors generator output to
determine the possibility of a main bus
The TRUs are de-energized by opening a circuit fault. If an over current output from a
breaker when the pilots are instructed by a procedure generator GCU is sensed the EPCU will
in the Quick Reference Handbook. Pilots will be protect the system by:
guided to isolate the associated TRU through the
CB for any of the following caution lights. •• Opening and inhibiting all bus ties that
could draw power from the DC GENs
•• L TRU (K21, K5, K6)
•• R TRU •• If the over current is still present after
a 5 second delay it will disconnect the
•• L TRU HOT associated DC GEN and batteries from
•• R TRU HOT. the suspected bus.
The over current of the DC GEN will be

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Fault Tolerant Logic indicated with the illumination of the DC
The DC electrical system incorporates a fault BUS caution light.
logic system to minimize the loss of services 5. Secondary Bus Faults
to the crew in the event of a malfunction.
The system follows a series of logic rules Mechanical protection is provided for faults
to connect and open tie relays. For inflight in secondary feeder buses. The over current
operations the system will allow a single DC of a TRU caused by a possible faulty bus
power source (DC Gen or TRU) to power up will cause:
to two feeder buses only. This includes the •• A circuit breaker at the TRU to open,
main and secondary feeder buses, not the resulting in the TRU having no output power.
essential buses. The essential buses will be
powered through either the main feeder buses •• When the EPCU closes the secondary tie
or the batteries. as a result of no TRU output power there
is a secondary current limiter between the
two secondary buses that is set to a value
lower than maximum TRU output current
causing the current limiter to open before
the second TRU is brought off line.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-43

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

6. Battery Protection NOTES

In flight the batteries are providing a backup
power for essential bus power. The batteries
are able to provide a minimum of 45 minutes
of operation to the essential bus services.
In order to ensure that power is available,
the EPCU will monitor the battery load to
ensure that the batteries will not drain into
the main buses (emergency power).
•• EPCU opens the battery ties (K8, K7,
K25) in flight if the battery load is
negative (discharging).
•• The EPCU will allow the battery ties to
close (K8, K7) for an in flight engine start.

All of these protective features are

operating together for all phases of flight.
Using these rules of the fault tolerant logic
we can examine any combination of faults
for the DC system and determine the result
within the system.
7. Fault Indications
The system provides caution lights to
provide the flight crew with an indication
of the system operation.
8. Caution Lights
No.1 DC GEN - K1 is OPEN
No.2 DC GEN - K2 is OPEN
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

L TRU - Left TRU output power is

less than 18 volts
R TRU - Right TRU output power
is less than 18 volts
MAIN BAT - K8 is OPEN
AUX BAT - K7 is OPEN
STBY BAT - K25 is OPEN

The following pages give examples of

various combinations of faults and the
resulting system operation using the fault
tolerant logic above.

24-44 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-45

24-46 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg43a01a.cgm

Figure 24-21.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, Two DC Starter-Generator Source Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-21. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System, Two DC Starter-Generator
Source Fault.

If a No. 1 and a No. 2 DC Gen fault is sensed

at the same time by the two DC GCUs they are
de-energized and the related line contactors, K1
and K2, are opened to disconnect the DC Gens
from the buses.

This fault is sensed by the EPCU and it will

close the two main to secondary bus tie
contactors, K5 and K6. The left and right
main feeder buses are now energized by the
serviceable TRUs.

The associated No.1 DC GEN and No.2 DC

GEN caution lights will illuminate.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-47

24-48 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU
GEN 2

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg44a01a.cgm

Figure 24-22.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, Two TRU Source Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-22. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System, Two TRU Source Fault.

If a left and right TRU fault is sensed by the

EPCU, it closes the two main to secondary bus
tie contactors, K5 and K6. The left and right
secondary feeder buses are now energized by
the serviceable DC generators.

The associated L TRU and R TRU caution

lights illuminate.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-49

24-50 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg45a01a.cgm

Figure 24-23.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Starter-Generator No. 1 and Left TRU Source Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-23. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System, DC Starter-Generator No.
1 and Left TRU Source Fault.

If a No 1. DC Gen fault is sensed it is

de-energized and the associated line contactor,
K1, is opened to disconnect the generator from
the bus.

The EPCU then closes the main bus tie

contactor, K21, to connect the left and right
main feeder buses energizing both main buses
from the remaining DC Gen. The associated
No.1 DC GEN caution light will illuminate.

If a left TRU fault is also sensed, the secondary

bus tie contactor, K22, is closed to connect
the left and right secondary feeder buses
energizing both secondary feeder buses from
the serviceable TRU. The EPCU also makes the
related L TRU caution light illuminate.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-51

24-52 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg46a01a.cgm

Figure 24-24.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Starter-Generator No. 1 and Two TRU Source Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-24. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System, DC Starter-Generator No.
1 and Two TRU Source Fault.

This combination of faults results in only one

DC Gen remaining as a power source for the
DC system. The EPCU will close the main bus
tie contactor, K21, to connect the left and right
main feeder buses.

The secondary feeder buses will become

de-energized as the remaining DC Generator
is unable to power the full system. This will
be indicated on the ELECTRICAL page on
the MFD and associated services will be
unpowered.

The associated No.1 DC GEN caution, L TRU

and R TRU caution lights will illuminate.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-53

24-54 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg47a01a.cgm

Figure 24-25.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, Two DC Starter-Generators and Two TRU Source Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-25. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System, Two DC Starter-Generators
and Two TRU Source Fault.

If a loss of all DC generated power is sensed,

the EPCU will open all of the bus ties (K21,
K22, K5, K6).

To protect the power supply to the essential

buses, if the aircraft is airborne, the EPCU also
automatically removes the batteries from the
main buses by opening K25, K7 and K8.

The essential buses will remain the only DC

buses powered and electrical availability is
time limited.

In addition to the associated No.1 DC GEN,

No.2 DC GEN, L TRU and R TRU caution
lights, additional caution lights associated with
the lost services will illuminate.

For a description of emergency mode, see

24-32-00 Battery System.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-55

24-56 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg48a01a.cgm

Figure 24-26.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, Left Main Feeder Bus Fault
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-26. Main 28 VDC NOTES

Generation System, Left Main Feeder Bus
Fault.

If an over current is sensed at the DC GCU, the

EPCU will open and prevent the operation of
the K21, K5, and K6 bus ties.

The associated DC BUS caution light will

illuminate.

If the overcurrent condition continues for more

than 5 seconds, the associated line contactor,
K1, opens to disconnect the DC generator from
the bus. The EPCU also automatically opens
associated battery contactors, K25 and K7
de-energizing the potentially faulty bus.

The associated No.1 DC GEN, STBY

BATTERY and AUX BATTERY caution lights
will illuminate. Additionally any caution lights
associated with services lost on the unpowered
bus will illuminate.

NOTE
This condition stays set until
the overcurrent condition is
corrected and the BUS FAULT
RESET switch on the DC
CONTROL panel is set to reset
position.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

If the overcurrent condition is
not corrected, the sequence starts
again when the BUS FAULT
RESET switch is selected.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-57

24-58 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg50a01a.cgm

Figure 24-27.  DC Starter-Generator No. 1 Source and Left Main Feeder Bus Faults
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-27. DC Starter-Generator NOTES

No. 1 Source and Left Main Feeder Bus Faults.

A No. 1 DC Gen fault will cause the associated

line contactor, K1 to open and the main bus tie
contactor, K21 to close.

The No.1 DC GEN caution light will illuminate.

If a bus fault is then sensed (overcurrent at

the operational DC GEN) the EPCU will open
the main bus tie K21, and inhibit the main to
secondary bus ties, K5 and K6, and the DC
BUS caution light will illuminate. The EPCU
will also open the battery contactors for the
standby battery, K25 and auxiliary battery, K7,
to prevent negative loads.

The overcurrent sensed at the No. 2 generator

will no longer be present as the faulted bus is
isolated and the No. 2 generator will remain on
line and will power the right main feeder bus.

NOTE
Supplement 92 has been
incorporated for operators
dispatching the aircraft with a failed
generator to ensure that a reset is
not attempted following a bus fault
with a failed generator dispatch.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-59

24-60 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU
GEN 2

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg49a01a.cgm LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

Revision 0.5

Figure 24-28.  Dispatch Under MMEL with Failed GEN then Bus Fault on Good Generator Side
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer Figure 24-28. Dispatch Under MMEL Training Note:

with Failed GEN then Bus Fault on Good
Generator Side. If the BUS FAULT RESET switch were to be
selected at this time, the EPCU would reset
A No. 1 DC Gen fault will cause the associated the bus tie inhibits and sensing both DC GENs
line contactor, K1 to open and the main bus tie off line, it would close the main to secondary
contactor, K21 to close. bus ties. This would connect the faulted main
feeder bus through the secondary bus to the
The No.1 DC GEN caution light will illuminate. right TRU causing an over current at the TRU
and the TRU circuit breaker would open. The
If a bus fault is then sensed (overcurrent at the EPCU, sensing the loss of output power, would
operational DC GEN), the EPCU will open then open the main to secondary bus ties (K5
the main bus tie K21, and inhibit the main to and K6), and close the secondary bus tie, K22.
secondary bus ties, K5 and K6, and the DC
BUS caution light will illuminate. To prevent this, Supplement 92 has been
incorporated for operators dispatching the
If the overcurrent condition continues for more aircraft with a failed generator to ensure that a
than 5 seconds, the associated line contactor, reset is not attempted following a bus fault with
K2, is opened to disconnect the DC GEN. The a failed generator dispatch.
EPCU also opens the main battery contactor, K8,
and contactors for the standby battery, K25, and The DC generation system re-configuration
auxiliary battery, K7, to prevent negative loads. logic for source malfunctions is summarized
in the table that follows:
The associated No.2 DC GEN caution light
illuminates and the MAIN BATTERY caution
light also illuminates.

DC SOURCE FAILURE RECONFIGURATION LOGIC

GEN1 GEN2 L TRU R TRU K21 K22 K5 K6 K25 K7 K8
(K1) (K2) Airborne Airborne Airborne
On On On On Open Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

On On On Off Open Closed Open Open Closed Closed Closed
On On Off On Open Closed Open Open Closed Closed Closed
On On Off Off Open Open Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed
On Off On On Closed Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed
On Off On Off Closed Closed Open Open Closed Closed Closed
On Off Off On Closed Closed Open Open Closed Closed Closed
On Off Off Off Closed Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed
Off On On On Closed Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed
Off On On Off Closed Closed Open Open Closed Closed Closed
Off On Off On Closed Closed Open Open Closed Closed Closed
Off On Off Off Closed Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed
Off Off On On Open Open Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed
Off Off On Off Open Closed Open Open Open Open Open
Off Off Off On Open Closed Open Open Open Open Open
Off Off Off Off Open Open Open Open Open Open Open

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-61

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The starter-generator also connects to a cooling

duct to supply fresh air from outside the nacelle.
DC Starter-Generators
The rotor is supported at each end by ball
Refer to Figure 24-29. DC Starter-Generator. bearings mounted in the housing. They are
pre-lubricated with grease and service is not
The starter-generator is attached to the engine necessary until overhaul. The starter-generator
accessory gearbox with a quick disconnect “V” has a fan that supplies a forced air flow axially
clamp around the quick attach/detach housing through the rotor and starter windings and
and the starter-generator mounting flange. then over the commutator assembly before it
exhausts from the starter-generator. This air
flow also cools the bearings that support the
CAUTION rotor. The air is supplied from outside the
nacelle through NACA vents that use propeller
Do not let the DC starter-
blast air for better cooling in flight.
generator hang on the input spline
shaft. This can cause damage to
the spline shaft and the input seal
of the DC starter-generator.
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

A FW
D

D
FW

A fsf50a01.cgm

Figure 24-29.  DC Starter-Generator

24-62 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

The starter-generator electrical power circuit The starter-generator also has a generator
is a four pole shunt with a nominal speed of positive output signal so that the generator
12,000 rpm. The electrical power connections terminal voltage can be monitored by the
are made through bolted stud connections to a EPGDS for CBIT functions.
terminal block assembly.
Starter mode of operation: When operating as
The electrical signal connections are made a starter motor, the machine is supplied input
through a circular connector. A bonding strap is voltage at the main terminals and field current
attached to a stud on the body of the generator from the DC GCU.
case. The starter-generator has a drive shaft
that engages with the engine accessory gear A speed sensor signal in the starter-generator is
box to give mechanical coupling to the engine. supplied to the DC GCU to stop the starter mode.
The drive shaft has a shear section that breaks
to protect the accessory gear box drive train Training Information Point:
from damage because of too much torque.
The DC starter-generator has the limitations
The operation is controlled by the DC GCU. that follow:

•• 30.0 VDC
NOTE
•• 400 A continuous in speed range
The engine and APU DC
starter-generators have similar •• 150% of rated current for overload
construction but use different (2 minutes)
brushes because of the amount •• 200% of rated current for overload
of cooling supplied and (5 seconds).
operating altitude.
Operational Check of the DC
Generator mode of operation: When Generation System
operating as a generator, the machine uses
its own residual magnetism to build up a self Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
sustaining output voltage for self excitation. detailed description of this maintenance practice.
The generator residual voltage is supplied
through the DC GCU to the field until the This check is to ensure the DC starter

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

regulating voltage is correct. When regulating, generation system is operating normally:
the GCU supplies a modulated current to the
shunt field winding to keep 28.5 Volts DC at •• Start both engines and keep both
the aircraft buses. Condition Levers in feather position.
•• Put the generator switches to GEN1 and
A tapping of the interpole winding voltage of GEN2 position
the starter-generator is used by the DC GCU for
system protection. This voltage is proportional to •• Display the electrical system page on
generator current and is monitored continuously one of the MFDs and verify:
by the GCU to sense incorrect current levels. °° The generators are producing proper
voltages (28±2V DC)
A bimetallic temperature switch in the
stator assembly of the starter-generator °° They are not overloaded
senses temperature. If the switch senses an °° No DC GEN caution light illuminates
overtemperature condition, the bimetallic due to source fault.
element closes a set of contacts to give an
indication of the overtemperature condition.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-63

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Generator Maintenance NOTES

Practices
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

•• Make sure that the DC generator exhaust’s

color is not brown or black. This indicates
an imminent generator failure.

NOTE
The brown color of the DC
generator exhaust indicates
excessive bearing wear and the
black color indicates excessive
carbon wear.

•• Always use the socket wrench to

remove or install the terminal nuts on
the terminal block.

NOTE
If you use a standard wrench, it
may cause damage to the terminal
block separators and this will
result in denied warranty claims.

•• A slow-to-spool occurrence can be

caused by an increased line resistance
of the feeder cable between the batteries
and the DC starter generator. Make sure
bonding and ground wires are connected
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

properly. Loose or corroded joints will

increase resistance. Bonding resistance
must be less than 10 milliohms.

24-64 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Quick Attach/Detach QAD Housing NOTE

Refer to Figure 24-30. Quick Attach/Detach The quick QAD housing has a
Housing. bonding stud connected directly
to the aircraft structure to make
The DC starter-generator attaches to the sure that if there is an internal
accessory gearbox with a Quick-Attach/Detach short circuit of the DC starter-
(QAD) adapter that, once installed, stays generator the short circuit does
attached to the gearbox when the DC starter- not go through the accessory
generator is removed. The DC starter-generator gearbox of the engine.
connects to the QAD with a V-band clamp to
secure the assembly. The QAD has an opening When installing the QAD housing,
that connects to an airframe duct to exhaust ensure a gasket is installed on
cooling air outside of the engine nacelle. the generator mounting pad.
Lubricate the six mounting nuts
with engine oil and torque them
as specified in the AMM task.
A

LEGEND
1. Nut
2. Washer (Pre-Modsum 4-113433)
3. Quick Attach/Detach Housing
4. Gasket
5. Oil Baffle (Post-Modsum 4-113433).

2
1

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

3

5
A PRE-MODSUM 4-113433
1

A POST-MODSUM 4-113433

Figure 24-30.  Quick Attach/Detach Housing

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-65

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FW
D

fsf54a01.cgm
A

Figure 24-31.  DC Generator Control Unit

24-66 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Generator Control Units (GCU) Once the start is completed, the DC GCU
monitors the speed signal of the DC starter-
Refer to Figure 24-31. DC Generator Control generator and stops the start cycle when the
Unit. speed signal senses that the engine has reached
50 percent NH. At the end of the start cycle,
The two DC GCUs are installed in the flight the DC GCU opens the line contactor and
compartment, in the right circuit breaker shelf. de-energizes the field winding.

A connector is attached to one end of the DC The DC GCU supplies a signal to the ENGINE
GCU enclosure to interface with the EPGDS. START control panel to illuminate the start light.

The DC GCUs give the functions that follow: Generator mode: After the engine start and
a selection of the GEN toggle switch on the
•• Control for engine starting DC CONTROL panel to the GEN position,
the DC GCU will energize the field regulation
•• Control for generator
circuits and enable the system monitoring and
•• Voltage regulation protective functions. After sensing that the
system parameters are satisfactory, the DC
•• Protection
GCU will close the line contactor to connect
•• Control of the DC starter-generator line the DC starter-generator to the main bus.
contactors.
The DC GCU has protective functions that
The DC GCUs also give the indications and continuously monitor the operation of the system.
special functions that follow: If a parameter is not in range, the DC GCU
inhibits the operation of the mode, or de-energizes
•• Start command input the generator and disconnects it from the bus.
•• Starter cutout inhibit
A selection of the GEN toggle switch on the
•• Start terminate DC CONTROL panel to the OFF position
disconnects it from the bus.
•• External power inhibit
•• Field monitoring The GCU controls generator output voltage at
28.5±1VDC at the Point of Regulation (POR).

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• Power ready signal
Before the line contactor is closed to connect the
•• Power not-ready signal. generator output to the bus, the build up ground
fault function of the DC GCU checks for current
Starter mode: The DC GCU controls the flow. This makes sure that the line contactor is
starter-generator as a starter motor to turn the not shorted. When the generator output is within
high pressure compressor (NH) part of the ±1V of the bus voltage, the DC GCU closes the
aircraft engine. line contactor to connect the generator output
to the bus. If the MAIN BUS TIE toggle switch
It continues until the NH is at 50 percent or is set to the MAIN BUS TIE position, a signal
manually disengaged by a selection on the is supplied through the bus tie contactor to each
ENGINE START control panel. DC GCU to load share the generator output.

When the DC GCU receives a start command

from the ENGINE START control panel, it
energizes the field winding and closes the line
contactor to supply 28 VDC power to the DC
starter-generator.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-67

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Protection: To prevent damage to the DC start a sequence to isolate the shorted bus. If
starter-generators, the DC GCUs have the the bus fault is not isolated in 5 seconds, the
protective functions that follow: EPCU will send a trip signal back to the DC
GCU to de-energize the DC starter-generator
•• Build Up Ground Fault and open the related line contactor. If the
DC GCU continues to sense an overcurrent
•• Overvoltage
condition for more than 7 seconds because the
•• Reverse Current EPCU did not supply a trip signal, the DC GCU
will automatically de-energize the DC starter-
•• Feeder Fault generator and open the related line contactor.
•• Bus Fault.
Indications and special functions: The DC
Build up ground fault: If the DC GCU senses GCU also has special logic functions that help to
that current is flowing through the generator control the EPGDS operation and give indications
interpole before the line contactor is closed, in the flight compartment for the EPGDS.
the DC GCU will de-energize the DC starter-
generator and not close the related line contactor. Start command input: The DC GCU receives
a start command input signal from the engine
Overvoltage: Overvoltage is sensed at 32.5 control system.
±0.5 VDC. The overvoltage function latches
the DC starter-generator off. The GEN toggle Starter cutout inhibit: Two pins of the DC
switch is set to the OFF position and then GCU are connected together to disable the
back to the GEN position to reset the DC automatic starter termination function for the
GCU. If the overvoltage condition continues, main engine start sequence and let the APU Full
the overvoltage function will again sense the Authority Engine Control (FADEC) control the
condition and de-energize DC starter-generator start termination function for the APU. This
and open the related line contactor. allows the same DC GCU part numbers for the
DC starter-generator and APU generator.
Reverse current: Current will flow from the
bus into the generator if the voltage output is Start terminate signal: The DC GCU supplies
low. When this occurs, the voltage measured a start terminate signal to the ENGINE START
across the interpole winding is reversed. If this control panel when the NH is more than 50%,
negative voltage is sensed, the DC GCU will to stop the starting sequence.
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

de-energize the DC starter-generator and open

the related line contactor. External power inhibit: The EPCU supplies
an inhibit signal to the three GCUs to inhibit
Differential Feeder fault: The GCU monitors operation of their generators when external DC
the voltages induced in Current Transformers power is applied.
(CTs) located at each end of the feeder cables
in the POR loop. If the DC GCU senses at Power ready signal: The DC GCU supplies an
an instant, that the voltage in one CT is not output to the EPCU to show that the DC starter-
balanced by the voltage of the other CT, the generator is ready to load.
DC GCU will de-energize the DC starter-
generator and open the related line contactor. Power not-ready signal: The DC GCU
The feeder fault function also latches the DC supplies a power not-ready signal during the
starter-generator off. start mode to CAWP to illuminate the related
DC GEN caution light.
Bus fault: If the DC GCU senses an overcurrent
condition, more than 700 Amps through the
interpole monitoring circuit, a nominal 28
VDC output signal is supplied to the EPCU to

24-68 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Operational Test of the GCUs NOTES

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

•• This procedure allows maintenance to

test the DC GCUs one at a time
•• Select both DC generators to GEN1 and
GEN 2 position and verify the DC GEN
lights are on
•• Start one engine and verify its DC
GCU closes K1/K2 by observing the
corresponding DC GEN caution light
goes OFF
•• Verify that the left and right ESS and
MAIN buses are getting the 28±2 VDC
via the K1/K2 contactor. Loading
the DC system by switching on the
APPROACH, FLARE and TAXI lights
should not affect the indication
•• Start the opposite engine and ensure its
corresponding DC GEN light goes off.
Basically checking that the two GCUs
are sharing the load properly
•• Shutdown both engines and repeat the
above steps to test the other GCU.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-69

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FW
D

A fsf63a01.cgm

Figure 24-32.  Electrical Power Control Unit

Code Fault Aribuon Code Fault Aribuon

01 #1 DC FEEDER 19 K21 (DC) FAIL
02 #2 DC FEEDER 20 K22 (DC) FAIL
03 APU DC FEEDER 21 K24 (DC) FAIL
04 #1 DC GCU 22 K26 (DC) FAIL OPEN
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

05 #1 DC GEN 23 K3 (AC) FAIL CLOSED

24 K4 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
06 #2 DC GCU
25 #1 AC GEN FEEDER
07 #2 DC GEN
26 #2 AC GEN FEEDER
08 APU DC GCU
27 #1 AC GCU FAIL
09 APU DC GEN
28 #2 AC GCU FAIL
10 K1 FAIL OPEN
29 EPCU-K25 DRV FAIL
11 K2 FAIL OPEN
30 EPCU-K5 DRV FAIL
12 K3 (DC) FAIL
31 EPCU-K6 DRV FAIL
13 K4 (DC) FAIL 32 EPCU-K7 DRV FAIL
14 K5 (DC) FAIL OPEN 33 EPCU-K8 DRV FAIL
15 K5 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 34 EPCU-K9 DRV FAIL
16 K6 (DC) FAIL OPEN 35 EPCU-K21 DRV FAIL
17 K6 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 36 EPCU-K22 DRV FAIL
18 K9 (DC) FAIL 37 DC EP OVERVOLTAGE

Figure 24-33.  EPCU Front Panel

24-70 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Electrical Power Control Unit (EPCU) Contactor control: The primary function of the
EPCU is to control the different contactors in
Refer to: the power distribution part of the EPGDS. The
contactors are controlled by manual selections
•• Figure 24-32. Electrical Power Control of toggles switch on the DC CONTROL panel
Unit. or automatically.
•• Figure 24-33. EPCU Front Panel.
EPCU Fault Code Retrieval
The EPCU is attached on a mounting platform. Procedure
Make sure that the EPCU box is bonded to the
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
mounting platform.
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
The EPCU enclosure is constructed of aluminum
•• Ensure the aircraft is electrically
and has four hard bolt mount feet. The enclosure
powered and is Weight-On-Wheels
has three interface connectors on the rear of the
unit to interface with the EPGDS. The front •• Push the Fault Review pushbutton and
face of the enclosure has a two decimal, seven check the display shows ‘88’
segment LED display to give fault codes that
•• Push the Fault Review pushbutton
can be used with the Fault Isolation Manual
again within 10 seconds to see the first
(FIM). A folding carry handle on the front face
recorded fault code (01-37)
is also attached to the front face.
•• Push the Fault Review pushbutton for the
The unit has the additional components that follow: next fault code or ‘99’ will be displayed
if there are no more stored codes.
•• Daughter printed circuit cards
•• To erase existing fault codes, press
•• Mother board the CLEAR pushbutton and all data is
erased with the display showing ‘AA’.
•• Flex print flat cables
•• Electromechanical relays. Operational Test of the EPCU
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
The EPCU give the functions that follow: detailed description of this maintenance practice.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• Contactor control This check is to ensure the EPCU is controlling
•• Measurement of system quantities the battery system contactors differently when
the aircraft is on ground versus in flight. It also
•• DC external power monitor and protection tests the electrical indicating system.
•• Bus bar protection
•• Health monitoring of units of the EPGDS
•• DC GCU trips and inhibits
•• Caution lights control.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-71

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Contactor Function Name Operation

K21 Main Bus Tie The K21 contactor is closed when the DC bus tie switch input to the EPCU is
energized. This function is interrupted and locked out by the EPCU if a DC bus
fault is sensed. A reset is done by supplying a reset signal to the EPCU. K21 is also
controlled automatically by the EPCU to tie the main buses when the conditions are
as follows:
No overcurrent is reported by the DC GCUs and
MAIN BUS TIE toggle switch is not activated by the pilot, or
One of the DC starter-generators is failed, or
External DC power is connected to the airplane, or
APU Gen is available.
K9 External Power DC external power is connected to the aircraft buses through contactor K9. The
Contactor EPCU closes contactor K9 when the conditions are as follows:
BATTERY MASTER toggle switch is set,
EXT POWER toggle switch is set,
DC and APU DC GCUs do not sense overcurrent conditions on the DC buses and,
The external power monitor function enables the connection.
When EXT POWER toggle switch is set to the OFF position, the K9 control signal
will be switched from ON to OFF with a short delay to avoid power interruptions at
the power transfer from the external power to the internal sources of the aircraft
K8 Main Battery The K8 contactor connects the main battery to the right main bus. The contactor is
closed by switching 28 VDC through the BATTERY MASTER and MAIN BATT toggle
switches and EPCU. The contactor is prevented from closing if the EPCU senses
an overcurrent condition supplied by the opposite DC GCU for 1 second or from
the related DC GCU for 5 seconds. The contactor is also opened when charging is
not allowed or in emergency conditions. The EPCU has an electromechanical relay
with normally closed contacts to give the pilots direct control of K8 if EPCU is not
energized.
K25 Standby Battery The K25 contactor connects the standby battery to the left main bus. The contactor
is closed by switching 28 VDC through the BATTERY MASTER and STBY BATT
switches and EPCU. The contactor is prevented from closing if the EPCU senses
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

an overcurrent condition supplied by opposite side DC GCU for 1 second or from

the related DC GCU or APU GCU for 5 seconds. The contactor is also opened
when charging is not allowed or in emergency conditions. The EPCU has an
electromechanical relay with normally closed contacts to give the pilots direct
control of K25 if EPCU is not energized.
K7 Auxiliary Battery The K7 contactor connects the auxiliary battery to the left main bus. The contactor
is closed by switching 28 VDC through the BATTERY MASTER and AUX BATT
switches and EPCU. The contactor is prevented from closing if the EPCU senses
an overcurrent condition supplied by opposite side DC GCU for 1 second or from
the related DC GCU or APU GCU for 5 seconds. The contactor is also opened
when charging is not allowed or in emergency conditions. The EPCU has an
electromechanical relay with normally closed contacts to give the pilots direct
control of K7 if EPCU is not energized.
K22 Secondary Bus The K22 contactor will connect the two secondary buses if one of the TRUs fail.
Tie

24-72 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Contactor Function Name Operation

K5, K6 Left Main The K5 and K6 contactors connect the main buses to the secondary buses. The
Secondary Tie, contactors are closed when the conditions are as follows:
Right Main The two DC starter-generators are failed, DC external is not available, two TRUs
Secondary Tie are available, there is no overcurrent sensed by a DC GCU, and there is no start
command, or
The two TRUs are failed, the two DC starter-generators are available, there is no
overcurrent sensed by a DC GCU and there is no start command, or
DC external power is available and there are no TRUs on line, or
APU starter-generator is available, there is no overcurrent sensed by a DC GCU and
there is no start command

Measurement of System Quantities: The •• R AC BUS VOLTAGE PHASE C

EPCU changes the analog data to digital format
•• L AC BUS CURRENT PHASE A %
and then transmits the data through an ARINC
429 data bus to the ESID of the EIS. •• L AC BUS CURRENT PHASE B %
•• L AC BUS CURRENT PHASE C %
The different EPGDS quantities measured and
shown as follows: •• R AC BUS CURRENT PHASE A %
•• R AC BUS CURRENT PHASE B %
•• L ESS DC BUS VOLTAGE
•• R AC BUS CURRENT PHASE C %
•• R ESS DC BUS VOLTAGE
•• MAIN BATT TEMP °C
•• L MAIN DC BUS VOLTAGE
•• AUX BATT TEMP °C
•• R MAIN DC BUS VOLTAGE
•• STBY BATT TEMP °C.
•• L SEC DC BUS VOLTAGE
•• R SEC DC BUS VOLTAGE DC external power monitor and protection:
The EPCU has external DC power protection for
•• APU GEN DC VOLTAGE
too high or too low supply of external DC power
•• MAIN BATT CURRENT % of 200A voltage. The DC external power is supplied

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

to the aircraft through the external DC power
•• AUX BATT CURRENT % of 200A
receptacle. The EPCU will enable the connection
•• STBY BATT CURRENT % of 200A of the DC external power to the aircraft if the
supplied DC external voltage is as follows:
•• L DC GEN CURRENT % of 400A
•• R DC GEN CURRENT % of 400A •• Correct polarity, and
•• L TRU CURRENT % of 300A •• Voltage is between 22 VDC and 31 VDC
•• R TRU CURRENT % of 300A
If the DC external power is more than these
•• APU DC GEN CURRENT % OF 400A limits, the enable signal is removed. The signal
can be reset by cycling EXT PWR toggle switch
•• L AC BUS VOLTAGE PHASE A
on the DC CONTROL panel.
•• L AC BUS VOLTAGE PHASE B
Bus bar protection: If overcurrent detection
•• L AC BUS VOLTAGE PHASE C
continues for 5 seconds, the EPCU supplies a
•• R AC BUS VOLTAGE PHASE A trip signal to the DC GCU to de-energize the DC
starter-generator and disconnect the line contactor.
•• R AC BUS VOLTAGE PHASE B

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-73

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

The DC BUS FAULT RESET toggle switch DC GCU trips and inhibits: The EPCU has
clears system latches caused by a bus fault. The the DC GCU trips and inhibits that follow:
EPCU and DC GCU are reset.
Function Name Operation
Health monitoring of units of the EPGDS:
The EPCU BIT monitors the parameters that No. 1 DC GCU A DC GCU Trip signal is supplied
follow: Trip, No. 2 DC to the related DC GCU if an
GCU Trip overcurrent signal by the DC
•• AC Generator wiring GCU continues for more than 5
seconds.
•• AC GCUs
No. 1 DC GCU The EPCU supplies a DC GCU
•• DC Generator wiring Inhibit, No. 2 DC INHIBIT signal to each DC GCU.
GCU Inhibit The signal is used by the DC GCU
•• DC Generators
to disable its related DC starter-
•• DC GCUs generator from operating in the
generator mode when DC external
•• APU GCU
power is connected to the aircraft
•• K1 and K2 - DC Generators Line and set on.
Contactors
•• K3 and K4 & K24 - Batteries ESS. Bus Control caution lights: The EPCU controls the
Contactors caution lights that follow:
•• K5 and K6 - TRU Tie Contactors
Function Name Operation
•• K10 DC External Power Contactor
DC BUS caution The indication comes on if the
•• K21 Generators Tie Contactor light EPCU receives an overcurrent
signal from any of the DC GCUs
•• K22 Secondary Bus Tie Contactor
and the signal is present for more
•• K26 APU DC Generator Line Contactor than 1 second.

•• K3 (AC) and K4 (AC) - AC External L TRU, R TRU The TRU failure is sensed if the
Power Contactors caution light TRU output voltage is below 15
VDC for more than 7 seconds.
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOTE
Not all the fault codes that NOTE
are shown will be related to The EPCU is not necessary for
the current fault as the EPCU continued safe flight because the
does not erase fault codes EPCU functions are fail safe. If power
automatically from memory is lost, internal electromechanical
after each flight. If the memory relays will close to give manual
is erased and the fault is verified control with toggle switches on the
again, the EPCU will then show DC CONTROL panel.
only those fault codes related to
the current fault. The BIT of the EPCU has no control
of the contactors in the EPGDS.
The EPGDS usually controls all
the contactors during an engine
start and the EPCU can monitor for
correct operation without the need
for a power on BIT.

24-74 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Control Panel The toggle switches are identified as follows:

Refer to Figure 24-34. DC Control Panel. •• STBY BATT

•• AUX BATT
The DC control panel is attached to the
overhead console with four DZUS fasteners. •• MAIN BATT
The DZUS fasteners and a bonding wire
•• BATTERY MASTER
connected to the chassis of the unit make a
ground continuity connection between control •• GEN 1
panel and the aircraft structure.
•• GEN 2
•• MAIN BUS TIE
•• BUS FAULT RESET
•• EXT POWER.
A The DC control panel gives manual control of
main 28 VDC generation system.

DC
CO

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

OF NT
F RO
ST
B L
BA Y OF
TT F
AU
BA X OF
TT F
MA
OF I
F BA N
TT
GE OF
N1 OF F
BA
F T T
D MA ER
GE
FW
ST Y
N OF ER
F
AIN
BU OF
TIE S F
BU
S F
RE AULT OF
F
SE
T EX
T PW
R

A
fsf51a01.cgm

Figure 24-34.  DC Control Panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-75

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

D
FW
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

A fsf52a01.cgm

Figure 24-35.  DC Transformer Rectifier Units

24-76 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Transformer Rectifier Units If the internal temperatures of the TRU increase

because of load or ambient temperatures, the
(TRU) thermostatic control energizes the cooling fan
Refer to Figure 24-35. DC Transformer and supplies air flow over the internal TRU
Rectifier Units. components. If the unit continues to increase
in temperature, the unit will output a hot status
Two DC TRUs are installed on the right side signal for indication on the caution and warning
of the nose equipment bay. An exhaust duct on panel (CAWP).
the DC TRU is attached with a plastic strap.
NOTE
The TRU has two circular connectors. The
one connector supplies 115 VAC input power The TRUs can continue to charge
to the unit for power conversion and the other the batteries if the two DC
connector supplies temperature indications and starter-generators fail because
unit operating status to the CAWP and EPCU. the voltage does not decrease too
Two terminals supply the DC positive and much at high current loads.
negative outputs.

The TRU is a relatively simple solid state conversion

device. It has the following components:

•• Transformers
•• Windings
•• Diode bridge
•• Filter network
•• Internal sensors
•• Cooling fan.

NOTE

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The cooling fan in the unit supplies
forced air for convection cooling.
The cooling air flow is supplied
from the front face screened input,
internally along the length of the
enclosure to the rear face, to the
attached exhaust ducting.

The rated output of the TRU is

300 Amperes.

The TRU changes variable frequency 115 AC

power at the input connector to a nominal
28 VDC power at the output terminal studs.
The TRU gives an electrical output that is in
proportion to the input voltage and load. If the
TRU fails, the status output of the TRU to the
EPCU is lost.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-77

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Contactor Box (DCCB) The DCCB has the components that follow:

Refer to Figure 24-36. DC Contactor Box. •• Rigid buses

•• K1 and K2 generator line contactors
The DCCB contains monitor and protection
components for the DC electrical system in •• K3 and K4 auxiliary and main battery
a protected environment. It is installed in the to essential bus contactors
electrical nose equipment bay.
•• K5 and K6 main to secondary bus tie
contactors
The enclosure has removable covers to give
easy access to components in the unit. The •• K7 and K8 auxiliary and main battery
removable panels have screened air vents to to main bus contactors
supply convection cooling for the internal
•• K9 external power contactor
components of the enclosure.
•• K21 main bus tie contactor
•• K22 secondary bus tie contactor
•• K26 APU generator line contactor
•• Fuses
•• Circuit breakers
•• Current transformers.
A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

D
FW

fsf53a01.cgm

Figure 24-36.  DC Contactor Box

24-78 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-79

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A DC CONTACTOR BOX
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

fsf62a01.cgm

Figure 24-37.  DC Contactors

24-80 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Contactor Box Contactors NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-37. DC Contactors.

The contactors are located in the DCCB in the

nose compartment of the aircraft.

NOTE
The K3 and K4 auxiliary and
main battery to essential bus
contactors have container covers
around the body of the unit for
protection from sand and dust.

All contactors in the DCCB are rated for 400

Amperes. The contactors have two sets of 5
Ampere auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts
are used to monitor the operation of the contactor.

NOTE
The contactors have economizer
contacts. The current through
the coil windings is decreased
after the contactor is energized
to improve reliability.

The DC contactors in the DCCB connect the

DC electrical power sources to the main and
secondary feeder buses.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-81

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

D
FW

A FORWARD STANDBY CONTACTOR BOX

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

D
FW

B
fsf61a01.cgm

Figure 24-38.  Standby Contactor Box

24-82 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Standby Contactor Box (SBCB) NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-38. Standby Contactor Box.

The SBCB contains monitor and protection

electrical components for the emergency elevator
control system in a protected environment. It is
installed in the electrical nose equipment bay.

Circular connectors are attached to the side

of the box. They give all electrical interfaces
with the other components of the EPGDS and
aircraft system.

The SBCB has the components that follow:

•• K23 DCMP power contactor

•• K25 Main bus power contactor
•• K24 Essential bus contactor
•• RL4 DCMP relay
•• CR6 Diode
•• CR8 Diode
•• Circuit breakers.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-83

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Cover

B Relay

A STANDBY CONTACTOR BOX

Bracket
Contactor
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Relay Socket

dh052a01.dg, gv/kms, feb19/2007

Figure 24-39.  Standby Contactor Box Contactors

24-84 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Standby Contactor Box Contactors NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-39. Standby Contactor Box
Contactors.

The contactors are located in the SBCB in the

nose compartment of the aircraft.

The K23 DCMP power contactor, K25 main bus

power contactor, and K24 essential bus contactor
in the SBCB are rated for 400 Amperes.

The DC contactors in the SBCB connect the

standby battery to the right essential bus and
the left main feeder bus, and control the DCMP
in the No.3 hydraulic system.

Operational Test of the SBCB

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

•• This procedure is for the operational

check of the DC contactor K23.
•• Select the BATT MASTER switch to
ON position and do not connect external
power to the aircraft.
•• Check contactor K23 operates normally
by pushing the HYD No.3 ISOL VLV
switchlight and observe the amber
OPEN indication comes on and No.3
DCMP operates.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-85

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Figure 24-40.  DC Contactor Box

24-86 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY Revision 0.5

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Contactor Box (DCCB) NOTES

Contactor Inspections
Refer to Figure 24-40. DC Contactor Box.

The following inspection guidelines are detailed

in service letter DH8-400-SL-24-015, issued
June 22, 2015. A welded contact can result
in starter/generator failures or the inability
to disengage the starter. The contacts that are
most susceptible to wear are K1 (#1 DC Gen
main contactor), K2 (#2 DC main contactor),
K26 (APU Gen main contactor) and K23 (#3
Hydraulic pump). It is recommended to check
the contactor every 6000 hours or sooner if
Engine or APU battery starts are common.

•• Inspect all hardware for damaged

threads and heads. Replace as required.

•• Inspect the covers, contact mounting

block, circuit boards and auxiliary
contacts for obvious damage such as
signs of pitting and/or burning.

•• Visually inspect the two stationary

contacts and the moveable contact to
ensure that their surface area is not
worn more than 50% and that there
are no deep burns or pitting, (contacts
that are badly pitted, burned, fused or
melted are not repairable).

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Revision 0.5 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-87

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE
Left side shown.
Right side similar.

D FWD
INB

A DC CURRENT TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION

FW
D

NOTE
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Cross-section at flight station x341.

FWD

WN
DO

fsf55a01.cgm

Figure 24-41.  DC Current Transformers

24-88 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC Current Transformers NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-41. DC Current Transformers.

Two DC CTs are installed in the center fuselage

below the passenger compartment floor.

The DC CT is a toroidal core wound unit. The

mounting holes are asymmetric to give the unit
installation in one direction only. Two sense
wires are attached to two terminal studs at the
top of the unit. The DC feeder cable passes
through a hole in the DC CT.

When a change in current occurs, a voltage is

induced for sensing.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-89

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A
A

A FW
D

NOTE
Cross-section at flight station X341.
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FWD

N
W
DO

A CURRENT SHUNT (TYPICAL)

Figure 24-42.  Current Shunt (Typical)

24-90 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Current Shunts NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-42. Current Shunt (Typical).

The shunts supply data to the EPCU for load

indication.

There are five 400A and three 200A DC current

shunts installed on the aircraft as follows:

•• Two 400A DC shunts in the nose

equipment bay for the left and right
transformer rectifier units
•• Three 200A DC shunts in the nose
equipment bay for the standby, main,
and auxiliary batteries
•• Two 400A DC shunts in the center
fuselage under the passenger
compartment floor for No.1 and No.2
DC starter-generators
•• One 400A DC shunt is in the aft
baggage compartment for the APU
starter-generator.

NOTE
For installation, make sure that
the connecting surfaces are
clean with no corrosion, paint,
grease, or preservation fluids.
The linear resistive property

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

of the shunt supplies an output
voltage that is proportional to
the current flowing through the
feeder connections.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-91

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

Refer to Figure 24-43. Main 28 VDC
Generation System, DC Control Panel.

The DC CONTROL panel has the controls for

main 28 VDC generation system that follow:

•• GEN1
•• GEN2

The DC starter-generators are connected to the

DC buses when the conditions are as follows:

•• Two engines are operating

•• EXT PWR toggle switch power is not
set
•• GEN1 and GEN2 toggle switches are set.

The GEN1 and GEN2 toggle switches are set to

the OFF position to reset the related DC GCU.

A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
MAIN

TIE

fsg64a01.cgm A

Figure 24-43.  Main 28 VDC Generation System, DC Control Panel

24-92 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-44. EIS Main 28 VDC Bus voltage is displayed for the ESS, main and SEC
Generation System Indications. buses in 0.1 volt increments from 0.0 to 59.9 VDC.

The multi-functional display unit ELECTRICAL Load is displayed as a percentage of maximum in

system page has a digital display of the DC bus 0.01 power increments from .00 to 1.99, where
voltage, DC generator load, and TRU load. .00 is equal to 0% and 1.00 is equal to 100%.

NOTE
The MFD shows white dashes for
all ELECTRICAL system page
parameters when it senses that
the EPCU is not supplying valid
electrical data through the Flight
Data Processing System (FDPS).

ELECTRICAL A

MAIN 00
AUX 00
STBY 00

ESS

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

MAIN
SEC

PSI x 1000

fsf83a01.cgm

Figure 24-44.  EIS Main 28 VDC Generation System Indications

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-93

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

PITCH PITOT HEAT

A ICE DETECT #1 HYD ROLL SPLR
TRIM STBY F L
FAI ISO VLV
L INBD SPLR

PITOT PITOT CABIN # HYD

#2 HYD
HEAT
A 1 HEAT
A 2 DUCT HOT ISO
O VLV
VL

CABIN ROLL SPLR

PACK HOT
P INBD HYD

PROP MAIN
DEICE BATT
A ERY
BATTERY

DEICE #1 HY
YD #2 HYD
TIMER FLUIDD H OT
T FLUID HOT

EMERR LT
L S INTERNAL SIDE WDO DEICE
AV
AVIONICS
DISAR
RMED DOOR
OORS
S HOT PRESS

CABIN
C CHK #1 ENGG #1 E
ENG #2 ENG
#
P
PRESS FIRE DET OIL PRE
RESS FAD
FADEC FAI
F L DEC
FADE C FAI
F L
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

MAIN
BATTERY

fsf80a01.cgm

Figure 24-45.  Caution and Warning Panel, Main 28 VDC Generation System Caution Indications

24-94 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-45. Caution and Warning NOTES

Panel, Main 28 VDC Generation System
Caution Indications.

1. The DC GEN caution lights illuminate

when generators are not connected to their
respective buses.
2. The TRU caution lights illuminate when the
TRUs are not energizing their respective buses.

DC BUS caution light: The DC BUS caution

light illuminates when a DC generator (GEN)
overcurrent condition is sensed by the No.1 DC
GCU or No.2 DC GCU for more than seven
seconds and the EPCU has reconfigured the
main 28 VDC generation system.

Other related caution lights can also illuminate

at the same time as follows:

•• No.1 DC GEN
•• No.2 DC GEN
•• APU
•• STBY BATTERY
•• MAIN BATTERY
•• AUX BATTERY.

No.1 DC GEN HOT caution light: The No.1 DC

GEN HOT caution light illuminates when the
No.1 DC GEN temperature is more than 166ºC

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

(330ºF).

No.2 DC GEN HOT caution light: The No.2 DC

GEN HOT caution light illuminates when the
No.1 DC GEN temperature is more than 166ºC
(330ºF).

L TRU HOT caution light: The L TRU HOT

caution light illuminates when the L TRU
temperature is more than 71º C (160ºF).

R TRU HOT caution light: The R TRU HOT

caution light illuminates when the R TRU
temperature is more than 71ºC (160ºF).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-95

24-96 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOSE COMP.
C B27
88 5A

COPLT SIDE CONS. LEFT ENGINE C B15

- L MAIN A
R- GEN SENSING P/J1 OVT FEEDER C B13
JJ FIELD SUPPLY BUS
B
C823
C B17
FW GND DD E
INTERPOLES LL A
H- B C825 C B19

DASH 8 Q400
SPEED
SENSE F- H GG B
D
GEN FIELD AA A
FIELD KK
O/H PANEL F HH
10K G
VV 1
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

+ 2
#1 DC GENERATOR W 5
K GG GEN CONT E- 13
C 831
N M- GEN ON

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

J K GEN RESET A 1 2
AA 11
1
2 K- 12
3 M N - GEN OUT K1
OFF
4 GENERATOR BUS
5 CONTACTOR
6 L M CONPWR OUT

S1 C T3
ON
GEN 1
DC CONTROL PANEL ESS BUS PWR FF
START N
T3

#1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT (GCU)

JJ

(K8) DC GEN 1
+28 V DC EXCITE
L ESS 10A FF A2 A1
EE X2 X1 7 8
C R10
LEFT DC CBP 24-61-00
RELAY 1 K1 GENERATOR BUS
C R9 CONTACTOR
CO PLT SIDE CONS.

J/P 15-2
ESS BUS PWR FF
B2 EQUALIZING BUS BB
START N CC
CC
#2 DC GENERATOR
CONTROL UNIT (GCU)
DC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-46.  Operation - Voltage Regulation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION K1 GENERATOR BUS CONTACTOR TIE

energizes RELAY 1 in the DC CONTACTOR
Refer to Figure 24-46. Operation - Voltage BOX to supply 28 VDC through circuit breaker
Regulation. K8 (DC GEN 1 EXCITE) of the L ESS BUS,
RELAY 1, to [ESS BUS PWR] of the No.1 DC
For voltage regulation, the main 28 VDC GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT to energize
generation system has the interfaces that follow: the DC GCU.

•• The [SPEED SENSE] and [SPEED NOTE

SENSE RTN] signal from the No.1 DC
GENERATOR is supplied to the No.1 RELAY 1 is also energized during
DC GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT to a start of the No.1 or No.2 engine.
stop the start cycle
•• 28 VDC [CONTR PWR OUT] from the
No.1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT is supplied through the GEN1 toggle
switch on the DC CONTROL PANEL
back to the No.1 DC GENERATOR
CONTROL UNIT for generator control
[GEN CONT]
•• A generator output [GEN OUT] signal
is also supplied through the GEN1
toggle switch and back for generator
on [GEN ON]
•• If the GEN 1 toggle switch is set to
the OFF position, the generator output
[GEN OUT] is supplied back for
generator reset [GEN RESET]
•• The + (28 VDC) output from the No.1 DC
GENERATOR is supplied through circuit

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

breaker CB23 on the DC CONTACTOR
BOX to the [FIELD SUPPLY] of the
No.1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT to energize the DC GCU.
•• The + (28 VDC) output from the
No.1 DC GENERATOR is supplied
through circuit breaker CB25 on
the DC CONTACTOR BOX to the
[GEN SENSING] of the No.1 DC
GENERATOR to control the generator
field [GEN FIELD] output to the No.1
DC GENERATOR [FIELD].

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-97

24-98 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

(J9)
NOSE COMP.
+28V DC LEFT BUS TIE
5A C B27
ESS BUS
88 5A
RIGHT DC CBP

DASH 8 Q400
C B15
(J9) L MAIN A
BUS FAULT FEEDER
+28V DC RESET SW C B13
5A BUS L DC
ESS BUS B
C823 C B17 C/B PNL
LEFT DC CBP LL A
C825 C B19
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

O/H PANEL LH SIDE GG B

OFF CO PLT SIDE CONS LEFT ENGINE LH/BRKR CONS
-
KK
P/J1 OVT HH

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RESET
A Z 3 X
55 K1 STATUS 21 VV 1
BUS FAULT E 2
RESET INTERPOLES W 5
K GG GEN CONT B 87 RESET E 13
N M GEN ON C 831
J K GEN RESET H K5/K6 FEED 90 A 1 2
D AA 11
1
2 A FIELD
3 M N- GEN OUT 103 K5 DRV SCR K- 12
OFF K1 COIL Y- F K1
G
4 10K GENERATOR BUS
5 CONTACTOR
6 L M CONT PWR OUT +
S1 #1 DC GENERATOR C T3
ON #1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
GEN 1 UNIT (GCU)
DC CONTROL PANEL 34 L TRU STATUS K5 STATUS 22 V- 13 5 X
T1
NOSE COMPARTMENT T3 1 2
AC CB PANEL
K5 DRV 91 Q- 11 12 P
C R1
PH.A K5 MAIN TO
LEFT 14 L TRU 7
SECONDARY BUS TIE
AC PH.B AC STATUS ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT (EPCU)
18 CB 11
BUS INPUT
PH.C -
35A 22 DC C
DC OUTPUT CB 9
OUTPUT
- L SEC L DC
115 V AC VARIABLE FEEDER D
CB 7 C/B PNL
FREQUENCY CBP BUS
E
CB 5
F
TRANSFORMER
RECTIFYING UNIT (TRU)

DC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-47.  Operation - Control of the Line Contactors (Sheet 1 of 2)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-47. Operation - Control of NOTES

the Line Contactors (Sheet 1 of 2).

For control and monitor of the line contactors,

the main 28 VDC generation system has the
interfaces that follow:

•• A [K1 COIL] signal from the No.1 DC

GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT is
supplied to the K1 GENERATOR L
BUS CONTACTOR to energize its coil
•• The [K1 STATUS] is supplied back
through an auxiliary contact of K1 to
the ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL
UNIT (EPCU) for CBIT
•• 28 VDC is supplied from the + output of
the No.1 DC GENERATOR through K1
GENERATOR L BUS CONTACTOR to
the L MAIN FEEDER BUS
•• 28 VDC is supplied from the + output of
the L TRANSFORMER RECTIFYING
UNIT (TRU) directly to L SEC
FEEDER BUS
•• A [L TRU STATUS] signal is supplied
to the EPCU for monitoring
•• 28 VDC is supplied through the circuit
breaker J9 (LEFT BUS TIE) on the
R ESS BUS, [K5 DRV SRC] and
[K5 DRIVE] of the EPCU, to the K5
SECONDARY FEEDER BUS TIE

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

CONTACTOR to energize its coil
•• The [K5 STATUS] is supplied back
through an auxiliary contact of K5 to
the EPCU for CBIT
•• 28 VDC is supplied through the circuit
breaker M8 (BUS FAULT RESET SW)
on the L ESS BUS, the BUS FAULT
RESET toggle on the DC CONTROL
PANEL, to [RESET] of the EPCU.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-99

24-100 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LH/BKR CONS. NOSE COMP.

K7 PIN 1 K26 PIN 2

K9 STATUS 60 5- 10 3 AUX BAT INPUT APU
DC EXTERNAL T9 2 1
POWER SYSTEM R MAIN
F 12 11 K5/K6 FAULT CIRCUIT FEEDER
6 14 14 6 5 13 6 14 BUS
K9 DC EXTERNAL
POWER CONTACTOR K1 K2 K9 K22

DASH 8 Q400
K9 DRIVE 38 8 L SEC
FEEDER
K5/K6 FS 102 8- 12 11 6 15 BUS

K6 C R16
12 11
K5 C R15 C R14

K21 STATUS 24 T
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K22 STATUS 35 5- 13 5
1 2
(H9) K22 DRIVE 36 C 11 12 6 15
SEC BUS TIE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

28 V DC 5A 35 K22 DRV SRC 13 5
R ESS BUS 37 K9 D RV SRC K22 SECONDARY FEEDER
BUS TIE CONTACTOR
(G8) DC BUS D 1 2
TIE CONT K21 DRIVE 92 A 11 12
5A 127 K21 DR VSRC CO PLT SIDE CONS R MAIN
K21 MAIN FEEDER BUS FEEDER K8 PIN 1
TIE CONTACTOR BUS MAIN BATT
RIGHT DC CBP E
B2 UALIZING BUS 88 INPUT
X
X-
#1 DC GENERATOR
CONTROL UNIT (GCU)
F1 T8
R SEC 100
FEEDER
BUS

AV. RACK

WOW 90 47 AC WOW

PSEU ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL

UNIT (EPCU)
CO PLT SIDE CONS LH SIDE

B2
EQUALIZING BUS 88 X-

#2 DC GENERATOR
CONTROL UNIT (GCU)
DC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-48.  Operation - Control of the Line Contactors (Sheet 2 of 2)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-48. Operation - Control of NOTES

the Line Contactors (Sheet 2 of 2).

•• 28 VDC is supplied through the circuit

breaker H9 (SEC BUS TIE) on the R
ESS BUS, [K22 DRV SRC] and [K22
DRIVE] of the EPCU, to the K22
SECONDARY FEEDER BUS TIE
CONTACTOR to energize its coil
•• The [K22 STATUS] is supplied back to
the EPCU for CBIT
•• 28 VDC is supplied through circuit
breaker G8 (DC BUS TIE CONT) of
the R ESS BUS, [K21 DRV SRC] and
[K21 DRIVE] signal of the EPCU, to
the K21 MAIN FEEDER BUS TIE
CONTACTOR to energize its coil
•• The [K21 STATUS] is supplied back
through an auxiliary contact of K21 to
the ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL
UNIT (EPCU) for CBIT
•• If the K21 is closed, an [EQUALIZING
BUS] signal from the No.1 DC
GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT and
No.2 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT is connected together through
K21.

The main 28 VDC generation system has a K5,

K6 fault (fail safe) circuit to continue to control
the K5 and K6 SECONDARY FEEDER BUS

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

TIE CONTACTORS if the EPCU malfunctions.
28 VDC is supplied from the + output of the
No.1 DC GENERATOR, through CB31 on the
DC CONTACTOR BOX, [K5/K6 FEED] and
[K5/K6 FS] of the EPCU, K1 GENERATOR
L BUS CONTACTOR, K2 GENERATOR
R BUS CONTACTOR, K9 DC INTERNAL
POWER CONTACTOR, K22 SECONDARY
FEEDER BUS CONTACTOR, diode CR15,
to the K5 SECONDARY FEEDER BUS TIE
CONTACTOR to energize its coil. Then, the
electrical power is supplied through K5 to
energize the coil of K6.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-101

24-102 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

C B27
CT1
X2 X1 88 5A

A DIFF PROT
A- RTN CB 15
C- DIFF PROT
W- PWR - L MAIN A

DASH 8 Q400
FEEDER CB 13
P/J1 OVT BUS
Z BUS SENSING B L DC
CB 23 CB 17
C/B
E LL A
INTERPOLES CB 25 CB 19
B
GG B
H
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

INTERPOLE CC D
A FIELD KK
F HH
G

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

10K
+ VV 1
2
#1 DC GENERATOR W 5
E- 13
CB 31
PWR RDY G- 29 PWR RELAY A 1 2
AA 11
TRIP P 69 TRIP
OVERCURRENT V- 52 O/C
K- 12
K1
GENERATOR BUS
CONTACTOR

C T3
#1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT (GCU)

34 L TRU STATUS 13 5 X
T1V-
T3 1 2
Q- 11 12 P-
C R1

K5 MAIN TO
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT (EPCU) SECONDARY BUS TIE
CB 11
C
CB 9
L SEC
FEEDER D
CB 7 L DC
L TRU 7 BUS C/B
STATUS E
CB 5

TRANSFORMER
RECTIFYING UNIT (TRU) DC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-49.  Operation - Protective Functions

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-49. Operation - Protective NOTES

Functions.

For protection, the main 28 VDC generation

system has the interfaces that follow:

•• The + (28 VDC) output from the

No.1 DC GENERATOR is supplied
through K1 GENERATOR L BUS
CONTACTOR, circuit breaker CB27
on the L MAIN FEEDER BUS in
the DC CONTACTOR BOX to
[BUS SENSING] of the No.1 DC
GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT to
monitor for overvoltage
•• The [INTERPOLE] voltage of the No.1
DC GENERATOR is supplied to the
No.1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT to monitor for reverse current and
a bus fault (overcurrent)
•• Current transformer CT1 supplies a
signal to [DIFF PROT RTN] of the
No.1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT and CT3 supplies [DIFF PROT
PWR] to monitor for a feeder fault.

If a bus fault is sensed, the No.1 DC

GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT will
supply an [OVERCURRENT] signal to the
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT to
start a bus isolation sequence. If the bus fault
continues, a [TRIP] signal is supplied back to

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

the No.1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT
to de-energize the No.1 DC GENERATOR
and open the K1 GENERATOR L BUS
CONTACTOR.

If a source fault of the No.1 DC GENERATOR

is sensed, the No.1 DC GENERATOR
CONTROL UNIT will stop supplying a
[PWR RDY] signal to [PWR RELAY] of the
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT to
start a reconfiguration of the line contactors.

If a source fault of the L TRANSFORMER

RECTIFYING UNIT is sensed, the L TRU
will stop supplying a [TRU STATUS] signal
to [L TRU STATUS] of the EPCU to start a
reconfiguration of the line contactors.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-103

 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LC/BKR CONS.
24-104

B A R1 SHUNT

26 SHUNT
27 SHUNT RTN

LEFT ENGINE
- (N9)
P/J1 OVT 28 V DC VOLT IND
5A 116 L SEC
L SEC BUS
(D10)

DASH 8 Q400
E 28 V DC DC PWR MON
L ESS BUS 5A 88 L ESS
INTERPOLES
B (D8)
28 V DC VOLT IND
H L MAIN BUS 5A 100 L MAIN
D
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

A FIELD
LEFT DC CBP
21-61-00
F G
10K (P8)

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

28 V DC VOLT IND
+ 5A 55 R MAIN
R SEC BUS
#1 DC GENERATOR
(D9)
28 V DC VOLT IND
R SEC BUS 5A 33 R SEC
(H10)
DC PWR MON
5A 70 R ESS

RIGHT DC CBP
21-61-00

AV. RACK

ARINC 429 303

304
31-41 A2 IOP 2
31-41-00
AV. RACK

ARINC 429 303 1 A

304 2 B ARINC 429

31-41 A1 IOP 1 ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL

31-41-00 UNIT (EPCU)
LH SIDE

Figure 24-50.  Operation - Voltage and Load Indication

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-50. Operation - Voltage and NOTES

Load Indication.

For voltage and load indicator on the multi-

functional display unit (MFD) ELECTRICAL
system page, the main 28 VDC generation
system has the interfaces that follow:

•• The VOLT IND voltage of the 28

VDC L SEC BUS is monitored by
the [L SEC] inputs of the electrical
power control unit (EPCU) for voltage
indication.
•• The DC PWR MON voltage of the 28
VDC L ESS BUS is monitored by the
[L ESS] inputs of the EPCU for voltage
indication.
•• The VOLT IND voltage of the 28 VDC
L MAIN BUS is monitored by the [L
MAIN] inputs of the EPCU for voltage
indication.
•• SHUNT R1 supplies a [SHUNT] and
[SHUNT RTN] signal to the [SHUNT]
and [SHUNT RTN] to the EPCU for
load indication
•• [ARINC 429] AC variable frequency,
main 28 VDC generation, and battery
system indication data is supplied
from the EPCU through IOP1 and
IOP2 [ARINC 429] to the electronic
instrument system (EIS) for indication.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOTE
The No.1 part of the main 28
VDC generation system is
described. The No.2 part is
similar.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-105

24-106 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT ENGINE O/H CONSOLE

#1 DC GEN HOT
P/J1 OVT
27

E
INTERPOLES 20 DC BUS

DASH 8 Q400
B
CAUTION & WARNING
H PANEL
D
31-61-00
A
FIELD O/H CONSOLE
F LC/BKR CONS.
G
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

10K
15 DC BUS FAIL
#1 DC GENERATOR VV 1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

2
W 5
E 13
C 831
COPLT SIDE CONS
A 1 2
AA 11
PWR NOT RDY T-
K- 12
K1
GENERATOR BUS
L TRU 54 CONTACTOR TIE

#1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL DC CONTACTOR BOX

UNIT (GCU) ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL UNIT (EPCU)
21-31-00

NOSE COMPARTMENT
O/H CONSOLE

L TRU 21
3312-PU3
L TRU HOT S 13 L TRU HOT
#1 DC GEN 33
TRANSFORMER CAUTION & WARNING
RECTIFYING UNIT (TRU) PANEL
31-61-00

Figure 24-51.  Operation - CAWP Indications

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-51. Operation - CAWP Fault Diagnostics:

Indications.
Refer to Figure 24-52. Fault Codes - DC
For DC generator, TRU, and DC bus caution Generation and Distributing System.
lights, the main 28 VDC generation system has
the interfaces that follow: The highlighted fault codes 01, 02, 04, 05, 06,
07, 10, 11, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 30, 31, 35,
•• An overheat [OVT] signal is supplied 36 are associated with the DC generation and
by No.1 DC GENERATOR to the distributing systems.
CAWP to make the No.1 DC GEN HOT
caution light illuminate Troubleshooting:
•• A [L TRU HOT] signal is supplied by
During engine ground run with both DC
the L TRU to the CAWP to make the L
generators on line, the DC BUS, No.2 DC
TRU HOT caution light illuminate
GEN, MAIN BATT caution lights and Master
•• A [PWR NOT RDY] is supplied by Caution light illuminated.
No.1 DC GCU or a signal from the K1
GENERATOR L BUS CONTACTOR 1. Which unit was the first to detect this fault?
to the CAWP to make the No.1 DC
2. What fault code(s) will you expect to find
GEN caution light illuminate
on the EPCU?
•• A [L TRU] signal is supplied by the
3. What steps will you take to pinpoint the
EPCU to the CAWP to make the L TRU
bus fault?
caution light illuminate
•• A [DC BUS] output is supplied by No.1
DC GCU to the CAWP to make the L
DC BUS caution light illuminate.

Code Fault Aribuon Code Fault Aribuon

01 #1 DC FEEDER 19 K21 (DC) FAIL
02 #2 DC FEEDER 20 K22 (DC) FAIL
03 APU DC FEEDER 21 K24 (DC) FAIL

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

04 #1 DC GCU 22 K26 (DC) FAIL OPEN
05 #1 DC GEN 23 K3 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
24 K4 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
06 #2 DC GCU
25 #1 AC GEN FEEDER
07 #2 DC GEN
26 #2 AC GEN FEEDER
08 APU DC GCU
27 #1 AC GCU FAIL
09 APU DC GEN
28 #2 AC GCU FAIL
10 K1 FAIL OPEN
29 EPCU-K25 DRV FAIL
11 K2 FAIL OPEN
30 EPCU-K5 DRV FAIL
12 K3 (DC) FAIL
31 EPCU-K6 DRV FAIL
13 K4 (DC) FAIL 32 EPCU-K7 DRV FAIL
14 K5 (DC) FAIL OPEN 33 EPCU-K8 DRV FAIL
15 K5 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 34 EPCU-K9 DRV FAIL
16 K6 (DC) FAIL OPEN 35 EPCU-K21 DRV FAIL
17 K6 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 36 EPCU-K22 DRV FAIL
18 K9 (DC) FAIL 37 DC EP OVERVOLTAGE

Figure 24-52.  Fault Codes - DC Generation and Distributing System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-107

24-108 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

APU CONTROL
GEN

ON

WARN

APU
DC GCU

K22

LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS

DASH 8 Q400
APU
FUSE DC GEN

EPCU F2

K6
K26
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K5

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
S3 S4
K25 K8

CR21 CR20
K7

BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY

CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS

CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4
K24

BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg37a02a.cgm

Figure 24-53.  APU 28 VDC Generation System Block Diagram - Control

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-33-00 APU 28 VDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

GENERATION SYSTEM The APU 28 VDC generation system operates
when the conditions are as follows:
INTRODUCTION •• APU is operating
The APU 28 VDC generation system supplies •• DC External power is not set
28 VDC electrical power to the main 28 VDC
•• G E N s w i t c h l i g h t o n t h e A P U
generation system.
CONTROL panel is set.
GENERAL The APU DC generator is monitored by the
APU DC GCU to automatically control the
Refer to Figure 24-53. APU 28 VDC Generation operation of the line contactor. If a fault is
System Block Diagram - Control. sensed, the contactor is opened automatically.
Also, this condition causes the EPCU to
The APU DC generator supplies 28 VDC automatically open and close other contactors
electrical power through a contactor to the right to reconfigure the system. The fault is isolated
DC electrical load distribution system. from the remaining part of the APU 28 VDC
generation system to give continued operation.
The APU DC GCU regulates its generator’s
output voltage and controls the line contactor. The APU 28 VDC generation system has
protective functions to prevent damage to the APU
The APU 28 VDC generation system also has DC generator and batteries when there is a fault.
DC current transformers in the DC contactor
box and below the floor in the aft baggage The APU 28 VDC generation system
compartment to measure DC current for control. continuously monitors for the fault conditions
that follow:
The switchlights on the APU control panel give
manual control of the APU generation system. •• Source
The APU 28 VDC generation system has the •• Bus.
units that follow:

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The source and bus faults are isolated. The
•• APU DC generator part of the system that continues to operate is
automatically reconfigured to give continued
•• APU DC GCU operation.
•• QAD adapter
The APU 28 VDC generation system has
•• APU relay box passive protection and active protection.
•• APU DC current transformer
Circuit breakers give passive protection.
•• APU current shunt
•• APU control panel The DC GCUs and EPCU control the DC
starter-generator line contactors and other
The MFD ELECTRICAL system page and contactors for active protection.
the CAWP show the APU 28 VDC generation
system indications. The APU 28 VDC generation system also uses
the EPCU for Continuous Built In Test (CBIT).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-109

24-110 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

APU CONTROL
GEN

ON

WARN

APU
DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
K22

LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS APU

FUSE DC GEN

EPCU F2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K6
K26

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
S3 S4
K25 K8

CR21 CR20
K7

BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY

CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS

CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4
K24

BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg37a03a.cgm

Figure 24-54.  APU Mode of Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-54. APU Mode of Operation. NOTES

During the APU mode of operation, the
APU DC GCU closes the APU DC generator
line contactor, K26 to connect the APU DC
generator the right main feeder bus.

The EPCU closes the contactors that follow:

•• Main bus tie contactor, K21

•• Main-secondary bus tie contactors, K5
and K6

The secondary bus tie contactor, K22 stays open.

DC electrical power is supplied from the right

main bus through K21 to the left main feeder
bus and through K5 and K6 to the right and left
secondary feeder buses.

DC power is provided directly from the main

and secondary feeder buses to the distribution
buses in the flight compartment.

DC electrical power is supplied from the left

main distribution bus through isolation diode
CR3 to the left essential bus and from the
right main distribution bus through isolation
diode CR2 to the right essential bus. The two
essential buses are connected together through
two circuit breakers.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

If an APU DC generator fault is sensed by
the APU DC GCU, the APU DC generator is
de-energized and the related APU DC generator
line contactor, K26, is opened to disconnect the
APU DC generator from the bus.

This fault is also sensed by the EPCU. It then

opens the main bus tie contactor, K21 and the
two main-secondary bus ties contactors, K5
and K6, to de-energize the left and right main
feeder buses and left and right secondary buses.

The APU DC GCU also causes the WARN caution

light on the APU CONTROL panel to illuminate.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-111

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

D
FW
A

A APU
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

D
FW

B
fs890a01.cgm

Figure 24-55.  EIS Main 28 VDC Generation System Indications

24-112 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION •• Always use the socket wrench to

remove or install the terminal nuts on
APU Starter-Generator the terminal block.

Refer to Figure 24-55. EIS Main 28 VDC NOTE

Generation System Indications.
If you use a standard wrench,
it may cause damage to the
The APU starter-generator is attached to
terminal block separators
the APU accessory gearbox with a quick
and this will result in denied
disconnect “V” clamp around the quick attach/
warranty claims.
detach housing and the APU starter-generator
mounting flange.

The engine and APU and DC starter-generators

have similar construction but use different
brushes because of the amount of cooling
supplied and operating altitude.

For a description of the APU starter-generator,

see DC starter-generators.

APU Generator Maintenance

Practices
To improve APU DC Generator reliability:

•• Make sure that the new QAD adaptor

with an oil drain is installed as per
SB84-49-06
•• Make sure that the APU DC generator
system exhaust color is not brown or black.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOTE
The brown color of the DC
generator exhaust indicates
excessive bearing wear and the
black color indicates excessive
carbon wear. A black oil residue
on the APU DC generator system
indicates that the APU Garloc
seal has failed.

•• When you replace the APU generator,

make sure that there are no oil leaks
from the APU generator adaptor.
•• If an oil leak is detected, replace the
APU Garloc seals.
•• Clean the QAD adaptor and make sure
that the oil drain is not plugged.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-113

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

APU DC Generator Control Unit

(GCU)
Refer to Figure 24-56. APU DC Generator
Control Unit.

The APU DC GCU is installed in the center of

the aircraft under the fuselage floor.

The DC GCU and APU DC GCU are the same.

For a description of the APU DC GCU, see B

DC GCU.

FWD

A APU GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT

A INSTALLATION
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOTE
The APU GCU is interchangeable
with the engine GCU.

Figure 24-56.  APU DC Generator Control Unit

24-114 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

QAD Adapter The QAD adapter for the APU and quick
attach/detach housing for the engines have
Refer to Figure 24-57. QAD Adapter. similar construction.

The quick attach/detach (QAD) adapter is

attached to mounting studs on the APU.

On aircraft with SB84-49-06, a drain tube is

connected to the QAD adapter.

QAD Adapter B

FWD

DC Starter/generator

QAD Adapter

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Bracket
Assembly

Drain Adapter
cg0283a01.dg, sb, sep01/2008

Assembly Gasket

Drain Tube

B Post SB 84-49-06

Figure 24-57.  QAD Adapter

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-115

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

APU Current Transformer

Refer to Figure 24-58. APU Current
Transformer (CT).

Two DC CTs are used in the APU 28 VDC

generation system with one unit located at the
APU DC generator output and the other located
close to the negative feeder cable grounding
connection. The CTs are used to monitor the APU
DC generator power feeder cables. They monitor
the APU DC generator current in the DCCB. The
sensed current is summed to cancel each other out
when a feeder fault is not present by the APU DC
GCUs. An APU CT is installed in the aft baggage
compartment below the floor.

A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

A APU CURRENT TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION

UP

FW
D

B
fsq53a01.cgm

Figure 24-58.  APU Current Transformer (CT)

24-116 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

APU Current Shunt

Refer to Figure 24-59. APU Current Shunt.

The APU current shunts supply output current

data from the APU DC generator to the EPCU
for indication. The negative terminal of the
APU DC generator is connected through a
separate current shunt to the airframe. A 400
amp current shunt is installed in the aft baggage
compartment for the APU starter-generator.

For a description of the APU current shunt, see

24-31-00 Current Shunt.

A APU SHUNT INSTALLATION

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

A

UP

FW
D

B
fsq54a01.cgm

Figure 24-59.  APU Current Shunt

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-117

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS The WARN caution light will also come on for
conditions that are not malfunctions as follows:
Refer to Figure 24-60. APU Generation System
- APU Control Panel. •• The ON/WARN switchlight is not set
•• External DC power is energizing the
The APU CONTROL panel has the GEN right main feeder bus.
control for the APU 28 VDC generation system.

The APU starter-generator is connected to the NOTE

DC buses when the conditions are as follows: The WARN caution light will
not illuminate if the PWR switch
•• APU is operating is not set.
•• EXT PWR toggle switch power is not
set The GEN OHT caution light on the APU control
panel illuminates when the APU DC starter-
•• GEN switchlight is pushed. generator temperature is more than 166°C (330°F).
The GEN switchlight is set to the off position The PWR FAIL caution light on the APU
to reset the related APU DC GCU. CONTROL panel and the APU caution light on the
CAWP also illuminates, and the APU shuts down.
The GEN ON light on the APU CONTROL
panel illuminates when the generator is
connected to the right main feeder bus. The NOTE
APU contactor K26 has connected the APU The FAIL caution light on the APU
generator to the right main feeder bus. CONTROL panel and the APU
caution light on the CAWP will
The WARN caution light in the APU control panel not illuminate if the PWR push-
illuminates when contactor K26 does not connect button is not set, except when the
the generator to the right main feeder bus. fire protection control amplifier has
calculated an APU shutdown.
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

fs733a03.cgm A

Figure 24-60.  APU Generation System - APU Control Panel

24-118 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-61. EIS, APU 28 VDC The numbers for the digital display of the APU
Generation System Indications. generator load change from .00 to +1.99 in 0.01
power unit increments. A + symbol before the
The MFD ELECTRICAL system page has a numbers shows an overload condition. The
digital display of the APU load. numbers relate to the APU generator load as a
percentage of the maximum rate.
The digital display of the APU load in a white
box gives an accurate APU generator load If there is an open or short circuit between the
value. An APU GEN label, in white, identifies APU current shunt and the EPCU, the digital
the APU generator load indicator. A LOAD display of the APU generator load indicator
unit is also shown in blue with the indication. will show .00.

MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRICAL

˚ .17 116 .16

MAIN .01
AUX .01 115 .16
S TB Y .01 115 .14

.00 .00

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

ESS 6 6 115 .19
MAIN 4 4 116 .19
SEC 4 4 .23 .23 115 .18

PSI x 1000

fsq49a01.cgm

Figure 24-61.  EIS, APU 28 VDC Generation System Indications

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-119

24-120 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

107 GEN OHT APU 107 U- APU D

X APU GEN START

APU RELAY PNL

APU GEN START

66 GEN ON APU 76
65 GEN WRN APU 75

DASH 8 Q400
GEN OHT

ACU

F S

D A A A

-28 V DC
ON
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

C G G B
G N -
F P J/P3
M C Z
D A A A C-

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K Y-
WARN U/F CENTER FUSE

GENERATOR S2 N G
GG GEN CONT E
P N- GEN OUT CON CNTR Y- INTERPOLES

RIGHT MAIN BUS

L K GEN RST PU COIL H
M- GEN ON
A2 N GEN PWR OUT
R P- FF ESS BUS PWR START CONT B
N
A1 FIELD D C840
K-
-A 10A
GEN S2
C842
10K
APU CONTROL PANEL K8 APU RELAY APU GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT (GCU) F 5A +28 V DC
(O/H CONSOLE RH SIDE) PANEL
+ 2
T10
APU DC
GENERATOR 1
+28 V DC X1 X2
RTL R
24 49-CR6 E-
CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
B CTS
APU FADEC X- 11 12 D

T
S 3 N
S-
(N7) 1 M S
28 V DC APU GEN EXCITE
F- A2 A1 14
ESS BUS 10A
R X1
CR17 15 6 X
RIGHT DC CBP
T- X2
K26 APU BUS
CONTACTOR
RELAY R13 P
W

DC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-62.  Operation - APU Generation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION (APU GEN EXCITE) of the R ESS BUS to

[ESS BUS PWR] of the APU GENERATOR
Refer to Figure 24-62. Operation - APU CONTROL UNIT to energize the APU GCU.
Generation.
For control and monitor of the line contactors,
The APU generation system has the interfaces the main 28 VDC generation system has the
for the functions that follow: interfaces that follow:

•• Voltage regulation •• A [CON CNTR APU COIL] signal from

the APU GENERATOR CONTROL
•• Control and monitor (continuous built UNIT is supplied to the K26 APU BUS
in test) of the line contactors CONTACTOR to energize its coil
•• Protective functions for the APU DC •• The [K26 STATUS] is supplied back
starter-generator through an auxiliary contact of K26 to
•• Load and bus voltage indication on the the ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL
MFD ELECTRICAL system page UNIT (EPCU) for CBIT
•• Control of the caution lights in the CAWP. •• 28 VDC is supplied from the + output
of the APU DC GENERATOR
For regulation, the APU generation system has •• The 28 VDC is supplied through K26
the interfaces that follow: APU BUS CONTACTOR to the RIGHT
MAIN (FEEDER) BUS.
•• 28 VDC [RTL] ready to load electrical
power is supplied from the APU For APU CONTROL panel indications, the
FADEC through diode CR6 to the coil APU DC generation system has the interfaces
of K8 in the APU RELAY PANEL that follow:
when the APU is in RUN mode
•• A ground signal is supplied through • • An APU DC GENERATOR overheat
the GEN switchlights on the APU signal is supplied by APU DC
CONTROL PANEL to the coil of K8 in GENERATOR, through the APU
the APU RELAY PANEL to energize it RELAY PNL, and ACU to the APU
CONTROL PANEL to make the GEN
•• 28 VDC [CONTR PWR OUT] from the

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

OHT caution light illuminate
No.1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT is supplied through contacts of • • 28 VDC [RTL] ready to load electrical
K8 back to the No.1 DC GENERATOR power is also supplied from the APU
CONTROL UNIT for generator control FADEC through auxiliary contacts
[GEN CONT] of K26 APU BUS CONTACTOR,
and ACU to the APU CONTROL
•• A generator output [GEN OUT] signal PANEL to make the ON or WARN
is also supplied through contacts of K8 light illuminate.
and back for generator on [GEN ON]
•• If the GEN toggle switch is set to the
OFF position, the generator output
[GEN OUT] is supplied back for
generator reset [GEN RESET].

28 VDC [START CONTROL] is supplied

from the APU GCU to RELAY 13 in the DC
CONTACTOR BOX to energize the relay to
supply 28 VDC through circuit breaker N7

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-121

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Code Fault Aribuon Code Fault Aribuon

01 #1 DC FEEDER 19 K21 (DC) FAIL
02 #2 DC FEEDER 20 K22 (DC) FAIL
03 APU DC FEEDER 21 K24 (DC) FAIL
04 #1 DC GCU 22 K26 (DC) FAIL OPEN
05 #1 DC GEN 23 K3 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
24 K4 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
06 #2 DC GCU
25 #1 AC GEN FEEDER
07 #2 DC GEN
26 #2 AC GEN FEEDER
08 APU DC GCU
27 #1 AC GCU FAIL
09 APU DC GEN
28 #2 AC GCU FAIL
10 K1 FAIL OPEN
29 EPCU-K25 DRV FAIL
11 K2 FAIL OPEN
30 EPCU-K5 DRV FAIL
12 K3 (DC) FAIL
31 EPCU-K6 DRV FAIL
13 K4 (DC) FAIL 32 EPCU-K7 DRV FAIL
14 K5 (DC) FAIL OPEN 33 EPCU-K8 DRV FAIL
15 K5 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 34 EPCU-K9 DRV FAIL
16 K6 (DC) FAIL OPEN 35 EPCU-K21 DRV FAIL
17 K6 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 36 EPCU-K22 DRV FAIL
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

18 K9 (DC) FAIL 37 DC EP OVERVOLTAGE

Figure 24-63.  Fault Codes - APU DC Generating System

24-122 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Operational Check of the APU 28 NOTES

VDC Generating System
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

This procedure verifies the APU DC generator

can provide electrical power to all DC buses
and contactors K26, 21, K5, K6 are operating
correctly.

•• Start the APU and ensure no external

power is connected to the aircraft
•• Push the GEN switchlight and ensure
the GEN WARN light goes off and the
green GEN ON light illuminates
•• Check the electrical system page that
the L & R ESS, MAIN and SEC buses
are 28±2 VDC
•• Verify the APU GEN load is not more
than 1.00.

Fault Diagnostics:

Refer to Figure 24-63. Fault Codes - APU DC

Generating System.

The highlighted fault codes 03, 08, 09, 22 are

associated with the APU DC generating system.

Troubleshooting:

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The aircraft is powered by the APU DC
generator. You noticed the GEN HOT light
on the APU Control panel was illuminated.

1. What maintenance actions will you take?

2. Do you expect relevant fault code(s)
recorded on the EPCU?
3. Is it possible that the APU remains on line
with the GEN HOT light?

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-123

24-124 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg37a01a.cgm

Figure 24-64.  DC External Power System Block Diagram - Control

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-42-00 DC EXTERNAL NOTES

POWER SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The DC external power system supplies 28
VDC electrical power to the main 28 VDC
generation system.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 24-64. DC External Power
System Block Diagram - Control.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied through a

DC external power receptacle to let an external
power source energize the main 28 VDC
generation system when the aircraft is on the
ground and the engines are not operating.

DC external power supplies 28 VDC electrical

power through a line contactor to the left DC
electrical load distribution systems.

The EPCU controls the line contactor.

The toggle switches on the DC CONTROL

panel give manual control of the DC external
power system.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-125

24-126 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS APU CONTROL

OFF OFF
GEN

GEN 1 35 35
OFF OFF OFF GEN 2 ON

L TRU R TRU WARN

STBY AUX MAIN
L DC GCU 115VAC VAR FREQ BATT BATT BATT 115VAC VAR FREQ
R DC GCU

OFF OFF OFF

APU
GEN 1 DC GCU

DASH 8 Q400
MAIN BUS BUS FAULT EXT GEN 2
TIE RESET PWR
L TRU R TRU
APU
DC GEN
LEFT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS RIGHT SECONDARY FEEDER BUS
K22
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

K1 EPCU K6
K2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K26

K5

PSEU

LEFT MAIN FEEDER BUS RIGHT MAIN FEEDER BUS

K21
CR6
HOT AUX BATTERY BUS HOT MAIN BATTERY BUS
K25 S3 S4 K8

K7 CR21 CR20

K9 BATTERY POWER BUS

STANDBY
BATTERY EXTERNAL DC
RECEPTACLE
CR8 BATTERY POWER BUS
CR19 OFF MAIN BATTERY
K3 AUX BATTERY K4

K24
BATTERY
MASTER CR4
CR5
LEFT ESSENTIAL BUS RIGHT ESSENTIAL BUS

CR3 CR2

LEFT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT MAIN DISTRIBUTION BUS

LEFT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS RIGHT SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BUS

fsg40a01a.cgm

Figure 24-65.  DC External Power Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If a DC external power fault is sensed by the

EPCU, the DC external power contactor K9, is
Refer to Figure 24-65. DC External Power opened to disconnect the DC external power
Operation. from the bus.

The DC external power operates when the The EPCU also opens the main bus tie K21 and
conditions are as follows: the two main-secondary bus ties K5 and K6 to
de-energize the left and right main feeder buses
•• BATTERY MASTER toggle switch is and left and right secondary buses.
set to energize the EPCU
•• DC external power is set.

External power contactor K9 is energized by

the EPCU and DC starter-generator contactors
K1 and K2 are prevented from operating as
well as APU contactor K26.

The DC external system has protective

functions to prevent damage to the system.

The DC external power is continuously

monitored for the fault conditions that follow:

•• Correct polarity
•• Over voltage
•• Under voltage.

The faults are isolated to give continued

operation.

The DC external system uses the EPCU for

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

CBIT.

During the DC external mode of operation, the

EPCU closes the contactors that follow:

•• DC external contactor, K9
•• Main bus tie K21
•• Main-secondary bus ties contactors,
K5and K6.
The secondary bus tie K22 stays open.

DC electrical power is supplied from the left

main bus through the K21 to the right main
feeder bus and through K5 and K6 to the right
and left secondary feeder buses.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-127

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
DC External Power Receptacle
Refer to Figure 24-66. DC External Power
Receptacle.

The DC external power receptacle is located in

the left nose fuselage.

The DC external power receptacle is a high

power electrical connector. The unit has two
large gauge pins to carry the DC current and
one smaller pin for interface control.

FWD
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

A GROUND POWER DOOR

FW
D

fsf68a01.cgm

Figure 24-66.  DC External Power Receptacle

24-128 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS The DC external power is connected to the DC

buses when:
Refer to Figure 24-67. External Power System
- DC Control Panel. •• Good external DC power is connected
to the aircraft
The DC CONTROL panel has the EXT PWR •• The BATTERY MASTER toggle switch
control for the DC external power system. on the DC CONTROL panel is set
•• The EXT PWR toggle switch on the AC
CONTROL panel is set.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

MAIN

TIE

fsg63a02.cgm

Figure 24-67.  External Power System - DC Control Panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-129

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRICAL

MAIN 00
AUX 00
STBY 00

ESS
MAIN
SEC
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

PSI x 1000

A fsf83a01.cgm

Figure 24-68.  EIS DC External Power Indications

24-130 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DC External Power Indications NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-68. EIS DC External Power
Indications.

The MFD ELECTRICAL system page has a

DC external power message.

The EIS ELECTRICAL systems page shows a

DC EXT PWR ON message when the:

•• DC external power voltage is more than

22 VDC and less than 31 VDC
•• DC EXT PWR toggle switch is set
•• DC external power is energizing the left
and right buses.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-131

24-132 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FWD FUSELAGE-LH SIDE

POS
NEG
+

DASH 8 Q400
DC EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

LC/BKR CONS

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

L MAIN
FEED
INHIBIT V 48 INHIBIT K9 STATUS 60 BUS
G- 10 3
T9 2 1
F 12 11 2
#1 DC GENERATOR CONTROL K21
UNIT (GCU) K9 DC EXTERNAL
POWER CONTACTOR
K9 DRIVE 36 1

OFF S8 58 EPDC CHARGE RTN R MAIN

70 EPDC CHARGE FEED
BUS
EXT PWR 2 3
28
ON 14 55 DC EP SW
EXT PWR
CB29
EP SENSE 46 F-
EP SENSE RTN 47

DC CONTROL PANEL
(O/H CONSOLE-LH SIDE) ELECTRICAL POWER DC CONTACTOR BOX
CONTROL UNIT (EPCU) 24-31-00
24-31-00
24-31-00

Figure 24-69.  DC External Power System Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION Connect DC External Power to

the Aircraft
Refer to Figure 24-69. DC External Power
System Schematic. Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
The DC external system has the interfaces that
follow: The procedure describes the steps to connect DC
external power to the aircraft.
•• Control and monitor of the external
power contactors •• Make sure the aircraft is grounded
•• Inhibit of the K1 and K2 DC/starter- CAUTION
generator contactors and K26 APU
contactor. Set the external power source current
limit to a minimum of 1500 amps
For control and monitor of the DC external and maintain the aircraft main bus
power contactors, the DC external power voltage at 28 VDC for dry motoring
system has the conditions that follow: or engine starts.
•• A ground signal is supplied through Monitor the external DC power
the EXT PWR toggle switch on the source at all times. If the external
DC CONTROL PANEL to the [DC EP DC power source goes off line, this
SW] of the ELECTRICAL POWER will decrease the battery power.
CONTROL UNIT (EPCU) to control K9 Monitor the temperature of the
DC EXTERNAL POWER CONTACTOR batteries during battery charging.
•• The DC external power is supplied If you do not do this, you can
through circuit breaker CB29 in the cause damage to the batteries.
DC CONTACTOR BOX TO the [EP
SENSE] of the EPCU for monitoring •• For aircraft general maintenance, it is
acceptable to use a lower current limit
•• A [K9 DRIVE] signal from the EPCU setting on the external ground power unit
is supplied to the K9 DC EXTERNAL
POWER CONTACTOR to energize its coil •• Set the BATTERY MASTER, MAIN,

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

AUX and STBY switches to the ON
•• The [K9 STATUS] is supplied back position
through an auxiliary contact of K9 to
the ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL •• Set the DC external power switch to the
UNIT (EPCU) for CBIT EXT PWR position.
•• An [INHIBIT] signal is supplied from NOTE
the EPCU to the No.1, No.2 and APU
GCU to prevent operation of their The DC EXT PWR on advisory
contactors message will appear on the MFD’s
electrical page and will stay on if
•• 28 VDC is supplied from the POS of the the external DC power source goes
DC EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE off line.
through K9 DC EXTERNAL
If the battery master switch is on, the
•• POWER CONTACTOR to the L MAIN aircraft will remain energized with
FEEDER BUS battery power.
•• [ E P D C ] a n d [ E P D C R T N ] o f t h e
EPCU are connected together in pin •• On the electrical system page, make sure
programming for charging of the that all six DC buses show 28±2 VDC.
batteries with external power.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-133

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Code Fault Aribuon Code Fault Aribuon

01 #1 DC FEEDER 19 K21 (DC) FAIL
02 #2 DC FEEDER 20 K22 (DC) FAIL
03 APU DC FEEDER 21 K24 (DC) FAIL
04 #1 DC GCU 22 K26 (DC) FAIL OPEN
05 #1 DC GEN 23 K3 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
24 K4 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
06 #2 DC GCU
25 #1 AC GEN FEEDER
07 #2 DC GEN
26 #2 AC GEN FEEDER
08 APU DC GCU
27 #1 AC GCU FAIL
09 APU DC GEN
28 #2 AC GCU FAIL
10 K1 FAIL OPEN
29 EPCU-K25 DRV FAIL
11 K2 FAIL OPEN
30 EPCU-K5 DRV FAIL
12 K3 (DC) FAIL
31 EPCU-K6 DRV FAIL
13 K4 (DC) FAIL 32 EPCU-K7 DRV FAIL
14 K5 (DC) FAIL OPEN 33 EPCU-K8 DRV FAIL
15 K5 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 34 EPCU-K9 DRV FAIL
16 K6 (DC) FAIL OPEN 35 EPCU-K21 DRV FAIL
17 K6 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 36 EPCU-K22 DRV FAIL
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

18 K9 (DC) FAIL 37 DC EP OVERVOLTAGE

Figure 24-70.  Fault Codes - DC External Power System

24-134 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Remove DC External Power from NOTES

the Aircraft
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

•• Set the DC external power switch on the

DC CONTROL panel to the OFF position.
•• Set the BATTERY MASTER, MAIN,
AUX and STBY switches to the OFF
position.
•• Stop the DC external power unit.

CAUTION
If you do not do this before
disconnecting the cable, there
can be electrical damage to the
external power receptacle and
the cable assembly.

Fault Diagnostics:

Refer to Figure 24-70. Fault Codes - DC

External Power System.

The highlighted fault codes 18, 34, 37 are

associated with the DC external power system.

Troubleshooting:

You selected the DC external power switch to EXT

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

PWR position and the DC EXT PWR ON message
was not displayed on the Electrical System page.

1. What maintenance actions will you take?

2. On checking the EPCU, you also noticed
fault code 34 was present, what is the
difference between codes 19 and 34?

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-135

24-136 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

GEN GEN
1 2

DC
LEFT AUX MAIN APU RIGHT STBY
EXT
TRU BATT BATT GEN TRU BATT
PWR

DASH 8 Q400
DC CONTACTOR BOX
K9 K1 K7 K3 K4 K8 K2 K26

HOT AUX BATT HOT MAIN BATT

STANDBY
K21 CONTACTOR BOX
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

LEFT SEC FEED BUS LEFT MAIN FEED BUS RIGHT MAIN FEED BUS RIGHT SEC FEED BUS
K5 K6
CR8

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

K25 K24 K23

K22
CR6

AUX MAIN
BATT BATT
S3 S4
CR5 CR4 DC
HYD
STBY
CR3 CR2

CR21 CR20

PWR BATT
CR19
LEFT SEC DIST BUS LEFT MAIN DIST BUS LEFT ESS BUS RIGHT ESS BUS RIGHT MAIN DIST BUS RIGHT SEC DIST BUS BATTERTY POWER BUS

LEFT CB RIGHT CB
PANEL VOLT PWR PWR VOLT PANEL
IND MON MON IND
fsh70a01a.cgm
LEFT MAIN DIST BUS LEFT ESS DIST BUS RIGHT ESS DIST BUS RIGHT MAIN DIST BUS

AVIONICS CB PANEL

Figure 24-71.  DC Electrical Load Distribution

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-60-00 DC ELECTRICAL NOTES

LOAD DISTRIBUTION
INTRODUCTION
28 VDC electrical power is distributed through the
circuit breaker panels in the flight compartment to
services. Some distribution is done at the standby
battery and DC contactor boxes.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 24-71. DC Electrical Load
Distribution.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied through

circuit breakers in the DC contactor box to the
left and right 28 VDC circuit breaker panels.
The left and right 28 VDC circuit breaker
panels supply power to the avionics circuit
breaker panel.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied through

circuit breakers in the standby contactor box to
the left and right 28 VDC circuit breaker panel
and main hydraulic system No.3.

The DC electrical load distribution systems

are the:

•• 28 VDC circuit breaker panels

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• 28 VDC avionics circuit breaker panel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-137

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

L MAIN L ESSENTIAL L SECONDARY

L ESS DC PWR L MAIN
BUS 1 MON BUS TIE INPUT 1 INPUT 2 L SEC INPUT

10 50 5 50 50 50 STBY 50 50 50 50
L MAIN INPUT BATT
PROP
AVIONIC FEEDERS AUX BATT ENG 1 75 VOLT O/SPD
75 75 75 75
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OIL CLG IND TEST

9 20 20 20 50 50 5 5 3

AIRFRAME DEICE
HYD
VOLT L ESS AIL TRIM RIGHT DC GEN 1 AUX BATT BUS FAULT PRESS
AVIONIC FEEDERS PRESS V/HTR V/HTR CV/DRAIN
IND BUS 2 IND 1 ACT IND BUS TIE EXCITE CONT RESET SW IND 1 #1 & #2 #5 HTRS

8 20 20 20 5 50 5 5 5 5 10 5 5 5 3 3 5

FIRE DET FLAPS DR SEAL PLT PLT

DE-ICE ECS/BA CONT AC GEN RUD SYS RUD TRIM HYD SYS ENG 1 FLAPS POS CV HTR WS/HT W/S
CONT L AUTO R MAN CONT 1 ISOL ACT IND CONT VLV IND IND CONT IND L RESTRICT CONT WIPER

7 1 5 5 5 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 3 1 10

NLG LDG GEAR LDG GEAR PROP

FAN 1 FAN 3 STEER ALT WOW 2 WOW 2 ALT ENG PROP 1 PROP 2 DE-ICE FAN 1 INTK DEF MAINT
PWR PRI PWR SEC CONT 1 DLK IND + CONT + CONT DLK IND START PEC A PEC B CONT PWR SEC ACT 1 PNL

6 20 20 3 3 712 712 3 5 5 5 3 20 5 10

CABIN
ENG PROP 1 BETA ENG 1 ENG 2 PRESS DE-ICE
MONITOR LTS SOL ECIU A IGN A IGN A MAN CONT

5 3 3 3 3 712 712 3 1

PITCH STBY
CABIN PRESS TRIM TRM FEEL ENG 1 ENG 2 FUEL REFUEL PROP 2 HYD PRESS PROP 2
AUTO CONT ACARS EQAR IND ACT 1 ACT 1 FADEC A FADEC A HLCU DEFUEL ALT FEATH IND 1 AUX PMP

4 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 3 5 50
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

PANEL LIGHTS EMERGENCY PASS

O/H GLARE PLT PLT LIGHTS ADVSY EMER WARN L ESS CARGO APU FUEL FCS FLT ATT
CONS SHIELD FLT MAP LTS RELAY LTS LTS SIGNS BAT BUS IND SOV/IND ECU 1 SEAT HTRS

3 5 5 5 5 5 712 5 712 15 5 5 5

CABIN
EXT LIGHTS PITOT WRB & SIDE WALL LTS
TAXI TAXI LDG L AIR VHF ARCDU PILOT STATIC BAGGAGE FLT ATT FLT COMP
PWR CONT CONT 1 FLARE STAIR NAV 1 1 AUDIO ISOL VLV LT ADV SIGNS DOME LTS PWR 1 CONT LAVATORY

2 10 5 5 25 5 2 3 2 2 5 5 5 20 5 712

PASS BATTERY POWER EXT LTS

STORM/PLT
BRIEFING AIRSTAIR STBY STBY STBY VHF COM APPR L WING ATT RDG MEDICAL
CB PNL
PWR DOOR SOV CMPS ALT ATT 1 STBY LTS L PWR INSP LTS OUTLET

1 1 1 1 1 3 10 1 5 25 5 5

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S

fsf74a01.cgm

Figure 24-72.  Left 28 VDC Circuit Breaker Panels

24-138 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION

The 28 VDC circuit breaker panel identifies the Do not let the circuit breaker
buses and circuit breakers. panel touch the adjacent side
window. When you install the
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION circuit breaker panel, it is easy to
put a scratch in the side window.
28 VDC Circuit Breaker Panels This will cause damage to the
side window.
Refer to:

•• Figure 24-72. Left 28 VDC Circuit

Breaker Panels.
•• Figure 24-73. Right 28 VDC Circuit
Breaker Panels.

The left and right 28 VDC circuit breaker panel

is installed in the flight compartment on the left
and right side of the pilot’s and co-pilot’s seats.

R SECONDARY R ESSENTIAL R MAIN

R MAIN DC MN BATT R ESS
R SEC INPUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 PWR MON BUS TIE INPUT 1 INPUT 2 BUS 1

10 50 50 50 50 50 50 5 50 50 50 50
STBY R MAIN INPUT

VOLT ENG 2 SEC LEFT COOLING FAN 2 75 R ESS 75 75 75 75

IND OIL CLG AVIONIC FEEDERS BUS TIE BUS TIE FAN CONT PWR SEC BUS 2
BATT
9 5 5 20 20 5 5 1 20 50

AIRFRAME DEICE DC BUS DC HYD

AUTO CV DRN V/HTR V/HTR TIE GEN 2 BATT CONT PWR PRESS VOLT
DIST VLV HTRS #2 & #4 #6 CONT EXCITE STBY MAIN XFER IND 2 IND AVIONIC FEEDERS

8 5 5 3 3 5 10 5 5 5 5 5 20 20 20

ENG 2 FLAP FIRE DET AIRFRAME PITOT HYD

LOGO LIGHTS MAIN OIL POSN APU ENG 2 ENG 2 MANUAL HTR SYS 3 APU
PRESS
FIRE

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

IND 2 LEFT RIGHT PRESS IND R IND VLV IND IND CONT STBY CONT GEN EXCITE CONTROL POWER

7 5 712 712 1 2 5 5 5 5 25 5 10 5 3 10

COPLT COPLT-WS CABIN INTAKE ROLL SPLRS LDG GEAR AFR

W/S PLT-MOD DUCT DEFLECT ARM PROP 1 PROP 2 FCS WOW 1 WOW 1 AC GEN ECS/BA CONT DE-ICE
WIPER HT CONT TEMP IND ACT 2 INBD OUTBD IND PEC B PEC A ECU 2 + IND + IND CONT 2 L MAN R AUTO BOOT LTS

6 10 1 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

PROP PLT NLG

DEICE PROP 2 BETA ENG 1 ENG 2 SMK DET WDO HT STEER ANTISKID DE-ICE
CONT 2 LTS SOL ECIU B IGN B IGN B LAV/CGO1 BAG/CGO2 RLY CONT 2 INBD OUTBD CONT

5 3 3 3 3 712 712 5 5 1 3 3 3 1

FUEL PITCH COPLT

PROP 1 XFER PROP 1 REFUEL TRM FEEL 2 ENG 1 ENG 2 CB PNL CAUT/WRN CAUT/WRN PROP STBY HYD FAN 2 FAN 3
AUX PMP PANEL ALT FEATH DEFUEL ACT 2 ACT 2 FADEC B FADEC B LTS LTS 1 LTS 2 BALANCE PMP 1 PWR PRI PWR PRI

4 50 1 3 5 3 3 5 5 5 712 712 5 20 20

BATTERY PWR PANEL LIGHTS

SEAT HTRS SHED GALLEY LAV AUDIBLE CLOCK CLOCK BATT CGO COPLT COPLT CTR CONS
FLT CREW ONTOR SYSTEM SYSTEM EVAC ALERT 1 2 BATTERY MASTER SW REFUEL VENT VLS MAP LTS FLT AFT FWD

3 712 5 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 10 3 5 5 5 5

NVS EXT LTS

PWR FIRE EXT/CONT AMP FUEL & FMU FUEL SOV APPR LDG ANTI CABIN LTS
1 2 3 CTRL 1 & 2 ENG CARGO ENG 1 ENG 2 ENG 1 ENG 2 POSN R PWR CONT 2 COLL CONT PWR 1

2 20 20 20 5 712 712 712 712 5 5 712 25 5 712 5 20

CABIN EXT LTS CABIN

SIDEWALL GALLEY R R WING HYD SOV BOARDING FLT COMP APU/CARGO EXT PWR PA EMER READING LTS LTS
LTS PWR 2 PWR FLARE INSP ENG 1 ENG 2 LTS DOME LTS MAN EXT LOGIC PWR L R PWR 2

1 20 20 25 5 712 712 5 5 712 5 10 20 20 20

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S

fsf75a01.cgm

Figure 24-73.  Right 28 VDC Circuit Breaker Panels

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-139

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AP
COPLT DISENG
ESID SPKR ANN 2

11 10 5 1

RIGHT
ESS AHRS AHRS COPLT ARCDU
2 2 CP AUDIO 2 ELT

10 5 5 2 2 1/2

AHRS AHRS PLT CLOCK FLT ATTD

1 1 CP SPKR 1 ANN

9 5 5 5 1 2

PA AP DISENG
AMP ANN 1
LEFT
8 ESS 712 1

GND CREW
ADU MFD ICP INPH ADV IOM/IOP FG CP
1 1 1 LT FGM 1 1

7 2 10 5 1 10 5

ADU MFD ICP VHF CLOCK IOM/IOP FG STICK

2 2 2 COM 2 2 FGM 2 CP 2 PUSHER

6 2 10 5 10 1 10 5 712

PFD EFIS VHF HF HF 2

2 ESID CP 2 NAV 2 SPM 2 SELCAL COM 2 AMP

5 RIGHT 10 10 5 2 5
MAIN
AHRS AHRS OBS PLT ARCDU DME ADF FMS MLS RAD ATC
1 1 CP AUDIO AUDIO 1 CVR 2 2 2 2 ALT 2 2

4 5 5 2 2 3 5 2 3 3 5

AHRS AHRS COPILOT ARCDU DME ADF FMS MLS RAD ATC ATC
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

2 2 CP AUDIO 2 YD AU FDR 1 1 1 1 ALT 1 1 ANT SW

3 5 5 2 3 712 1 2 3 5 3 5 1

PFD ESID EFIS AP AU ANS HF HF1

1 CP CP ROLL SPM 1 JACKS WX RDR COM 1 AMP

2 10 5 5 7 12 5 2 5
LEFT
MAIN
FLT ATTD
GPWS VHF AP AU STICK HANDSET
SYST ANN LDG/FLP COM 3 PITCH TCAS WX CP PUSHER PWR

1 5 1 1 7 12 5 1 7 12 2

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q

fsf76a01.cgm

Figure 24-74.  DC Avionics Circuit Breaker Panels

24-140 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

28 VDC Avionics Circuit Breaker NOTES

Panel
Refer to Figure 24-74. DC Avionics Circuit
Breaker Panels.

The DC avionics circuit breaker panel is

installed in the flight compartment above and
aft of the left 28 VDC circuit breaker panel.

CAUTION
Do not let the circuit breaker
panel touch the adjacent side
window. When you install the
circuit breaker panel, it is easy to
put a scratch in the side window.
This will cause damage to the
side window.

The DC avionics circuit breaker panel

gives distribution for the main 28 VDC
generation system.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-141

24-142 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

NOSE COMP.
C 827
88 5A

C 815 (A10) (A8)

L MAIN L MAIN INPUT AVIONIC FEEDER
FEEDER -A 75A 20A
BUS C 813
(B10) (B8)
L MAIN INPUT AVIONIC FEEDER
C 823 -B 75A 20A

DASH 8 Q400
C 817
-LL (C10) (C8)
C 825 L MAIN INPUT AVIONIC FEEDER
-A 75A 20A
3G C 819
(D10) (D8)
L MAIN INPUT VOLT IND
-B 75A 5A
BUS TIE
AVIONIC CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

(H10)
L ESS BUS
(L10) 50A
L ESS BUS 1 (J10)
50A L MAIN INPUT 1
50A

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

(K10)
(B8) L MAIN INPUT 2
C 811 (N10) L ESS BUS 2 CR3
50A 50A
L SEC L SEC INPUT
FEEDER C 50A
BUS
C 89 (P10)
L SEC INPUT
B 50A
C 87 (Q10)
L SEC INPUT
E 50A MAIN BUS
C 85 (R10)
L SEC INPUT
F 50A
C 857
C 81 AUX BATT (K9)
-A 15A
SEC BUS INPUT 2
C CR5 50A
50A (J9)
2 1
-M- 11 50A G
AUX BATT 50A
-K- 12 C 83
INPUT 1
K3 BATTERY BUS
(J3)
T7 CONTACTOR
15A
DC CONTACTOR BOX (NOSE
COMPARTMENT) CR19

1A
-EE INPUT 1 CR 20
-DD FF
OFF S4
MAIN BATT LL

-Y- ON INPUT 2 CR 21
-Z- JJ
S3 AA
AUX BATT
DC CONTROL PANEL
LEFT DC CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
(O/H CONSOLE-LH-SIDE)

Figure 24-75.  DC Electrical Load Distribution - Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTES
Refer to Figure 24-75. DC Electrical Load
Distribution - Operation.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied from the

left Main Feeder Bus through four 75A circuit
breakers on the DC contactor Box and left
DC circuit breaker panel to Main Distribution
Buses in the left DC circuit breaker panel.

The Main Distribution Buses in the left DC

circuit breaker panel supplies electrical power
through diode CR3 to the left Essential Bus
in the left DC circuit breaker panel. The left
Essential Bus is connected to the right Essential
Bus in the right DC circuit breaker panel
through circuit breaker H10, Bus Tie.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied through

the MAIN BATT and AUX BATT toggle
switches on the DC control panel and diodes
CR20 and CR21 to the Battery Power Bus in
the left DC circuit breaker panel. An Essential
Bus also supplies electrical power through
diode CR19 to the Battery Power Bus.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied from the left

Secondary Feeder Bus through four 50A circuit
breakers on the DC contactor box and left DC
circuit breaker panel to Secondary Distribution
Buses in the left DC circuit breaker panel.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-143

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Relay Junction Boxes (RJB)

Refer to Figure 24-76. Relay Junction Box.

The maintenance of three relay junction boxes

is included in ATA 24. While they are not part
of the DC or AC generation systems, these
boxes contain relays that are used in switching
functions of the various aircraft systems. The
units are installed below the cabin floor just aft
of the flight compartment door. Each RJB has
three daughter boards on which a maximum of
4 relays are mounted.

RELAY JUNCTION Box 2

RELAY RELAY
JUNCTION JUNCTION
Box 3 Box 1
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

ap212a01.cgm, cg, 18/08/04

Figure 24-76.  Relay Junction Box

24-144 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

RJB Maintenance Practices °° 24-50-60-710-803 For No.2 RJB

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a °° 24-50-60-710-804 For No.3 RJB
detailed description of this maintenance practice. •• Follow the AMM task to perform
operational test on the affected systems
Refer to:
The following switching relays are installed in RJB
•• Table 24-1. Relays Installed in RJB No.1:
No.1 (P/N 82420438-001).
•• Table 24-2. Relays installed in RJB •• A i r D a t a C o m p u t e r ( A D C ) a n d
No.2 (P/N 82420439-001). Integrated Standby Instruments (ISI)
•• Table 24-3. Relays installed in RJB •• Thunderstorm and dome lighting
No.3 (P/N 82420440-001). •• Avionics relays (Engine No. 2 main oil
•• When working on any of the RJBs, make pressure)
sure the aircraft electrical system is •• Airstair door seal system shut-off valve
completely powered off, including battery
power and install warning placards on •• W a r d r o b e a n d f w d / a f t b a g g a g e
both external power receptacles. compartment lights
•• You can replace a junction box or a single •• FCS electronic control unit
relay if you know which one is defective. •• Bleed air control and indication
•• Obey all caution and warnings posted •• No. 1 propeller control (PEC Lane A
on the AMM procedure. and feather pump contactor)
•• Perform the relevant operational test •• No. 2 propeller control (PEC Lane A
procedure for the junction box you have and feather pump contactor)
replaced or changed a relay:
•• Flight Data Recorder (FDR) impact switch
°° 24-50-60-710-801 For No.1 RJB

Wiring Daughter
Relay Sheet System Part Number
Diagram Board

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

3410-1-K1 83410250 2 1 Air Data Computer & Standby Pneumatic Instruments K-D4L-050
3316-1-K2 83310200 4 1 Thunderstorm & Dome Lighting K-D4L-050
3400-1-K3 83400201 4, 5 1 Avionics Relays (Engine No.2 Main Oil Pressure) K-D4L-050
5213-1-K4 85216936 2 1 Airstair Door Seal System Shut-Off Valve K-D4L-050
3331-2-K4 83330200 2 2 Wardrobe & Fwd/Aft Baggage Compartment Lights K-D4L-050
2700-2-K1 82700200 18 2 FCS Electronic Control Unit K-D4L-050
2121-2-K2 82120800 5 2 Bleed Air Control & Indication K-D4L-050
6100-2-K3 86100200 7 2 Propeller Control ( No. 2 Engine - Feather Pump TDH8003-2003
Contactor)
6100-3-K2 86100200 2 3 Propeller Control ( No. 2 Engine PEC Chan. A) TDH8002-2002
6100-3-K3 86100200 2 3 Propeller Control ( No. 1 Engine PEC Chan. A) TDH8002-2002
6100-3-K1 86100200 7 3 Propeller Control ( No. 1 Engine - Feather Pump TDH8003-2003
Contactor)
3133-3-K4 83130200 3 3 Flight Data Recorder (Impact Switch) K-D4L-050

Table 24-1. Relays Installed in RJB No.1 (P/N 82420438-001)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-145

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Wiring Daughter
Relay Sheet System Part Number
Diagram Board
2121-1-K3 82120800 4, 5 1 Bleed Air Control & Indication K-D4L-050
8011-1-K1 88010002 2, 3 1 Engine Start (GCU) K-D4L-050
3261-1-K4 83260400 6 1 Landing Gear Control & Indication K-D4L-050
1-K2 Unused 1 Installed - Unused K-D4L-050
3331-2-K4 83330200 2 2 Wardrobe & Fwd/Aft Baggage Compartment Lights K-D4L-050
2121-2-K1 82120800 4 2 Bleed Air Control & Indication K-D4L-050
8011-2-K2 88010002 2, 3 2 Engine Start (also on 83400201st5) K-D4L-050
2121-2-K3 82120800 5 2 Bleed Air Control & Indication K-D4L-050
3431-3-K2 83431044 3 3 Microwave Landing System (MLS No.2)(Option) K-D4L-050
8011-3-K3 88010002 2, 3 3 Engine Start (GCU) TDH8002-2002
3-K1 Unused 3 Installed - Unused K-D4L-050
3-K4 Unused 3 Installed - Unused K-D4L-050

Table 24-2. Relays installed in RJB No.2 (P/N 82420439-001)

Wiring Daughter
Relay Sheet System Part Number
Diagram Board
1-K1 Unused 1 Installed - Unused K-D4L-050
2921-1-K2 82920200 2 1 Standby Hydraulic Pump Control K-D4L-050
2921-1-K3 82920200 2 1 Standby Hydraulic Pump Control K-D4L-050
2921-1-K4 82920200 2 1 Standby Hydraulic Pump Control K-D4L-050
2921-2-K1 82920200 3, 4, 7 2 Standby Hydraulic Pump Control TDH8003-2003
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

2921-2-K2 82920200 3, 7 2 Standby Hydraulic Pump Control TDH8003-2003

3322-2-K3 83320205 3 2 Cabin Master Call & PA Chime K-D4L-050
2370-2-K4 82370200 2 2 Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR) K-D4L-050
2921-3-K1 82920200 2 3 Standby Hydraulic Pump Control K-D4L-050
3322-3-K2 83320205 3 3 Cabin Master Call & PA Chime K-D4L-050
2921-3-K3 82920200 3, 7 3 Standby Hydraulic Pump Control K-D4L-050
2431-3-K4 82430050 5 3 DC Power Generation (Battery Master Relay) K-D4L-050

Table 24-3. Relays installed in RJB No.3 (P/N 82420440-001)

24-146 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

The following switching relays are installed in NOTES

RJB No.2:

•• Bleed air control and indication

•• Engine start (GCU)
•• Landing gear control and indication
•• W a r d r o b e a n d f w d / a f t b a g g a g e
compartment lights
•• Microwave Landing System (MLS)

The following switching relays are installed in

RJB No.3:

•• Standby hydraulic pump control

•• Cabin Interphone and PA chime
•• Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder
(SSCVR)
•• DC power generation.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-147

24-148 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
ELECTRICAL POWER
PROTECTION UNIT

DASH 8 Q400
5
#1 AC GEN F1,F2,F3
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7
#2 AC GCU

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT POWER EXT POWER CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS
CONTACTOR OFF BUS
(K1) CONTACTOR
(K2) SPU CONTACTOR
EXT (K7)
PWR

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEGEND
LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU
CT Current Transformer
F Fuse
TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY
FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS
fsd01a01.cgm

Figure 24-77.  AC Variable Frequency Block Diagram Control

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-21-00 AC VARIABLE NOTE

FREQUENCY SYSTEM It is not possible to connect the two
AC generators in parallel. The AC
generator line contactors have a
INTRODUCTION center off position to make sure that
the AC generator is disconnected
The AC variable frequency system supplies 115 before it is connected to the
VAC three-phase electrical power to the AC opposite side (break before make).
electrical load distribution system. This is necessary because variable
frequency AC generators are used.
NOTE The AC GCUs regulate its related AC
The AC variable frequency generator’s output voltage and controls the
system supplies electrical power AC generator line contactors.
to AC systems that are not
frequency sensitive, such as: The AC variable frequency system also has
current transformers in the AC contactor boxes
• De-icing (heaters) and AC generators to measure A, B, and C
phase current.
• Fuel (auxiliary pumps)
The toggle switches on the AC CONTROL
• Hydraulic (standby power unit) panel give manual control of the AC variable
frequency system.
• Galleys.

The AC variable frequency system also

NOTE
interfaces with the Main 28 VDC generation 115 VAC three-phase electrical
system to supply electrical power to the power is also supplied through
transformer rectifier units (TRUs) that are an AC external power receptacle
additional sources of DC electrical power. to let an external power source
energize the AC variable
GENERAL frequency system when the

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

aircraft is on the ground and the
Refer to Figure 24-77. AC Variable Frequency engines are not operating.
Block Diagram Control.
The AC variable frequency system units are the:
The AC variable frequency system has a left
and right system with cross-tie capabilities. •• AC generators
•• AC generator Adapter Plate
Two engine driven AC generators supply 115
VAC three-phase electrical power through AC •• AC GCU
generator line contactors to the left and right •• AC CONTROL Panel
AC electrical load distribution systems.
•• AC contactor Boxes
•• AC contactor Box Contactors.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-149

24-150 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

ESID

#1 AC GEN #2 AC GEN
L AC BUS R AC BUS
HOT HOT

#1 AC GEN #2 AC GEN
MFD 1 ED MFD 2

DASH 8 Q400
IFC

OFF OFF
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

GEN 1 GEN 2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

#1 AC GEN #2 AC GEN

EPCU

#1 AC GCU CT 1 CT 4
#2 AC GCU

BUS
CT 2 CONTACTOR CT 5
K3 CT 3 CT 6 K4 (K2)

X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS
CONTACTOR
OFF
(K1)
SPU CONTACTOR
EXT (K7)
PWR

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS

GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD

SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) (K6)
fse78a01a.cgm

Figure 24-78.  AC Variable Frequency Block Diagram - Indication

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-78. AC Variable Frequency NOTES

Block Diagram - Indication.

The MFD, ELECTRICAL system page and the

CAWP show AC variable frequency system
indications.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-151

24-152 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
EXTERNAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
PROTECTION UNIT

5
#1 AC GEN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CB1, CB2,CB3
CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

#2 AC GCU
LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT PWR EXT PWR CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS OFF
BUS
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
(K1) (K2)
EXT
PWR SPU CONTACTOR
(K7)

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU

fse82a01a.cgm TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY

FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS

Figure 24-79.  AC Variable Frequency Block Diagram - Normal Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Circuit breakers and fuses are used for passive
protection.
Refer to Figure 24-79. AC Variable Frequency
Block Diagram - Normal Operation. The AC GCUs are used to control the AC
generator line contactors for active protection.
The alternating current variable frequency
system modes of operation are: The AC variable frequency system uses the EPCU
for CBIT. The AC variable frequency system also
•• Airborne (normal) uses AC GCUs for initiated built in test.
•• External AC power. During the normal mode of operation, the AC
GCU controls the related AC generator line
The AC variable frequency system operates in contactor to connect the AC generator to the
the normal mode when: related AC bus.
•• Two engines are operating and the
propeller is not feathered NOTE
•• External AC power is not set The two AC GCUs monitor
the condition of the opposite
•• GEN 1 and GEN 2 toggle switches on AC GCU. When an AC GCU
the AC CONTROL panel are set. senses that the opposite AC
generator is not serviceable, it
For a description of external AC power, see then controls the AC generator
24-41-00 External AC Power. line contactor to connect the bus
to the serviceable AC generator.
The AC generators are monitored by the AC
GCUs to automatically control the operation The galley load shed contactors are
of the AC generator line contactors. If a fault controlled by auxiliary contacts in the AC
is sensed, the AC generator line contactors are generator line contactors. The two galley
opened or closed to automatically reconfigure load shed contactors are automatically closed
the system. The fault is isolated from the when the AC buses are energized by the two
remaining part of the AC variable frequency AC generators or external power.
system to give continued operation.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The AC variable frequency system has
protective functions to prevent damage to the
AC generators when there is a fault.

The AC variable frequency system continuously

monitors for the following fault conditions:

•• Source
•• Bus.

The source and bus faults are isolated and the

part of the system that continues to operate is
automatically reconfigured to give continued
operation.

The AC variable frequency system has passive

protection and active protection.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-153

24-154 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
EXTERNAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
PROTECTION UNIT

5
#1 AC GEN
#
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CB1, CB2,CB3
CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

#2 AC GCU
LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT PWR EXT PWR CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X

BUS OFF
BUS
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
(K1) (K2)
EXT
PWR

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU

fse82a01a.cgm TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY

FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS

Figure 24-80.  AC Variable Frequency System, AC Generator No. 1 Source Fault K1 to Cross Tie
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-80. AC Variable Frequency NOTES

System, AC Generator No. 1 Source Fault K1
to Cross Tie.

If an AC generator fault is sensed by the AC

GCU, the AC generator is de-energized and the
related AC generator line contactor is opened
to disconnect the AC generator from the bus.
The AC GCU also causes the related No.1 AC
GEN caution light to illuminate.

This fault is also sensed by the opposite AC

GCU. It then controls the AC generator line
contactor to connect the bus to the serviceable
AC generator. The left and right 115 VAC
variable frequency buses are now energized
by the serviceable AC generator. This is called
cross-tie operation.

This fault condition also causes the two galley

load shed contactors to automatically open.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-155

24-156 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
EXTERNAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
PROTECTION UNIT

5
#1 AC GEN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CB1, CB2,CB3
CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

#2 AC GCU
LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT PWR EXT PWR CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS OFF
BUS
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
(K1) (K2)
EXT
PWR SPU CONTACTOR
(K7)

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT

FT AC BUS
S RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU

fse82a01a.cgm TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY

FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS

Figure 24-81.  AC Variable Frequency System Left AC Bus Fault

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-81. AC Variable Frequency NOTES

System Left AC Bus Fault.

If a bus fault is sensed by the AC GCU, the

related AC generator line contactor is opened
to isolate the bus. The AC GCU also causes
the related AC BUS caution light to illuminate.

NOTE
The AC generator is not
de-energized and can be
connected to the opposite AC
bus if necessary.

NOTE
This fault condition is not sensed
by the opposite AC GCU.

This fault condition also causes the two galley

load shed contactors to automatically open.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-157

24-158 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
EXTERNAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
PROTECTION UNIT

5
#
#1 AC GEN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CB1, CB2,CB3
CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

#2 AC GCU
LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT PWR EXT PWR CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS OFF
BUS
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
(K1) (K2)
EXT
PWR SPU CONTACTOR
(K7)

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS

BUS RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU

fse82a01a.cgm TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY

FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS

Figure 24-82.  AC Generator No. 1 and AC Bus Fault, Sequence 1

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-82. AC Generator No. 1 and NOTES

AC Bus Fault, Sequence 1.

If an AC generator malfunctions, the left and

right 115 VAC variable frequency buses are
energized by the serviceable AC generator. If
a bus fault is then sensed by the AC GCU, the
generator line contactor is opened to isolate
the bus.

The left AC GCU senses this condition and

illuminates the L AC BUS caution light on the
CAWP only if the GEN 1 toggle switch on the
AC CONTROL panel stays set.

This fault condition also causes the two galley

load shed contactors to automatically open.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-159

24-160 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
EXTERNAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
PROTECTION UNIT

5
#1 AC GEN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CB1, CB2,CB3
CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

#2 AC GCU
LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT PWR EXT PWR CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS OFF
BUS
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
(K1) (K2)
EXT
PWR SPU CONTACTOR
(K7)

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT

HT AC BUS
S RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU

fse82a01a.cgm TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY

FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS

Figure 24-83.  AC Generator No. 1 and AC Bus Fault, Sequence 2

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-83. AC Generator No. 1 and NOTES

AC Bus Fault, Sequence 2.

If the bus fault condition continues for more

than 7 seconds the opposite AC generator
line contactor is reconnected by the AC GCU
and the related AC generator line contactor is
opened to isolate the bus.

The two galley load shed contactors to continue

to stay open.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-161

24-162 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
EXTERNAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
PROTECTION UNIT

5
#1 AC GEN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CB1, CB2,CB3
CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

#2 AC GCU
LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT PWR EXT PWR CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS OFF
BUS
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
(K1) (K2)
EXT
PWR SPU CONTACTOR
(K7)

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT

T AC BUS
S RIGHT
T AC BUS
S RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU

fse82a01a.cgm TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY

FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS

Figure 24-84.  AC Variable Frequency System, AC Generator No. 1 and AC Bus Fault, Sequence 3
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-84. AC Variable Frequency NOTES

System, AC Generator No. 1 and AC Bus Fault,
Sequence 3.

If the bus fault condition still continues for

more than 7 seconds the two AC generator
line contactors are opened by the AC GCU to
isolate the two buses.

The two galley load shed contactors to continue

to stay open.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-163

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FW
D

fs889a01.cgm

Figure 24-85.  AC Generator

24-164 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION circular connector and the high power three-

phase output connections are made with studs
AC Generators attached to a terminal block.

Refer to Figure 24-85. AC Generator. A bonding stud is also attached to the housing
of the AC generator. The generator also has a
The AC generators are attached to the bimetallic temperature sensor that closes a set of
propeller reduction gearboxes of the engines contacts and gives continuity through two pins on
with V-clamps around the quick attach/detach the interface connector when the temperature of
(QAD) adapter plates and the AC generator the machine is too much. A three-phase current
mounting flanges. The QAD adapters stay transformer is attached in the neutral lines of the
attached to the reduction gearboxes. windings to give current data to the AC GCU.

CAUTION NOTE
The AC generators output rating
YOU MUST CORRECTLY
is 45 KVA.
ALIGN THE FLANGE OF THE
AC GENERATOR WITH THE
The AC Generator is an electromagnetic
QAD ADAPTER PLATE. IF
rotating machine that converts engine input
YOU DO NOT DO THIS, YOU
mechanical torque into output AC electrical
CANNOT INSTALL THE V BAND
power. The first stage of the AC generator is a
CLAMP AND YOU CAN CAUSE
permanent magnet generator (PMG).
DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
It has a rare earth magnet to make output power
The generator receives a supply of pressurized
without the need for an external excitation
oil from the reduction gearbox to cool and
source. The three-phase output from the PMG
lubricate the internal components.
is supplied through the AC GCU to the second
stage field. The second stage is the exciter.
Oil is transferred from the gearbox, through the
QAD adapter, to the generator using transfer
tubes. These tubes are sealed with O-rings at each NOTE
end to prevent oil leakage. Oil enters the shaft
The generator also has a

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

and is sprayed outward to cool the windings and
generator positive voltage
lubricate the bearings. The used cooling oil then
output signal so that the terminal
goes under gravity to the bottom of the generator
voltage of each phase at the
where it is collected in the sump. A scavenge
generator can be monitored by
port is located in the sump. The engine scavenge
the EPCU for CBIT functions.
pump extracts the oil and returns it to the engine.
Electrical power for AC GCU operation is
The generator is a three-stage machine, with
supplied by the PMG stage of the AC generator.
electromagnetic coupling between stages. (It
This lets the AC generation system operate
does not have slip rings and brushes).Each
independently of the main 28 VDC generation
stage in the machine has a rotor and stator
and battery systems.
segment along its length. The rotor is supported
in the machine by ball bearings at both ends.
The bearings are lubricated and cooled by the
generator cooling oil. Inputs and outputs of the
stator windings are supplied through interface
connections on the body of the AC generator.
The low current connections are made with a

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-165

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

brz36a01.dg, gv, 16/12/02

C
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

0.353 ± 0.030 in.

(8.97 ± 0.77 mm)

C AND D INSTALLED C D

Figure 24-86.  AC Generator Adapter Plate

24-166 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AC Generator Adapter Plate NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-86. AC Generator Adapter Plate.

There are two quick attach/detach QAD adapter

plates installed on the aircraft, one for each AC
generator.

The QAD adapter plate is not removed when

an AC generator is removed.

The QAD adapter plate has two transfer tubes to

supply engine oil to the AC generator. The QAD
adapter plate has an O-ring and the transfer
tubes also have O-rings and retaining clips.

The QAD adapter plate gives an interface

between the AC generators and the reduction
gearbox of the engines.

AC Generator and Adapter

Maintenance Practices
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

•• Make sure that the stator housing screws

and O-rings are in working condition as
per Honeywell SB 1152218-24-67 and
SB 84-24-39A.
•• If there is an oil leak from the AC
generator screws or terminal block,

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

replace the AC generator
•• If there is an oil leak from the AC
generator QAD and QAD to engine
interface, remove the AC generator
•• Always use the socket wrench to
remove or install the terminal nuts on
the terminal block.

NOTE
If you use a standard wrench, it
may cause damage to the terminal
block separators and will result in
denied warranty claims.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-167

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FW
D

A AC GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT

INSTALLATION
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FWD

NOTE
FWD equipment shown.
AFT equipment opposite.
fse77a01.cgm

Figure 24-87.  AC Generator Control Unit

24-168 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AC Generator Control Units (GCU) The voltage regulator gives a constant voltage
at the POR under different load and speed
Refer to Figure 24-87. AC Generator Control conditions. An average of the individual three-
Unit. phase outputs are used for regulation. The
AC GCU also uses current transformers in
The two AC GCUs are installed under the the system to continuously monitor the AC
fuselage floor in the center of the aircraft. generator current and limit the current if the
output is more than the permitted limits.
The AC G CU is a ful ly encl osed, non-
hermetically sealed unit. Control of the AC generator line contactor:
When a stable output is sensed by the AC
A connector is attached to one end of the AC GCU, it closes the related AC generator line
GCU enclosure to interface with the electrical contactor to connect the AC generator to the
power generation and distribution system related AC bus. It closes the opposite AC
(EPGDS). generator line contactor to connect the AC
generator to the opposite AC bus if the opposite
The AC GCU has an Initiated Built In Test AC GCU or AC generator is not operating.
(IBIT) function to check the status of the unit. The operating AC GCU senses this condition
through a TRANSFER REQUEST [TR] signal.
The unit is cooled by conduction through This signal is active when there is no need for
the chassis and support bracket and by transfer and is removed when there is a need.
convection air over the surface of the box.
Power dissipating components in the unit are If AC external power is supplied to the aircraft,
attached to chassis heat sinks to minimize the a signal is supplied to the AC GCU to energize
thermal resistance of the cooling circuit and the Y coil of the AC generator line contactor
give correct operating temperatures. to give external AC power system operation.

The AC GCUs give the functions that follow: Protection: To prevent damage to the AC
generators, the AC GCUs have the protective
•• Voltage regulation functions that follow:
•• Control of the AC generator line
•• Overvoltage
contactors

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• Undervoltage
•• Protection
•• Differential current
•• Control of the AC generator and AC
bus caution lights •• Underfrequency
•• CBIT. •• Bus fault.

Voltage regulation: The AC GCU supplies Overvoltage: The AC generator is de-energized

power through a voltage regulator circuit to and the related line contactor is opened by
the exciter windings of the AC generator to the AC GCU before the voltage is more than
start generator output when the conditions are approximately 125 VAC. This protective
as follows: function is sensed in a period of time that is
inversely proportional to the size of the sensed
•• The related GEN 1 or GEN 2 toggle overvoltage condition.
switch on the AC CONTROL panel is
set Undervoltage: The AC generator is
de-energized and the related line contactor is
•• AC GCU senses that the AC generator
opened by the AC GCU before the voltage is
is at the correct operating speed.
less than approximately 100 VAC.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-169

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE NOTE
If an undervoltage and bus fault The AC GCU prevents cycling
condition is sensed at the same of the system if a fault exists.
time, the overcurrent protection If a fault is sensed, the system
function will occur. trips, and stays tripped until it is
reset. The protective functions
Differential current: The AC generator is are latched by the AC GCU
de-energized and the related AC generator and can be only reset when the
line contactor is opened by the AC GCU GEN toggle switch on the AC
when the differential current on any phase CONTROL panel is set to the
is more than 20 A. OFF position and then back to
the GEN position.
Underfrequency: The AC generator is
de-energized and the related AC generator line
contactor is opened by the AC GCU when the
AC generator frequency is less than 300 Hz. It
will automatically reconnect the AC generator
when the frequency is more than 320 Hz. This
will occur only if the system was not previously
disconnected by a different protective function.
As the AC generator frequency goes below
340 Hz, the output voltage decreases relative
to the frequency until the AC generator is
disconnected at 300 Hz.

NOTE
When the condition lever is set
to START & FEATHER, the
AC generator is de-energized
and disconnected from the bus
because the AC generator speed
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

is too low for operation. The

AC generator will automatically
reconnect. When the condition
lever is returned to the 850, 900
or 1020 position.

Bus fault (overcurrent): The AC generator

line contactor is opened by the AC GCU to
disconnect the AC generator from the bus if
the current is more than 300% of the rated
current (45 KVA). If the AC GCU senses an
overcurrent condition, the AC generator will
continue to supply current for a maximum of
7 seconds to let the fault clear itself before
disconnecting the AC generator.

24-170 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AC Control Panel
Refer to Figure 24-88. AC CONTROL Panel.

The AC CONTROL panel is attached to the

overhead console with four DZUS fasteners.

The toggle switches are identified as:

•• GEN 1
•• GEN 2
•• EXT POWER.

The three switches have an OFF label to show

their off position.

The AC CONTROL panel gives manual control

of the AC variable frequency system. A

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

AC
OF
C ON
F TR
OL
OF
EX F
PWT
R OF
GE F +
N1

GE
N2
fsg00a01.cgm

A
D
FW

Figure 24-88.  AC CONTROL Panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-171

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

D
TB
OU

A FW
D

NOTE
LEFT AC CONTACTOR BOX SHOWN
RIGHT AC CONTACTOR BOX SIMILAR.

A LEFT AC CONTACTOR BOX

INSTALLATION
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

D
TB
OU
FW
D

fsf00a01.cgm

Figure 24-89.  Left-Hand Side AC Contactor Box (ACCB)

24-172 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AC Contactor Boxes been carried out (Refer to AMM TASK

24-21-16-550-801).
Refer to Figure 24-89. Left-Hand Side AC
Here is a list of the various components
Contactor Box (ACCB).
installed inside the ACCBs:
There are different types of AC contactor
•• AC generator line contactors, K1 and K2
boxes (ACCBs) which are based on galley
configuration of the aircraft, i.e. no galley, one •• External power contactors, K3 and K4
galley or two galleys installed.
•• Galley load shed contactors, K5 and K6
(optional)
There are two ACCBs on the aircraft. AC
electrical power is distributed through the left •• Standby power unit (SPU) contactor,
and right contactor boxes which are located installed in the right-hand side ACCB
in the left and right wheel wells. The boxes
• • Internal cable assemblies and rigid
shield the switching, protection and measuring
bus bars
components such as contactors, fuses, current
transformers and bus bars. •• Circuit breakers and fuses for output
protection
Before you start working on the contactor
•• Circuit breakers for heaters in the
boxes, ensure main landing gear safety pins
propellers anti-icing system
are installed. Maintenance can open the
contactor boxes by undoing the 18 turnlock •• Current transformers, CT1, CT2, CT3,
fasteners located on the box cover. Line CT4, CT5, CT6.
replaceable units inside the boxes include
•• External Power Protection Unit (EPPU),
External Power Protection Unit (EPPU),
installed in the right-hand side ACCB
circuit breakers and contactors.

When working on contactor boxes or replacing

NOTE
contactors, ensure the following: K1 and K3 are installed in the
left-hand side ACCB, and K2
•• Landing gear doors are opened and and K4 are installed in the right-
safety pins are installed on all gear and hand side ACCB. Also, when
doors. installed, K5 is in the left ACCB

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

and K6 is in the right ACCB.
•• Do not forget to perform an operational
test as per AMM Task 24-20-00-710-
CT1, CT2, and CT3 are installed
801/802 if contactors are replaced
in the left-hand side ACCB, and
•• Connector cables are installed without CT4, CT5, and CT6 are installed
contacting each other in the right-hand side ACCB.
•• C a b l e s a r e p r o p e r l y r o u t e d a n d
Connectors are attached to the
supported without inducing load on
enclosure to interface with the
mating connectors or interfering with
EPGDS.
landing gear operation
•• Moun t i ng bol t s for t he box m ust The current transformers in the
be torqued as per AMM Task ACCBs monitor the current for
24-21-16-400-801 phases A, B, and C of the AC
generator for indication and
•• D o a R e t u r n t o S e r v i c e a f t e r
protection.
Replacement of the ACCB. Check if
installation of the contactor box has

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-173

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE NOTES
Two current transformers,
identified as CT1 and CT4,
supply total generator output
current of the AC generators
to the EPCU for AC electrical
load indications in the Electronic
Instrument System (EIS).

Two current transformers,

identified as CT2 and CT5, supply
total generator output current of
the AC generators to the AC GCUs
for differential current sensing.
When an AC bus is energized by
the opposite AC generator, CT3 or
CT6 is also used.

For a description of the EPPU in the right-hand

side ACCB, See External AC Power Protection
Unit.
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

24-174 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-175

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

D
INB

FW
D

A RIGHT AC CONTACTOR BOX

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

D
INB

FW
D

fse95a01.cgm

Figure 24-90.  AC Contactors

24-176 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AC Contactor Box Contactors They have one coil winding to move the
contact arms to connect the galley buses to
Refer to Figure 24-90. AC Contactors. the AC buses.

The contactors in the left-hand side and right- The galley load shed contactors are only
hand side ACCBs attach directly to rigid bus bars. energized when:

AC generator line contactors: The AC generator •• The two AC buses are energized by the
line contactors, K1 and K2, are 150A Three-Pole two AC generators
Double Throw (3PDT), center off contactors.
•• The two AC buses are energized by the
external AC power.
They have two coil windings, identified as X and
Y, to move the contact arms to connect the AC
buses to the related or the opposite AC generator. CAUTION
They also have auxiliary contacts to control the
Do not start engine when
galley load shed contactors, K5 and K6.
connected to AC External Power
as damage to Transformer Unit
NOTE could occur.
The contactor arms also move to
the Y position when the external Operational Check of K2Y, K3 and
AC power is used. K4 Contactors
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
The X position of the bus
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
contactor is controlled by the
related AC GCU and the Y
•• To verify contactors K3 and K4 are
position is controlled by the
operating correctly:
opposite AC GCU.
°° Connect AC external power to the
External Power contactors: The external power aircraft to close contactors K3 and K4
contactor, K3 and K4, are 100A 3PDT, contactors.
°° Confirm fault code 23 or 24 has not
been triggered
They have one coil winding to move the

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

contact arms to connect the AC buses to the •• To verify K2Y is operating correctly:
AC external power receptacle.
°° Run No.1 engine unfeathered with
No.1 AC GEN on line
The external power contactors are only
energized when the conditions are as follows: °° Confirm from the electrical system
page that K2Y is closed as both
•• Good external AC power is supplied No.1 and No.2 AC buses are
powered by No.1 AC Generator.
•• EXT PWR toggle switches on the AC
CONTROL panel are set.

They also have auxiliary contacts to control the

galley load shed contactors, K5 and K6.

Galley load shed contactors: The galley load

shed contactors, K5 and K6, are 50A Three-Pole
Single Throw (3PST), normally open contactors.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-177

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Operational Check of K1 and K2 NOTES

Contactors
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

This procedure is for verifying contactors K1 and

K2 are operating correctly, i.e. they can switch to
either X and Y positions. Start both engines with
both AC GENs set to GEN positions.

•• Connect AC external power to the

aircraft but leave the EXT PWR switch
in the OFF position

CAUTION
If you do not disconnect the AC
power current to the aircraft,
you can damage the Transformer
Rectifier Unit (TRU) when
starting an engine.

•• Start both engines and set both AC GEN

switches to GEN position
•• Set the AC external power switch to
EXT PWR position and unfeather both
propellers.
•• Verify K1 and K2 contactors are set
to the K1Y and K2Y positions by
checking both AC GEN caution lights
are illuminated
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• By setting the external power switch to

OFF position with engines unfeathered,
we are checking the K1 and K2
contactors can be reset back to the
K1X and K2X positions. Both AC GEN
caution lights will go off and the green
AC EXT PWR message disappears from
the right hand top corner of the MFD
electrical systems page
•• By turning off AC GEN 1 and AC GEN
2 individually, we are verifying that K1
and K2 contactors can go to the K1Y
and K2Y position individually. This can
be verified by seeing both AC GENs are
showing 115±3 VAC.

24-178 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-179

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATION The AC generators are connected to the AC

buses when the:
Refer to Figure 24-91. AC Variable Frequency
System - AC Control Panel. •• Two engines are operating and propeller
is not feathered, and
The AC CONTROL panel has the controls for
•• EXT PWR toggle switch power is not
AC variable frequency system:
set, and
•• GEN1 toggle switch •• GEN1 and GEN2 toggle switches are set.
•• GEN2 toggle switch.
The GEN1 and GEN2 toggle switches are set to
the OFF position to reset the related AC GCU.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

fse75a02.cgm

Figure 24-91.  AC Variable Frequency System - AC Control Panel

24-180 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-92. EIS, AC Variable AC load: The load part of the AC generator voltage
Frequency System Indications. and load indicator shows an indication for the digital
display of the AC generators phase A, B, and C.
The MFD ELECTRICAL system page has an
AC generator voltage and load indicator with a The numbers for the digital display of the AC
digital display for voltage and load. generator load change from .00 to +1.99 in 0.01
power unit increments. A + symbol before the
AC voltage: The voltage part of the AC numbers shows an overload condition. The
generator voltage and load indicator shows numbers relate to the AC generator load as a
an indication for the digital display of the AC percentage of the maximum rate.
generators phase A, B, and C.
If there is an open or short circuit between
The numbers for the digital display of the AC the AC generator current transformer and the
generator voltage change from 0 to 249 in 1 EPCU, the digital display of the AC generator
volt increments. load indicator will show .00.
A
If there is an open or short circuit to ground
potential between the AC bus and the EPCU,
the related digital display of the AC generator
voltage will show 0.

MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRICAL

˚ .17 116 .16

MAIN .01
AUX .01 115 .16
S TB Y .01 115 .14

.00 .00

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

ESS 6 6 115 .19
MAIN 4 4 116 .19
SEC 4 4 .23 .23 115 .18

PSI x 1000

fsq49a01.cgm

Figure 24-92.  EIS, AC Variable Frequency System Indications

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-181

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

PITCH PITOT HEAT

A ICE DETECT #1 HYD
HYD ROLL SPL
SPLR #1 STAL
T L
TRIM STBY F L
FAI ISO VLV
ISO INBD S
SPL
PLR
R SYST FAI
F L

PITOT PITOT CABIN #2 H

HYD #2 STAL
T L
HEAT
HEA 1 HEAT
A 2 DUCT HOT ISO VLV
VL
L SYST FAI
F L

CABIN ROLL SPL

SPLR PUSHER PARKING
P
P CK HOT
PA INBD
D HYD SYST FAI
F L BRAKE

PROP MAIN INBD OUTBD

DEICE BATT
A ERY ANTISKID ANTISKID

DEICE #1 HYD #2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

TIMER FLUID HOT FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

EMER LT
L S INTERNAL
AL SIDE
E WDO DEI
EICE
EIC NOSE FUELING
AVIONICS
DISARMED DOORS HOT PRESSS
S S STEERING ON

CABIN CHECK #1 ENG #1 ENG #2 ENG MAIN BAT

A
PRESS FIRE DET OIL PRESS F
FADE C FAI
F L F
FADE C FAI
F L HOT
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

fse93a01.cgm

Figure 24-93.  Caution and Warning Panel - AC Variable Frequency System Caution Indications

24-182 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-93. Caution and Warning NOTES

Panel - AC Variable Frequency System Caution
Indications.

AC GEN: The No.1 AC GEN or No.2 AC GEN

caution light illuminates when the associated
generator (GEN1 or GEN2) is not connected to
its bus.

NOTE
The No.1 AC GEN or No.2 AC
GEN caution light will also
illuminate for conditions that
are not malfunctions as follows:

• The AC GEN1 or AC GEN2

toggle switch is set to the
OFF position

• External AC power is energizing

the L and R AC buses.

If a source fault is sensed, the AC generator

line contactors K1 and K2 will not connect the
AC GEN to the 115 VAC BUS.

AC BUS: The R AC BUS or L AC BUS caution

light illuminates when there is an overcurrent
condition on the 115 VAC BUS for more than
seven seconds.

NOTE

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The caution light will go out if
the associated toggle switch is
set to the OFF position.

AC GEN HOT: The No.1 AC GEN HOT or

No.2 AC GEN HOT caution light in the CAWP
illuminates when the AC generator temperature
is more than 166°C (330°F).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-183

24-184 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

DASH 8 Q400
P/J102
# 1 AC ON
6 P V GEN ON
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
4 N A RESET

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

M R +28 V DC OUT
GEN 1 SW SW PWR 1
P/J 16-1 P/J2
ON/OFF/RESET DD CIRC GND FIELD A 1 FIELD

AC CONTROL PANEL AA ELEC GND PMG PH ‘A’ C 3

PMG PH ‘B’ D 4 PMG

PMG PH ‘C’ E 5
(D7) AC GEN
+28 V DC CONT 1
L MAIN 5A FF 28 V DC IN
BUS

LEFT DC CBP #1 AC GENERATOR CONTROL #1 AC GENERATOR

UNIT (GCU)

Figure 24-94.  Voltage Regulation Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTE
The drive [K2Y DRV] and
Voltage Regulation return [K2Y RTN] for the Y
Refer to Figure 24-94. Voltage Regulation coil of the AC generator line
Schematic. contactor K2 is also controlled
by No.1 AC GCU when it
For voltage regulation, the AC variable senses external power.
frequency system has the interfaces that follow:

•• A [FIELD] output from the No.1 AC

GCU is supplied to the exciter windings
of the No.1 AC generator to start
generator output.
•• The ripple voltage from the permanent
magnet generator of the No.1 AC
generator is supplied to the [PMG PH
‘A’], [PMG PH ‘B’], and [PMG PH
‘C’] inputs of the No.1 AC GCU to
sense correct speed.
•• 28 VDC [+28 VDC OUT SW PWR 1]
from the No.1 AC GCU is supplied
through the GEN1 toggle switch on the
AC CONTROL panel back to the No.1
AC GCU for generator on [GEN ON].
•• Current from the current transformers
in the No.1 AC generator is monitored
by the [PHA] and [PHA RTN], [PHB]
and [PHB RTN], and [PHC] and [PHC
RTN] inputs of the No.1 AC GCU to
limit the current if the output is more

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

than the permitted limits.

To control the AC generator line contactor,

the AC variable frequency system has the
interfaces that follow:

•• The drive [K1X DRV] and return [K1X

RTN] for the X coil of the AC generator
line contactor K1 is controlled by No.1
AC GCU.
•• The condition of the No.1 AC GCU
is monitored by the No.2 AC GCU
through a transfer request to [TR TO]
and transfer request from [TR FROM]
interface. The drive [K1Y DRV] and
return [K1Y RTN] for the Y coil of
the AC generator line contactor K1 is
controlled by the No.2 AC GCU when
it senses a loss of the transfer request.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-185

24-186 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

P/J1-1 CB 5

PIN H - 55 5A
CB 6
A
SEE #1 AC GCU,
PIN K - 69 5A
P15-1 (SHT. 1)
CB 7
B
PIN M - 54 5A
15
C

DASH 8 Q400
K1 GENERATOR
BUS
CONTACTOR

CT2 PHA

SEE SHT. 1 A
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

PHB

PHC

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PIN W 76
SEE #1 AC GCU, PIN X 67
P15-1 (SHT. 1) PIN Y 51
PIN Z 66

P/J1-1 50 28 27 26 P/J2-1
#1 AC CONTACTOR BOX
24-51-00

P/J1-2 50 28 27 26 P/J2-2 P/J9-2 C E F

PH C

PH
B

PH
A CT6

K4 EXTERNAL POWER

Figure 24-95.  Protection Unit Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Protection Bus fault (overcurrent): For overcurrent

protection, current from the current transformers
Refer to Figure 24-95. Protection Unit in the No.1 AC generator is monitored by the
Schematic. [PHA] and [PHA RTN], [PHB] and [PHB
RTN], and [PHC] and [PHC RTN] inputs of
For protective functions of the AC generators, the No.1 AC GCU.
the AC variable frequency system has the
interfaces that follow:

•• Point of regulation of the AC generator

for voltage
•• C u r r e n t t r a n s f o r m e r s i n t h e A C
generator and ACCB for differential
current
•• A C g e n e r a t o r p e r m a n e n t m a g n e t
generator for frequency
•• C u r r e n t t r a n s f o r m e r s i n t h e A C
generator for bus fault.

Voltage: For overvoltage and undervoltage

protection, the voltage at the point of regulation
for phase A, B, and C of the No.1 AC generator
is monitored by the [POR PHA], [POR PHB],
and [POR PHC] inputs of the No.1 AC GCU.

Differential current: For differential current

protection, the AC variable frequency system
has the interfaces that follow:

•• Current from the current transformers

in the No.1 AC generator is monitored

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

by the [PHA] and [PHA RTN], [PHB]
and [PHB RTN], and [PHC] and [PHC
RTN] inputs of the No.1 AC GCU to
continuously monitor the No.1 AC
generator input current.
•• Current from the current transformer,
CT2 or CT6 is also supplied to the
[PH A], [PH B], [PH C] and return
[RTN] inputs of the No.1 AC GCU
to continuously monitor the No.1 AC
generator output current.
Frequency: For underspeed protection, the
ripple voltage from the permanent magnet
generator of the No.1 AC generator is supplied
to the [PMG PH ‘A’], [PMG PH ‘B’], and
[PMG PH ‘C’] inputs of the No.1 AC.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-187

24-188 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

T4
P/J 1

DASH 8 Q400
6 P/J 1
PH 9
C 8
5
7
4 PH A VOLT SENSE
4
PH 52 PH B VOLT SENSE
B 32 PH C VOLT SENSE
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

3
50 #2 AC CURRENT PH A
2
49 #2 AC CURRENT PH B
PH 22
25 #2 AC CURRENT PH C
A
27 #2 AC CURRENT RTN
1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

R4 R6 PH
T1 C
25
T2 ELECTRICAL POWER
CONTROL UNIT (EPCU) PH
R2
T3 24-31-00 B
24

#2 AC GENERATOR PH
A
23
P/J4-2 CT4
A
B
C
P/J100 9811-P/J146
L AC VM PHA P/J5-2 CB 11
A 1A A
L AC VM PHB A 50A PH A
B 1A B
L AC VM PHC B 50A PH B
C 1A C
C 50A PH C
115V AC VARIABLE FREQUENCY CBP
24-51-00

#2 AC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-96.  AC Generator Voltage and Load Indicator Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Voltage and Load Indication NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-96. AC Generator Voltage
and Load Indicator Schematic.

For the AC generator voltage and load indicator

on the MFD ELECTRICAL system page, the
AC variable frequency system has the interfaces
that follow:

•• The LEFT AC VM PH A, PH B, and PH

C voltage of the 115 VAC VARIABLE
FREQUENCY LEFT BUS is supplied
to the [PHA VOLT SENSE], [PHB
VOLT SENSE], and [PHC VOLT
SENSE] inputs of the EPCU for voltage
indication.
•• The current from current transformer
CT1 is supplied to [No.1 AC CURRENT
PHA], [No.1 AC CURRENT PHB],
[No.1 AC CURRENT PHC], [No.1 AC
CURRENT RTN] and of the EPCU for
load indication.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-189

24-190 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

LEFT NACELLE
3312-P/J1
-18 AC BUS
P/J3
OVT P/J1 34 AC GEN
10 28 #1 AC GEN HOT

CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL

12

DASH 8 Q400
#1 AC GENERATOR

FUSELAGE LH
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

P/J15-1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AC BUS H
AC GEN J

P/J15-1

K1 Y STATUS G
30-21-00
K1 X STATUS F

#1 AC GENERATOR CONTROL P/J1-1 73 79 19 20

UNIT (GCU) P/J1-1
37
K1X

36

71 DRV
K1Y

58 RTN

P/O K3

44

#1 AC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-97.  Caution Lights Illustration

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Caution Lights NOTES

Refer to Figure 24-97. Caution Lights
Illustration.

For AC generator and AC bus caution lights,

the AC variable frequency system has the
interfaces that follow:

•• An auxiliary contact of the X coil of AC

line contactor K1 is monitored by the
[K1X STATUS] of the No.1 AC GCU
to control the No.1 AC GEN caution
light.
•• An auxiliary contact of the Y coil of
AC line contactor K1 is monitored by
the [K1Y STATUS] of No.1 AC GCU
to control the L AC BUS caution light
•• An [AC GEN] signal is supplied by
No.1 AC GCU to the CAWP to make the
No.1 AC GEN caution light illuminate.
•• An [AC BUS] signal is supplied by
No.1 AC GCU to the CAWP to make
the L AC BUS caution light illuminate.
•• An overheat [OVT] signal is supplied
by No.1 AC generator to the CAWP to
make the No.1 AC GEN HOT caution
light illuminate.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-191

24-192 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

P/J15-1 2431-P/J11

Np <> 64% B 33
FIELD SIG STATUS F 12

P/J16-1
FIELD RTN B

#1 AC GENERATOR CONTROL
UNIT (GCU)

DASH 8 Q400
P/J2
1 FIELD
2 FIELD RTN
3
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

4 PMG

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

5

T4
P/J1
6 P/J1
PH
9 123 #1 AC VOLT PHA
C
5 8 122 #1 AC VOLT PHB
4 7 115 #1 AC VOLT PHC
115 PH A VOLT SENSE
PH
119 PH B VOLT SENSE
B
3 120 PH C VOLT SENSE
2
PH
A
1
T1

T2

T3

ELECTRICAL POWER
#1 AC GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT (EPCU)
24-31-00

P/J10 1 9811-P/J138
L AC VM PHA
A 1A A
L AC VM PHB
B 1A B
L AC VM PHC
C 1A C

115 V AC VARIABLE FREQUNECY CBP

24-51-00

Figure 24-98.  Continuous Built-In Test Schematic

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CBIT VOLT PHA], [No.1 AC VOLT PHB],

and [No.1 AC VOLT PHC] inputs of the
Refer to Figure 24-98. Continuous Built-In Test EPCU.
Schematic. •• The propeller speed [NP<>64%] output of
the No.1 AC GCU is also monitored by
For CBIT of the AC generator field circuit,
EPCU.
the AC variable frequency system has the
interfaces that follow:
NOTE
•• The field return of the AC generator The No.1 part of the AC variable
field return [FIELD RTN] is monitored frequency system is described.
by the No.1 AC GCU. The No.2 part is similar.
•• A field signal status [FIELD SIG
Fault Diagnostics:
STATUS] output is then supplied by the
No.1 AC GCU to the EPCU for CBIT. The highlighted fault codes 23, 24, 25, 26, 27,
28 are associated with the AC generation and
For CBIT of a feeder fault, the AC variable
distribution systems.
frequency system has the interfaces that follow:
Troubleshooting:
•• The LEFT AC VM PH A, PH B, and PH
C voltage of the 115 VAC VARIABLE Pilot report - No.1 AC GEN caution light and
FREQUENCY LEFT BUS is monitored Master Caution light illuminated at FL 230.
by the [PHA VOLT SENSE], [PHB VOLT No.1 AC GEN switch cycled to off then to AC
SENSE], and [PHC VOLT SENSE] inputs GEN 1 position with no improvement.
of the electrical power control unit (EPCU)
for voltage indication. 1. What maintenance actions will you take?
•• The output voltage of the No.1 AC 2. Will the fault isolation steps be different if
generator is monitored by the [No.1 AC fault code 25 is also recorded on the EPCU?

Code Fault Aribuon Code Fault Aribuon

01 #1 DC FEEDER 19 K21 (DC) FAIL
02 #2 DC FEEDER 20 K22 (DC) FAIL

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

03 APU DC FEEDER 21 K24 (DC) FAIL
04 #1 DC GCU 22 K26 (DC) FAIL OPEN
05 #1 DC GEN 23 K3 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
24 K4 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
06 #2 DC GCU
25 #1 AC GEN FEEDER
07 #2 DC GEN
26 #2 AC GEN FEEDER
08 APU DC GCU
27 #1 AC GCU FAIL
09 APU DC GEN
28 #2 AC GCU FAIL
10 K1 FAIL OPEN
29 EPCU-K25 DRV FAIL
11 K2 FAIL OPEN
30 EPCU-K5 DRV FAIL
12 K3 (DC) FAIL
31 EPCU-K6 DRV FAIL
13 K4 (DC) FAIL 32 EPCU-K7 DRV FAIL
14 K5 (DC) FAIL OPEN 33 EPCU-K8 DRV FAIL
15 K5 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 34 EPCU-K9 DRV FAIL
16 K6 (DC) FAIL OPEN 35 EPCU-K21 DRV FAIL
17 K6 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 36 EPCU-K22 DRV FAIL
18 K9 (DC) FAIL 37 DC EP OVERVOLTAGE

Figure 24-99.  Fault Codes - AC Generation and Distribution Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-193

24-194 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
ELECTRICAL POWER
PROTECTION UNIT

DASH 8 Q400
5
#1 AC GEN F1,F2,F3
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CT 1 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7
#2 AC GCU

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT POWER EXT POWER CT 5

CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS
CONTACTOR OFF BUS
(K1) CONTACTOR
(K2) SPU CONTACTOR
EXT (K7)
PWR

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEGEND
LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU
CT Current Transformer
F Fuse
TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY
FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS
fsd01a01.cgm

Figure 24-100.  External AC Power System Block Diagram - Control

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-41-00 EXTERNAL AC NOTES

POWER SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The external AC power system supplies 115
VAC electrical power to the AC variable
frequency system.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 24-100. External AC Power
System Block Diagram - Control.

115 VAC three-phase electrical power

is supplied through an AC external power
receptacle to let an external power source
energize the AC variable frequency system
when the aircraft is on the ground and the
engines are not operating.

The external power protection unit controls the

line contactors.

The toggle switches on the AC CONTROL

panel give manual control of the external AC
power system.

The external AC power system has the units:

•• AC External Power Receptacle

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• EPPU.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-195

24-196 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

EXTERNAL AC
RECEPTACLE
OFF OFF

GEN 1 GEN 2
EXTERNAL POWER
PROTECTION UNIT

DASH 8 Q400
5
#1 AC GEN
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

5
AC GEN
AC GEN #2 AC GEN CONT 2
#1 AC GCU CT 1 F1, F2,F3 CT 4
CONT 1 RIGHT DC (MAIN), P7
#2 AC GCU

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEFT DC (MAIN), D7

CT 2 EXT POWER EXT POWER

CT 5
CONTACTOR CT 3 CT 6 CONTACTOR
(K3) (K4)
X Y Y X
AC SPU

BUS
CONTACTOR OFF BUS
(K1) CONTACTOR
(K2) SPU CONTACTOR
EXT (K7)
PWR

LEFT GALLEY BUS LEFT AC BUS RIGHT AC BUS RIGHT GALLEY BUS
GALLEY LOAD GALLEY LOAD
SHED CONTACTOR SHED CONTACTOR
(K5) 35 L TRU R TRU 35 (K6)
115 VAC VAR FREQ 115 VAC VAR FREQ

LEGEND
LEFT TRU RIGHT TRU
CT Current Transformer
F Fuse
TO LEFT DC SECONDARY TO RIGHT DC SECONDARY
FEEDER BUS FEEDER BUS
fse83a01a.cgm

Figure 24-101.  AC Variable Frequency System, External Power Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION contactors K3 and K1 to the left AC bus and

K4 and K2 to the right AC bus.
Refer to Figure 24-101. AC Variable Frequency
System, External Power Operation. If an external AC power fault is sensed by the
EPPU, line contactors K4, K3, K1 and K2 are
The external AC power operates when the: opened to disconnect the external AC power
from the buses.
•• BATTERY MASTER toggle switch is
set to energize the AC external power This fault is also sensed by the EPCU.
protection unit and
•• AC external power is set.

External power contactors K3 and K4 are

energized by the EPPU, and K1 and K2 are
energized by the AC GCUs.

The external AC system has protective

functions to prevent damage to the system.

The external AC is continuously monitored for

fault conditions:

•• Voltage level
(undervoltage, overvoltage)
•• Frequency
(underfrequency, overfrequency)
•• Phase Rotation.

The faults are isolated to give continued

operation.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

The external AC system uses the EPCU for
CBIT.

During the external AC mode of operation, the

EPPU closes the Ext Pwr K4 line contactor.
Line contactor K3 is then energized by K4.
Line contactor K3 supplies a signal to the
two AC GCUs to energize the generator line
contactors K1 and K2 to the cross-tie position.

The galley load shed contactors are controlled

by the generator line contactors. The two galley
load shed contactors are automatically closed
when the AC buses are energized by external
AC power.

External AC electrical power is supplied

through the AC external power receptacle,

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-197

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION On aircraft with the relocated AC external

power receptacle (824CH00114): It is located
External Power Receptacle in the right nose fuselage.

Refer to Figure 24-102. AC External Power The unit has four large gauge pins to carry the
Receptacle. three-phase AC current and two smaller pins
for interface control.
The AC external power receptacle is normally
located on the right engine nacelle. It gives the interface connection between
external AC power source and the aircraft.

D
INB

FW
D

A AC EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FWD

OU
TB
D

B AC EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE

FW
D

D
INB

fsf72a02.cgm

Figure 24-102.  AC External Power Receptacle

24-198 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

External AC Power Protection Unit It monitors the parameters for:

Refer to Figure 24-103. External AC Power •• Undervoltage, 106 VAC

Protection Unit.
•• Overvoltage, 124 VAC
The external AC power protection unit is •• Underfrequency, 370 Hz
located in the right AC contactor box. It is
•• Overfrequency, 450 Hz
attached with screws.
•• Phase Rotation.
The AC external power protection unit monitors
the quality of the input power to the AC external
power receptacle and prevents connection of
the power to the aircraft distribution system, if
the power is not satisfactory.

A D
INB

FW
D

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

B

A RIGHT AC CONTACTOR BOX

fsf67a01.cgm B

Figure 24-103.  External AC Power Protection Unit

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-199

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Controls and Indications

Refer to Figure 24-104. External AC Power
System - AC Control Panel.

The AC CONTROL panel has the EXT PWR

control for the external AC power system.

The external AC power is connected to the AC

buses when the:

•• Good external AC power is connected

to the aircraft, and
•• BATTERY MASTER toggle switch on
the DC CONTROL panel is set, and
•• EXT PWR toggle switch on the AC
CONTROL panel is set.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

A
fse75a03.cgm

Figure 24-104.  External AC Power System - AC Control Panel

24-200 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 24-105. EIS External AC Power The EIS ELECTRICAL systems page shows an
System Indications. AC EXT PWR ON message when:

The MFD ELECTRICAL system page has an •• AC external power voltage is more
AC external power message. than 106 VAC and less than 124 VAC,
frequency is more than 370 Hz and less
than 450 Hz, phase rotation is phase A,
phase B, then phase C, and
•• AC EXT PWR toggle switch is set, and
•• AC external power is energizing the left
and right 115 VAC buses.

MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRICAL AC EXT
PWR ON

MAIN 00 22 +1.00 115

AUX - .34 22 115
S T B Y - .34 22 115

+1.00 .06

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

E S S 28.1 28.1 115
MAIN 28.1 28.1 115
S E C 28.1 28.1 +1.00 +1.00 115

PSI x 1000

Figure 24-105.  EIS External AC Power System Indications

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-201

24-202 24  ELECTRICAL POWER

#2 GEN
A PH A
PH B K2
B
PH C
C A B C

DASH 8 Q400
N
PHA PHB PHC
E
F RIGHT AC BUS
K3 #1 GEN
EXTERNAL POWER A F3 100A
A A
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

CONNECTOR B
C F2 100A
B B
F1 100A A B C
C C K1
EXT POWER

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LOGIC (FB)
PHAPHB PHC
28 V DC
R ESS BUS LEFT AC BUS
39 60

R DC C/B PNL 53
10
30 LEFT #1 AC
K4 CONTACTOR BOX
EXT PWR SW 40

AC EXT PWR
W - EXT PWR
MONITOR
T 6 AC EXT
PWR SW #1 AC GCU
U
EPCU
V 60 19
20
W - EXT PWR
AC CONTROL
PANEL
#2 AC GCU
RIGHT #2 AC CONTACTOR BOX

Figure 24-106.  AC External Power Receptacle

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION AC EXTERNAL POWER

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
Refer to Figure 24-106. AC External Power
Receptacle. Connect AC External Power to
The external AC system has interfaces for the
the Aircraft
following functions: Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
•• Control of the K3 and K4 EXTERNAL
POWER CONTACTOR. 1. Pull circuit breakers for L & R AOA Vane
Heater, Pitot Heat 1 & 2, Standby Hydraulic
•• Protective functions for the external
Pump 1.
AC power.
2. Position a work stand near the right hand
•• External AC power indication on the
nacelle for supporting the AC external
MFD ELECTRICAL system page
power cable.
•• CBIT.
3. Make sure that the STBY HYD PRESS
switch in the flight compartment is not
For Control of the K3 and K4 EXTERNAL
pushed in. This will prevent accidental SPU
POWER CONTACTOR, the AC variable
operation when you connect the external
frequency system interfaces with:
AC electrical power.
•• C o n t a c t s i n t h e A C E X T E R N A L 4. Make sure that the DC CONTROL switches
POWER MONITOR (EPPU) close when on the AC and DC control panel are in the
it senses that phase A [PH A], phase B OFF position and put the BATT MASTER
[PH B], and phase C [PH C] supplied to ON position.
by the external AC power is good. 28
5. Connect AC external power by setting AC
VDC is then supplied through the circuit
external power switch to EXT PWR and
breaker F8 (EXT PWR LOGIC) on the
verify that all 3 phases of AC GEN1 and
R ESS BUS, the EPPU, pins E and F
GEN 2 show 115±3 VAC.
(the smaller pins) of the EXTERNAL
POWER CONNECTOR, back through 6. Check the green AC EXT POWER message
the EPPU, to the coil of K4. appears on the top right hand corner.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• A ground signal is supplied through the 7. When using external AC power for an
EXTERNAL POWER SW in the AC extended period of time, open the upper
CONTROL PANEL to the coil of K4 forward nose doors for better ventilation
to energize K4. of the TRUs.
•• W h e n K 4 i s e n e r g i z e d , 2 8 V D C
electrical power is also supplied through
auxiliary contacts of K4 to the coil of
K3 to energize K3.
•• Then, 28-VDC is supplied through
auxiliary contacts of K3 to [EXT PWR]
of the No.1 AC GCU and No.2 AC GCU
to energize the Y coils of contactor K1
and K2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-203

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Remove AC External Power from Fault Diagnostics:

the Aircraft Refer to Figure 24-106. AC External Power
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a Receptacle.
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
The highlighted fault codes 23, 24 are
associated with the AC external power system.
1. In the flight compartment, set the EXT
PWR switch on the AC CONTROL panel Troubleshooting:
to the OFF position.
After the engines were started and propellers
2. Stop the AC external power unit
selected to MIN, you noticed the No.2 AC GEN
caution light remains on but nothing else seems to
CAUTION have lost electrical power. You are also aware that
the AC ground power was used throughout the 7
Stop the AC ground power unit
days before the aircraft was towed from the hanger.
(GPU) before you disconnect
the GPU cable from the external 1. What maintenance actions will you take?
power receptacle. If you do not
do this, there can be electrical 2. What other indications will you look for
damage to the external power before troubleshooting starts?
receptacle and the cable assembly. 3. If fault code 23 is shown on the EPCU,
what action will you take?
3. Disconnect the cable of the AC external
power unit from the AC ground power
receptacle on the aircraft.

Code Fault Aribuon Code Fault Aribuon

01 #1 DC FEEDER 19 K21 (DC) FAIL
02 #2 DC FEEDER 20 K22 (DC) FAIL
21 K24 (DC) FAIL
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

03 APU DC FEEDER
04 #1 DC GCU 22 K26 (DC) FAIL OPEN
05 #1 DC GEN 23 K3 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
24 K4 (AC) FAIL CLOSED
06 #2 DC GCU
25 #1 AC GEN FEEDER
07 #2 DC GEN
26 #2 AC GEN FEEDER
08 APU DC GCU
27 #1 AC GCU FAIL
09 APU DC GEN
28 #2 AC GCU FAIL
10 K1 FAIL OPEN
29 EPCU-K25 DRV FAIL
11 K2 FAIL OPEN
30 EPCU-K5 DRV FAIL
12 K3 (DC) FAIL
31 EPCU-K6 DRV FAIL
13 K4 (DC) FAIL 32 EPCU-K7 DRV FAIL
14 K5 (DC) FAIL OPEN 33 EPCU-K8 DRV FAIL
15 K5 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 34 EPCU-K9 DRV FAIL
16 K6 (DC) FAIL OPEN 35 EPCU-K21 DRV FAIL
17 K6 (DC) FAIL CLOSED 36 EPCU-K22 DRV FAIL
18 K9 (DC) FAIL 37 DC EP OVERVOLTAGE

Figure 24-107.  Fault Codes - AC External Power System

24-204 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-205

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

115V AC VARIABLE FREQUENCY

LEFT BUS RIGHT BUS
L R
IRS DRAIN LAV
WSHLD 35 71/2 10 WSHLD 35
FAN MAST HTRS
HT HT

L R
L R PITOT
AOA PITOT AOA
ICE 5 71/2 71/2 ICE 5 71/2 HEAT 71/2
VANE HEAT VANE
DET DET 2
HT 1 HT

INTK INTK
LIP L LIP
HTR 15 WDO HTR GALLEY
10 15
ENG 1 HT ENG 2 HTRS

LEFT AC VM RIGHT AC VM

PH A 1 PH B 1 PH C 1 PH A 1 PH B 1 PH C 1

3 PH
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

L TRU 35 R TRU 35

FUEL FUEL
AUX 5 AUX 5
PMP 1 PMP 2

Figure 24-108.  115 VAC Variable Frequency Circuit Breaker Panel

24-206 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-51-00 ELECTRICAL CAUTION

LOAD DISTRIBUTION DO NOT LET THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL TOUCH
THE ADJACENT SIDE
INTRODUCTION WINDOW. WHEN YOU
INSTALL THE CIRCUIT
Three-phase, 115 VAC variable frequency
BREAKER PANEL, IT IS
electrical power is distributed through a circuit
EASY TO PUT A SCRATCH
breaker panel in the flight compartment to
IN THE SIDE WINDOW. THIS
electrical loads. Some distribution is done at
WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO
the AC contactor boxes.
THE SIDE WINDOW.
GENERAL It has circuit breakers attached to the panel.
Panel markings identify the buses and circuit
Phase A, phase B, and phase C 115 VAC breakers.
electrical power is supplied through circuit
breakers in the left and right AC contactor
boxes to:

•• 115 VAC variable frequency circuit

breaker panel
•• Propellers anti-icing system
•• Galley ovens and water boilers
•• Main hydraulic system No.1.

The AC electrical load distribution has a 115

VAC variable frequency circuit breaker panel.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

Circuit breakers (CB) in the 115 VAC
variable frequency circuit breaker panel and
AC contactor box protect the wires in the AC
variable frequency system.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
115 VAC Variable Frequency
Circuit Breaker Panel
Refer to Figure 24-108. 115 VAC Variable
Frequency Circuit Breaker Panel.

The 115 VAC variable frequency circuit

breaker panel is installed on the rear flight
compartment bulkhead above and aft of the
right 28 VDC circuit breaker panel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-207

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEFT NACELLE
CB 2
F
E L PROP DE-ICE
30-61-00
PHA D
35A

PHB
CB 3
K5 C
PHC LOAD
SHED B GALLEY OVEN #1
15A A
CB 4
G
F GALLEY OVEN #2

K5 15A E

PH PH PH
C B A

39 72 99
+28 V DC
RIGHT NACELLE
14 72 38 99
K6

K4 K2 CB 12
F
E R PROP DE-ICE
30-61-00
35A D
CB 13
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

PHC C
MOD G1 GALLEY __WATER BOILER (25-33-02)
B OR
PHB MOD G4 GALLEY . OVEN #3 (25-33-06)
15A A
CB 14
PHA K6 LOAD
SHED G
F
15A E
PH PH PH CB 18
A B C
A
B
C MAIN HYDRAULIC (#1) SYSTEM
60A
P/J1-2 29-12-00
16

K7 STANDBY POWER UNIT (SPU)

CONTACTOR
41

Figure 24-109.  AC Electrical Load Distribution - L ACCB and R ACCB (Sheet 1 of 2)

24-208 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION Three-phase, 115 VAC variable frequency

electrical power is supplied through three 15 A
Refer to: circuit breakers on the L and R AC CONTACTOR
BOX to the GALLEY OVENS (25-30-00).
•• Figure 24-109. AC Electrical Load
Distribution - L ACCB and R ACCB Three-phase, 115 VAC variable frequency
(Sheet 1 of 2). electrical power is supplied through three 15
A circuit breakers on the R AC CONTACTOR
•• Figure 24-110. AC Electrical Load BOX to the WATER BOILERS (25-30-00).
Distribution - L ACCB and R ACCB
(Sheet 2 of 2). Three-phase, 115 VAC variable frequency
electrical power is supplied through three 60
Three-phase, 115 VAC variable frequency A circuit breakers on the R AC CONTACTOR
electrical power is supplied through three BOX to the MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
50 A circuit breakers on the L and R AC 1 (29-12-00).
CONTACTOR BOX to the 115 VAC
VARIABLE FREQUENCY CIRCUIT The left part of the AC electrical load distribution
BREAKER PANEL. is described. The right part is similar.
Three-phase, 115 VAC variable frequency
electrical power is supplied through three
35 A circuit breakers on the L and R AC
CONTACTOR BOX to the PROPELLERS
ANTI-ICING SYSTEM (30-61-00).

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

C TB1
L AC VM PH A
1A A A 50A P HC CONT’D
L AC VM PH B AT
1A B B 50A P HB
‘C’
L AC VM PH C (SHT.3)
1A C C 50A P HA

115 VAC VARIABLE FREQUENCY CBP #1 AC CONTACTOR BOX

24-61-00

Figure 24-110.  AC Electrical Load Distribution - L ACCB and R ACCB (Sheet 2 of 2)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-209

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-00-00 SPECIAL TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• HP 4328A milliohmmeter or equivalent
•• GSB1200012 Battery Lifting Device Model No. 04 - 6000-0900
•• Commercially Available Thomas and Betts Crimping Tool - P159-TBFP
•• Commercially Available Tyco Crimping Tool - 1490749-1
•• Commercially Available Multimeter, Fluke series 80 or equivalent
•• Commercially Available Bonding meter, capable of reading 1 milli-ohm range
•• GSB3411011 Air Data Test Set (Pitot testing)
•• GSB3411013 Pitot/Static Pressure Test Adapters 100-400 series
•• GSB1216008 Tire Servicing Gage
•• GSB3240002 Tire Pressure Gage
•• GSB2000009 Digital Inclinometer
•• ATC-600A ATC/DME Ramp Test Set
•• MLS-800 MLS Test Set
•• GSB2400001 Digital Multimeter, Fluke 87

24-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for details on these maintenance procedures:

•• AMM 24-21-21-000-801 Removal of the Contactors from the RH AC Contactor Box

•• AMM 24-21-21-400-801 Installation of the Contactors in the RH AC Contactor Box
•• AMM 24-20-00-710-801 O
 perational Check of the AC Contactors K2Y, K3 and K4
24  ELECTRICAL POWER

(CMR# 242000−102)
•• AMM 24-20-00-710-802 Operational Test of the K1 and K2 Contactors
•• AMM 24-00-00-700-801 A
 C Power, DC Power and Battery Maintenance Practice
Recommendations
•• AMM 24-00-00-861-801 Energize the Electrical System
•• AMM 24-00-00-861-802 De-energize the Electrical System
•• AMM 24-00-00-910-801 Electrical/Electronic Safety Precautions
•• AMM 24-00-00-910-802 Electrostatic Discharge Safety Precautions
•• AMM 24-31-03-000-801 Removal of the Quick Attach/Detach Housing
•• AMM 24-31-03-400-801 Installation of the Quick Attach/Detach Housing
•• FIM 24-30-00-810-801 AUX BATTERY (Caution) − Fault Isolation
•• FIM 24-30-00-810-802 AUX BAT HOT (Warning) − Fault Isolation
•• FIM 24-30-00-810-803 L TRU (Caution) − Fault Isolation
•• FIM 24-30-00-810-804 L TRU HOT (Caution) − Fault Isolation

24-210 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• FIM 24-30-00-810-805 MAIN BATTERY (Caution) − Fault Isolation

•• FIM 24-30-00-810-806 MAIN BAT HOT (Warning) − Fault Isolation
•• FIM 24-30-00-810-807 STBY BAT HOT (Warning) − Fault Isolation
•• FIM 24-30-00-810-808 STBY BATTERY (Caution) − Fault Isolation
•• FIM 24-30-00-810-809 DC BUS (Caution) − Fault Isolation
•• AMM 24-31-00-710-801 O
 perational Check of the DC Contactors K3,K4,K5,K6,K21 and
K24 (CMR# 243100–105)
•• AMM 24-31-00-710-802 Operational Test of the Main 28V DC Generation System
•• AMM 24-31-00-710-803 O
 perational Check of the DC Essential Bus Diodes CR 4, CR5,
CR6 and CR8 (CMR# 243100–106)
•• AMM 24-31-00-710-804 O
 perational Check of the DC Circuit Breakers CB50, CBR01,
CBL01 and CBS04 (CMR# 243100–107)
•• AMM 24-31-00-710-805 O
 perational Check of the DC Essential Bus Diodes CR2 and
CR3 (CMR#243100–102)
•• AMM 24-31-06-710-801 Operational Test of the DC Generator Control Unit
•• AMM 24-31-11-710-801 Operational Test of the DC Electrical Power Control Unit (EPCU)
•• AMM 24-31-31-710-801 Operational Test of the DC Contactor Box Contactors
•• AMM 24-31-36-710-801 Operational Test of the Standby Contactor Box
•• AMM 24-31-11-742-801 Retrieval of Data from the Electrical Power Control Unit (EPCU)
•• AMM 24-31-11-743-802 Erase the Data from the Electrical Power Control Unit (EPCU)
•• AMM 24-32-21-000-801 Removal of the Standby Battery
•• AMM 24-32-21-400-801 Installation of the Standby Battery
•• AMM 24-32-00-610-801 Servicing of the Battery System Sump Jar

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

•• AMM 24-32-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Battery System
•• AMM 24-33-00-710-801 Operational Test of the APU 28V DC Generation System
•• AMM 12-00-06-861-803 Connection of the External AC Electrical Power
•• AMM 12-00-06-861-804 Removal of the External AC Electrical Power
•• AMM 24-41-00-710-801 Operational Test of the External AC Power System
•• AMM 12-00-06-861-801 Connection of the External DC Electrical Power
•• AMM 12-00-06-861-802 Removal of the External DC Electrical Power
•• FIM 24-42-00-810-801 D
 C External Power, The DC EXT POWER ON message does not
come into view − Fault Isolation
•• AMM 24-42-00-710-801 Operational Test of the External DC Power System
•• AMM 24-50-60-000-801 Removal of the Relay Junction Box 1, 2, 3
•• AMM 24-50-60-400-801 Installation of the Relay Junction Box 1, 2, 3
•• AMM 24-51-01-000-801 Removal of the 115V AC Variable Frequency Circuit Breaker Panel
•• AMM 24-51-01-400-801 Installation of the 115V AC Variable Frequency Circuit Breaker Panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 24-211

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

24-00-00 CAUTIONS & WARNINGS

WARNING

Obey all the safety precautions when you do maintenance on or near electrical/
electronic equipment. If you do not do this, you can cause injuries to persons and
damage to the equipment.

WARNING

Do not use electrical test equipment that can cause a spark in areas where explosive
gases occur. This can cause an explosion that will cause damage to equipment and
injuries to personnel.

WARNING

Obey all the electrostatic discharge safety precautions when you do maintenance
on or near devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If you do not do this, you can
cause damage to the equipment.

CAUTION
Set the external power source current limit to a minimum of 1500 amps and maintain
the aircraft main bus voltage at 28 VDC for dry motoring or engine starts.

Monitor the external DC power source at all times. If the external DC power source
goes off line, this will decrease the battery power.

Monitor the temperature of the batteries during battery charging.

24  ELECTRICAL POWER

If you do not do this, you can cause damage to the batteries.

CAUTION
If you do not disconnect the AC power current to the aircraft, you can damage the
Transformer Rectifier Unit (TRU) when starting an engine.

24-212 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 31
INDICATING AND RECORDING
CONTENTS
Page
31-00-00 INDICATING AND RECORDING ............................................................. 31-1

Introduction......................................................................................................... 31-1

31-61-00 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT SYSTEM.................................................... 31-3

Introduction......................................................................................................... 31-3

General ............................................................................................................... 31-3

System Description.............................................................................................. 31-7

Component Description........................................................................................ 31-8

Display Unit.................................................................................................. 31-8

Display Unit Lighting Module............................................................................ 31-11

Electronic Flight Instrument (EFIS) Control Panel............................................. 31-12

Engine Systems Integrated Display (ESID)................................................. 31-15

Operational Test of the Electronic Instrument System................................. 31-15

Index Control Panel..................................................................................... 31-16

Controls and Indications.............................................................................. 31-17

Operation........................................................................................................... 31-37

31-41-00 FLIGHT DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM (FDPS)...................................... 31-47

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Introduction....................................................................................................... 31-47

General.............................................................................................................. 31-47

System Description............................................................................................ 31-49

Mismatch Calculations................................................................................ 31-51

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Essential Monitoring................................................................................... 31-53

Advisory Message Calculations.................................................................. 31-53

Warning Tone Generator (WTG)................................................................. 31-55

Component Description...................................................................................... 31-59

Integrated Flight Cabinet............................................................................. 31-59

Input/Output Processor Module................................................................... 31-61

Prime Power Supply Module (PPSM).......................................................... 31-63

Aircraft Configuration Module (ACM)....................................................... 31-65

Controls and Indications.............................................................................. 31-67

31-21-00 CLOCKS.................................................................................................... 31-75

Introduction....................................................................................................... 31-75

General.............................................................................................................. 31-75

Component Description...................................................................................... 31-77

Digital Electronic Clock.............................................................................. 31-77

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 31-78

Adjustment of the Digital Electronic Clock................................................. 31-79

31-32-00 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM (FDR).......................................... 31-81

Introduction....................................................................................................... 31-81

General.............................................................................................................. 31-81
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Component Description...................................................................................... 31-83

Flight Data Recorder................................................................................... 31-83

Universal Flight Data Recorder (FDR)........................................................ 31-84

Flight Signal Conditioning Unit (FSCU)............................................................ 31-87

31-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page
Impact Switch............................................................................................. 31-89

FDR Underwater Locating Device............................................................... 31-91

Controls and Indications.............................................................................. 31-93

31-34-00 EXTENDED QUICK ACCESS RECORDER (EQAR) SYSTEM............... 31-95

Introduction....................................................................................................... 31-95

General ............................................................................................................. 31-95

System Description............................................................................................ 31-95

Operational Test of the Flight Data Recorder System (FDR)....................... 31-95

Component Description...................................................................................... 31-97

Extended Quick Access Recorder (EQAR) Unit.......................................... 31-97

Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 31-99

31-36-00 MICRO QUICK ACCESS RECORDER SYSTEM (MQAR)....................31-101

Introduction.....................................................................................................31-101

General Description.........................................................................................31-101

Detailed Description........................................................................................31-101

Operation.........................................................................................................31-101

Micro Quick Access Recorder...................................................................31-102

31-50-00 CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM............................................................31-105

Introduction.....................................................................................................31-105
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-51-00 CAUTION AND WARNING LIGHTS SYSTEM....................................31-105

Introduction.....................................................................................................31-105

General............................................................................................................31-105

System Description..........................................................................................31-108

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page

Caution and Warning Panel.......................................................................31-108

Advisory Control Unit...............................................................................31-109

Caution/Advisory Lights Panel..................................................................31-110

Master Warning Switch.............................................................................31-111

Master Caution Switch..............................................................................31-112

Caution and Advisory Test Switch.............................................................31-113

Controls and Indications..................................................................................31-115

Operation.........................................................................................................31-119

31-52-00 TAKE-OFF WARNING SYSTEM............................................................31-123

Introduction.....................................................................................................31-123

General Description.........................................................................................31-123

Operation.........................................................................................................31-125

Functional Test of the Take-off Warning System........................................31-125

31-53-00 TOUCHED RUNWAY SYSTEM..............................................................31-127

Introduction.....................................................................................................31-127

System Description and Operation...................................................................31-127

Controls and Indications..................................................................................31-127

Component Description....................................................................................31-127

Tail Strike Switch......................................................................................31-127

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

32-62-00 LANDING GEAR CONFIGURATION WARNING SYSTEM..................31-129

Introduction.....................................................................................................31-129

System Description and Operation...................................................................31-129

31-iv FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Page

Case 1.......................................................................................................31-129

Case 2.......................................................................................................31-131

Case 3.......................................................................................................31-133

31-00-00 SPECIAL TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT...............................................31-134

31-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................31-136

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-v

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page
31-1 Electronic Instrument System (EIS) Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)............31-2

31-2 Electronic Instrument System (EIS) Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)............31-4

31-3 Monitoring of Critical Parameters .............................................................31-6

31-4 Display Unit..............................................................................................31-8

31-5 Display Unit Lighting Module.................................................................31-11

31-6 Electronic Flight Instrument (EFIS) Control Panel..................................31-12

31-7 Electronic Flight Instrument (EFIS) Control Panel, Block Diagram.........31-13

31-8 Engine Systems Integrated Display (ESID) Control Panel

Block Diagram........................................................................................31-14

31-9 Index Control Panel.................................................................................31-16

31-10 EFIS Control Panel..................................................................................31-17

31-11 ESID Control Panel.................................................................................31-20

31-12 Index Control Panel.................................................................................31-22

31-13 Primary Flight Display (PFD)..................................................................31-24

31-14 
Multi-Function Display 1 (MFD1) - MAP Mode......................................31-26

31-15 
Multi-Function Display 1 (MFD1) - PLAN Mode....................................31-26

31-16 
Multi-Function Display 1 (MFD1) - ARC Mode......................................31-27

31-17 
Multi-Function Display 1 (MFD1) - Composite Indication......................31-28

31-18 
Multi-Function Display 2 (MFD 2) - Electrical System Page ....................31-29
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-19 
Multi-Function Display 1 (MFD1) - Engine System Page........................31-30

31-20 
Multi-Function Display 2 (MFD 2) - Fuel System Page...........................31-32

31-21 
Multi-Function Display 2 (MFD 2) - Doors System Page.........................31-33

Revision 0.5 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-vii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

31-22 Engine Display (ED)................................................................................31-34

31-23 Indication of Navigation Data..................................................................31-36

31-24 EIS Reversion..........................................................................................31-38

31-25 Power Supply...........................................................................................31-40

31-26 ON/OFF Control......................................................................................31-42

31-27 Continuous Monitoring............................................................................31-44

31-28 Flight Data Processing System (FDPS) Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)..........31-46

31-29 Flight Data Processing System (FDPS) Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)..........31-48

31-30 Mismatch Calculations ...........................................................................31-50

31-31 Essential Monitoring Calculation ............................................................31-52

31-32 FDPS Warning Tone Generators (WTG1, WTG2)....................................31-54

31-33 Warning Tone Generators.........................................................................31-56

31-34 Integrated Flight Cabinet.........................................................................31-58

31-35 Input/Output Module and Processor Module............................................31-60

31-36 Prime Power Supply Module (PPSM).......................................................31-62

31-37 Aircraft Configuration Module................................................................31-64

31-38 IFC Advisory Messages...........................................................................31-66

31-39 AVIONICS Caution Light on CWP..........................................................31-68

31-40 IOP1 FAIL...............................................................................................31-70

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-41 IOP2 FAIL...............................................................................................31-72

31-42 Clocks - Block Diagram..........................................................................31-74

31-43 Electronic Clocks....................................................................................31-76

31-44 Electronic Clock......................................................................................31-76

31-viii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

31-45 Electronic Clock......................................................................................31-78

31-46 Flight Data Recorder (FDR) Block Diagram............................................31-80

31-47 Flight Data Recorder...............................................................................31-82

31-48 FDR (Universal)......................................................................................31-84

31-49 Flight Signal Conditioning Unit...............................................................31-86

31-50 Impact Switch..........................................................................................31-88

31-51 FDR Underwater Locating Device...........................................................31-90

31-52 FDR Controls and Indication...................................................................31-92

31-53 Extended Quick Access Recorder (EQAR) System Block Diagram..........31-94

31-54 Extended Quick Access Recorder (EQAR) Unit.......................................31-96

31-55 EQAR Indication.....................................................................................31-98

31-56 MQAR System..................................................................................... 31-100

31-57 Micro Quick Access Recorder............................................................... 31-102

31-58 Caution and Warning Lights System..................................................... 31-104

31-59 Caution and Warning Lights System, Advisory Lights.......................... 31-106

31-60 Caution And Warning Panel (CWP)...................................................... 31-108

31-61 Advisory Control Unit.......................................................................... 31-109

31-62 Caution/Advisory Lights Panel............................................................. 31-110

31-63 Master Warning Switch......................................................................... 31-111

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-64 Caution/Advisory Lights Panel............................................................. 31-112

31-65 Master Warning Switch......................................................................... 31-113

31-66 Caution and Warning Panel and Glareshield Panel................................ 31-114

31-67 Caution/Warning Lights Panel Dim and, BRT Selections...................... 31-116

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-ix

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

31-68 Caution And Warning Lights System, Power To Caution and Warning
Panel (CWP)......................................................................................... 31-118

31-69 Caution And Warning Lights System, Inputs And Outputs.................... 31-120

31-70 Caution and Warning Lights System, Power to Advisory Control Unit....... 31-121

31-71 Flight Compartment Take-Off Configuration........................................ 31-122

31-72 FDPS Incorrect Take-off Configuration Warning.................................. 31-124

31-73 Touched Runway System, Block Diagram............................................. 31-126

31-74 Touched Runway Warning Light........................................................... 31-126

31-75 Tail Strike Switch................................................................................. 31-127

31-76 Incorrect Landing Configuration - Airspeed, Radio Altitude and

PLA Position with No Muting Capabilities........................................... 31-128

31-77 Incorrect Landing Configuration - Flap Lever and Engine Torque

with No Muting Capabilities................................................................. 31-130

31-78 Incorrect Landing Configuration - Single Engine Operation................. 31-132

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-x FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 31
INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-00-00 INDICATING AND RECORDING

INTRODUCTION
The indicating and recording system has the systems that follow:

•• Clocks
•• Flight Data Recorder System (FDR)
•• Extended Quick Access Recorder (EQAR) System
•• Flight Data Processing System (FDPS)
•• Central Warning System
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

•• Electronic Instruments System.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-1

31-2 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

PILOT EFIS DISPLAY ESID DISPLAY CO-PILOT EFIS DISPLAY

WX OFF HDG 1 FMS1 075 NTOP NTOP ELECTRICAL

057 00 90 % TRQ 90 %
HDG 057° %
35.0 NM
3 E --:--
HDG SEL GA
NH 3 3 NH HDG SEL GA
ALT SEL %RPM %RPM
00 ALT SEL
MAIN 01 116 16
5000 40
CNU9 AUX 01 115 16 HSI 5000
G 10 STBY 01 115 14 10
CYKZ
67.6 PROP 67.6 G

60 RPM 60
20 22
MDA MDA
40
CYZD
FF 660 660 FF 40
00 CYTZ
ESS 7 7 115 19 00
CPM5 KG/H KG/H
30 5 80 MAIN 5 5 116 19 30 5 80
60
NAV 210 210 S EC 115 60

DASH 8 Q400
20 ITT 5 4 02 12 18 20
APT CYYZ C
20 YTPYYZ
V1 118 --- TCAS NL NL V1 118
%RPM %RPM
VR 119 TAS 0 CNC3
STBY VR 119
GS 0 44 420 420 44 V2 122 0 0
V2 122 0 1580 MDA 0 1580 MDA

130 29.92 IN
FMS1 CZBA 130 29.92 IN
DME1 0.2 NM R 1.0 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM 154 TCAS
154 TCAS C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI
STBY
H DG 1 STBY 87 62 910 KG 910 87 62 H DG 2
6
3
6 + 26 C + 26 PSI x 1000 HDG 057 3 E ILS 2 057
HDG 057 E ILS 1 057
109. 10
109. 10 SAT + 13 C

N
H 0.4 NM

12
N

0.2 NM
12

I I

15
15

30

S
30

MFD 1 ED MFD 2
S

W 21
W 21 24
24 ADF2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FMS1
DME1 0.2 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM
0.2 NM

PFD 2
DME1 DME2 H 0.4 NM

PFD 1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

MIN AHRS 1 MIN

EFIS CP 1 AHRS 2
EFIS CP 2
ADU 1
ADU 2
ICP 1 FADEC 1 ICP 2
FMS 1 FADEC 2
FMS 2
ESID CP
ARCDU 1 WXR
ARCDU 2
IFC 1
IFC 2
Revision 0.5

Figure 31-1.  Electronic Instrument System (EIS) Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-61-00 ELECTRONIC The function of each DU is set by:

INSTRUMENT SYSTEM •• Rear connector pin-program

•• Control panel selection (EFCP, ICP or
INTRODUCTION ESCP)
The Electronic Instrument System (EIS) is the •• Aircraft configuration module (ACM)
primary display for the following indications: configuration.

•• Primary flight data The EIS has five display units (DUs) connected
to control panels for control and interface to
•• Navigation
aircraft systems.
•• Engine
Important data for indication is supplied
•• Systems.
directly from the following units:
GENERAL •• Audio and radio control display unit
(ARCDU1 and ARCDU2)
Refer to Figure 31-1. Electronic Instrument
System (EIS) Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2). •• Air data computer (ADC1, ADC2)
•• Attitude and heading reference unit
The electronic instrument system (EIS) has the (AHRU1, AHRU2)
following units:
•• Weather radar transceiver (MFD1,
•• Display Units MFD2 only)
•• Electronic flight instrument (EFIS) •• Engine electronic control unit (EEC1,
control panel EEC2) of the full authority digital
electronic control (FADEC).
•• Engine systems integrated display
(ESID) control panel
Other EFIS and ESID indications are supplied
•• Index control panel (ICP). through the flight data processing system
(FDPS) concentration to the bus for indication.
This system is divided into two sub-systems:
An example of EFIS FDPS concentration is
•• Electronic flight instrument system VOR bearing.
(EFIS)
•• Engine and system integrated displays An example of ESID FDPS concentration is
(ESID). fuel temperature.

The EFIS is divided into two sub-systems: The EFCP selections are supplied directly to
the DUs through an ARINC bus.
•• Pilot
The ESCP selections are supplied through the
•• Co-pilot.
FDPS to the DUs for the following calculations:
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

The DUs are as follows:

•• ED brightness (ARINC)
•• Primary flight display (PFD1, PFD2) •• System pages (ARINC)
•• Multi-functional display (MFD1, MFD2) •• MFD reversion (discrete)
•• Engine display (ED). •• AHRS reversion (discrete)
•• ADC reversion (discrete).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-3

31-4 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

NTOP NTOP
90 % TRQ 90 %
%

5 10
NH 3 3 NH
%RPM %RPM

ESID ESID 67.6 PROP

RPM
67.6

AVIONICS (LEFT MAIN), B2 ESID CP AVIONICS (RIGHT ESSENTIAL), B11 FF

KG/H
660 660
KG/H
FF
210 210
ITT
C
NL NL
%RPM %RPM
44 420 420 44

C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI

87 62 910 KG 910 87 62
+ 26 C + 26

10 SAT + 13 C

DASH 8 Q400
5 ESID
ED
HDG SEL GA
ALT SEL

EFIS CP1
MIN AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN), B5 G
5000
10
60

AVIONICS (LEFT MAIN), C2 EFIS CP1 40

30
MDA

00
5 80
20 60

V1 118
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

VR 119
V2 122 0 0
10
1580 MDA
130 29.92 IN
154 TCAS
H DG 1 STBY
6
HDG 057 3 E ILS 1 057

PFD 1
109. 10

N
0.2 NM

12

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AVIONICS (LEFT MAIN), A2 HDG SEL GA

15
ALT SEL

30
5

S
HSI 5000 W 21
24
G 10 FMS1

60 DME1 0.2 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM

PFD 1
MIN

EFIS CP2
MDA
40
00
30 5 80

AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN), C5 EFIS CP2

20 60

V1 118

10 VR 119
V2 122 0 1580 MDA 0
130 29.92 IN
154 TCAS
H DG 2 STBY
6

PFD 2 HDG 057 3 E ILS 2 057

109. 10

N
0.4 NM

12
AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN), A5
H

15
30
HDG 1 FMS1 075

S
WX OFF
W
24
21 057 00
ADF2
HDG 057° 35.0 NM
DME1 0.2 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM 3 E --:--

5
PFD 2 40
CNU9
00

CYKZ

ICP 1
10
CYZD

AVIONICS (LEFT ESSENTIAL), C7 CPM5

NAV

APT CYYZ
CYTZ

YTPYYZ
20
--- TCAS

MFD 1 0
TAS CNC3
STBY
GS 0
ELECTRICAL

AVIONICS (LEFT ESSENTIAL), B7

FMS1 CZBA
DME1 0.2 NM R 1.0 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM

ICP 1 MAIN 01 116 16

AUX 01 115 16 I I
STBY 01 115 14

20 22

ESS 7 7 115 19
5
MFD 1
MAIN 5 5 116 19
S EC 5 4 02 12 115 18

10
ICP 2

AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN), C6 MFD 2 PSI x 1000

AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN)), B6

ICP 2
MFD 2
Revision 0.5

Figure 31-2.  Electronic Instrument System (EIS) Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

The ALL and ED OFF (discrete) selections on NOTES

the ESCP are supplied directly to the ED.

The ICP selections are only supplied through

the FDPS to the DUs for calculations.

The DUs are connected to each other for

display monitoring.

The proximity sensor electronics unit interfaces

with the DUs to supply on ground condition for
POST function.

Refer to Figure 31-2. Electronic Instrument

System (EIS) Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2).

28 VDC electrical power is supplied to the

following units:

•• PFD1, PFD2
•• MFD1, MFD2
•• ED
•• EFIS control panel
•• ESID control panel
•• Index control panel.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-5

31-6 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

SHOWN
SENSOR - ACQUISITION PARAMETER
No. 1 - CALCULATION
- SYMBOL GENERATION

DASH 8 Q400
COMPARATOR

THRESHOLD
CHECK DU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MESSAGE

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FILTER

DISPLAY UNIT

FILTER

THRESHOLD CHECK DU
MESSAGE

COMPARATOR

- ACQUISITION
SENSOR - CALCULATION
No. 2 - SYMBOL GENERATION SHOWN
PARAMETER

fsm15a01.cgm DISPLAY UNIT

Figure 31-3.  Monitoring of Critical Parameters

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The monitoring is done by one or two other DUs

as set by a reversion selection or malfunction:
The EIS has the following functions:
•• The PFD indications are monitored by
•• Indication of piloting and navigation data the adjacent MFD if it is valid and not
set to PFD, and by the opposite PFD or
•• Indication of engine and aircraft system
MFD if it is set to PFD
parameters
•• ED indications are monitored by the
•• Monitoring of important parameters
two adjacent MFDs.
•• EIS reversion
If one MFD is set to ED, it is still monitored
•• Self tests and continuous tests by the opposite MFD.
•• Software teleloading
The DUs monitor the difference between a
•• Maintenance, interface with central parameter supplied directly to it and its
diagnostic system (CDS). indication from a different DU.

Refer to Figure 31-3. Monitoring of Critical If a difference is sensed for EFIS, a CHECK
Parameters. PFD message is shown on the PFDs and MFDs.

The important parameters of the EFIS and The threshold for EFIS monitoring is as follows:
ESID are monitored to ensure that correct
indications are displayed.
Parameter Threshold
The DUs monitor the following EFIS parameters: Roll 4 degrees
Pitch 4 degrees
•• Pitch Heading 6 degrees
•• Roll Indicated airspeed 10 knots
•• Altitude Corrected barometric altitude 100 feet

•• Airspeed
If a difference is sensed for ESID, a CHECK
•• Heading. ED message is shown on the ED and MFDs.

The DUs also monitor the following ESID The threshold for ESID monitoring is as follows:
parameters:
Parameter Threshold
•• Torque
Torque 5 percent
•• ITT
NH 5 percent
•• NH NP 50 rpm
•• Propeller Speed (NP) ITT 50° C
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

•• ITT red limits ITT Limit

NH Limit
•• NH red limits.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-7

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Display Unit
Refer to Figure 31-4. Display Unit.

The display units are installed in the instrument

panel with screws.

CAUTION

Make sure that there is sufficient

clearance between the display
connector-backshell screws and
the electrical harness. If the
clearance is not sufficient, it can
damage the wires.

The display unit is a smart display that has

a graphic processor to calculate and show
graphic symbology. It calculates and displays
the symbols to be shown from data supplied by A
the flight data processing system (FDPS) and
aircraft sensors as set by the control panels.

The display unit has the following components: Figure 31-4.  Display Unit

•• Rectangular case with a cut-out part for

Two cells at the bottom of the LCD assembly
the location of ventilation outlets
module are used to adjust the brightness level
•• Housing in which all the electronic boards in relation to ambient lighting conditions.
and LCD assembly module are installed
The DU has the following inputs:
•• Front frame that protects the LCD.
•• 24 ARINC 429
It has the following modules:
•• 24 Discrete from the aircraft systems
•• Interconnection module (ICM)
•• One RS422 serial link (synchronous
•• Power supply module (PSM) half duplex) at 1 Mbits/s for download
•• Digital processing module (DPM) •• One ARINC 708/453 for weather radar
information
•• Back lighting module (BLM)
•• Eight TTL (discrete) from a digital
•• Lighting module (LIM)
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

encoder used to encode current software

•• LCD assembly module (LAM). version of the DU.

A fan external to the DU causes a flow of air It has the following outputs:
through two openings at the top of the structure
for cooling. •• Five ARINC 429
•• Two discrete (one called DU Healthy,
the other being a spare).

31-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

The display unit also has one RS232 Color rules for the DUs are shown in the
asynchronous full duplex input/output for tests. following table:

The display unit has the following visual Color Indication

characteristics: Red Warning
•• Images are shown superimposed on a Yellow Caution
weather radar indication White Messages, labels, scales
•• Images are linear drawings, color filled Green Active modes, passed tests
areas, and alphanumerics Cyan Selectable parameters
•• Background color is programmed to Magenta FMS
black Brown Attitude indicator (Earth)
•• Colors of the weather radar image are Blue Attitude indicator (Sky), ESID units
black, green, yellow, red, magenta,
Grey Indicator background
blue, white
Black Aircraft symbol
•• The useful image size is greater than
6.03” x 8.04” (153 x 204 mm)
The messages have the following attributes:
•• Horizontal angle limit is ±56 degrees
•• Vertical angle limit 4.5 degrees up and •• Flashing, to alert the crew
21 degrees down. •• Reverse video, to show change in mode
of operation
Temperature and altitude conditions for the
DUs are shown in the following table: •• Brackets, to instruct the crew.

The main function of the DUs is to give the

OPERATIONS pilots primary indications for the piloting,
TEMPERATURES
CONDITIONS navigation and check engine/system parameters.
Operating high
+ 55°C
temperature The DU has the following functions:
Operating low
- 40°C •• Initialization
temperature
Short time operating •• POST
+70°C (30 minutes)
high temperature
•• Line operational
Ground survival high
+85°C •• Maintenance
temperature
Ground survival low •• Teleloading.
- 55°C
temperature
Initialization: The DU operates in the
30 minutes
initialization mode after a long electrical power
Loss of air cooling Initial temperature: 30°C
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

interruption that continues for more than 200 ms.

60% nominal brightness
Altitude test 25000 ft A power interruption less than 200 ms causes
A/C maximum altitude: a loss of the image and a short initialization
Decompression
25000 ft of the hardware but not of the RAM. After a
short power interruption, the DU goes back to
Power to the DU is shut off if the internal the line operation mode and no POST or fail
temperature is more than 90°C (194°F). indication is shown.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-9

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

After a long electrical power interruption, it will NOTES

then continue to operate the following modes:
•• POST
•• Line operational
•• Maintenance.

If the aircraft is on ground and there is a long

power interruption, the DU does a POST before
it goes to the operational mode. However, if it
is airborne it goes directly to the operational
mode and uses the previous status of POST.

POST: The POST of the DU checks the

condition of parameters that cannot be
monitored by the continuous test in the line
operational mode. It resets the previous
continuous operational test status. Post lasts
for a maximum of 30 seconds.

Line Operational: The operational mode has

these functions:
•• Acquisition
•• Animation
•• Drawing
•• Monitoring.

Maintenance: The maintenance mode gives

central diagnostic system (CDS) indications
of malfunctions. Internal malfunctions are
saved in the non volatile memory (NVM)
of the DU. External malfunctions of the
electronic instruments system are saved only
when the aircraft speed is more than 80 knots.
All malfunctions are supplied to the central
diagnostic system (CDS).

Teleloading: The operational software and data

base is downloaded from a portable maintenance
access terminal (PMAT) through an RS422
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

serial connection to the DU. Teleloading can

only be done by the manufacturer.

31-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DISPLAY UNIT LIGHTING It has a day structure which has:

MODULE •• 18 cold cathode fluorescent lamps
Refer to Figure 31-5. Display Unit Lighting •• A high voltage board (HVB) which
Module. connects the lamps and supports the
high voltage components.
The lighting module (LIM) is installed in the
display unit. This structure lets the back light module supply
the backlighting of the LCD panel with high
The LIM has an assembly which supports the luminance levels in day mode of the necessary
lamp block, the optical part and the electronic dimming range.
board.
Luminance sensors supply a feedback of the
WARNING
WARNING luminance because the luminance parameters
can be different from one BLM to another.
BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU
REMOVE OR INSTALL THE
MODULE. IF YOU BREAK
THE TUBES, THEY CAN
RELEASE POISONOUS
GASES WHICH CAN CAUSE
INJURY TO PERSONS.

4
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

LEGEND
1. EFIS Display unit 4. Extraction ring
2. Screw 5. Captive screw.
2 3. Module
5

Figure 31-5.  Display Unit Lighting Module

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-11

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ELECTRONIC FLIGHT
INSTRUMENT (EFIS) CONTROL
PANEL
Refer to Figure 31-6. Electronic Flight
Instrument (EFIS) Control Panel.

Two EFCPs are installed in the center console.

center console
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-6.  Electronic Flight Instrument (EFIS) Control Panel

31-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-7. Electronic Flight Instrument Selection Signal Type

(EFIS) Control Panel, Block Diagram.
DATA Toggle pushbuttons to
select the symbology to be ARINC 429
The EFCP selection and interface is shown in
displayed
the following table:
FORMAT Toggle pushbuttons
to select the symbology to be ARINC 429
Selection Signal Type displayed
PFD Rotary potentiometers BRG o Five-position rotary
Discrete,
with ON/OFF position to adjust switches to select the displayed
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
display brightness bearing from various number 1
MFD Rotary potentiometers navigation sources
Discrete,
with ON/OFF position to adjust BRG ◊ Five-position rotary
ARINC 429
display brightness switches to select the displayed
ARINC 429
WX/TERR BRT Rotary bearing from various number 2
potentiometer to adjust weather ARINC 429 navigation sources
radar and terrain brightness
TCAS Toggle pushbuttons to
select the symbology to be ARINC 429
displayed
WX/TERR Toggle pushbuttons
to select the symbology to be ARINC 429
displayed

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-7.  Electronic Flight Instrument (EFIS) Control Panel, Block Diagram

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-13

31-14 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FRONT FACE INTERFACE

1 ROTARY POTENTIOMETER 4 ROTARY SWITCHES 6 PUSH BUTTONS
WITH ON/OFF POSITION

GND

GND

DASH 8 Q400
GND
GND
GND
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

GND GND

LEGENDS

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ELECTRONIC
INTERFACE HARDWARE PARALLEL/
SERIAL CONVERTER

POWER
SUPPLY
ARINC
EMITTER/RECEIVER

EMI, LIGHTNING PROTECTION

+5V DC POWER ARINC 429 DISCRETE DISCRETE

DIMMED SUPPLY OUT IN OUT
fsm16a01.cgm LIGHTING

Figure 31-8.  Engine Systems Integrated Display (ESID) Control Panel Block Diagram
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Engine Systems Integrated Operational Test of the Electronic

Display (ESID) Instrument System
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
Control Panel detailed description of this maintenance practice.
Refer to Figure 31-8. Engine Systems Integrated
Display (ESID) Control Panel Block Diagram. This check confirms the correct operation of
the electronic instrument system (EIS) using
One ESCP is installed in the center console inputs from the following control panels:
with fasteners.
•• Flight guidance control panel (FGCP)
The ESCP has the functions that follow: •• Index control panel (ICP)
•• Engine and system control panel (ESCP)
Selection Signal Type
•• Electronic flight control panel (EFCP).
ED BRT Rotary potentiometer
Discrete,
with ON/OFF position to adjust
ARINC 429 The correct indication should change with the
display brightness
movement of each control and there should
MFD1 Four-position rotary not be any flags, error messages, dashes, or
switches for DU reversion Discrete INVALID DATA shown on any of the displays.
control failures
MFD2 Four-position rotary
switches for DU reversion Discrete
control failures
EFIS ATT/HDG SOURCE
Three-position rotary switches
Discrete
for Attitude/ Heading Source
selection
EFIS ADC SOURCE Three-
position rotary switches for Air Discrete
Data Source selection
ELEC SYS Toggle pushbuttons
to call system pages for ESID ARINC 429
displays
ENG SYS Toggle pushbuttons
to call system pages for ESID ARINC 429
displays
FUEL SYS Toggle pushbuttons
to call system pages for ESID ARINC 429
displays
DOORS SYS Toggle
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

pushbuttons to call system ARINC 429

pages for ESID displays
ALL Toggle pushbuttons to
call system pages for ESID Discrete
displays

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-15

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Index Control Panel

Refer to Figure 31-9. Index Control Panel.

Two ICPs are installed in the flight console

with screws.

Refer to Figure 31-7. Electronic Flight Instrument

(EFIS) Control Panel, Block Diagram.

The ICP has the following functions:

A
•• SPEED BUGS selection
•• SPEED BUG index setting
•• DECISION HEIGHT setting
•• BAROMETRIC PRESSURE setting.

Selection Signal Type

SP SPEED BUGS SEL Select
EE ARINC 429
pushbutton
DB
UG
SE S SPEED BUGS Rotary encoder to
L adjust five independent airspeed ARINC 429
indicators
Rotary encoder with center
pushbutton to adjust the ARINC 429
BA
RO barometric pressure
SE
T DH/MDA Rotary encoder with two-
position DH/MDA rotary switch
ARINC 429
to adjust the decision height and
minimum decent altitude

DH
MD
A
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-9.  Index Control Panel

31-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Controls and Indications The EFCP1 BRG (circle) selector knob is set to
the OFF position to remove the bearing pointer
Refer to Figure 31-10. EFIS Control Panel. from view.
The EFCPs have the following controls: BRG (diamond) Selector Knob - The EFCP1
BRG (diamond) selector knob is set to the
•• BRG (circle) selector knob following positions:
•• BRG (diamond) selector knob
•• AUX2 (Auxiliary 2)
•• TCAS pushbutton switch
•• FMS2 (Flight Management System 2)
•• WX/TERR pushbutton switch
•• VOR2 (VHF navigation 2)
•• DATA pushbutton switch
•• ADF2 (Automatic Direction Finding 2).
•• FORMAT pushbutton switch
•• Range selector knob The EFCP1 BRG (diamond) selector knob is
set to the OFF position to remove the bearing
•• PFD OFF, BRT knob pointer from view.
•• MFD OFF, BRT knob
TCAS Pushbutton Switch - The EFCP1 TCAS
•• WX/TERR BRT knob. pushbutton switch is usually set to show pop-up
(automatic) MFD1 navigation page TCAS
BRG (Circle) Selector Knob - The EFCP1 indications. The EFCP1 TCAS pushbutton switch
BRG (circle) selector knob is set to the is pushed to change the MFD1 navigation page
following positions: TCAS indication from pop-up to continuously on.
It is pushed again to show the pop-up indication.
•• AUX1 (Auxiliary 1)
•• FMS1 (Flight Management System 1) NOTE
•• VOR1 (VHF navigation 1) The pop-up indication only
•• ADF1 (Automatic Direction Finding 1 ). shows traffic advisory (TA)
and resolution advisory (RA)
indications. The on selection
shows all TCAS indications.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-10.  EFIS Control Panel

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-17

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE After the EGPWS terrain alert condition, the

MFD1 navigation page 10 NM range indication
An EFCP1 TCAS pushbutton stays in view. The WX/TERR, TCAS,
switch selection has no effect FORMAT, DATA or RANGE switches are
if the MFD1 navigation page is used to reset the indication.
not displayed.

WX/TERR Pushbutton Switch - The EFCP1 NOTE

WX/TERR pushbutton switch has two different If the MFD navigation page
functions: terrain indication lasts for more
than 30 seconds while the aircraft
•• A s h o r t p u s h c h a n g e s t h e M F D 1 is on the ground and the weather
navigation page indication from weather radar is transmitting, the MFD1
radar and enhanced ground proximity navigation page automatically
system (EGPWS) terrain pop-up to changes to weather radar.
an EGPWS continuously on terrain
indication. The pushbutton is pushed The first MFD1 navigation page
again (short) to change the MFD1 indication after an electrical power
navigation page indication back to interuption is weather radar.
weather radar and EGPWS terrain pop-up.
•• A long push causes the MFD1 navigation An EFCP1 WX/TERR push
page weather radar and EGPWS terrain button switch selection has no
indications to go out of view. The switch effect when the MFD1 navigation
is pushed again (long) to cause the MFD1 page is not displayed.
navigation page to go back to weather
radar and EGPWS terrain pop-up. DATA Pushbutton Switch - The EFIS1 DATA
pushbutton switch has four functions:
If the MFD1 navigation page is set to show a
weather radar indication (arc or map format) •• The first selection causes the page to
and an EGPWS terrain alert condition is show the nearest navigation aids
sensed, the terrain indication automatically •• The second selection causes the page to
comes into view. If the MFD1 navigation page show the nearest airports
is set to the plan format, an EGPWS terrain
alert causes it to change to the arc or map • • The third selection causes the page to
format. An EGPWS terrain alert always causes show the nearest navigation aids and
the MFD1 navigation page range indication airports
to change to 10 NM. An MFD1 navigation •• T h e f o u r t h s e l e c t i o n c a u s e s t h e
page AUTO RANGE message below the outer navigation aids and airports indications
range digital mark is shown because the range to go out of view.
indication can possibly not relate to the EFCP
RANGE selection. FORMAT Pushbutton Switch - The EFCP1
FORMAT pushbutton switch has two functions:
NOTE
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

During an EGPWS terrain alert •• A long FORMAT push changes the

condition, the following switches MFD1 navigation page indication from
do not have any effect: FMS map format to a VOR/ILS arc
format. Another long push changes the
- WX/TERR MFD1 navigation page back to FMS
- RANGE map format.
- FORMAT
- DATA.

31-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• A s h o r t p u s h c h a n g e s t h e M F D 1 NOTES
navigation page indication from an
FMS or VOR/ILS arc format to an FMS
or VOR/ILS plan format. Another short
push causes the MFD1 navigation page
indication to go back to FMS map or
VOR/ILS format.

RANGE Selector Knob - The EFCP1 RANGE

selector knob changes the range indications on
the MFD1 navigation page.

PFD/MFD OFF, BRT Knob - The display

brightness is controlled:

Automatically with light sensors attached to the

display unit’s front panel

Manually with the EFCP PFD/MFD OFF, BRT

knob selection

WX/TERR BRT Knob - A WX/TERR BRT

Knob Changes the weather radar or terrain
indication brightness.

The EFCP2 does all the same functions for the

co-pilot’s MFD and PFD.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-19

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-11. ESID Control Panel. A PFD1 AVAIL message is shown when
the PFD1 is operating and the ESCP MFD1
The ESCP has the following controls: reversion switch is set to the PFD position. An
ED AVAIL message is shown when the ED is
•• MFD1 and MFD2 reversion switches operating and the MFD1 reversion switch is set
to the ENG SYS position. The same is true for
•• ELEC system page pushbutton
the MFD2 reversion switch.
•• ENG system page pushbutton
The ESCP MFD2 reversion switch is usually
•• FUEL system page pushbutton
set to the SYS position and then a related
•• DOOR system page pushbutton pushbutton switch is pushed as follows:
•• ALL system pushbutton
•• ELEC SYS
•• Electronic flight instrument system
•• ENG SYS
(EFIS) ATT/HDG SOURCE reversion
knob •• FUEL SYS
•• EFIS ADC SOURCE reversion knob •• DOORS SYS.
•• ED OFF, BRT knob.
NOTE
MFD1 and MFD2 Reversion Switches - The
The default system page is electrical.
ESCP MFD1 reversion switch is usually set to
the NAV position to show the navigation page.
To show the other possible MFD2 indications,
the ESCP MFD2 reversion switch is set to the
To show the other possible MFD1 indications,
positions that follow:
the ESCP MFD1 reversion switch is set to the
positions that follow:
•• NAV to show the navigation page
•• SYS to show the different system pages •• PFD to show PFD2 reversion
•• PFD to show primary flight display 1 •• ED to show ED reversion.
(PFD1) reversion
•• ED to show ED reversion.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

EFIS EFIS

Figure 31-11.  ESID Control Panel

31-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ALL pushbutton switch - The ALL pushbutton NOTES

switch is used to sequence to the next shown
system page.

EFIS ATT/HDG SOURCE reversion selector

- The ESCP EFIS ATT/HDG SOURCE reversion
selector is set to the NORM position to show data
from the related attitude and heading reference
units (AHRU1, AHRU2) on PFD1 and PFD2.

When the ESCP ATT/HDG SOURCE reversion

selector is set to the 1 or 2 position, PFD1 and
PFD2 will show data from the set attitude and
heading reference system (AHRS) source, and
the two PFDs show an attitude and heading
source annunciator that follows:

•• ATT1, HDG1
•• ATT2, HDG2.

The two MFD navigation pages also show a

related heading source annunciator as follows:

•• HDG1
•• HDG2.

EFIS ADC SOURCE Reversion Selector

- The ESCP EFIS ADC SOURCE reversion
selector is set to the NORM position to show
data from the related air data computer (ADC1,
ADC2) on the PFDs.

When the ESCP ADC SOURCE reversion

is set, the two PFDs show an air data source
annunciator that follows:

•• ADC1
•• ADC2.

When the ESCP ADC SOURCE reversion

selector is set to the 1 or 2 position, AHRS1
and AHRS2 will use data from the set source.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

ED OFF, BRT Knob - The ED brightness is

controlled as follows:

•• A u t o m a t i c a l l y w i t h l i g h t s e n s o r s
attached to the display unit’s front panel
•• Manually with the ESCP ED OFF, BRT
knob selection.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-21

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-12.  Index Control Panel

31-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-12. Index Control Panel. BARO SET Knob - The BARO SET knob is
turned to set the barometric reference from 700
The ICP has the following controls: to 1100 HPA or 21 to 32 IN for the related air
data computer (ADC).
•• SPEED BUG SEL pushbutton
PUSH TO STD Pushbutton Switch - The
•• SPEED BUG knob
PUSH to STD pushbutton switch is pushed to
•• BARO SET knob automatically set the barometric reference to
standard pressure, 1013 HPA or 29.92 IN.
•• PUSH TO STD pushbutton
•• DH, MDA switch DH, MDA Switch And Knob - The switch is
set to the DH position for the decision height
•• DH, MDA knob.
function and to MDA position for the minimum
descent altitude function. The knob is turned to
SPEED BUG SEL Pushbutton Switch And
set the DH from 0 to 999 ft and the MDA from
Knob - The SEL pushbutton switch is pushed
-10 ft to 19,990 ft.
to set the IAS index bugs on the IAS indicator
of the PFD that follow:
NOTE
•• V1, take off decision speed
HPA or IN is set with pin
•• VR, rotation speed programming of the ADCs.
•• V2, take off safety speed
•• Δ, flap retraction speed
•• Δ, single engine safety speed.

The knob is then turned to set the index

bug between 50 kts and 400 kts. The SEL
pushbutton switch is pushed again to set the
other references.

The selection is stopped when:

•• The SEL pushbutton switch is pushed to

set the next index bug in the sequence
•• 5 seconds after a SEL pushbutton
switch selection
•• 5 seconds after a knob selection.

The IAS index bugs V1, VR, V2 are only set

when the aircraft is on the ground and the CAS
is less than 50 kts.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

A short time after takeoff, the V1 and VR index

bugs go out of view. When the IAS is 40 kts more
than V2, the V2 index bug goes out of view.

The Δ and Δ IAS index bugs can be set while

the aircraft is on the ground or airborne. They
are set as V1, VR, and V2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-23

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

1 WING LVL GA
3
ALT SEL

HSI 14000
10
60 4

DH 10 10 MDA
2
40
60
30 5 40
20 20
10 10 5

V1 131
VR 0
131
V2 131 195 DH 0 1180 MDA 0
1013 HPA TCAS
6
STBY

6
HDG 073 3 E VOR2 350
113. 50
92.1 NM
12
N
33

S15
30

21
W
ADF1 24 ADF2

DME1H 92.1 NM DME2 92.1 NM

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

LEGEND
1. Flight Mode Annunciator 4. Altimeter (ALT)
(FMA) 5. Inertial Vertical Speed
2. Air Speed Indicator (IAS) Indicator (IVSI), TCAS
3. Attitude Direction Indicator 6. Horizontal Situation
(ADI) Indicator (HSI)

Figure 31-13.  Primary Flight Display (PFD)

31-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-13. Primary Flight Display NOTES

(PFD).

The PFD gives the following primary flight

indications:

•• Flight mode annunciator (FMA)

•• Indicated air speed (IAS)
•• Altimeter (ALT)
•• Attitude direction indicator (ADI)
•• Horizontal situation indicator (HSI)
•• Inertial vertical speed indicator (IVSI)

•• T r a f f i c a w a r e n e s s a n d c o l l i s i o n
avoidance system II (TCAS II).

A PFD WARMING UP message is shown after

the POST indication if the PFD has sensed a
low internal temperature and an internal heater
has automatically come on.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-25

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

WX ALRT FMS1 359°

MSG FMS1 359° N IDENT
+10.3° STAB 359 IDENT 18.5 NM
FAIL 18.5 NM
HDG330° 10:50
33 3 10:50
TGT

20 250

LFBO MPT
260 W E

40 PPG
IDENT NAV BGCD
AGN
80 80
80 300 TAS200
10 GS 250
TAS250 TCAS
GS 200 ABS ABV
LMG S
ADF1 ADF2
DME1 18.5NM DME2 20.5NM
DME1 18.5 NM DME2 20.5 NM

PFCS PFCS

SPOILERS SPOILERS

RUD
LO LI
RUD
RI RO LO LI RI RO
L R
L R
ELEV ELEV ELEV ELEV

Figure 31-14.  Multi-Function Display 1 Figure 31-15.  Multi-Function Display 1

(MFD1) - MAP Mode (MFD1) - PLAN Mode
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to:
•• Figure 31-14. M
 ulti-Function Display
1 (MFD1) - MAP Mode.
WX ON ILS1 359°
•• Figure 31-15. M
 ulti-Function Display 1 109.30
359 H 8.5 NM
(MFD1) - PLAN Mode. HDG 359°
4 MIN
33 3
•• Figure 31-16. M
 ulti-Function Display
1 (MFD1) - ARC Mode.
160 G
The MFD gives the following different
indications:

•• Navigation page
•• Electrical system page
•• Engine system page
80
•• Fuel system page TAS 200
GS 250 80
•• Doors system page
•• PFD reversion
DME1 H 8. 5NM DME2 H20.5NM
•• Engine display (ED) reversion.
PFCS
The MFD1 navigation page is divided into two SPOILERS
parts as follows: RUD
LO LI RI RO
•• Electronic flight instrument system L R
(EFIS) navigation page, in the top part ELEV ELEV

•• Engine and system integrated display

(ESID) permanent system data area
Figure 31-16.  Multi-Function Display 1
powered flight control system (PFCS)
(MFD1) - ARC Mode
surface position indication, in the
bottom part.

The navigation page gives the different

indications that follow:

•• FMS Map
•• Plan
•• ARC.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-27

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-17. Multi-Function Display

1 (MFD1) - Composite Indication.

An ESID permanent system data area composite

indication is shown if MFD2 does not show its
permanent system data area indication due to ELECTRICAL
a reversion or malfunction.

There is only one automatic DU reversionary

mode. When the Engine Display (ED)
malfunctions while the True Air Speed MAIN 00
(TAS) is more than 50 kts, the ED indication AUX 00
is automatically displayed on MFD1 and STBY 00
MFD2 will show a composite permanent
system data indication.
ESS
This automatic reversionary mode occurs MAIN
only if MFD1 is not already showing the SEC
PFD indications.

0 5
FLAP 10
DEG I I

35

PK BRK STBY 1 1 3 1 2 3

3000 0 3000 3000 0 100 100 100

Figure 31-17.  M
 ulti-Function Display 1
(MFD1) - Composite Indication
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-28 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-18. Multi-Function Display

2 (MFD 2) - Electrical System Page.

The MFD2 gives the following different

indications:

•• Navigation page ELECTRICAL

•• Electrical system page

•• Engine system page
•• Fuel system page MAIN 00
AUX 00
•• Doors system page STBY 00
•• PFD2 reversion
•• Engine display (ED) reversion.
ESS
The MFD2 system page is divided into two parts: MAIN
SEC

•• ESID system page, in the top area

• • ESID permanent system data area
flap and hydraulic indications in the
bottom part.

The ELECTRICAL system page shows the PSI x 1000

following parameters:

•• AC generator voltage
•• AC generator load indicator
•• Battery load and temperature
•• DC bus voltage Figure 31-18.  M
 ulti-Function Display 2
(MFD 2) - Electrical
•• APU generator load
System Page
•• DC generator load
•• TRU load
•• AC and DC external power messages.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-29

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-19. Multi-Function Display 1 •• NTOP, normal take-off power

(MFD1) - Engine System Page.
•• MTOP, maximum take-off power.
The ENGINE system page on the MFD gives
The powerplant messages are:
most of the ED indications but in a digital
format with permanent system data in the lower
•• REDUCED NP LANDING
area of the display.
•• UPTRIM
The ENGINE system page shows the following
•• BLEED
parameters:
•• A/F ARM, autofeather arm
•• Engine primary parameters
•• A/F SELECT, autofeather select.
•• Engine secondary parameters
For each engine, the ENGINE page supplies the
•• FUEL indications
secondary parameters:
•• Powerplant messages
•• OIL PSI, oil pressure
•• Advisory messages
•• OIL °C, oil temperature.
•• SAT °C, static air temperature
•• [CHECK ED] electronic instrument
system (EIS) display monitoring
message.
---- ENGINE ----
For each engine, the ENGINE page supplies the --- % --- %
TRQ
engine primary parameters: NH
%RPM 0 % 0 NH
%RPM

•• Actual torque, TRQ % 0.0 0.0

•• Torque bug FF PROP FF
KG/H 0 RPM 0 KG/H
•• High pressure rotor speed, NH % RPM 0 0
ITT
•• Propeller speed, PROP RPM 31 °C 31
NL NL
•• Indicated turbine temperature, ITT °C %RPM %RPM

•• Fuel flow, FF PPH 0 FUEL

795 KG 910
0
+31 °C +32
•• Low pressure rotor speed, NL % RPM OIL
°C PSI
OIL
°C PSI
SAT +23°C
32 0 32 0
•• Engine mode messages
•• Powerplant messages.

The engine mode messages are:

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

•• MAINT, maintenance mode

•• MCR, maximum cruise power LO RI RI RO
L R
•• MCL, maximum climb power ELEV ELEV

•• MCP, maximum continuous power

•• RDC, reduced take-off power Figure 31-19.  M
 ulti-Function Display 1
(MFD1) - Engine System Page

31-30 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

For each engine, the ENGINE page supplies the Resolution

fuel indications: Parameter Source
Unit
Torque sensor through
•• LBS or KGS, fuel tank quantity TRQ % 1%
FADEC
•• °C, fuel inlet temperature. Torque Bug FADEC 1%
NH speed sensor
The ENGINE page supplies the advisory NH % RPM 0.1%
through FADEC
messages that follow:
Prop sensor through
PROP RPM 10 RPM
•• [BALANCE] FADEC
NL speed sensor
•• ICE DETECTED NL % RPM 1%
through FADEC
•• [INCR REF SPEED]. ITT thermocouple and
ITT °C main oil temperature 1°C
The ENGINE page title and the parameter sensor through FADEC
labels are shown with white letters and the
Main oil pressure sensor
related units that follow are shown in blue: OIL PSI 1 PSI
through FDPS

•• % Main oil temperature

OIL °C 1°C
through FADEC
•• RPM
Fuel flowmeter through 10 PPH, 5
FF PPH or KG/H
•• PSI FDPS KG/H

•• °C. LBS or KG, fuel FQC through FDPS 10 PPH, 5

tank quantity KG/H
°C, fuel inlet Engine fuel temperature
1°C
temperature bulb through FDPS
ADC1, ADC2 through
SAT °C 1°C
FDPS

The color of the numbers will change to

yellow or red with the same logic and engine
limitations as the ED.
When a parameter is not valid, the related
numbers change to white dashes.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-31

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-20. Multi-Function Display

2 (MFD 2) - Fuel System Page.

The FUEL system page supplies the fuel tanks

quantity and temperature indications:
•• Left and right fuel tank quantity (analog) FUEL
VALVE VALVE

•• TOTAL FUEL TRANSFER SW

TO TO
•• TANK, Fuel temperature in the left tank. OPEN
TANK1 TANK2
OPEN

The FUEL system page supplies the fuel

transfer indications: l
l l l
3 l
l l l
3
4 4

l
QTY TANK1 TANK 2 QTY
2 2
•• TRANSFER SW position

l
5 AUX PUMP AUX PUMP

l
l

l
LBS LBS

l
1 SW SW 1
•• VALVE, left and right fuel transfer X1000 6 X1000

l
l

l
0 7 0 7
l l
OFF OFF
shut-off valves
l l
l l l l

•• T A N K 1 A U X P U M P , L e f t f u e l TANK +20°C
TOTAL FUEL
4000 LBS
auxiliary pump pressure or
•• T A N K 2 A U X P U M P , R i g h t f u e l
auxiliary pump pressure.

The FUEL system supplies the left and right

fuel auxiliary pump indications: PSI x 1000

•• TANK1 AUX PUMP, Pressure

•• TANK2 AUX PUMP, Pressure
•• TANK1 AUX PUMP SW ON or OFF
•• TANK2 AUX PUMP SW ON or OFF.
Figure 31-20.  Multi-Function Display 2
(MFD 2) - Fuel System Page
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-21. Multi-Function Display

2 (MFD 2) - Doors System Page.

The DOORS system page shows the parameters

that follow: DOORS

•• FORWARD PAX
BAGGAGE
•• AFT PAX
EMERG
•• AFT SERVICE EXIT

•• EMERG EXIT
•• FORWARD BAGGAGE
SERVICE
•• AFT BAGGAGE.
BAGGAGE

0 5
FLAP 10
DEG I I

35

PK BRK STBY 1 2 3 1 2 3

3000 0 3000 3000 0 100 100 100

Figure 31-21.  Multi-Function Display 2

(MFD 2) - Doors System Page

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-33

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

9 10 11

A MTOP UPTRIM MTOP

100 % TRQ 100 %
1 %
2 12

NH 0 0 NH
%RPM %RPM
[CHECK ED]
A/FSELECT
MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL
0. 0 PROP 0. 0
RPM
A/F TEST A/F TEST
PASSED PASSED 13
LEGEND 3
FF 0 0 FF
1. NP Propeller Rotational Speed Indicator. PPH PPH
2. NH High Pressure Compressor Rotational 0 0
ITT
Speed Indicator. C
4
3. Fuel Flow Indicator.
NL NL
4. NL Low Pressure Compressor Rotational %RPM %RPM
Speed Indicator. 0 20 20 0 14
5. Advisory Messages. 5
6. Oil Pressure Indication. 6 [ BALANCE ]
7. Oil Temperature Indication. 7 C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI
8. Fuel Inlet Temperature Indication. 0 0 4300 LBS 3600 0 0
9. Engine Rating Mode Indication. + 25 C + 22
10. Torque Indication.
11. Powerplant Messages.
SAT + 0 C
12. Check DU Message. ICE DETECTED 15
13. ITT Inter-Turbine Temperature. 5 [INCR REF SPEED]
WTG1 FAIL FANS FAIL
14. Tank Fuel Quantity Indication. POWERPLANT
15. Static Air Temperature Indication.

8
5

Figure 31-22.  Engine Display (ED)

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-22. Engine Display (ED). DU BAD CONF: The set ED shows this
message when any DU senses that it does not
The ED gives the following engine indications: receive valid aircraft configuration data from
the two aircraft configuration modules (ACM1
•• Torque or ACM2), or that the data is different.
•• NH high pressure compressor rotational
The DU BAD CONF message can come into
speed
view only after a DU POST.
•• NP propeller rotational speed
The AVIONICS caution light in the CWP will
•• ITT inter-turbine temperature
come on for avionics no dispatch conditions.
•• Fuel flow
The ED also gives the following system page
•• NL low pressure compressor rotational
reversions:
speed
•• Engine rating mode •• Electrical
•• Oil pressure •• Engine
•• Oil temperature •• Fuel
•• Tank fuel quantity •• Doors.
•• Fuel inlet temperature
NOTE
•• Advisory messages
The engine and ESID system has
•• Static air temperature a mono mode to view the system
•• Powerplant messages. page with a composite permanent
system data indication if the two
The EIS shows the following DU advisory multi-function displays (MFDs)
messages on the bottom right part of the ED: malfunction or are set to show
PFD, ED or navigation page
FANS FAIL: One of the input/output modules indications.
(IOMs) senses that two or more cooling fans
do not operate under the following conditions: An ESCP system pushbutton switch is then
pushed to show its related system page with a
•• Aircraft is airborne composite permanent system data indication on
• • Aircraft is on the ground and the flight the ED as follows:
compartment temperature is more than
•• ELEC SYS
10°C.
•• ENG SYS
HOT PFD1, HOT PFD2, HOT MFD1, HOT
•• FUEL SYS
MFD2, HOT ED, HOT DISPLAYS: A DU has
overheated. •• DOORS SYS
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

•• Consecutive pushes of the ALL button

ED MON FAIL, PFD1 MON FAIL, PFD2
will cycle through these pages in order.
MON FAIL: Each DU has a feedback output
bus that supplies the status of its monitoring
function to the set ED to indicate:
•• Operating correctly or fail
•• Indication format (PFD1, PFD2, or ED).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-35

31-36 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

X373.15 (U/FL)

C5 R HI
AHRS #2-3
C10 G- LO
A3 F HI
ADU #2-4
A8 G LO

8 HI
AHRS #1-1
AHRS #2 34-20 A2 16 LO
15 HI
ADU #1-1
24 LO
X373.15 (U/FL)

PFD #1 34-28 A1

DASH 8 Q400
A3
A8
C5
R HI
C10 AHRS #2-3
G- LO
F HI
ADU #2-4
G LO
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

AHRS #1 34-20 A2
8 HI
AHRS #1-1
16 LO
15 HI

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ADU #1-1
24 LO

MFD #1 34-28 A2

R HI
AHRS #1-3
G- LO
F HI
ADU #1-4
G LO

AV. RACK 8 HI
AHRS #2-1
16 LO
15 HI
ADU #2-1
24 LO
17
50
14 PFD #2 34-28 A4
47

ADU #1 34-12 A1

R HI
AV. RACK AHRS #1-3
G- LO
F HI
ADU #1-4
G LO

14 8 HI
AHRS #2-1
47 16 LO
17 15 HI
ADU #2-1
50 24 LO

ADU #2 34-12 A2 MFD #2 34-28 A3

AHRS/ADU INPUTS WITH

Figure 31-23.  Indication ofDISPLAY
CORRESPONDING Navigation Data
PAGES
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTES
Refer to Figure 31-23. Indication of Navigation
Data.

The Air Data Units (ADU1 and ADU2) and

Attitude and Heading Reference Units (AHRS1
and AHRS2) supply data through different
ARINC 429 buses to all the Display Units (DUs)
of EFIS (PFD1, PFD2, MFD1, and MFD2).

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-37

 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

CENTRE CONSOLE AFT

31-38

INSTRUMENT PANEL LH SIDE

27
29
48
19
21
80
82

34-28 A1 PRIMARY FLIGHT

DISPLAY (PFD) #1

INSTRUMENT PANEL LH SIDE

U/FL.

DASH 8 Q400
MFD #1 REV 1 38 27
MFD #1 REV 2 39 29
MFD #1 REV 3 40 48 B20 ADU REV 1
19 B5 ADU REV 2
21
80
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

82 34-20 A2 AHRS #2
34-21-00
AV. RACK
34-28 A2 MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY (MFD) #1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ATT REV 1 25 434 ATT REV 1
ATT REV 2 26 435 ATT REV 2
ADU REV 1 27 432 ADU REV 1
ADU REV 2 28 433 ADU REV 2

INSTRUMENT PANEL RH SIDE

31-40 A1 IOM #1
31-41-00
AV. RACK
27
29
48
19 434
21 435
80 432
82 433

34-28 A4 PRIMARY FLIGHT 31-40 A2 IOM #2

DISPLAY (PFD) #2 31-41-00
U/FL.

INSTRUMENT PANEL RH SIDE

B20
MFD #2 REV 1 42 27 B5
MFD #2 REV 2 43 29
MFD #2 REV 3 44 48
19 34-20 A1 AHRS #1
21 34-21-00
80
82

77-40 A2 ENGINE AND SYSTEM INTEGRATED 34-28 A3 MULTIFUNCTION

DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL (ESCP) DISPLAY (MFD) #2

REVERSION SWITCHING CIRCUITS

Figure 31-24.  EIS Reversion
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-24. EIS Reversion. NOTES

Three [ATT REV] and [ADU REV] discrete
signals are supplied from the ESID control
panel (ESCP) to tell the DUs to show the No.1
or No. 2 parameter.

The MFD1 and MFD2 reversions are done the

same way.

NOTE
Two [ADU REV] discrete
signals are also supplied to the
AHRU1 and AHRU2 to make
them switch their input from
ADU1 or ADU2.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-39

31-40 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

U PP0 9
+28 VDC
T PP1 10
C PP2 11
RTN 7 PP0 9
D PP3 12 CHASSIS GND
100 PP1 10
PP4 13
P2-A3 PP2 11
N PP5 14
CHASSIS GND T PP3 12
H UNITS 87 +28 VDC
U PP4 13
P1-A1 UNITS 88
C PP5 14
7 FT 89 RTN
CHASSIS GND D UNITS 87
100 PARITY 90
UNITS 88
SHOP 92
H FT 89
CHASSIS GND
N PARITY 90
SHOP 92

DASH 8 Q400
PFD #1 34-28 A1
PFD #1
MFD #2 34-28 A3
+28 VDC (A2)
L MAIN 10
MFD #2
+28 VDC (B6)
R MAIN 10
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ESID
CR1
+28 VDC (B11)
R ESS 10 U PP0 9
+28 VDC
T PP1 10

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ESID C PP2 11
CR2 RTN
+28 VDC (B5) D PP3 12
R MAIN 10 PP4 13
N PP5 14
MFD #1 CHASSIS GND
H UNITS 87
+28 VDC (B7) UNITS 88
L ESS 10 7 FT 89
CHASSIS GND
100 PARITY 90
PFD #2 SHOP 92
+28 VDC (A5)
R MAIN 10
ENGINE 77-40 A1
DISPLAY (ED)
AVIONICS C/B PNL

H PP0 9
CHASSIS GND
N PP1 10
U PP2 11
+28 VDC
T PP3 12
C PP4 13
RTN
D PP5 14
UNITS 87
U PP0 9
+28 VDC UNITS 88
T PP1 10
7 FT 89
C PP2 11 CHASSIS GND
RTN 100 PARITY 90
D PP3 12
SHOP 92
PP4 13
N PP5 14
CHASSIS GND
H UNITS 87
UNITS 88 MFD #1 34-28 A2
7 FT 89
CHASSIS GND
100 PARITY 90
SHOP 92

PFD #2 34-28 A4
POWER SUPPLY (+28 VDC)/
PROGRAMMING PINS

Figure 31-25.  Power Supply

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-25. Power Supply. NOTES

28 VDC is supplied directly to the DUs.

The DUs supply indication data through

different ARINC 429 feedback buses to other
display units to make sure that the important
parameters are correctly drawn.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-41

31-42 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

60
61

PFD #1 34-28 A1

EFIS CP
ON/OFF PFD #1 25
+28 VDC (C2) HI 13 60
EFCP #1
L MAIN 5 1 +28 VDC LO 14 61
2 DC RTN
24-61-00 P
10 PP SIDE 1 B-

DASH 8 Q400
AVIONICS C/B PNL NC 11 PP SIDE 2
26
50 REF GND MFD #1 34-28 A2
34 CHASSIS ON/OFF
MFD #1 GND

B-
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

EFCP #1 34-28 A5 P

ENGINE 77-40 A1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

DISPLAY (ED)
AV. RACK
EFIS CP
ALL 45
+28 VDC (B2) ON/OFF ED 41
L MAIN 5 1 +28 VDC
BUS 2 DC RTN 13 327 HI ESCP
24-61-00 14 326 LO A429 (IN)
34 CHASSIS GND
AVIONICS C/B PNL
50 REF GND IOP #1 31-41 A1
AV. RACK

ESCP (ESID) 77-40 A2

327
326

EFIS CP IOP #2 31-41 A2

+28 VDC (C5) P1-A6
R MAIN 5 1 +28 VDC ON/OFF MFD #2 26
2 DC RTN HI 13
24-61-00 EFCP #2
LO 14
25 B-
AVIONICS C/B PNL 11 EFCP #2 PP SIDE 2 P
NC 10 EFCP #2 PP SIDE 1
50 REF GND 60
61
34 CHASSIS GND

MFD #2 34-28 A3

EFCP #2 34-28 A6

60
61

P
CONTROL PANELS OFF/ON/MISC OUTPUTS TO DISPLAYS
PFD #2 34-28 A4

Figure 31-26.  ON/OFF Control

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-26. ON/OFF Control. NOTES

The EFIS control panels (EFCP1 and EFCP2)
and ESID control panel (ESCP) supply a [ON/
OFF] discrete signal to the DU to energize and
de-energize it.

The EFCP1 and EFCP2 also supply control data

through ARINC 429 buses directly to the DUs.

The ESID supplies control data through the two

input/output processors (IOP1 and IOP2) of the
flight data processing system (FDPS) to the DUs.

The ESID supplies an [ALL] discrete signal to

the DU to sequence it to the next system page.
This is used if the ARINC 429 bus malfunctions.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-43

31-44 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

AV. RACK AV.RACK

HI 119 R-
IOP #2-3 329
LO 118 S-
328
HI 121 Q-
IOP #2-2 PFD #1 HI 17 419
LO 122 P-
IOP LO 18 418
PFD #1 HEALTHY 53 321
69
IOP #2 31-41 A2 PFD #1 HEALTHY FB 38 322
70
77
315
86
314
417
418
PFD #1 34-28 A1

DASH 8 Q400
IOP #1 31-41 A1

R- MFD #1 HI 17
S- IOP LO 18
Q- MFD #1 HEALTHY 38 AV.RACK
P- MFD #1 HEALTHY FB 53

69
70
77 305
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

86 310

MFD #1 34-28 A2 203

206

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

210

R- HI 17 IOM #1 31-40 A1
ED IOP
S- LO 18
Q- ED HEALTHY FB 53
P- ED HEALTHY 38

69
70 AV.RACK
77
86

ENGINE 77-40 A1 305

DISPLAY (ED) 310

203
69 MFD #2 HEALTHY 38 206
70 MFD #2 HEALTHY FB 53 210
77 MFD #2 HI 17
86 IOP LO 18
IOM #2 31-40 A2
R-
S-
Q-
P- AV.RACK

MFD #2 34-28 A3
AV. RACK 321
322
419
69
418
70
PFD #2 HEALTHY 53
HI 121 77
IOP #1-2 PFD #2 HEALTHY FB 38
LO 122 86
PFD #2 HI 17 417
IOP LO 18 418
HI 119 R-
IOP #1-3 315
LO 118 S-
314
Q-
329
P-
IOP #1 31-41 A1 328
CONTINOUS
MONITORING MFD #2 34-28 A4 IOP #2 31-41 A2

Figure 31-27.  Continuous Monitoring

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-27. Continuous Monitoring. NOTES

The DUs supply [HEALTHY] discretes through
the input/output module 1 (IOM) to the central
diagnostic system (CDS) in input/output
processor 1 (IOP1).

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-45

31-46 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

TO AIRCRAFT TO AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS SYSTEMS

DASH 8 Q400
ACM ACM
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FDPS1 FDPS2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

28 VDC P P 28 VDC
I I I I
L ESS P P R MAIN
O O O O
S S
28 VDC M P P M 28 VDC
M M
L MAIN 1 1 2 2 R MAIN
1 2

FROM FROM
NO. 1 AIRCRAFT NO. 2 AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS SYSTEMS

fsr79a01a.cgm

Figure 31-28.  Flight Data Processing System (FDPS) Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-41-00 FLIGHT DATA Analogue and discrete signals are supplied

to the IOMs to change the signals to ARINC
PROCESSING SYSTEM format before they go to the IOP.
(FDPS) ARINC data is supplied from the IOP modules
to the IOMs to change ARINC data to an
INTRODUCTION analogue or discrete signal before they are
supplied as an output.
The FDPS receives data from sensors
and avionics systems for calculation and
Data from the No.1 system is supplied to other
concentration and supplies it to other systems.
systems through FDPS1 and No.2 system data
is supplied through FDPS2. If an IOM or IOP
The FDPS also makes calculations to cause
malfunction is sensed, the data is then supplied
different warning tones to sound and it
through the opposite FDPS, and an advisory
shows messages if an important system has
message is shown by the electronic instruments
malfunctioned or if the aircraft is in a dangerous
system (EIS).
condition.

GENERAL NOTE
Some data is only supplied to
Refer to Figure 31-28. Flight Data Processing
FDPS1 or FDPS2.
System (FDPS) Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2).

The FDPS has the following units:

•• Input/output processor module
•• Input/output module
•• Prime power supply module
•• Aircraft configuration module.

These modules are contained in the integrated

flight cabinets (IFC).

ARINC 429 data is supplied to the IOP modules

for calculation and concentration.

The IOMs convert analogue and discrete signals

from aircraft systems to ARINC format before
they go to the IOP. It also converts ARINC data
supplied from the IOP to an analog or discrete
signal before they are sent as an output.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-47

31-48 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

5 PPSM 1
SPM 1
AVIONICS (LEFT MAIN), F2

DASH 8 Q400
10
IFC 1
IOM/IOP
FGM 1
AVIONICS (LEFT ESSENTIAL), F7
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

IOM 1 IOP 1 FGM 1 SPM 1

PPSM 2
5

SPM 2
AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN), F5

10
IFC 2
IOM/IOP
FGM 2
AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN), F6

IOM 2 IOP 2 FGM 2 SPM 2

fsn22a01a.cgm

Figure 31-29.  Flight Data Processing System (FDPS) Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-29. Flight Data Processing
System (FDPS) Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2).

The FDPS has the following functions:

•• Calculations of aircraft and avionics
parameters
•• Concentration of non-critical parameters
to the automatic flight guidance
control system, stall warning/stick
pusher, electronic instruments system,
radio management, weather radar
system, enhanced ground proximity
warning system, traffic alerting and
collision avoidance system, and flight
management system
•• Concentration of parameters for the
flight data recorder and extended
quick access recorder (EQAR) system
(changes ARINC 429 data to ARINC
717) (IOP1 only)
•• C o n c e n t r a t i o n a n d c a l c u l a t i o n o f
parameters from weather radar control
panel, index control panel, flight
guidance control panel, and ESID
control panel
•• Warning tone generation and set TCAS,
EGPWS aural priority
•• WTG monitoring and reversion
•• Self-tests and continuous tests
•• B u i l t - i n t e s t e q u i p m e n t ( B I T E )
management
•• Software teleloading
•• Maintenance, interface with central
diagnostic system (CDS).
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-49

31-50 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

SENSOR MISMATCH
No. 1 - ACQUISITION MESSAGE
- CALCULATION
-

DASH 8 Q400
SYMBOL GENERATION
MISMATCH
FLAG

MISMATCH
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY No. 1 (PFD 1)
IOP 1

THRESHOLD
MISMATCH
MESSAGE

IOP 2

FDPS 1, FDPS 2 MISMATCH

MESSAGE
- ACQUISITION
- CALCULATION
SENSOR - SYMBOL GENERATION
MISMATCH
No. 2 FLAG

fs0b2a01.cgm PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY No. 2 (PFD 2)

Figure 31-30.  Mismatch Calculations

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Mismatch Calculations NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-30. Mismatch Calculations.

The IOPs sense differences between systems

No. 1 and No. 2 for the following parameters:

•• Pitch
•• Roll
•• Heading
•• Indicated airspeed
•• Altitude
•• Radio Altitude
•• Glideslope
•• Localizer.

If the difference is more than the threshold, a

mismatch flag and mismatch message is shown
by the EIS.
NOTE
The EIS will show only the most
important mismatch message and it
is the primary mismatch indication.

The EIS does not show a mismatch

flag for the glideslope and localizer.

The mismatch calculations are done only when

the conditions are as follows:

•• Data must be valid

•• No AHRS, ADC, or VHF navigation
receiver source reversion is set.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-51

31-52 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

EFIS 1 (PFD) EFIS 2 (PFD)

DASH 8 Q400
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

IFC 1 IFC 2

IOM 1 IOP 1 IOP 2 IOM 2

RA 1 VHF NAV 1
RA 2 VHF NAV 2
fsg98a01a.cgm

Figure 31-31.  Essential Monitoring Calculation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Essential Monitoring NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-31. Essential Monitoring
Calculation.

The IOPs sense differences between a

parameter received directly and the same
parameter received through the opposite IOP
and PFD system for the parameters that follow:

•• Radio altitude
•• Localizer deviation
•• Glideslope deviation.

If the difference is more than the threshold, a

mismatch message is shown by the EIS.

Advisory Message Calculations

Integrated Flight Cabinet. The malfunctions
sensed by the FDPS are shown by the EIS.

The FDPS also makes the AVIONICS caution

light on the CWP come on for no dispatch
allowed avionics messages when the aircraft is
on the ground and less than 50 knots.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-53

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
Figure 31-32.  FDPS Warning Tone Generators (WTG1, WTG2)
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING 31-54 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Warning Tone Generator (WTG) The two warning tone generators receive
parameters from aircraft systems and generate and
Refer to Figure 31-32. FDPS Warning Tone prioritize the warning tones as a function of IOP
Generators (WTG1, WTG2). logic. The master WTG, if it is valid, supplies the
warning tone signal (made in the IOM) through
The WTG is a function of the Input/Output
the Remote Control Audio Unit (RCAU) to the
Modules (IOM1, IOM2). One WTG supplies a
flight compartment speakers and pilots headsets.
warning tone to the Remote Control Audio Unit
(RCAU) and other WTG monitors it. The RCAU
WTG1 and WTG2 independently monitor the
amplifies the signal and sends the tone to the flight
warning tone at the output of the IOM. WTG1
compartment speakers and the pilot’s headsets.
transmits its health status to WTG2.
The WTG supplies warning tones to advise of
The WTG receives inputs from other systems to
conditions or system malfunctions. The warning
make it operate. Each WTG monitors its output.
tones have the following priority:
If the WTG calculates different tones, the system
will use the calculations from WTG1.
Priority Tone Description
1 EGPWS Voice from EGPWS Warning Tone Generators (WTG1, WTG2):
computer
2 TCAS RA Voice from TCAS •• The WTG1 sounds the applicable tone
processor when necessary because it is the master
3 Fire Continuous chime until •• T h e W T G 2 i s a s t a n d b y , b a c k u p
manually cancelled unit if WTG2 senses that the WTG1
4 Incorrect take 1000 Hz intermittent malfunctioned, it will become the master
off configuration tone until cause of •• The WTG2 only generates tones when
condition is removed WTG1 has malfunctioned.
5 Autopilot 250 Hz intermittent tone
disengage for 1.5 sec (manual) or
until manually cancelled
(automatic)
6 Pitch trim in Continuous click until
motion cause of condition is
removed
7 Overspeed 1000 Hz intermittent
tone until cause of
condition is removed
8 Incorrect landing Continuous 800 Hz tone
configuration until cause of condition
is removed
9 Altitude alert 2900 Hz tone for 1 sec
10 Beta lockout Continuous 1900 Hz
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

warning to 2900 Hz tone until

cause of condition is
removed
11 Master warning 3 chimes
12 Master caution 1 chime
13 TCAS, TA Voice
14 SELCAL 800 Hz tone for 2 sec

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-55

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

L Ess DC Bus

audio
Logic generation
acquisition

emission
priority
RCAU

audio monit
audio
detection

emi/acq

IOM
IOP

ARINC
Discrete
other
systems

emi/acq

audio
audio monit

detection

Logic
acquisition

priority

emission

audio
generation

IOP IOM
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

R Main DC Bus

Figure 31-33.  Warning Tone Generators

31-56 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-33. Warning Tone Generators. NOTES

The EGPWS and TCAS are systems that make
their own synthesized voice sounds and connect
directly to the Audio Integrating System (AIS).
When the WTG senses an EGPWS audio on
condition, it inhibits the other tones when the
aircraft is airborne.

The EGPWS audio on signal is monitored to

prevent an inhibit of a different WTG tone
caused by a partial GPWS malfunction. If the
GPWS audio on signal stays on for more than
60 seconds, the EGPWS’s priority status is
ignored. An EGPWS and a TCAS or WTG tone
is allowed to be heard at the same time.

The GPWS malfunction condition and that the

TCAS and WTG continues to function is easily
identified by the pilots. To be able to sense
this malfunction condition, the FDPS does not
inhibit the GPWS during the

WTG test (ADC1 or ADC2 TEST toggle switch

selection).

When either WTG1 or WTG2 is latched off

due to a malfunction, they will remain off until
the next power interruption. The POST will
determine the validity of WTG1 and WTG2 at
the next power up.

A Warning Tone Generator (WTG1, WTG2)

malfunction is stored in the Built In Test
Equipment (BITE) and sent to the Central
Diagnostic System for display as a fault on
ARCDU1 or ARCDU2.

The Engine Display (ED) advisory message

location will show a WTG FAIL message when
a WTG malfunctions.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-57

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

D
FW

AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION fsj52a01.cgm

Figure 31-34.  Integrated Flight Cabinet

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-58 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTES

Integrated Flight Cabinet
Refer to Figure 31-34. Integrated Flight Cabinet.

The integrated flight cabinet No.1 (IFC1) is

installed in the lower shelf of the avionics rack.
The IFC2 is installed on the upper shelf of the
avionics rack.

The IFCs are electromagnetic containment

compartments that give high intensity radio
frequency (HIRF) protection to the modules in
them as follows:

•• Input/Output processor
•• Input/Output module
•• Prime power supply
•• Flight guidance module
•• Stall protection module.

NOTE
The aircraft configuration
modules are attached externally
to the IFCs.

The IFCs are cooled by the avionics cooling

system.

Each module is a Line Replaceable Unit (LRU).

They are guided into the IFC with a guide rail
and guide pins. The top and bottom guide pins
at the back panel of the IFC makes sure that
the modules come together precisely and in the
correct location.

Each module is held in place with front locking

levers to allow easy removal and installation
without tools.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-59

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A D
FW

A AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION

B INTEGRATED FLIGHT CABINET C INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR MODULE

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

D INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE

Figure 31-35.  Input/Output Module and Processor Module

fs897a01.cgm fs896a01.cgm

31-60 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Input/Output Processor Module Line Operational: The line operational mode

of the IOP has the following functions:
Refer the Figure 31-35. Input/Output Module
and Processor Module. •• Flight data recorder concentration,
flight data concentrator (FDC)
The input/Output processor modules are
installed in the IFCs. •• C o n c e n t r a t i o n o f d a t a , d a t a h u b
concentrator (DHC).
The IOPs store the aircraft configuration data •• Calculations, data control (DCO)
and CRC data in their own memory. The aircraft
configuration data is then supplied to the •• Generation of warning tones, warning
necessary systems. The aircraft configuration tone generator (WTG)
module parameters are cross-checked by the •• Continuous test.
two FDPS. If a malfunction is sensed, a fault is
stored in built in test equipment (BITE) of the Maintenance: The maintenance mode gives
IOP and transmitted to the CDS. An advisory CDS system indications of malfunctions.
message is also shown by the EIS. Internal malfunctions are saved in the non
volatile memory (NVM) of the IOP. External
The IOP module has the following functions: malfunctions of the FDPS are saved only
when the aircraft speed is more than 80 knots.
•• Initialization
All malfunctions are supplied to the central
•• Power on self test (POST) diagnostic system (CDS).
•• Line operational
Teleloading: The operational software and
•• Maintenance data base is downloaded from a portable
maintenance access terminal (PMAT) through
•• Teleloading.
an RS422 serial connection to the IOP module.
Teleloading can only be performed by the
Initialization: The IOP operates in the
manufacturer or an authorised shop.
initialization mode after a long electrical power
interruption that continues for more than 200
Refer to Figure 31-35. Input/Output Module
ms (a power interruption less than 200 ms has
and Processor Module.
no effect). It will then continue to operate in
one of the following modes: Input/Output Modules: The IOM is an
interface between the aircraft sensors and
•• (POST)
the input/output processing (IOP) module.
•• Line operational It converts discrete and analogue inputs to
ARINC 429 outputs and ARINC 429 inputs to
•• Maintenance.
discrete and analogue outputs.
If the aircraft is on the ground and there is a
long power interruption, the IOP does a POST
before it goes to the operational mode. But, if
it is airborne it goes directly to the operational
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

mode and uses the previous status of the POST.

POST: The POST of the FDPS checks the

condition of paramet ers t hat cann ot be
monitored by the continuous test in the line
operational mode. It resets the previous
continuous operational test status.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-61

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A D
FW

A AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION

B INTEGRATED FLIGHT CABINET C fs900a01.cgm

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-36.  Prime Power Supply Module (PPSM)

31-62 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Prime Power Supply Module The PPS board of the PPSM has the following
functions:
(PPSM)
Refer to: •• Filtering and pre-regulation of two 28
VDC power buses
•• Figure 31-36. Prime Power Supply
Module (PPSM). •• Energy reserves against power cut-off.
•• Figure 31-29. Flight Data Processing •• Distribution of individual dedicated
System (FDPS) Block Diagram (Sheet power lines to each LRM.
2 of 2). •• Power down signal related to each 28
VDC bus.
The PPSM is installed in the IFC on a shelf of
the avionics rack. It supplies 28 VDC electrical •• Saves internal malfunctions in its non
power to the IOMs, IOPs, FGMs and SPMs. volatile memory (NVM).

It has the following boards: All malfunctions are supplied to the central
diagnostic system (CDS).
•• Prime Power Supply (PPS)
The energy reserve board has capacitors at the
•• Energy reserve.
circuit breaker outputs to make it resistant to
voltage changes.
The PPSM is a power interface between the
aircraft power buses and the other LRM’s. The
PPSM is a common module for different IFC
configurations. Its requirements are those
necessary for the maximum configuration,
five LRM’s.

For IFC1:

•• 1 LRM is supplied with 28 VDC Left

main bus
•• 3 LRM are supplied with 28 VDC Left
essential bus
•• 1 spare LRM provision may be supplied
with 28 VDC main bus or 28 VDC
essential bus.

For IFC2:

•• 4 LRM are supplied with 28 VDC right

main.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

•• 1 SPARE LRM provision may be

supplied with 28 VDC main bus.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-63

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A D
FW

A AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION

FW
D

FW
D
C

B INTEGRATED FLIGHT CABINET C fse96a01.cgm

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-37.  Aircraft Configuration Module

31-64 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Aircraft Configuration Module NOTES

(ACM)
Refer to Figure 31-37. Aircraft Configuration
Module.

The ACM is installed on the rear of the IFC.

The FDPS uses data that is stored in the Aircraft

Configuration Modules (ACM 1, ACM 2).
Each IOP supplies the configuration data to the
systems that follow:
•• Electronic Instrument System (EIS)
•• Stall Protection System (SPS), Stall
Protection Modules (SPM 1, SPM 2)
•• Audio and Radio Control Display Units
(ARCDU1, ARCDU2).

It has an EEPROM Non-Volatile Memory

(NVM) board contained in metal covers.

The ACM stores non-critical aircraft

configuration data such as:

•• The systems and options that are

installed
•• The aircraft type and serial number
•• The equipment configuration data (VHF
COM extended range and frequency
step, display options, AOA calibration,
etc.).

Each system monitors the configuration data.

If a malfunction is sensed, it is stored in the
Built In Test Equipment (BITE) and sent to the
Central Diagnostics System (CDS) and the ED
shows an IFC message.

The aircraft configuration module 1 (ACM1)

supplies aircraft configuration data (installed
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

equipment) and cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

data to IOP1 and ACM2 supplies aircraft
configuration data and CRC data to IOP2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-65

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

MTOP UPTRIM MTOP

100 % TRQ 100 %
%

NH 0 0 NH
%RPM %RPM

A/FSELECT
0. 0 PROP 0. 0
RPM

FF 0 0 FF
PPH PPH
0 0
ITT
C
NL NL
%RPM %RPM
0 20 20 0
[ BALANCE ]
C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI
0 0 4300 LBS 3600 0 0
+ 25 C + 22
SAT + 0 C

WTG1 FAIL FANS FAIL

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-38.  IFC Advisory Messages

31-66 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Controls and Indications NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-38. IFC Advisory Messages.

The EIS shows the IFC advisory messages at

the bottom left part of the Engine Display (ED)
that follows:

IOP1 FAIL: The IOP1 output has malfunctioned

for more than 10 seconds.

IOP BAD CONF: The IOP1 or IOP2 senses that

it does not receive valid aircraft configuration
data from the ACM1 and ACM2, or that the
data is different. The IOP BAD CONF message
can come into view only after an IOP power-on
self-test (POST).

IOM1 FAIL: The IOP1 senses that IOM1 has

malfunctioned.

WTG1 FAIL: The IOP1 senses WTG1 output

has malfunctioned. If warning tones from
WTG1 and WTG2 are different, a WTGS FAIL
advisory message is shown.

WOW/IOP1 FAIL: The IOP1 senses different

Proximity Sensor Electronics Unit (PSEU)
Weight-On-Wheels 1 (WOW1) and WOW2
inputs during a Power-On Self-Test (POST).
This indication is shown on the ground only
because the IOP1 cannot do a POST when it
is airborne.

The WT ON WHEELS caution light on the

CWP will also come on.

RA1 FAIL: ED senses that RA1 has

malfunctioned for more than 10 seconds.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-67

31-68 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

DASH 8 Q400
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PITCH PITOT HEAT
A ICE DETECT #1 HYD ROLL SPLR STAL
T L
#1 STALL
TRIM STBY FAIL
F L
FAI L
ISO VLV INBD SPLR F L
FAI
SYST FAIL

PITOT PITOT CABIN #2 HYD STAL

T L
#2 STALL
HEAT
A 1 HEAT
A 2 DUCT HOT L
ISO VLV F L
FAI
SYST FAIL

CABIN ROLL SPLR PUSHER P

PARKIN
PARKINGG
P CK HOT
PA
PACK INBD HYD F L
FAI
SYST FAIL BRAKE

PROP MAIN INBD OUTBD

DEICE BATT
A ERY
R
BATTERY ANTISKID ANTISKID

DEICE #1 HYD #2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

TIMER FLUID HOT FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

L S
LT
EMER LTS INTERNAL SIDE WDO DEICE NOSE FUELING
AVIONICS
DISARMED DOORS HOT PRESS STEERING ON

CABIN CHK #1 ENG #1 ENG #2 ENG MAIN BAT

A
PRESS FIRE DET OIL PRESS F
FADE
FADECC FAI
F
FAILL F
FADE
FADECC FAI
F L
FAIL HOT

Figure 31-39.  AVIONICS Caution Light on CWP

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-39. AVIONICS Caution NOTES

Light on CWP.

The AVIONICS caution light in the CWP will

come on for avionics no dispatch conditions.

The AVIONICS caution light does not come on

for the following malfunctions:

•• RA1 FAIL, RA2 FAIL, RAS FAIL

•• FADEC1/DU, FADEC2/DU
•• LINK FAIL.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-69

31-70 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

MTOP MTOP FUEL

75% TRQ 75% VALVE VALVE
%

DASH 8 Q400
TRANSFER SW

OPEN TO TO OPEN
TANK1 TANK2
NH 75 75 NH
%RPM %RPM
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

l l l l l l

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

3 3
92.3 PROP 92.3 l 4 l 4

l
QTY TANK1 TANK1 QTY
RPM 2 2

l
5 AUX PUMP AUX PUMP

l
l

l
LBS LBS

l
1 SW SW 1
X1000 6 X1000

l
1020 1020

l
FF FF 0 7 0 7
l l
OFF OFF
l l
l l l l
PPH PPH
1020 1020
ITT TOTAL FUEL
C TANK +20°C 4000 LBS

NL NL
%RPM %RPM
74 755 755 74

C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI

50 65 1020 LBS 1020 50 65
PSI x 1000
--- + 22 C
SAT + 22 C

IOP1 FAIL

Figure 31-40.  IOP1 FAIL

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-40. IOP1 FAIL. NOTES

Most aircraft and avionics parameters are
supplied through FDPS1 and FDPS2 to the
interfaced system, but the parameters that
follow only go through FDPS1:

•• Flight data recorder (FDR)

•• Fuel Temperature 1
•• Hydraulic quantity 1
•• Hydraulic quantity 3
•• Parking brake pressure.

If FDPS1 malfunctions, the FLT DATA

RECORDER caution light will come on and
the EIS shows dashes for these parameters, or
they go out of view.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-71

31-72 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

MTOP MTOP FUEL

75% TRQ 75% VALVE VALVE
% TRANSFER SW

DASH 8 Q400
OPEN TO TO OPEN
TANK1 TANK2
NH 75 75 NH
%RPM %RPM
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

l l l l l l
l 3 l 3
92.3 92.3 4 4

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PROP

l
QTY TANK1 TANK1 QTY
RPM 2 2

l
5 AUX PUMP AUX PUMP

l
l

l
LBS LBS

l
1 SW SW 1
X1000 6 X1000

l
1020 1020

l
FF FF 0 7 0 7
l l
OFF OFF
l l
l l l l
PPH PPH
1020 1020 TOTAL FUEL
ITT TANK +20°C
C 4000 LBS

NL NL
%RPM %RPM
74 755 755 74

C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI

50 65 1020 LBS 1020 50 65
PSI x 1000
+ 22 C ---
SAT + 22 C

IOP2 FAIL

Figure 31-41.  IOP2 FAIL

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-41. IOP2 FAIL. NOTES

The following parameters only go through
FDPS2:

•• Traffic alerting and collision avoidance

system (TCAS)
•• Hydraulic quantity 2
•• Fuel temperature 2.

If FDPS2 malfunctions, the EIS shows a

TCAS FAIL message and shows dashes for
the parameters, or they are removed from view.

NOTE
If FDPS2 malfunctions, the
parameters supplied only to
FDPS2 will not be recorded
by the FDR. The FLT DATA
RECORDER caution light does
not come on.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-73

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

1 CLOCK 1
CLOCK
1

AVIONICS (LEFT ESSENTIAL), E9

CVR
1

CLOCK
1

RIGHT DC (BATTERY POWER), F3

IFC
PSEU

CLOCK
2

AVIONICS (RIGHT MAIN), E6

CLOCK
2

RIGHT DC (BATTERY POWER), G3

CLOCK 2
fs616a01a.cgm

Figure 31-42.  Clocks - Block Diagram

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-74 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-21-00 CLOCKS NOTE

The date is also supplied to the
INTRODUCTION central diagnostics system (CDS)
in FDPS No.1 to time and date
The clocks have the following functions: mark faults recorded by the CDS.
•• C o n t i n u o u s d i g i t a l i n d i c a t i o n o f CLOCK 1 and CLOCK 2 are interfaced directly
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) with proximity sensor electronics unit (PSEU)
•• Local Time (LOC) Digital to measure ET when the aircraft is airborne.
•• Digital indication of elapsed time
•• Indication of the chronometer function
(seconds is a sweep-hand and minutes
are digital)
•• Indication of month, day and year
(Digital).

•• The clocks provide the time to aircraft

systems via the ARINC 429 bus.

•• T h e c l o c k s r e c e i v e a i r / g r o u n d
information from the PSEU to control
the elapsed time function.

GENERAL
Refer to Figure 31-42. Clocks - Block Diagram.

The clocks are located on the pilot’s and

co-pilot’s glareshield panels, and are controlled
by front panel push buttons.

28 VDC primary electrical power is supplied

from the left essential bus to CLOCK 1 and
from the right main bus to CLOCK 2.

28 VDC standby (backup/keep-alive) electrical

power is supplied from the right battery power
bus to both clocks.

The CLOCK 1 is interfaced directly with the

cockpit voice recorder (CVR). The two clocks
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

interface with the FDR, through the input/

output processor modules of the FDPS. The
FDR usually records time and date from the
CLOCK 1 and will switch to CLOCK 2 if
CLOCK 1 is unserviceable.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-75

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

POWERED FLIGHT CONTROL SHUTOFFS

STICK PUSHER STICK PUSHER

SPOILERS SHUT OFF SHUT OFF

FLIGHT
ENGINE FIRE ENGINE FIRE
A/P IAS
ROLL INBD DISENG

TAXI INHIBIT INHIBIT ANTI SKID

TEST

ELEVATOR TRIM TERRAIN TERRAIN ELEVATOR TRIM

CF-SFM SHUT OFF INHIBIT INHIBIT SHUT OFF
CF-SFM
HSI
WARNING SEL
PRESS TO RESET

GLARESHIELD PANEL

3
SEL

ET
4
RST

INT
LEGEND CHR
MODE
1. Mode pushbutton switch
2. Chronometer function switch 1
3. ET SEL pushbutton switch
4. ET RST pushbutton switch CHR
2

Figure 31-43.  Electronic Clocks

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-44.  Electronic Clock

31-76 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Refer to Figure 31-44. Electronic Clock.

Digital Electronic Clock The functions of the various switches on the

post MODSUM 4-126043 electronic clock are
Refer to Figure 31-43. Electronic Clocks. as follow:
(Modsum-4-126043)
•• Mode - Short push to change the display
With the original clock on the Q400 out of to show day, month, year, hour, minute in
production, SB 84-31-38 was introduced in mid GMT or local. Long push of more than 2
2010 as a new digital clock. The new Dash 8 seconds will change the clock operating
Q400 digital clocks provide current time and mode to clock setting mode or vice versa
date in local or Universal Coordinated Time
(UTC), elapsed time (ET) and chronometer •• ET SEL - Push to decrease the blinking
(CHR) functions. minute/hour/day/month/year in the
clock setting mode
There are two rows of display. Top row has 6 •• ET RST - Push to increase the blinking
digits for showing local or GMT date or time. minute/hour/day/month/year in the
The bottom row has 4 digits and is used to clock setting mode
display elapsed time and chronometer.
•• CHR - In ET mode, push once to display
There are six modes and corresponding elapsed Time on ground, a second
annunciations: push will reset the ET. In CHR mode,
it is pushed to start the chronometer
•• INT - INT flag for internal time display on ground. Another push will stop the
mode chronometer. A third push will reset the
elapsed time to zero.
•• DT - DT flag for date display mode
•• LT - LT flag for local time display
•• GPS - Not used
•• ET - Lower display shows elapsed
flight time
•• CHR - Chronometer mode.

At start-up, the clock automatically starts in

the INT mode.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-77

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS Elapsed Time (ET): Elapsed time (flight

time) is shown in the bottom digital display
Refer to Figure 31-45. Electronic Clock. from 0 to 99:59.

Each clock has a selector switch for control and

are labelled as:
NOTE
This mode is automatically
•• DATE started when the aircraft is
airborne and can be manually
•• LOC
reset only when on ground.
•• GMT
The ET pushbutton switch is pushed to show
•• SET.
the elapsed time. It is pushed again to show the
chronometer time.
Each clock also has two pushbutton switches
labelled as:
When the aircraft is on the ground, the ET
pushbutton switch is pushed to show the elapsed
•• CHR
time. It is pushed again to reset the ET to zero.
•• ET.

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT): GMT is shown

in the top digital display of the clock face from
00:00 to 23 hours 59 minutes. A dot is shown
between the two hour numbers above the GMT
label to indicate GMT selection.

Local Time (LOC): LOC time is shown in the

top digital display of the clock face from 00:00
to 23 hours 59 minutes. A dot is shown between
the two minute numbers above the LOC label to
indicate LOC selection.

Date: The day, month, and year are shown in the

top digital display of the clock face. The two left
numbers show the month from 01 to 12 and the
two right digits show the day from 01 to 31, then
the year from 00 to 99. The indication changes
from year to month/date at a one second rate.

Chronometer Function (CHR): The

chronometer minutes are shown in the right
part of the bottom digital display from 0 to 99 Figure 31-45.  Electronic Clock
and the seconds are shown with a clock face
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

and sweep-hand.

The CHR pushbutton switch is pushed once to

start the chronometer. The CHR switch is pushed
second time to stop the chronometer. It is pushed
a third time to reset the CHR back to zero.

31-78 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SET: The selector switch is pushed and turned NOTES

to SET position to set the clock in the following
sequence:

•• GMT minutes
•• GMT hours
•• LOC minutes
•• LOC hours
•• Days
•• Months
•• Years (default at power on is 90).

The CHR switch is pushed to change the

parameter, and then the ET switch is pushed
to set it.

NOTE
The parameter that is being
changed will flash.

Adjustment of the Digital

Electronic Clock
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.

To adjust the times on the digital clock push

the MODE switch. The (GMT) minutes will be
blink. Push ET RST switch to increase or push
ET SEL switch to decrease the time.

The next selection of the MODE switch to

set the GMT hours, year, month, day Local
minutes and local hours. Push ET RST switch
to increase or push ET SEL switch to decrease
the value that is blinking.

Push MODE switch for a minimum of two

seconds to set operational mode.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

NOTE
The Month is shown on the two
left digits, and the Year is shown
on the two right digits. The day
is shown in the two right digits
on the two center digits.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-79

31-80 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FLT DATA
AVIONICS (LEFT MAIN), F3 K5 RECORDER
FDR 5G +- 2G
1

FLIGHT DATA CAUTION

RCDR LIGHT
IMPACT SWITCH
NORM

DASH 8 Q400
GND RELAY BOX
TEST
FSCU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FLIGHT DATA
+RCDR
WARNING
EMERGENCY
USE ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

UNAUTHORIZED
OPERATION
PROHIBITED

E TERIOR LIGHTS

WING WHITE LOGO

IFC 1 (IOM1, IOP1, FDC)
INSP A COL LIGHT

FLIGHT DATA RECORDER

RED

OFF

WHITE
A/COL

FROM NO.1 PSEU

EQAR
AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS
FROM NO.2
AIRCRAFT
SYSTEMS (IOM 2, IOP2)

Figure 31-46.  Flight Data Recorder (FDR) Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-32-00 FLIGHT DATA The interlock circuit has a relay that is

controlled by Input/Output Module #1 (IOM1).
RECORDER SYSTEM The IOM1 monitors the following inputs:
(FDR) •• A/COL toggle switch on the EXTERIOR
LIGHTS control panel
INTRODUCTION •• Either engine is operating (oil pressure
The Solid State Flight Data Recorder (SSFDR) is sensed)
records aircraft parameter data and stores it in •• WOFFW (nose or main)
crash-protected memory for future retrieval
purposes. •• FLIGHT DATA RCDR toggle switch on
the FLIGHT DATA RCDR control panel.
The FDR records 25 hours of aircraft parameters.
The FDR has a discrete output to the IOM1 for
the central diagnostic system functions and one
GENERAL to the caution and warning panel (CWP) for a
Refer to Figure 31-46. Flight Data Recorder malfunction indication.
(FDR) Block Diagram.

The FDR has the following units:

•• Flight data recorder
•• Mounting tray
•• Flight signal conditioning unit
•• Impact switch
•• Ground test panel
•• Test twitch
•• FDR underwater locating device.

Serial data is supplied from the Input/Output

Processor #1 (IOP1) from aircraft systems
through an ARINC 717 data bus to the FDR.
The FDR supplies serial data through a loop-
back ARINC 717 data bus back to IOP1 for
monitoring and to the Extended Quick Access
Recorder (EQAR) if it is installed. A Flight
Signal Conditioning Unit (FSCU) supplies the
position and force of pilot and co-pilot control
input through an ARINC data bus to the IOP1.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

28 VDC electrical power is supplied through an

interlock circuit and impact switch.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied directly

to the FSCU.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-81

31-82 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

DASH 8 Q400
FWD
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FDR Underwater

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Locating Device
(Universal)
CVR/FDR SHELF

FWD

B
UNIVERSAL FDR

Figure 31-47.  Flight Data Recorder

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Self-Test and Fault Status Reporting: The

FDR has the following built-in-tests (BIT):
Flight Data Recorder
•• Power-up (to sense more parameters)
Refer to Figure 31-47. Flight Data Recorder.
•• Continuous monitor. The BITs can
sense and identify internal and external
The FDR is installed in the lower rear fuselage
faults. The status of the BIT is recorded
in a mounting tray.
in the crash survivable memory unit
(CSMU) and can be viewed with ground
The FDR is in a housing with crash-survivable
based equipment (GBE).
enclosure attached on top and to the front of the
chassis. The chassis assembly has interfaces that
SSFDR Status and Maintenance Signals
control electronics, power supply. The memory
and External BIT Indication: A ground
is in the crash-survivable enclosure.
[STATUS] signal is supplied directly to the
caution and warning panel (CWP) to cause the
The chassis of the FDR is painted bright
FLT DATA RECORDER caution light to come
international orange and is marked with black
on. A [FDR MAINT OUT] signal is supplied
letters as follows:
to IOM1 for the CDS.
•• FLIGHT DATA RECORDER DO NOT
An external BIT indicator is located on the
OPEN
front panel of the FDR and is on when the
•• ENREGISTREUR DE VOL NE PAS [FDR MAINT OUT] signal is set.
OUVRIR.

The FDR has a microprocessor for system

control and management.

ARINC 717 Recording: The data is written to

a crash survivable memory unit (CSMU).

NOTE
If the ARINC 717 data input has
malfunctioned, the FDR will stop
recording.

Data Rate Detection: The FDR supplies data

back to the FDPS to make sure that the recorder
is correctly receiving data. The loop-back data
will not be supplied back to the FDPS if the
status discrete is set to fail for the caution light
in the caution and warning panel.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-83

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Universal Flight Data Recorder NOTES

(FDR)
Refer to Figure 31-48. FDR (Universal).

The Universal FDR is a small, lightweight

unit. It records at least twenty-five hours of
flight data recording and interfaces with data
downloader tools to allow quick download of
data from virtually any aircraft between flights.
The unit also features an Ethernet interface for
on-aircraft data downloading.

Its unique internal RIPS option provides a

backup power source in the event of a main
power failure and allows aircraft to meet the
FAA’s latest RIPS requirement without the
additional size, weight and complexity of an
external RIPS unit. It provides these capabilities
without the need to maintain internal batteries.

Figure 31-48.  FDR (Universal)

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-84 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-85

31-86 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

DASH 8 Q400
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PRE MODSUM 4−126285 POST MODSUM 4−126285

Figure 31-49.  Flight Signal Conditioning Unit

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FLIGHT SIGNAL CONDITIONING The FSCU has the following functions:

UNIT (FSCU) Power-Up BIT: The FSCU does a
power-up BIT for hardware functions that
Refer to Figure 31-49. Flight Signal Conditioning
are critical for system operation.
Unit.
Continuous BIT: The FSCU also does
The FSCU is installed on the forward side of continuous BIT for hardware functions that
the wardrobe compartment. are critical for system operation.
If a malfunction is sensed, the unit stops its
The FSCU has one printed circuit board
operation, sets the fault LED on, and sets
assembly enclosed in an aluminium chassis.
the [SCU FAIL] discrete output to cause
the FLT DATA RECORDER caution light
The FSCU senses the parameters for the FDR:
to come on.
•• Brake pressure, left and right Sensor Failure Monitoring: The FSCU
•• Pilot left and right brake pedal application monitors the status of the sensors for fault
conditions. This information is supplied to
•• Co-pilot left and right brake pedal the IOP1.
application
•• Pilot pitch trim nose-up 1 and 2 switches
•• Pilot pitch trim nose-down 1 and 2 switches
•• Co-pilot pitch trim nose-up 1 and 2
switch
•• Co-pilot pitch trim nose-down 1 and 2
switch
•• Aileron trim enable
•• Aileron trim retract and extend
•• Rudder trim enable
•• Rudder trim retract and extend
•• Rudder trim speed
• • Pilot and co-pilot control wheel force
•• Pilot and co-pilot control column force
• • Pilot left and right rudder pedal force
•• Co-pilot left and right rudder pedal
force.

The FSCU supplies excitation voltage to

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

different position and force sensors. These

sensors change the mechanical movement of
the sensor to a voltage signal, which is supplied
back to the FSCU. The FSCU changes the
voltage signals into ARINC 429 format for
transmission to the IOP1.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-87

31-88 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

DASH 8 Q400
SSCVR
IMPACT
SWITCH
(REF)
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PRE MODSUM 4−309257 POST MODSUM 4−309257

FW
D

Figure 31-50.  Impact Switch

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Impact Switch NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-50. Impact Switch.

The switch is installed under the floor of the

forward center fuselage with screws. It is
installed at a 45° angle.

The impact switch has a 5 ± 2 G impact activated

double-pole latching with a reset switch.

NOTE
28 VDC power is supplied
through one pole of the impact
switch to the FDR and the other
pole is to the cockpit voice
recorder (CVR).

For the Universal system there are two

Impact switches: one for the FDR and one
for the CVR. CVR is covered in ATA 23.

The switch opens the 28 VDC power in

circuit to the FDR to prevent continued
operation of the FDR. This makes sure that
SSFDR recorded data prior to the impact is
stored and cannot be overwritten.

A manually operated RESET toggle switch,

located on the side of the impact switch is
used to re-arm the switch.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-89

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEGEND
1. Underwater locating device.
2. Flight data recorder. 2
3. Clamp.
4. Screw.

4 3

FDR Underwater
Locating Device
(Universal)
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

UNIVERSAL FDR

Figure 31-51.  FDR Underwater Locating Device

31-90 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FDR Underwater Locating Device NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-51. FDR Underwater
Locating Device.

The FDR underwater locating device (ULD)

is installed on the front of the flight data
recorder (FDR) and cockpit voice recorder
(CVR) with clamps to easily access it for
servicing and to read its battery expiratory
date. It may also be used as a carrying handle.

The ULD starts to transmit when it is fully

immersed in fresh water or salt water at depths
from 0.5 to 20,000 feet (.15 to 6096 meters).
It transmits a 37.5 KHz frequency at a rate of
0.9 pulses per second for thirty days or more.

The ULD has a battery with a service life of

six years from the date of manufacture. A label
is attached to the ULD to show the expiry date
of the battery.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-91

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

1
OVERHEAD CONSOLE

FLIGHT DATA
+RCDR
WARNING
EMERGENCY
USE ONLY
UNAUTHORIZED
OPERATION
PROHIBITED

LEGEND
1. Flight Data Recorder Test Switch.

Figure 31-52.  FDR Controls and Indication

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-92 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Controls and Indications NOTE

Refer to Figure 31-52. FDR Controls and Ground based equipment (GBE)
Indication. gives the functions that follow:
-R
 eal-time monitoring of aircraft
The FLIGHT DATA RCDR toggle switch is set
parameters and discretes
to the GND TEST position to do an operational
test of the FDR. -M
 onitor internal status of the
FDR
The FLT DATA RECORDER caution light in
- Download data from the CSMU
the CWP goes out when the toggle switch is set
to the GND TEST position. - Functional testing of the FDR.

The FLT DATA RECORDER caution light will The front panel of the FDR has a GBE
come on for the following conditions: interface connector (with protective cover)
for downloading, testing and maintenance
•• FDR is not energized functions, without removing the LRU from the
•• FDR is defective aircraft with the use of:
•• FDR ARINC 717 input data bus is •• 964-0446-001 Hand-Held Download
defective Unit (HHDLU) (or equivalent)
GSB2030001 (110 VAC) or
•• FDR ARINC 717 output data bus for
data rate mis-compare is defective •• GSB 2030002 (220 VAC) Data Track
ARINC Bus Reader (or equivalent).
•• FSCU is defective.
For complete diagnostic testing of the FDR,
NOTE the GBE must also be connected to its rear
The FLT DATA RECORDER connector. The necessary pins of the rear
caution light also comes on connector are connected through an aircraft cable
for conditions that are not terminating in a normally-capped diagnostics
malfunctions such as: connector located in the aircraft cargo bay.
-T
 esting with the data track
ARINC bus reader
-D
 ownloading with the hand-
held download unit (HHDLU).

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-93

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

FDR EQAR

A717
A717
Discretes

IFC1 IFC2
IOM1 IOP1 IOP2 IOM2

A429

Avionics Systems

CLOCK FMS1
A/C systems

Figure 31-53.  Extended Quick Access Recorder (EQAR) System Block Diagram
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-94 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-34-00 EXTENDED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

QUICK ACCESS The optical disk is inserted into a slot located
RECORDER (EQAR) behind a door on the EQAR unit.

SYSTEM NOTE
New optical disks must be
INTRODUCTION formatted with the ground support
equipment (GSE) before use.
Extended Quick Access Recorder (EQAR) is
installed on aircraft with CR831CH00057. The
The optical disk can be removed by pushing
EQAR system records aircraft parameters from
the EJECT pushbutton on the front face of the
the flight data recorder (FDR) on a removable
unit. If the unit is not powered, the disk can
disk in DOS-compatible direct access files.
also be removed by pushing another switch
with a screwdriver through an access hole on
GENERAL the front of the unit.
Refer to Figure 31-53. Extended Quick Access
A new file is created with the current date and
Recorder (EQAR) System Block Diagram.
time in its file name each time the RUN control
signal changes from STOP to RUN, or the unit
The EQAR system has the following units:
is de-energized.
•• EQAR unit (31-34-00)
•• Removable optical disk.
Operational Test of the Flight
Data Recorder System (FDR)
NOTE Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
The optical disk is a standard 128
Mbytes, 230 Mbytes, or 540 Mbytes Hold the switch in the GND TEST position for
commercial 3.5 inch polycarbonate 1 or 2 seconds. Make sure that the FLT DATA
or glass re-writable disk. RECORDER caution light goes out. Release
switch and make sure caution light comes on.
The FDR supplies serial data through an
ARINC 717 data bus to the EQAR unit.

An EQAR run command is supplied from IOM #1

whenever the conditions to start the FDR are met.

The EQAR unit has a status discrete output to the

IOM1 for the central diagnostic system functions.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied directly

to the EQAR.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-95

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

1
3

4
2

LEGEND
1. EQAR
2. Handle
3. Connector
4. Tray 5
5. Knobs 5

Figure 31-54.  Extended Quick Access Recorder (EQAR) Unit

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-96 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NOTE

If a disk malfunctions, the unit
Extended Quick Access Recorder can continue to receive data
(EQAR) Unit because it has an internal buffer.
Refer to Figure 31-54. Extended Quick Access
Recorder (EQAR) Unit.

The EQAR unit is installed on the avionics

shelf above the wardrobe in a tray.

It has a disk-drive system enclosed in an

aluminium 1/2 short ATR case assembly. The
front panel has a carrying handle, disk door,
and two hold-down hooks. The door provides
access to the drive for installation and removal
of the disk.

The EQAR unit has the following functions:

•• Quick-Access Recorder (QAR)

•• Digital Aircraft Condition Monitoring

System (ACMS) Recorder (DAR).

NOTE
Only the DAR function is used
because the data is supplied by the
flight data processing system (FDPS).

An external STATUS indicator located on the

front panel of the EQAR unit will come on for
the following conditions:

•• No disk inserted
•• Disk not formatted
•• Disk write-protected
•• Corrupted disk
•• Disk is full
•• Unit overheating
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

•• Internal buffer overflow

•• Low battery voltage
•• Internal fault
•• Disk drive fault
•• Internal power supply fault.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-97

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

LEGEND
1. Handle
2. ON Indication
3. DISK LOW Indication
4. STATUS Indication
5. Indentification Label
6. Hold Down Hooks
7. 1/4 turn Fasteners
7 8. Door
1

8
3
ON

DISK LOW 4
STATU S

7 INSERT DISK ONE

5 WAY ONLY

LOCK PRESS BUTTON TO EJECT

( WAIT FEW SEC.)

6
CAUTION: DISK MUST BE
6 RECORDABLE

BACKSIDE OF THE DOOR

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-55.  EQAR Indication

31-98 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-55. EQAR Indication.

The EQAR unit has the following controls:

•• EJECT
•• BACKUP EJECT
(loss of electrical power).

The front panel of the EQAR unit has the

following LED indications:

•• ON (green) unit is energized

•• STATUS (red) defect sensed
•• DISK LOW (red) un-recorded disk
capacity is less than 30%
•• Busy, drive is being accessed.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-99

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure 31-56.  MQAR System

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-100 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-36-00 MICRO QUICK OPERATION

ACCESS RECORDER The MQAR operates on 28 VDC and draws less
SYSTEM (MQAR) than 2 watts of power.

The front panel of the MQAR contains two LEDs

INTRODUCTION that come on two times, and go off to indicate
normal operation when the system is initially
The Micro Quick Access Recorder (MQAR) powered. An amber FAULT LED comes on if
is an on-board flash card recorder. It is used as the compact flash card is not installed, or the
a digital aircraft condition monitoring system MQAR stops recording. The illumination of the
recorder and records on-board flight and message amber MEMORY FULL LED in the “No-Wrap”
data. The MQAR is a “Wrap Around” type, in type MQAR indicates that the compact flash
which the memory is overwritten once full. card is full. The amber MEMORY FULL LED
does not come on in the “Wrap” type MQAR.
(The memory is over-written).
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The MQAR receives aircraft data from the NOTE
SSFDR and records it on a compact flash card.
The unit installed on the Q400 is
This data downloads through a built-in mini
a “Wrap” type.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port interface to a
computer. Alternately, the compact flash card
An internal battery allows for the backup of
may be removed and read through a standard
the calendar clock and data buffer memory in
PCMCIA interface reader.
case of power loss. The Left Main Bus supplies
the MQAR with 28 VDC through a 5 Ampere
DETAILED DESCRIPTION circuit breaker located on the Avionics Circuit
Breaker panel (Left Main Bus) at position L1.
Refer to Figure 31-56. MQAR System.
The MQAR interfaces with:
•• Solid state flight data recorder
(SSFDR) system
•• Input/Output Processor (IOP) #1

The system mounts in the wardrobe shelf area.

The system interfaces with the aircraft wiring
through a standard 15-Pin 28 VDC connector
at the rear of the MQAR. Data records from
the SSFDR in an ARINC 717 format at the
rate of 64 wps, 128 wps, 256 wps or 512 wps.
These parameters record as soon as the system
energizes. The storage capacity of the compact
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

flash card may be 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB or 1

GB. On a 128 MB card, the recording capacity is
20 to 160 hours. On a 256 MB card, the recording
capacity is 40 to 320 hours. For a 512 MB card,
the recording capacity is 80 to 640 hours and on
the 1 GB card, the capacity is 160 to 1250 hours.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-101

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Micro Quick Access Recorder

Refer to Figure 31-57. Micro Quick Access
Recorder.
The MQAR comprises the components that
follow:
•• Aircraft interface connector
•• Compact flash card interface
•• Mini USB port
•• Front panel LEDs.

When connected to a host computer through a

USB interface cable, the mini USB port on the
MQAR acts as an easily accessible interface to:

•• Download the recorded data from the

MQAR
•• Monitor and set the MQAR internal
clock’s time and date
•• Erase the flight data recorded in the
MQAR
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-57.  Micro Quick Access Recorder

31-102 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-103

31-104 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

71/2 TO ACU
DIM
ADVSY
LTS
MASTER WARNING MASTER CAUTION
LEFT DC (ESSENTIAL), F3 LIGHT LIGHT
BRT

DASH 8 Q400
WARNING CAUTION
PRESS TO RESET PRESS TO RESET

71/2

CAUT/WRN
TO ACU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

LTS 1
RIGHT DC (ESSENTIAL), M4
TO ACU

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

TEST
CAUT

ADVSY

TO ACU

TO ACU

PRIMARY POWER

CAUTION AND
SECONDARY POWER WARNING PANEL
71/2

CAUT/WRN FROM DIFFERENT

LTS 2 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS IFC 1
RIGHT DC (MAIN), N4 FDR
IFC 2
fsh67a01.cgm

Figure 31-58.  Caution and Warning Lights System

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-50-00 CENTRAL GENERAL

WARNING SYSTEM Refer to Figure 31-58. Caution and Warning
Lights System.
INTRODUCTION
The caution and warning lights system has the
The central warning system has the following following units:
indications:
•• Caution and Warning Panel (CWP)
•• Caution and warning lights system
•• Advisory control unit
•• Take-off warning system
•• Advisory lights/passenger advisor panel
•• Touched runway system.
•• Master warning switch light(s)

31-51-00 CAUTION •• Master caution switch light(s)

AND WARNING LIGHTS •• Caution and advisory test switch.

SYSTEM The CWP senses caution and warning signals

from the different aircraft systems, and
INTRODUCTION shows them on the caution and warning panel
annunciator segments. This condition also
The Caution and Warning Lights System is causes lights in the master CAUTION switch
divided into two parts: or master WARNING switch to come on. One
chime sounds when the master CAUTION
•• Caution and warning lights light comes on and three chimes sound when
the master WARNING light comes on.
•• Advisory lights.

Caution and warning lights system shows system

NOTE
malfunctions and other conditions that need a The FUELING ON caution light
corrective action. does not sound the tone or cause
the master caution light to flash.
Advisory lights show malfunctions and safe or
normal system operation. Some advisory lights All caution and warning lights in the CWP are
may need a corrective action. dimmed or brightened with the related CAUT/
ADVSY LIGHTS toggle switch located on the
passenger warning panel.

All caution and warning lights in the CWP are

tested when the related CAUT/ADVSY LIGHTS
toggle switch is set to the TEST CAUT position.

The CWP is energized by the left essential and

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

right main buses.

All warning lights and some caution lights are

sensed by the FDPS and then supplied to the
SSFDR.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-105

31-106 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

71/2
DIM TO CAUTION AND ICE PROTECTION
ADVSY WARNING PANEL PANEL
LTS
LEFT DC (ESSENTIAL), F3
BRT
FIRE PROTECTION
PANEL
71/2

DASH 8 Q400
CAUT/WRN
LTS 1 LANDING GEAR
RIGHT DC (ESSENTIAL), M4 PANEL

PSEU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

TEST HYDRAULICS
PANEL
CAUT

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AHCP 1
AHCP 2
ACU
ADVSY
ENGINE
CONTROL
PANEL

MICROPHONE MONITOR UNIT

PILOT'S SIDE CONSOLE

ARCDU 1
STANDBY ARCDU 2
COMPASS
APU
CONTROL
PANEL
TO CAUTION AND FROM DIFFERENT
WARNING PANEL AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS

fsh68a01.cgm

GLARESHIELD PANEL

Figure 31-59.  Caution and Warning Lights System, Advisory Lights

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-59. Caution and Warning NOTES

Lights System, Advisory Lights.

Advisory lights are located on the following

panels:
•• Overhead
•• Glareshield
•• Instrument
•• Center console
•• Pilot side console.

The brightness and test of the advisory lights

are controlled by the ACU. The signals from
different aircraft systems are supplied through
the ACU to their related advisory indication.

A loss of electrical power to the ACU will

not prevent individual lights from coming on
when they receives an advisory light signal.
Only the advisory test, dim or bright selections
will be ignored.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-107

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The caution, warning, and advisory lights have
the following colors:
Caution and Warning Panel
Refer to Figure 31-60. Caution And Warning
•• Red (Warning) Panel (CWP).
•• Amber (Caution)
The CWP is located in the cockpit below the
•• Green (Safe system) overhead console.
•• White (Normal system operation)
It has 96 active indication segments. The panel
•• Blue (Normal system operation) is divided into 14 modules. Each module is
further divided into 7 segments, 6 yellow
The red warning lights show system malfunctions cautions and 1 red warning indication. Each
or conditions that would cause danger in flight. It segment is labelled with the appropriate legend.
shows a malfunction or a condition that requires The legends are not readable until the LED
immediate action. comes on. Each module has a bezel and lens
assembly that is keyed and marked with the
The amber caution lights show system module number. The bezel is pulled to remove
malfunctions or conditions that do not it, which give access to the LED behind it.
immediatel y affect t he ai rcraft ’s f light
capabilities. It indicates that a future corrective
action may be necessary.

The green lights show safe system operation

and white or blue lights show normal operation.
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

fsg81a01.cgm

Figure 31-60.  Caution And Warning Panel (CWP)

31-108 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Advisory Control Unit

Refer to Figure 31-61. Advisory Control Unit.

The ACU is located in the cockpit on the

co-pilot’s side, mounted on the floor panel.

It tests and controls the brightness of the

advisory indications. The advisory control unit
receives 28 VDC input or ground input signals
from different aircraft systems and supplies
them to the related advisory lights in the aircraft.

FWD
fsg78a01.cgm

Figure 31-61.  Advisory Control Unit

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-109

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Caution/Advisory Lights Panel

Refer to Figure 31-62. Caution/Advisory Lights
Panel.

The caution/advisory lights panel is located on

the overhead console in the flight compartment.

The toggle switches are identified as:

•• FASTEN BELTS
•• NO SMOKING
•• TEST CAUTION/ADVSY
•• DIM/BRT
•• EMER LIGHTS OFF/ARM/ON.

OF
FA F TE
S
BE TEN CAST
LT UT
S
SM NO
OF OK
F ING DIM
AD
VS
CA Y
AR + UT
M /A
O DV
SY
EM N LIG BR
T
ER HT
L S
IG
HT
S

C
fs781a01.cgm

Figure 31-62.  Caution/Advisory Lights Panel

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-110 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Master Warning Switch

Refer to Figure 31-63. Master Warning Switch.

The master warning switch is installed in the

flight compartment on the left side of the
glareshield panel.

On aircraft with the dual Master Warning

option (833CH00034), an additional Master
Warning switch is installed on the right side of
the glareshield panel.

The master warning switch has a pushbutton

reset switch and a WARNING PRESS TO
RESET indication in red letters on a black
background. It is back lit by LEDs when a
warning signal is received.

WA
PR R
ES NI
ST
O
NG
RE
SE
T
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-63.  Master Warning Switch

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-111

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Master Caution Switch

Refer to Figure 31-64. Caution/Advisory Lights
Panel.

The master caution switch is located in the

flight compartment on the right hand of the
glareshield panel.

On aircraft with the dual Master Caution

option (833CH00034), an additional master
caution switch is installed on the left side of
the glareshield panel.

The master caution switch has a pushbutton

reset switch and a CAUTION PRESS TO
RESET indication in yellow letters on a black
background. It is back lit by LEDs when a
caution signal is received.

CA
PR UT
ES
ST IO
O
RE
N
SE
T
E

fsk41a01.cgm
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-64.  Caution/Advisory Lights Panel

31-112 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Caution and Advisory Test Switch

Refer to Figure 31-65. Master Warning Switch.

The caution and advisory test switch is located

in the flight compartment on the caution/
advisory lights panel.

The caution/advisory test switch is set to the

TEST CAUT position to test the caution/
warning lights, the master caution and master
warning indication. It is set to the TEST
ADVSY position to test the advisory lights.

F PASSENGER WARNING PANEL

fsh65a01.cgm
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Figure 31-65.  Master Warning Switch

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-113

31-114 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

OVERHEAD B
LEGEND
CONSOLE 1. Master Caution Annunciator Switch.
GLARESHIELD PANEL

DASH 8 Q400
A

A
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

STICK PUSHER STICK PUSHER

SPOILERS
SHUT OFF SHUT OFF

FLIGHT
ENGINE FIRE H ENGINE FIRE
G
A/P IAS
S HGS
ROLL INBD DISENG FAIL

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

INHIBIT INHIBIT
TAXI
ELEVATOR TRIM TERRAIN TERRAIN ELEVATOR TRIM

CF-AEI SHUT OFF INHIBIT INHIBIT SHUT OFF

CF-AEI
HSI
WARNING SEL
PRESS TO RESET

PITCH PITOT HEAT ICE DETECT #1 HYD ROLL SPLR #1 STALL

TRIM STBY FAIL ISO VLV INBD SPLR SYST FAIL

PITOT PITOT CABIN #2 HYD #2 STALL

HEAT 1 HEAT 2 DUCT HOT ISO VLV SYST FAIL

CABIN ROLL SPLR PUSHER PARKING

PACK HOT INBD HYD SYST FAIL BRAKE

PROP MAIN INBD OUTBD

DEICE BATTERY ANTISKID ANTISKID

DEICE #1 HYD #2 HYD FLAP LDG GEAR

TIMER FLUID HOT FLUID HOT DRIVE INOP

EMER LTS INTERNAL SIDE WDO DEICE NOSE FUELING

AVIONICS
DISARMED DOORS HOT PRESS STEERING ON

CABIN CHK #1 ENG #1 ENG #2 ENG MAIN BAT

PRESS FIRE DET OIL PRESS FADEC FAIL FADEC FAIL HOT

Figure 31-66.  Caution and Warning Panel and Glareshield Panel

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS NOTES

Refer to Figure 31-66. Caution and Warning
Panel and Glareshield Panel.

When the CWP senses a warning condition, it

causes the related red warning light to flash,
the pilot’s glareshield master warning switch
to flash and three chimes to be sounded.

The CWP warning annunciator and the master

warning switch flash until the master warning
switch is pushed or the warning condition
ceases.

Pressing the master warning switch selection

causes the CWP warning indication to change
to steady and the master warning indication
to go out.

If the CWP senses a caution condition, it causes

the related amber caution annunciator to come
on, and the co-pilot’s glareshield panel master
caution switch light to flash. A single chime
sounded.

The CWP caution light and the master caution

switch remain flashing until the master caution
switch is pushed. A master caution switch
selection will cause the master caution indication
to go out. If the condition is corrected, both
caution and master caution will go out.

NOTE
The caution and warning panel
FUELING ON caution light will
not cause the master caution
switch light to come on.

On aircraft with the dual master warning and

dual master caution switches (833CH00034)
both master warning and both master caution
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

push-to-reset lights come on. Pushing either

switchlight has the same effect as a single
light installation.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-115

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A CAUT/ADVSY LIGHTS

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
EMER LIGHTS

fsb41a08.cgm

Figure 31-67.  Caution/Warning Lights Panel Dim and, BRT Selections

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-116 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-67. Caution/Warning Lights NOTES

Panel Dim and, BRT Selections.

The warning, caution, and advisory lights will

default to bright when the system energizes. The
DIM/BRT toggle switch is momentarily selected
to the DIM position. This causes the advisory,
caution lights and compass light to dim. The
DIM/BRT toggle switch, when held to the BRT
position, causes the advisory, caution lights and
compass light to change back to bright.

The TEST CAUT/ADVSY toggle switch,

when held to TEST CAUT position, causes the
caution, warning lights and the master caution
and master warning lights to come on.

The caution and warning test gives the

following indications:

•• Warning lights on bright and flashing

•• Caution lights on bright
•• Master warning flashing
•• Master caution flashing
•• Three chimes are heard.

When the TEST CAUT/ADVSY toggle switch

is held to the ADVSY position, all advisory
lights will come on.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-117

31-118 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

P/J1
4
SEC PWR A
5
48
GND
49

2
PRIMARY PWR
1
44
GND
9811- 45
P/J166
9811-

DASH 8 Q400
BRT X 31 BRT INPUT
P/J166
DIM V 32 DIM INPUT
Z +28 V DC TEST T 33 TEST INPUT
29 RESET SW
MASTER CAUTION
30 IND LTS
PASSENGER
WARNING PANEL P/J2
(O/H CONSOLE RH SIDE)
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

4 IND LTS
MASTER WARNING
15 RESET SW

19 GND

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

9811-
P/J164
B-
S3 CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL
OFF C (O/H CONSOLE)
A

E
9811-
P/J164 RESET B2
B3
D- B1
A-

MASTER WARNING
IND (PLT)

9811-
P/J165
(N4) E
CAUT/WARN S1
R MAIN LTS 2 OFF B
A
+28 V DC 7.5A

E
(M4) 9811-
CAUT/WARN
R ESS P/J165 RESET B2
LTS 1 B3
+28 V DC J B1
7.5A G

MASTER CAUTION
RIGHT DC CBP IND (CO-PLT)
24-61-00
GLARESHIELD

Figure 31-68.  Caution And Warning Lights System, Power To Caution and Warning Panel (CWP)
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTES
Refer to Figure 31-68. Caution And Warning
Lights System, Power To Caution and Warning
Panel (CWP).

28 VDC primary power for the CWP is from

the R ESS bus with secondary power from the
R MAIN bus.

The R ESS bus also supplies the power for

testing and bright/dim selection of the lights.

Power to cause the master caution and master

warning light to flash is from the CWP.

The power to reset the master caution and

master warning lights is from the R ESS bus,
through the switchlights, to the CWP.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-119

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-69. Caution And Warning Type II: A condition is true if the impedance
Lights System, Inputs And Outputs. to ground potential is less than 50 ohms.

Five different types of aircraft inputs are Type III: A condition is true if the input to the
supplied to the CWP: caution and warning panel is less than 10 VDC.

•• Type I, supplied 28 VDC Type IV: A condition is true if the impedance

to ground potential is more than 2000 ohms or
•• Type II, supplied ground
if the total voltage across a switching element
•• Type III, 28 VDC removed and a 50 resistor is more than 4.5 VDC.
•• Type IV, ground removed
Type V: A condition is true if the input is a
•• Type V, combination. combination of type I, II, III, or IV inputs.

Type I: A condition is true if the input to the

caution and warning panel is more than 10
VDC.
AV. RACK

3140-
P/J1A-A1 P/J4
A
R AC BUS 307 24 R AC BUS
L TRU 308 25 L TRU
R TRU 428 7 R TRU
L DC GEN 425 11 #1 DC GEN
L FADEC FAIL 313 12 #1 ENG FADEC FAIL
R FADEC FAIL 302 14 #2 ENG FADEC FAIL
MAIN BATTERY HOT 304 33 MAIN BATT HOT
#3 STBY HYD PUMP 429 34 #3 HYD PUMP
ENG HYD PUMP RIGHT 433 31 #2 ENG HYD PUMP
TOUCHED RUNWAY 431 26 TOUCHED RUNWAY
#2 ENGINE OIL PRESS 432 27 #2 ENG OIL PRESS
SMOKE 430 9 SMOKE
L AC GEN 426 30 #1 AC GEN
R DC GEN 306 13 #2 DC GEN
R AC GEN 305 32 #2 AC GEN
MASTER CAUTION STATUS 303 21 MASTER CAUTION STATUS
MASTER WARNING STATUS 128 17 MASTER WARNING STATUS
3140-
P/J1C-A1
AUX BATTERY HOT 125 18 AUX BATT HOT
CHECK FIRE DETECTION 314 22 CHECK FIRE DET
CABIN PRESSURE 422 23 CABIN PRESS
DC BUS 210 5 DC BUS
MASTER WARNING STATUS 309 15 MASTER WARNING STATUS
MASTER CAUTION STATUS 308 28 MASTER CAUTION STATUS
STBY BATTERY HOT 315 10 STBY BATT HOT
L AC BUS 211 6 L AC BUS
FUSE DOOR 212 16 FUSELAGE DOORS
#1 ENG OIL PRESS 124 8 #1 ENG OIL PRESS
ENG HYD PUMP LEFT 423 29 #1 ENG HYD PUMP

31-40 A1 IOM #1
31-41-00
AV. RACK 2730-
P/J1A-A1 P/J5
3140- STALL NO. 1 WARNING 324 30 #1 STALL SYST FAIL
P/J1A-A2 STALL NO. 1 WARNING FBK 424
PUSHER SYSTEM FAIL 323 31 PUSHER SYST FAIL
R AC BUS 307
L TRU 308
R TRU 428 27-30 A1 SPM #1
L DC GEN 425 27-33-00
L FADEC FAIL 313
R FADEC FAIL 302
MAIN BATTERY HOT 304 2730-
#3 STBY HYD PUMP 429 P/J1A-A2
ENG HYD PUMP RIGHT 433 STALL NO. 2 WARNING 324 12 #2 STALL SYST FAIL
TOUCHED RUNWAY 431 STALL NO. 2 WARNING FBK 424
#2 ENGINE OIL PRESS 432 PUSHER SYSTEM FAIL 323 27 PUSHER SYST FAIL
SMOKE 430
L AC GEN 426 27-30 A2 SPM #2
R DC GEN 306
27-33-00
R AC GEN 305
MASTER CAUTION STATUS 303
MASTER WARNING STATUS 128 3141-
P/J1A-A1 P/J3
3140-
P/J1C-A2 AVIONICS CAUTION LIGHT 227 7 AVIONICS
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

AUX BATTERY HOT 125

CHECK FIRE DETECTION 314 31-41 A1 IOP #1
CABIN PRESSURE 422 31-41-00 CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL
DC BUS 210 (O/H CONSOLE)
MASTER WARNING STATUS 309
MASTER CAUTION STATUS 308 3141-
STBY BATTERY HOT 315 P/J1A-A2
L AC BUS 211 AVIONICS CAUTION LIGHT 227
FUSE DOOR 212
#1 ENG OIL PRESS 124
ENG HYD PUMP LEFT 423 31-41 A2 IOP #2
31-41-00

31-40 A2 IOM #2
31-41-00

Figure 31-69.  Caution And Warning Lights System, Inputs And Outputs

31-120 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 31-70. Caution and Warning

Lights System, Power to Advisory Control Unit.

28 VDC is supplied from the left essential bus

to the ADVISORY CONTROL UNIT.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied from the

right essential bus through the TEST CAUT/
ADVSY toggle switch to the ADVISORY
CONTROL UNIT for an advisory light test.

A ground signal is also supplied from the

TEST CAUT/ADVSY toggle switch to the
ADVISORY CONTROL UNIT for the advisory
lights test.

28 VDC electrical power is supplied from the

right essential bus through the DIM/BRT toggle
switch to the ADVISORY CONTROL UNIT for
dim and bright control of the advisory lights.
RIGHT C/B CONSOLE

3313-
P/J3
PSEU 17 LAMP TEST #1
(32-61-00, SHT. 1) 18 LAMP TEST #2
AHRS 16 DIM MODE STATUS
(34-21-00, SHT. 1) 19 GRD SEEKING TEST O/P 3

ARCDU 15 BRT MODE STATUS

(23-81-00, SHT. 1)

(F3)
2 GRD
L ESS ADVSY LTS
1 28 V DC IN
+28 V DC 7.5A
5 BRT I/P
6 DIM I/P
LEFT DC CBP
12
24-61-00 POS SEEKING LAMP TEST
13
7
NEG SEEKING LAMP TEST
8
126 CASE GRD

3313-
P/J2

126 CASE GRD

3313-
P/J1
126 CASE GRD

ADVISORY CONTROL UNIT (ACU)

9811-
P/J166
B- NEG LAMP TEST
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

C- POS LAMP TEST

E- DIM
G- BRT
J- 28V DC IN
PNL LTG A 5 V DC
(33-11-00) PANEL LT
B DC RTN

PASSENGER
WARNING PANEL
(O/H CONSOLE RH SIDE)

Figure 31-70.  Caution and Warning Lights System, Power to Advisory Control Unit

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-121

31-122 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Engine Torque (>50%)

1013
20
RIGHT
00
RIGHT
TERR ON HDG 1 FMS1 075
80
NTOP NTOP WX OFF HDG 1 FMS1 075
057 00 60 90 % TRQ 90 % LANDING GEA R 057 00
HDG 057° % HDG 057° 35.0 NM
35.0 NM
E - -:- -
40
3 E --:--
3 29.92
NH 3 3 NH
HDG SEL GA %RPM %RPM HDG SEL GA
ALT SEL ALT SEL
40 021 40
GOPEV GOPEV
007 CNU9
HSI
5000 5000
G 10 67.6 PROP 67.6 CYKZ G 10
RPM
60 60
MDA
FF 660 660 FF
CYZD
MDA
CYTZ
40 PPH PPH CPM5 40
00 00
30 5 80 350 350 NAV
30 5 80
60 ITT 60
APT
20 C CYYZ 20
20 YYZ 20 YTP
--- NL NL ---
V1 118 %RPM %RPM TAS 0 CNC3 TCAS V1 118
TAS 0 TCAS GPWS
VR 119 GS 0 STBY 44 420 420 44 GS 0 STBY
VR 119

DASH 8 Q400
LANDING
V2 122 0 1580 MDA 0 FMS1 FLAP FMS1 CZBA V2 122 0 1580 MDA 0
130 29.92 IN DME1 0.2 NM R 1.0 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM DME1 0.2 NM R 1.0 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM 130 29.92 IN
C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI
154 TCAS 154 TCAS
STBY
87 62 2000 LBS 2000 87 62
STBY
H DG 1
6
+ 26 C + 26 PSI x 1000 H DG 1
6
HDG 057 3 E ILS 1 057 HDG 057 3 E ILS 1 057
109. 10
SAT + 13 C 109. 10
N
HYDRAULIC CONTROL

N
0.2 NM 0.4 NM

12

12
I I H
STBY HYD PTU HYD #3
PRESS CNTRL ISOL VLV

15

15
FAIL
30

30
S

S
W 21 W 21
24 24
FMS1
ADF2

DME1 0.2 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM DME1 0.2 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PITOT STATIC
ISOLATION VALVE

Spoiler Panel Position Flap Position (>3.5° or <20°)

ISOL

(Retracted)
BASIC BASIC

ALIGN ALIGN

CIR BKR W/S WIPER PILOTS ENGINE CONTROL

LIGHT ICE DETECT FLT PNL
UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL

FPL 1/ 1 M NAV 1/ 3 M
ALT/ FL
1 CYYZ ------ FR CYYZ --:-- HDG
094 32.6NM 075 34.9NM ----
STEERING 2 GOPEV - - -- - - @ FL220 TO 0 0 --:-- MNVR
094 123 NM 295 55.4NM ----
3 ART - - -- - - @ FL220 NX YMS --:--
041 69.3NM
4 CYRIL - - -- - - @ 9840 XTK ( T ) R 1 . 0 GS 0
349 16.1NM WND - - - T / - - - ANP 0.05
5 TEXEN - - -- - - @ 3000 RNP 1.00

LIST DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3

FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6

Take-Off Warning I
A

H
B

I
C

J
D

K L
E

M
F G

N
7
BACK
8

0
9
MSG

Test Switch O P Q R S T
ON/OFF +
DIM DIM -
U V W X Y Z ENTER

COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER MICROPHONE MONITOR

MIN I
Condition Levers Position (MAX 1020)

Park Brake Lever Position (OFF)

R R
A A
T T
I I
N N I
G G

FLIGHT

Pitch Trim Position (TO Band) IDLE

DISC

Figure 31-71.  Flight Compartment Take-Off Configuration

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-52-00 TAKE-OFF NOTES

WARNING SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The take-off warning system supplies an aural
warning when a take-off is attempted with the
aircraft not in the correct take-off configuration.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Refer to Figure 31-71. Flight Compartment
Take-Off Configuration.

The Warning Tone Generators (WTGs) sound

a 1000 Hz intermittent tone when the aircraft is
not in a configuration which is safe for take-off.
It functions when the nose gear is weight on
wheels, both engine torque indications are more
than 50% or the T/O WARN TEST toggle switch
on the pilot’s side console is set to TEST and one
or more of the parameters is sensed as follows:

•• Flaps out of range, < 3.5° or > 20°

•• CLA 1 or 2 not at MAX 1020
•• Parking brake set
•• Inboard or outboard spoilers extended
•• Left or Right elevator trim out of range.
not it TO range.

For Calculations, the system receives the

required inputs from the following sources:

Parameter Source
T/O WARN TEST
T/O WARN MAINT
Toggle switch
ENG TORQUE FADEC
Nose Gear Position PSEU
Flap Position FPIU
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Condition Lever
FADEC
Position
Parking Brake Lever
Parking Brake Position
Switch
Spoilers Position FCS ECU

Pitch Trim Position FCS ECU

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-123

31-124 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

T/O WARN TEST

ENG 1 TORQUE > 50%

OR
AND

ENG 2 TORQUE > 50%

DASH 8 Q400
NGWOFW
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

FLAPS < 3.5

TAKE-OFF

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

WARNING
AND
HORN
SOUNDS
FLAPS > 20

CLA 1 = MAX/1020

OR
OR
CLA 2 = MAX/1020

PARKING BRAKE ON

INBOARD SPOILERS EXTENDED

OR
LEFT ELEVATOR TRIM OUT OF RANGE

OR
OUTBOARD SPOILERS EXTENDED

OR
RIGHT ELEVATOR TRIM OUT OF RANGE

fsq94a01.cgm

Figure 31-72.  FDPS Incorrect Take-off Configuration Warning

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTES
Refer to Figure 31-72. FDPS Incorrect Take-off
Configuration Warning.

The flight data processing system (FDRS) 1&2

monitor the required parameters and generate
the warning tone when the conditions for safe
take-off are not met.

If the FDPS fails to receive a pitch trim position

signal, the aural take-off warning will sound.

Functional Test of the Take-off

Warning System
The functional test can be accomplished with
the engines running @ greater than 50% torque
or with the take-off warning test switch with
the engine shut down. The test begins with the
aircraft set up in proper take-off configuration
then sequentially all the inputs are moved out
of range and you listen for the warning tone.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-125

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CAUTION/WARNING
PANEL 3312- 9812-
P2 P957 J957
TOUCH RUNWAY 6 1A-22-4 59 59 1C-22-4

U/F X-OVER DISC

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT SWITCH LOCATED ON THE

UNDERSIDE OF FUSE FWD 9812-
OF REAR PRESS BLKHD J913 P913
2A-22-4 1B-22-4 36 36

1 2 3A-22N-4
GS2 LH U/F DISC
X=63

S1

FRANGIBLE SWITCH
(SWITCH OPENS ON IMPACT)

9811-
J802 P802 E1
A B
T T 2B-22-4 2C-22N-4
GS1

LOCATED CLOSE TO THE

ANTI-COLLOSION LIGHTS
REAR PRESS. SELECTOR SWITCHES
BLKHD DISC. IN AFT EQUIPMENT BAY

Figure 31-73.  Touched Runway System, Block Diagram

PITCH PITOT HEAT

A ICE DETECT
TRIM STBY FAIL
F L
FAI

PITOT PITOT
HEAT
A 1 HEAT
A 2

PROP
DEICE

DEICE
TIMER
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

L S
LT
EMER LTS INTERNAL SIDE WDO DEICE
DISARMED DOORS HOT PRESS

CABIN CHK
PRESS FIRE DET

Figure 31-74.  Touched Runway Warning Light

31-126 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-53-00 TOUCHED CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

RUNWAY SYSTEM Refer to Figure 31-74. Touched Runway
Warning Light.
INTRODUCTION
If the aircraft has a tail strike, the TOUCHED
The touched runway system indicates a tail strike RUNWAY warning light on the caution and
to the flight crew. warning panel will come on.

You must complete AMM TASK 05-50-08-210-

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND 801 Inspection After a Tail Strike.
OPERATION
Refer to Figure 31-73. Touched Runway COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
System, Block Diagram.
Tail Strike Switch
The normally closed frangible switch opens on Refer to Figure 31-75. Tail Strike Switch.
impact when the rear fuselage makes contact
with the runway. When the switch opens, the The tail strike switch is installed on the bottom
caution and warning panel senses the removal of of the aircraft at Sta. X757.00.
the ground signal and as a result, the TOUCHED
RUNWAY warning light will come on.

The frangible switch cannot be reset. Once the

circuit opens it remains open.

D
FW
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

LEGEND
1. Fairing.
2. Switch. A 1

Figure 31-75.  Tail Strike Switch

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-127

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ADU HI 13 107 HI
A429 OUT ADU #1-5 A429
LO 46 108 LO
Airspeed < 156 Kts
ADU #1

< 1053 Ft.

HI B 319 HI
A429 TX RA #1 A429 IN 128 LDG GEAR HORN
LDG GEAR HORN 2H
LO C 320 LO AUDIO HI 134 15H HI
All Gear Not Down & Locked 317 BETA LOCKOUT R WTG #1
OUT 1 LO 135 14H LO
RAD ALT #1 LDG GEAR HORN 6D
ENGINE NO. 2
204 BETA LOCKOUT L
PSEU
ARINC 429 HI C- 433 HI FADEC #2-A A429 AUDIO HI 434
OUTPUT LO V- 432 LO 134 HORN MUTE OUT 1 LO 435
103 HI 135 HORN TEST
FADEC #1-A A429
104 LO
323
CH. A 12 FLAP POS RIGHT
PLA RVDT A 322 LO
13

POWER LEVER NO. 2 223

FLAP POS LEFT
133 HI PLA’s < 47 Degrees 222 LO
FADEC #1-B A429
132 LO 326 RAD ALT VALID
ARINC 429 HI C- 403 HI
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #2-B A429 VALID J- IOM #1
404 LO
12
PLA RVDT A
13
CH. B RAD ALT
IOP #2
ENGINE #2 FADEC POWER LEVER NO. 1
424 BETA LOCKOUT R AUDIO HI 134 15J HI
WTG #2
OUT 2 LO 135 14J LO

128 LDG GEAR HORN

RCAU
MUTE V AUDIO HI 434
HORN W 204 BETA LOCKOUT L OUT 2 LO 435
ENGINE NO. 1 TEST X 134 HORN MUTE
B- 135 HORN TEST
323 HI
ARINC 429 HI C- 103 HI LANDING GEAR CONTROL FLAP POS RIGHT
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #1-A A429 322 LO
104 LO PANEL
433 HI FADEC #2-A A429
432 LO
223 HI
CH. A FLAP POS LEFT
222 LO
326 RAD ALT VALID
IFC1R F
IFC1RRET G
IFC1L F IOM #2
403 HI
FADEC #2-B A429 IFC1LRET G
404 LO
ARINC 429 HI C-
133 HI IFC2R H
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #1-B A429
132 LO
IFC2RRET J
CH. B IFC2L H
ENGINE #1 FADEC IFC2LRET J

FLAP POS. IND. UNIT

319 HI

RA #1 A429 IN
320 LO
ADU HI 13 129 HI
A429 OUT ADU #2-5 A429
LO 46 128 LO
Airspeed < 156 Kts
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

ADU #2 IOP #1

Figure 31-76.  Incorrect Landing Configuration - Airspeed, Radio Altitude and PLA Position with No Muting Capabilities

31-128 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

32-62-00 LANDING NOTES

GEAR CONFIGURATION
WARNING SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The landing gear warning horn is installed to
provide the flight crew with an aural warning
if a landing is attempted when the landing gear
is not down and locked.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND

OPERATION
The landing gear warning horn logic can be
divided into three cases. Each case is dependant
on particular parameters to address the various
flight phases.

Case 1
Refer to Figure 31-76. Incorrect Landing
Configuration - Airspeed, Radio Altitude and
PLA Position with No Muting Capabilities.

Case 1 provides warnings of an incorrect landing

configuration based on Airspeed, Radio Altitude,
and PLA position with NO muting capabilities.

The horn sounds when:

•• A L L G E A R N O T D O W N A N D
LOCKED and;
•• AIRSPEED < 156 KTS AND [RAD
ALT < 1053 FT. or RAD ALT
INVALID] and;
•• PLA’S < 47º. 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-129

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ADU HI 13 107 HI
A429 OUT ADU #1-5 A429
LO 46 108 LO
Airspeed < 156 Kts
ADU #1

< 1053 Ft.

HI B 319 HI
A429 TX RA #1 A429 IN 128 LDG GEAR HORN
LDG GEAR HORN 2H
LO C 320 LO AUDIO HI 134 15H HI
All Gear Not Down & Locked 317 BETA LOCKOUT R WTG #1
OUT 1 LO 135 14H LO
RAD ALT #1 LDG GEAR HORN 6D
ENGINE NO. 2
204 BETA LOCKOUT L
PSEU
ARINC 429 HI C- 433 HI FADEC #2-A A429 AUDIO HI 434
OUTPUT LO V- 432 LO 134 HORN MUTE OUT 1 LO 435
103 HI 135 HORN TEST
FADEC #1-A A429
104 LO
323
CH. A 12 FLAP POS RIGHT
PLA RVDT A 322 LO
13

POWER LEVER NO. 2 223

FLAP POS LEFT
133 HI PLA’s < 47 Degrees 222 LO
FADEC #1-B A429
132 LO 326 RAD ALT VALID
ARINC 429 HI C- 403 HI
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #2-B A429 VALID J- IOM #1
404 LO
12
PLA RVDT A
13
CH. B RAD ALT
IOP #2
ENGINE #2 FADEC POWER LEVER NO. 1
424 BETA LOCKOUT R AUDIO HI 134 15J HI
WTG #2
OUT 2 LO 135 14J LO
1 or Both Engines 128 LDG GEAR HORN
<50% Torque RCAU
MUTE V AUDIO HI 434
HORN W 204 BETA LOCKOUT L OUT 2 LO 435
ENGINE NO. 1 TEST X 134 HORN MUTE
B- 135 HORN TEST
323 HI
ARINC 429 HI C- 103 HI LANDING GEAR CONTROL FLAP POS RIGHT
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #1-A A429 322 LO
104 LO PANEL
433 HI FADEC #2-A A429
432 LO
CH. A Flap Position 223 HI
FLAP POS LEFT
222 LO
> 8.5 Degrees 326 RAD ALT VALID
IFC1R F
IFC1RRET G
IFC1L F IOM #2
403 HI
FADEC #2-B A429 IFC1LRET G
404 LO
ARINC 429 HI C-
133 HI IFC2R H
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #1-B A429
132 LO
IFC2RRET J
CH. B IFC2L H
ENGINE #1 FADEC IFC2LRET J

FLAP POS. IND. UNIT

319 HI

RA #1 A429 IN
320 LO
ADU HI 13 129 HI
A429 OUT ADU #2-5 A429
LO 46 128 LO
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Airspeed < 156 Kts

ADU #2 IOP #1

Figure 31-77.  Incorrect Landing Configuration - Flap Lever and Engine Torque with No Muting Capabilities

31-130 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Case 2 NOTES
Refer to Figure 31-77. Incorrect Landing
Configuration - Flap Lever and Engine Torque
with No Muting Capabilities.

Case 2 provides warnings of an incorrect

landing configuration based on Flap Lever, and
Engine Torque, with NO muting capabilities.

The horn sounds when:

•• A L L G E A R N O T D O W N A N D
LOCKED And
•• B O T H P L A ’ S N O T I N R A T I N G
POWER DETENT And
•• FLAP Position > 8.5º And
•• ONE OR BOTH ENGINES < 50%
TORQUE.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-131

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ADU HI 13 107 HI
A429 OUT ADU #1-5 A429
LO 46 108 LO
Airspeed < 156 Kts
ADU #1

< 1053 Ft.

HI B 319 HI
A429 TX RA #1 A429 IN 128 LDG GEAR HORN
LDG GEAR HORN 2H
LO C 320 LO AUDIO HI 134 15H HI
All Gear Not Down & Locked 317 BETA LOCKOUT R WTG #1
OUT 1 LO 135 14H LO
RAD ALT #1 LDG GEAR HORN 6D
ENGINE NO. 2
204 BETA LOCKOUT L
PSEU
ARINC 429 HI C- 433 HI FADEC #2-A A429 AUDIO HI 434
OUTPUT LO V- 432 LO 134 HORN MUTE OUT 1 LO 435
103 HI 135 HORN TEST
FADEC #1-A A429
104 LO
323
CH. A 12 FLAP POS RIGHT
PLA RVDT A 322 LO
13

POWER LEVER NO. 2 223

FLAP POS LEFT
133 HI Either PLA < 47 Degrees 222 LO
FADEC #1-B A429
132 LO 326 RAD ALT VALID
ARINC 429 HI C- 403 HI
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #2-B A429 VALID J- IOM #1
404 LO
12
PLA RVDT A
13
CH. B RAD ALT
IOP #2
ENGINE #2 FADEC POWER LEVER NO. 1
424 BETA LOCKOUT R AUDIO HI 134 15J HI
WTG #2
OUT 2 LO 135 14J LO

128 LDG GEAR HORN

RCAU
MUTE V AUDIO HI 434
HORN W 204 BETA LOCKOUT L OUT 2 LO 435
ENGINE NO. 1 TEST X 134 HORN MUTE
B- 135 HORN TEST
323 HI
ARINC 429 HI C- 103 HI LANDING GEAR CONTROL FLAP POS RIGHT
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #1-A A429 322 LO
104 LO PANEL
433 HI FADEC #2-A A429
432 LO
223 HI
CH. A FLAP POS LEFT
222 LO
326 RAD ALT VALID
IFC1R F
IFC1RRET G
IFC1L F IOM #2
403 HI
FADEC #2-B A429 IFC1LRET G
404 LO
ARINC 429 HI C-
133 HI IFC2R H
OUTPUT LO V- FADEC #1-B A429
132 LO
IFC2RRET J
CH. B IFC2L H
ENGINE #1 FADEC IFC2LRET J

FLAP POS. IND. UNIT

319 HI

RA #1 A429 IN
320 LO
ADU HI 13 129 HI
A429 OUT ADU #2-5 A429
LO 46 128 LO
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

Airspeed < 156 Kts

ADU #2 IOP #1

Figure 31-78.  Incorrect Landing Configuration - Single Engine Operation

31-132 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Case 3 NOTES
Refer to Figure 31-78. Incorrect Landing
Configuration - Single Engine Operation.

Case 3 provides warnings of an incorrect

landing configuration based on Single Engine
Operation, and PLA position with muting
capabilities.

The horn sounds when:

•• ALL GEAR NOT DOWN AND

LOCKED and
•• AIRSPEED < 156 KTS AND [RAD
ALT < 1053 FT or RAD ALT
INVALID] and;
•• EITHER PLA < 47º and;
•• MUTE NOT SELECTED and;
•• BOTH PLAs NOT IN RATING
POWER DETENT.

31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-133

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-00-00 SPECIAL TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT

•• 18-234 Extraction Tool (Vivisun)
•• Electrical Bonding Tester - GSB5180001 or GSB5180005
•• Clamps - Duplex, Heavy Duty or equivalent - GSB5180002
•• Spikes - Helical Hand or equivalent - GSB5180004
•• Hand-Held Download Unit (HHDLU) (or equivalent) - 964-0446-001
•• HHDLU to FDR Cable (supplied with HHDLU) - 704-2554-001
•• HHDLU User’s Manual (supplied with HHDLU) - 998-1743-600
•• HHDLU Instruction Card (supplied with HHDLU) - 654-1065-001
•• GSB2000009 (or equivalent) Digital Inclinometer, Protractor
•• GSB2000024 Meter-Digital Force, 0-100 lb
•• GSB2030001 (or equivalent) Data Track, 110 VAC or
•• GSB2030002 (or equivalent) Data Track, 220 VAC
•• GSB2400001 (or equivalent) Multimeter-Hand Held
•• GSB2700008 Kit - Rigging Pin
•• GSB2700008-03 L-pin, 0.25 x 3.00 in (6.35 - 76.2 mm)
•• GSB2700008-16D WOW Target
•• GSB2700008-32 WOW Anti-target
•• GSB2715005 Mylar Template - Aileron Rigging Tool
•• GSB2733002 Rigging Fixture - Control Column
•• GSB3240006 (or equivalent) Tool-Force Application
•• GSB3411011 (or equivalent) Test Set - Pitot-Static
•• GSB3411012 or GSB3411013 (or equivalent) Adapter Kit - Pitot-Static Pressure Test
•• 807-102-000-011 Tester-Ice Sensor
•• 964-0446-001 (Allied Signal) or equivalent Download Unit- Hand Held on Site FDR
(HHDLU)
•• GSB3133002 Laptop computer with firefly software installed
•• RJ45 cable
•• Firefly User’s Manual
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

•• ARINC 429 bus reader or equivalent

•• GSB2733003 Mylar Template - AOA Vane Rigging
•• GSB3240006 (or equivalent) Tool-Force Application (only used if force sensors are
installed)
•• GSB3400001 Test Set Transponder DME/TCAS (for 110 VAC)

31-134 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• GSB3400002 Test Set Transponder DME/TCAS (for 220 VAC)

•• GSB3411011 (or equivalent) Test Set - Pitot-Static
•• GSB3443003 (or equivalent) Radio Altimeter Breakout Box (Honeywell)
•• GSB3444001 (or equivalent) Collins ALT-4000 Test Cable

NOTE
The Collins test cable is an in-house manufactured tool. Refer to the
Illustrated Tools and Equipment Manual (ITEM) for details.

•• 950-315 (MITUTOYO) or equivalent Inclinometer

•• DRUCK ADTS 405F or equivalent Air Data Test Set
•• Commercially Available Laptop computer with Flightscape software (or equivalent) installed
•• Contact USAC Product Support Firefly User’s Manual
•• A 12039 or A12039-1 Ground Tool (Firefly) PC Application
•• Commercially Available Formatted Optical Disc
•• 998-1944-501 EQAR Software Option
•• GSB 3131004 Portable PC - (PMAT) with Optical Disc Drive option
•• Commercially Available Laptop or Computer with the MQAR
•• Flight Data Processor Software Installed (P/N 883-E2822-04 or above)
•• Commercially Available USB Cable
•• Commercially Available Memory Card Reader
•• Commercially Available Formatted Compact Flash Card
•• PC with PCMCIA Drive with adapter for compact flash card and ROSE for Windows
installed.
•• 883E22822-04 or above MQAR Utility Software
•• Commercially Available Air Data Test-Set
•• GSB3411012 Pitot/Static Pressure Test Adapter or equivalent
•• GSB3411011, Air Data Test Set (ADTS)
•• GSB2700008-16D Activator Plates or Targets (Qty 2 Req’d) 31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 31-135

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

31-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for details on these maintenance procedures:

•• AMM 31-21-01-820-801 Adjustment of the Electronic Clock

•• AMM 31-32-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Flight Data Recorder System (FDR)
•• AMM 31-36-00-710-801 O
 perational Test of the Micro Quick Access Recorder (MQAR)
System
•• AMM 31-41-06-710-801 Operational Test of the Input/Output Processor
•• AMM 31-51-01-000-802 Removal of the Caution and Warning Panel LEDs
•• AMM 31-51-01-400-802 Installation of the Caution and Warning Panel LEDs
•• AMM 31-51-00-710-802 Operational Test of the Caution Lights System
•• AMM 31-51-01-710-801 Operational Test of the Caution and Warning Panel LEDs
•• AMM 31-51-26-710-801 Operational Test of the Caution and Advisory Lights
•• AMM 45-00-34-742-802 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Avionic Data (AVIONIC DATA)
•• AMM 45-00-34-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Avionics (AVIONICS)
•• AMM 31-61-00-710-801 Operational Test of the Electronic Instrument System
31  INDICATING AND RECORDING

31-136 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 45
CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Page
45-45-00 CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM........................................................... 45-1
Introduction......................................................................................................... 45-1
General................................................................................................................ 45-3
System Description............................................................................................ 45-21
Component Description...................................................................................... 45-23
CDS Maintenance Switch............................................................................ 45-23
Controls and Indications.................................................................................... 45-23
Operational Check After The CDS Maintenance Switch
Has Been Replaced..................................................................................... 45-23
Return to Service Operational Check after the Maintenance Panel
Has Been Replaced..................................................................................... 45-23
Operation........................................................................................................... 45-55
45-00-00 SPECIAL TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT................................................. 45-56
45-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.................................................................. 45-56

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-i

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

Figure Title Page
45-1 Central Diagnostic System Block Diagram................................................45-2

SYSTEM
45-2 CDS Architecture.......................................................................................45-4
45-3 Interface with ARMS (Type 1 Avionics System)........................................45-6
45-4 Interface with Type 1 Avionics Systems Installed within the IFCs..............45-8
45-5 Interface with the Electronic Instrument System EIS
(Type 1 Avionics Systems).......................................................................45-10
45-6 Interface with Avionics Type 2 Systems .................................................45-12
45-7 Interface with Avionics Type 3 Systems ..................................................45-14
45-8 Interface with Other (Non Avionics) Systems..........................................45-16
45-9 Interface with Clocks...............................................................................45-18
45-10 Modes of Operation ................................................................................45-20
45-11 Maintenance Panel, CDS Maintenance Mode Selection...........................45-22
45-12 CDS Pages...............................................................................................45-24
45-13 ARCDU, CDS Maintenance Mode Selection............................................45-26
45-14 ARCDU, Avionics Page...........................................................................45-28
45-15 ARCDU, Avionics Status Page.................................................................45-28
45-16 ARCDU, Last Leg Report Page................................................................45-30
45-17 ARCDU, Previous Legs Report Page.......................................................45-32
45-18 ARCDU, System Report/Test Page (Sheet 1 of 2)....................................45-32
45-19 
ARCDU, System Report/Test Page (Sheet 2 of 2)....................................45-34
45-20 ARCDU, System Report/Test, IFC Page...................................................45-34
45-21 
ARCDU, System Report/Test, EIS Page...................................................45-34
45-22 ARCDU, System Report/Test, Arms Page................................................45-34
45-23 ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 Page.............................................45-36

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-iii

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Figure Title Page

45-24 ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 Last Leg Report Page...................45-36
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

45-25 ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 Previous Legs Report Page...........45-36

SYSTEM

45-26 ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 System Test Page, Sheet 1............45-38
45-27 ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 System Test Page, Sheet 2............45-38
45-28 ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 Maint Page...................................45-40
45-29 ARCDU, System Report/Test, ADU Page.................................................45-40
45-30 ARCDU, System Report/Test, ADU 1 System Test Page..........................45-42
45-31 ARCDU, System Report/Test, VHF NAV 1 System Test Page..................45-42
45-32 ARCDU, System Report/Test, VHF NAV 1 System Test Page..................45-44
45-33 ARCDU, Maintenance Page.....................................................................45-44
45-34 ARCDU, LRU Ident Pages Sheet 1..........................................................45-46
45-35 ARCDU, LRU Ident Pages Sheet 2..........................................................45-46
45-36 ARCDU, LRU Ident Pages Sheet 3..........................................................45-48
45-37 ARCDU, Other System Page....................................................................45-48
45-38 ARCDU, Avionics Data Page...................................................................45-50
45-39 ARCDU, Avionics Config Sheet 1...........................................................45-50
45-40 ARCDU, Avionics Config Sheet 2...........................................................45-52
45-41 Maintenance Panel, NVM Reset of Other Systems...................................45-53
45-42 CDS Operation, Maintenance Control Panel............................................45-54

45-iv FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CHAPTER 45
CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM
45-45-00 CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The Central Diagnostic System (CDS) is an On-Board Maintenance System. It supports
maintenance personnel by monitoring, controlling, recording and displaying system tests,
diagnostics and maintenance activities.
The systems which interface with the CDS may communicate to CDS via digital buses or
discrete signals and they may operate with different levels of built-in-test capabilities. As
a result, there are differences in the individual system menus and their contents.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-1

 SYSTEM
45-2 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

ARCDU 1
ARCDU 2

V 118.350 V 133.375
H H
F F

DASH 8 Q400
1 125.000 2 127.425
I 109.100 I 109.100
L L
S S DME
1 109.350 2 112 .150 H
A 236 A 236
D D
F F
1 737 2 1091
VHF 1 A 2000
I T
N FNS TUNE ON ALT
C
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

T 1 0000

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

I

CDS
(IOP 1)

CDS
S GND MAINT
MAINTENANCE
A
A
SWITCH

MAINTENANCE
NTENANCE
PANEL
P
PANEL

Figure 45-1.  Central Diagnostic System Block Diagram

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

GENERAL Type 2 systems supply the following data to

the CDS:
Refer to:

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

•• System status (health) monitor
•• Figure 45-1. Central Diagnostic System
•• LRU identification
Block Diagram.

SYSTEM
(hardware and software part numbers)
•• Figure 45-2. CDS Architecture.
•• Initiated built-in test (IBIT).
The CDS uses the input/output processor
Type 3 systems: Type 3 systems only supply
module 1 (IOP 1) and input/output module
their health data to the CDS. The type 3 systems
1 (IOM 1) in the integrated flight cabinet 1
cannot do an IBIT.
(IFC1), and the two audio radio control and
display units (ARCDU1 and ARCDU2).
NOTE
The CDS is physically located in IOP module
The IBIT request affects the
1 and uses the same processor as the flight
safety of the aircraft and cannot
data processing system (FDPS). There are two
be done in flight.
partitions in the IOP 1 module, one for the CDS
and one for the FDPS.
The avionic systems also supply the following
data to the CDS:
The IOP has an ARINC extension card to
handle all the ARINC inputs.
•• Internal fault
Discrete inputs are received through the IOM 1 •• Interface fault
and the ARINC 429 inputs are received through
•• Probe fault (external, does not interface
the ARINC extension card, or directly to the
directly with the CDS)
CPU card of the IOP 1.
•• Class 2 fault
Maintenance data is supplied to the CDS from
•• Class 1 fault
3 different types of systems:
•• System in test
Type 1 systems: The type 1 systems interface (Power-on self test or IBIT)
with the CDS with one ARINC 429 input
•• Command response (maintenance mode).
and one ARINC 429 output buses to supply
commands and responses. The type 1 systems
Class 1 failures are failures that prevent
continue to operate in their operational mode
continued operation of an LRU or channel
until the CDS supplies a request to the system
and are annunciated via advisory messages,
to start the maintenance mode. Type 1 systems
cautions, warnings or advisory lights in the flight
supply the following data to the CDS as follows:
compartment. Dispatch with such posted failures
is to be in accordance with the Master Minimum
•• System status (health) monitor
Equipment List (MMEL). Class 2 failures are
•• LRU identification failures which do not prevent continued system
(hardware and software part numbers) operation and will not be annunciated to the
flight crews. Such faults would be evident
•• Initiated built-in test (IBIT).
during maintenance interrogation, which is
performed on opportunity basis. Class 2 faults
Type 2 systems: The type 2 systems interface
do not affect dispatch and will be listed in the
with the CDS with one ARINC 429 output bus
Fault Isolation Manual (FIM).
and a discrete input to start the IBIT.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-3

 SYSTEM
45-4 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

Discrete Discrete
Inputs Outputs

IFC1 IFC2

Ext. Bus

A429

DASH 8 Q400
28VDC IOP1

Left ESS

A429
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

IOM1 FGM1 SPM1
Arinc
Extension
Discrete ARINC 429 Discrete Card
Inputs Interface Interface
CDS
CDS NVM

Discrete
outputs

A429 A429

A429

SYSTEMS CONNECTED
TO CDS

Figure 45-2.  CDS Architecture

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-5

 SYSTEM
45-6 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

INT

RAD
VHF1 VHF2 HF AUX1 AUX2 INT

ACP
V 118.350 V 133.375
H H VOR MKR
F F 1 2 1 DME 2 1 ADF 2
1 125.000 2 127.425 MLS

DASH 8 Q400
I 109.100 I 109.100
L L
S S DME
1 109.350 2 112 .150 H
A 236 A 236
D D
F F
1 737 2 1091
VHF 1 A 2000
I T
N FNS TUNE ON ALT
C
T 1 0000
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

I

RCAU

SELCAL
I

ARCDU 1
ARCDU 2

CDS
(IOP 1)

Figure 45-3.  Interface with ARMS (Type 1 Avionics System)

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-3. Interface with ARMS NOTES

(Type 1 Avionics System).

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The CDS is part of the Thales Avionics Suite,
which is comprised of autoflight, navigation,
communication and electronic display

SYSTEM
equipment. This group of equipment records
system faults as they occur as they are directly
monitored by the IOP, thereby allowing the
CDS to see equipment status in real-time. This
also allows the failures to be time-stamped. Due
to the real-time monitoring, manual clearing of
stored faults is not necessary for equipment
within the “AVIONICS” menu.

The Audio Radio Management System (ARMS)

has the units identified as follows:

•• RCAU
•• ARCDU1, probe sensed by the pilot’s
audio card in the RCAU
•• A R C D U 2 , p r o b e s e n s e d b y t h e
co-pilot’s audio card in the RCAU
•• Observer’s ACP, probe sensed by the
observer’s audio card in the RCAU
•• Optional SELCAL, probe sensed by the
RCAU.

NOTE
A probe is any LRU contained
in the system that cannot report
directly to CDS.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-7

 SYSTEM
45-8 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

IOM 2 PPSM 2

DASH 8 Q400
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SPM 1 FGM 1 IOP 2 FGM 2 SPM 2

CDS
(IOP 1)
fsq75a01.cgm IOM 1 PPSM 1

Figure 45-4.  Interface with Type 1 Avionics Systems Installed within the IFCs
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-4. Interface with Type 1 NOTES

Avionics Systems Installed within the IFCs.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

IFC1 contains:

•• FGM 1

SYSTEM
•• Stall Protection Module 1 (SPM 1)
•• IOP 1
•• PPSM 1
•• IOM 1.

IFC2 contains:

•• FGM 2
•• SPM 2
•• IOP 2
•• PPSM 2
•• IOM 2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-9

 SYSTEM
45-10 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

ESID DISPLAY
PILOT EFIS DISPLAY CO-PILOT EFIS DISPLAY

WX OFF HDG 1 FMS1 075 NTOP NTOP ELECTRICAL

057 00 90 % TRQ 90 %
HDG SEL GA HDG 057° 35.0 NM % HDG SEL GA
ALT SEL 3 E --:-- ALT SEL
NH 3 3 NH
5000 00 %RPM %RPM HSI 5000
G 10 40 MAIN 01 116 16 G 10
CNU9 AUX 01 115 16
60 01 115 14 60
67.6 67.6 STBY
CYKZ PROP
MDA RPM MDA
40 20 22 40
00 00
30 5 80 CYZD
660 660 30 5 80
60 FF FF ESS 7 7 115 19 60
20

DASH 8 Q400
CPM5 CYTZ
KG/H KG/H 20
MAIN 5 5 116 19
NAV
210 210 SEC 115
ITT 5 4 02 12 18
V1 118 APT CYYZ C V1 118
20 YTPYYZ
VR 119 NL NL VR 119
--- TCAS
V2 122 0 1580 MDA 0 TAS 0 CNC3
STBY %RPM %RPM V2 122 0 1580 MDA 0
130 29.92 IN GS 0 44 420 420 44 130 29.92 IN
154 TCAS FMS1 CZBA 154 TCAS
H DG 1 STBY DME1 0.2 NM R 1.0 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM H DG 2 STBY
6 C OIL PSI FUEL C OIL PSI
6
HDG 057 3 E ILS 1 057 87 62 910 KG 910 87 62 HDG 057 3 E ILS 2 057
109. 10 + 26 C + 26 PSI x 1000 109. 10
N

N
0.2 NM
12

0.4 NM

12
H
SAT + 13 C
I I
15

15
30

30
S

S
W 21 W 21
24
FMS1
24
ADF2

MFD 1 ED MFD 2
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DME1 0.2 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM DME1 0.2 NM DME2 H 0.4 NM

PFD 1 PFD 2

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CDS
(IOP 1)

Figure 45-5.  Interface with the Electronic Instrument System EIS (Type 1 Avionics Systems)
 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-5. Interface with the NOTES

Electronic Instrument System EIS (Type 1
Avionics Systems).

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The EIS has 5 type 1 display units identified as:

SYSTEM
•• PFD 1
•• PFD 2
•• MFD 1
•• MFD 2
•• ED.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-11

 SYSTEM
45-12 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

DASH 8 Q400
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

AHRS 1 ADU 1

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

AHRS 2 ADU 2

CDS
(IOP 1)

fsq76a01.cgm

Figure 45-6.  Interface with Avionics Type 2 Systems

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-6. Interface with Avionics NOTES

Type 2 Systems.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The avionics type 2 units are:

•• ADU 1

SYSTEM
•• ADU 2
•• AHRS 1
•• AHRS 2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-13

 SYSTEM
45-14 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

ATC 1

PAA

ACARS FMS 1

DASH 8 Q400
FMS 2

CVR
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

WXR CP

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ADF 1 IOM 1
ADF 2 (CDS) FDR
IOP 1
(CDS) EGPWS

VHF NAV 1
VHF NAV 2 RA 1
RA 2

TCAS

MLS 1
MLS 2

fsq77a01.cgm

Figure 45-7.  Interface with Avionics Type 3 Systems

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-7. Interface with Avionics NOTES

Type 3 Systems.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The avionics type 3 systems are identified as:

•• ACARS

SYSTEM
•• CVR
•• FDR
•• RA
•• EGPWS
•• ATC
•• ADF
•• VHF NAV
•• TCAS
•• PAA
•• FMS and GPS
•• Weather Radar Control Panel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-15

 SYSTEM
45-16 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

CPC
EMU

TMU

DASH 8 Q400
APU
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

ASCU
ECS

CDS
(IOP 1)

FCS
TMCU 1
TMCU 2

FCU IOP 2
fsq72a01.cgm

Figure 45-8.  Interface with Other (Non Avionics) Systems

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-8. Interface with Other (Non NOTES

Avionics) Systems.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

There is a selected group of electronic control
units, referred to as “OTHER SYSTEMS”.
These ECUs from the various aircraft systems

SYSTEM
internally store their own respective system
faults in Non-Volatile Memory (NVM),
retaining such information through all power
interruptions for recall via CDS interrogation
by maintenance personnel.

Most of the units within this category use the

“transmit data request” discrete to initiate
the one-shot “data dump” to the CDS. The
“transmit data request” is output from the CDS
by the action of menu key selection to the
desired system. Once dumped into the CDS
temporary RAM, the ECU remains idle and
the CDS interacts solely with the ARCDU. If
an update of the displayed menu contents is
desired, such as after an adjustment or fault
rectification, the system menu must be exited
and then re-entered to initiate a new “transmit
data request”.

The other aircraft system units that are

connected to the CDS are identified as:

•• Engine Monitoring Unit (EMU)

•• Timer Monitor Control Unit 1 (TMCU 1)
•• Timer Monitor Control Unit 2 (TMCU 2)
•• Auxiliary Power Unit Full Authority
Electronic Engine Control (APU
FADEC)
•• Flap Control Unit (FCU)
•• Flight Control Electronic Control Unit
(FCECU)
•• E n v i r o n m e n t a l C o n t r o l S y s t e m
Electronic Control Unit (ECSECU)
•• Cabin Pressure Controller (CPC)
•• Anti Skid Control Unit (ASCU).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-17

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-9. Interface with Clocks.

The two clocks supply date and time through

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

the FDPS to the CDS.

SYSTEM

NOTE
The clocks are not monitored for
faults by the CDS.

CHR

CLOCK 1 DATE

CLOCK 2 LOC
GMT
SET

IOP 1, IOP2

fsq78a01.cgm

Figure 45-9.  Interface with Clocks

45-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-19

 SYSTEM
45-20 45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

LESS
THAN MORE
MORE THAN 50 KTS THAN
50 KTS WOFFW WOW FOR 10s 50 KTS 80 KTS

DASH 8 Q400
80 KTS
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

PREVIOUS
LEG (01) LAST LEG (00) NEXT LEG

MONITOR

IDLE

fsq82a01.cgm

Figure 45-10.  Modes of Operation

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION When the CAS is more than 80 knots, the

system monitors for internal and external
Refer to Figure 45-10. Modes of Operation. failures. If a malfunction is sensed, it is

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

saved in the flight memory of the unit, and is
The CDS operates in the following modes: transmitted to the CDS.

SYSTEM
Normal Monitoring Mode: During the normal Class 2 malfunctions sensed during the last leg
monitoring mode, the avionic systems continuously are erased at the start of the new one.
supply their fault condition to the CDS.
Maintenance mode: One of the two ARCDUs
The normal monitoring mode is set when one is used to do initiated built-in tests (IBITs)
of these conditions is sensed: and see the avionic system status, LRU
identification, and configuration.
• • Aircraft is weight off wheels or the
Calculated Air Speed is more than The maintenance mode is set when all of the
50 knots conditions are as follows:
•• Aircraft is weight on wheels and the
•• Aircraft is weight on wheels and CAS is
CDS maintenance switch is not set on.
less than 50 knots for more than 10 sec
In the normal mode the CDS has the functions •• C D S m a i n t e n a n c e s w i t c h o n t h e
that follow: maintenance panel is set
•• Maintenance key on the ARCDU is set.
•• Transmits fault data (date, time and
weight on wheels conditions to the
Test: The test of the CDS and IOP 1 is done by
type 1 systems)
the flight data processing system (FDPS).
•• Transmits aircraft type and serial
number to the remote control audio Idle mode: During the idle mode, the avionic
unit (RCAU) systems do not supply their fault condition to
the CDS.
•• Receives system status data from other
avionic systems
The idle mode is set when all the conditions
•• Receives the avionic configuration data are as follows:
•• Stores fault reports
•• Aircraft is on the ground
•• Sorts status data from the different
•• C D S m a i n t e n a n c e s w i t c h o n t h e
systems
maintenance panel is set.
•• Supplies fuel flow, fuel temperature,
and main oil pressure parameters to the
engine monitoring unit (EMU).

When the CAS is less than 50 knots, the system

monitors for internal failures only and, if a
malfunction is sensed, it is saved in the ground
memory of the unit and is transmitted to the CDS.

When the CAS is between 50 and 80 knots, the

system monitors for internal failures only and, if
a malfunction is sensed, it is saved in the flight
memory of the unit and is transmitted to the CDS.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-21

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

D
FW

AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION

CDS GND MAINT LED CDS GND MAINT Toggle Switch

SYSTEM DOWNLOAD
PROP DEICE CAL J1 AVIONIC J3 AVIONIC J4 AVIONIC J5 APU
ENGINE MAINTENANCE CDS GND MAINT
RS422/A429 RS422/A429 A429 RS422
UNFEATHER
#1 #2
#1 #2 ECS AUTO NVM RESET LED TEST J2 AVIONIC
ON FAIL PSEU RS422/A429 PMAT DOWNLOAD RS422 PORTS DISABLED

RIG TRIM MAINT DISC

PSS PSEU ON A
OFF PWR ON
MAINT OPER ANVS SYS
FLAP
PAA RS232 STOP L/V
PROP TEST
DEICE 2
28 VDC PLAY SEL
PROP
DIGITAL PASSENGER
CPC TEAM ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM

DEICE 1
ECS AFR
FLT ANVS SYS
DEICE
CTL DEGRADED

Figure 45-11.  Maintenance Panel, CDS Maintenance Mode Selection

45-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Return to Service Operational

Check after the Maintenance
CDS Maintenance Switch

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

Panel Has Been Replaced
Refer to Figure 45-11. Maintenance Panel,
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a
CDS Maintenance Mode Selection.

SYSTEM
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
The CDS maintenance switch, installed on the
The return to service operational check is to
maintenance panel located above the wardrobe
ensure that all the features and indication on
compartment, sets the maintenance mode for
the panel continue to work:
the CDS.
•• CDS GND MAINT light comes on
CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS when MAINT toggle is selected to the
UP position
Refer to Figure 45-11. Maintenance Panel,
CDS Maintenance Mode Selection. •• PAA TEST switch is pushed to ensure
the hi-lo chime is heard through the
The maintenance mode is set when: cabin speakers
•• P W R O N l i g h t o f t h e S Y S T E M
•• Aircraft is weight on wheels and CAS
DOWNLOAD section comes ON when
is less than 50 knots for more than 10
the PWR ON toggle switch is set to
seconds and
“PWR ON” position. It should turn off
•• CDS GRD MAINT switch is set. when PWR ON is deselected
•• MAINT DISC light comes on when
The amber CDS GRD MAINT light on the
MAINT DISC toggle is selected in the
maintenance panel comes on.
“up” position
Operational Check After The CDS •• MAINT key on left ARCDU is pushed
to confirm that the CDS menu appears,
Maintenance Switch Has Been repeat for the right ARCDU
Replaced
•• Push the DIM/RTN key and check the
Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for a CDS main menu is displayed
detailed description of this maintenance practice.
•• Push the CDS GND MAINT toggle to
•• The check is to ensure that the ARCDU the down position and verify the CDS
can be switched over to display the GND MAINT light is OFF and pushing
maintenance page after the maintenance the MAINT key on the ARCDU would
switch is replaced. not bring up the CDS main menu page.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-23

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

CDS
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

AVIONICS OTHER SYSTEMS AVIONIC DATA

IFC1, IFC2 OTHER SYSTEMS 1/2 AVIONIC CONFIGURATION
AVIONIC STATUS EMU AVIONIC CONFIG 1/8
Class 1 and 2 System faults FCS TCAS
(Type 1 and Type 2 Systems) PRESENT FAULTS 1/4 ACARS
SYSTEM

LAST LEG REPORT FCECU I/O STATUS 2/4 SELCAL

Class 1 Faults FCECU ANLG I/O STATUS 3/4 MLS
50 Maximum AILERON FMS1, FMS2
PREVIOUS LEG REPORT L ELEV VHF COM3
Class 1 Faults L IB SPOILER TACAN
300 Maximum or 63 legs R IB SPOILER UHF
SYSTEM REPORT/TEST L PITCH TRIM VHF FM
IFC1, IFC2 L PITCH FEEL AVIONIC CONFIG 2/8
FGM1, FGM2 L DELTA PRESSURE HF1
LAST LEG REPORT FCECU ANLG I/O STATUS 4/4 HF2
PREVIOUS LEG REPORT RUDDER VHF1, VHF2, VHF3 EXT RGE
SYSTEM TEST R ELEV VHF 8.33 kHZ
MAINTENANCE L OB SPOILER DME2
SPM1, SPM2 R OB SPOILER ATC2
IOP1, IOP2 R PITCH TRIM ADF2
IOM1, IOM2 R PITCH FEEL AVIONIC CONFIG 3/8
PPSM1, PPSM2 R DELTA PRESSURE APU
EIS ECS HUD
PFD1, PFD2 ECS PRESENT FLT L CH 1/7 AUX NAV1, AUX NAV2
MFD1, MFD2 ECS PRESENT FLT R CH 2/7 RA2
ED ECS FLT HISTORY L CH 3/7 IRS
ARMS ECS FLT HISTORY R CH 4/7 EGPWS
ARCDU1, ARCDU2 ECS FLIGHT DATA CH 5/7 ALTERNATE ICP
RCAU ECS FLT DATA L CH 6/7 COUPLED HEADING
ADU ECS FLT DATA R CH 7/7 FLT TEST A/C
ADU1, ADU2 TMCU1, TMCU2 AVIONIC CONFIG 4/8
AHRS TMCU FAULTS N/7 AIRCRAFT TYPE
AHRS1, AHRS2 ANTI-SKID ENGINE TYPE
NAV1, NAV2 ACS CURRENT FAULTS 1/3 UNITS
FMS1, FMS2 ACS PAST FAULTS 2/3 A/C NUMBER
TCAS ACS PAST FAULTS 3/3 AVIONIC CONFIG 5/8
GPWS ICE PROTECTION AOA1 CORRECTION,
FDR IRPS-MAINTENANCE AOA2 CORRECTION
CVR APU AVIONIC CONFIG 6/8
RA1, RA2 APU STATUS DISPLAY FORMAT
MLS1, MLS2 APU S/N AVIONIC CONFIG 7/8
ADF1, ADF2 FADEC S/N TONES
ATC1, ATC2 S/W VERSION GPWS
PAA HOURS TCAS
WXR CP STARTS FIRE BELL
MAINTENANCE APU STATUS PRESENT FAULTS TO CONFIG
Class 2 Faults APU STATUS FAULT HISTORY AP DISENG
50 Maximum OTHER SYSTEMS 2/2 PITCH TRIM
LRU IDENT FLAPS OVERSPEED
Shows hardware FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM PRESENT FAULTS 1/3 INCORRECT LD
and software p/n FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM FAULT HISTORY 2/3 ALTITUDE ALERT
IFC1, IFC2 FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM CALIBRATION 3/3 BETA LOCKOUT
FGM1, FGM2 CABIN PRESSURE CONTROL SELCAL
SPM1, SPM2 CPCS FAILURE REPORTING 1/1 AVIONIC CONFIG 8/8
IOP1, IOP2 TONES
IOM1, IOM2 MASTER WARN
PPSM1, PPSM2 MASTER CAUTION
EIS
PFD1, PFD2
MFD1, MFD2
ED
ADU
ADU1, ADU2
ARCDU1, ARCDU2
RCAU
AHRS
AHRS1
AHRS2

Figure 45-12.  CDS Pages

45-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-12. CDS Pages. NOTES

See Figure 45-12 for a list of the CDS pages

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

available within the three separate categories:

•• AVIONICS

SYSTEM
•• OTHER SYSTEMS
•• AVIONIC DATA.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-25

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

V 133.050 V 133.050
H H
F F
1 123.150 2 128.300
I 109.500 I 109.500
L L
S S
1 112.200 2 109.500
A 286 A 286
D D
F F CDS NOT AVAILABLE
1 341 2 341

I INT TX A 34 11
N T SBY
T C
1 43 37

I
PRESS RETURN KEY TO
REVERT TO MAIN ARCDU MENU

I I
I

Figure 45-13.  ARCDU, CDS Maintenance Mode Selection

45-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-13. ARCDU, CDS The CDS main menu page is shown if the CDS
Maintenance Mode Selection. is operating correctly.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The MAINT key on an ARCDU is pushed A CDS NOT AVAILABLE message is shown
to continue the sequence to set the CDS by the ARCDU if no response is received from
maintenance mode. the CDS after 3 seconds.

SYSTEM
The CDS maintenance mode is stopped with A SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE message is
any of the following conditions: shown if no response is received by the CDS
after a selection of a system and the CDS does
•• System is de-energized not send any data to the ARCDU.
•• RTN key on the ARCDU is pushed
•• Logoff (communication malfunction
between the ARCDU and CDS)
•• One of the conditions used to set the
CDS maintenance mode is not correct.

Only one ARCDU can show the pages for

maintenance mode at a time. When one
ARCDU is set, the other has no effect until
the communication with the other ARCDU
is stopped.

The ARCDU has the controls for the CDS that

follows:

•• 8 side keys
•• Return (RTN)
•• Previous (PREV)
•• NEXT
•• Maintenance (MAINT).

NOTE
Each key has only one function
except for the engine monitoring
unit (EMU). During some
operations the PREV and RTN
key perform the same function.

A command is supplied from the ARCDU to

the CDS to start the maintenance mode.

When the CDS receives the command, it

transmits a request to send (RTS) signal back
to the ARCDU. When the ARCDU is ready to
receive the data, a clear to send (CTS) signal
is supplied back to the CDS.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-27

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

CDS AVIONICS
SYSTEM

< AVIONICS SYSTEM >

REPORT / TEST

< OTHER SYSTEMS < AVIONICS MAINT >

STATUS

<AVIONIC DATA < LAST LEG LRU IDENT >

REPORT

< PREVIOUS LEGS

REPORT

I I

Figure 45-14.  ARCDU, Avionics Page

AVIONICS STATUS
AVIONICS STATUS 1/1
CLASS
IOP1 1 >

NO FAULT REPORTED

I I

Figure 45-15.  ARCDU, Avionics Status Page

45-28 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

A SYSTEM ERROR-ABORTED message is Refer to Figure 45-15. ARCDU, Avionics

shown if incorrect data is received. Status Page.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The CDS initial page has a menu for the The AVIONICS STATUS page shows current
selections of: class 1 and class 2 internal malfunctions of
avionic systems. To see current external faults,

SYSTEM
•• AVIONICS the side key adjacent to the cursor is pushed
to go to the SYSTEM REPORT / TEST page.
•• OTHER SYSTEMS
From this page, the side keys are pushed to
•• AVIONIC DATA. start an IBIT to check for both internal and
external malfunctions.
Refer to Figure 45-14. ARCDU, Avionics Page.
If a malfunction was sensed during the last
The side key adjacent to AVIONICS on the CDS leg, but is no longer present, the message is
page is pushed to show the AVIONICS page. removed from the AVIONICS STATUS page.

The AVIONICS page has a menu for the

selections of:

•• AVIONICS STATUS
•• LAST LEG REPORT
•• PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT
•• SYSTEM REPORT/TEST
•• MAINT
•• LRU IDENT.

NOTE
The non-volatile memory (NVM)
of the CDS has the following in
storage capacity:

- 5 0 class 1 failure messages in

the LAST LEG REPORT

- 3 00 class 1 failure messages

in the PREVIOUS LEGS
REPORT

- 5 0 class 2 failure messages in

MAINT REPORT.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-29

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

LAST LEG REPORT 1/1 LAST LEG REPORT 1/1

DATE TIME ATA

AUG 3 1020 31-41-06

IOP1 >
> >
USE SYSTEM / REPORT
TEST MENU TO TEST
SYSTEM IOP / IOM1

> >

I I

LAST
LASTLEG
LEGREPORT
REPORT

USE SYSTEM / REPORT

NO FAULT
TEST REPORTED
MENU TO TEST
SYSTEM GPWS

Figure 45-16.  ARCDU, Last Leg Report Page

45-30 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-16. ARCDU, Last Leg NOTES

Report Page.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The LAST LEG REPORT page shows class
1 malfunctions sensed while the aircraft was
airborne.

SYSTEM
It shows the parameters that follow:

•• Date
•• Time
•• ATA Message
•• Up to 2 malfunctions can be shown on
each LAST LEG REPORT page.

If the side key adjacent to the cursor is

pushed, a message shown to USE SYSTEM
REPORT/TEST MENU to start an IBIT for
the related system.

At the start of a new leg when the CAS is more

than 50 knots, all the messages are moved
from the LAST LEG REPORT page to the
PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT page.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-31

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

PREVIOUS
PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT
LEGS REPORT PREVIOUS LEGS
PREVIOUS LEG RPT 1/300
REPORT 1/1
4001
4016
LEG
LEG DATE
DATE TIMETIME ATA ATA

01
01 MAR 10 2 1910
AUG 1157 34-11-01
31-41-06
ADU1/ADU2/IOP2
IOP1
NO FAULT
NO FAULT REPORTED
REPORTED

02 MAR 05 1902 34-11-01

ADU1/ADU2/IOP1

I I

Figure 45-17.  ARCDU, Previous Legs Report Page

SYSTEM REPORT / TEST 1/3 SYSTEM REPORT/TEST 2/3

< IFC 1 ARMS > < FMS 1 FDR >

SYS TEST SYS TEST

< IFC 2 ADU > < FMS 2 CVR >

SYS TEST SYS TEST

< EIS AHRS > < TCAS RA1 >

SYS TEST SYS TEST

< VHF NAV 1 VHF NAV 2 > < EGPWS RA2 >
SYS TEST SYS TEST SYS TEST SYS TEST

I I

Figure 45-18.  ARCDU, System Report/Test Page (Sheet 1 of 2)

45-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-17. ARCDU, Previous Legs Page 2 of 3 of the SYSTEM REPORT / TEST
Report Page. pages has a menu for the selections of:

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT page shows •• FMS 1 SYS TEST
class 1 malfunctions sensed during the previous
•• FMS 2 SYS TEST
63 legs. It shows the parameters that follow:

SYSTEM
•• TCAS SYS TEST
•• Leg
•• EGPWS SYS TEST
•• Date
•• FDR SYS TEST
•• Time
•• CVR SYS TEST
•• ATA
•• RA1 SYS TEST
•• Message.
•• RA2 SYS TEST.
Up to 2 malfunctions can be shown on each
PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT page.

NOTE
Only malfunctions that occurred
on the same aircraft (same aircraft
serial number) are shown on the
same page.

The number for the legs is shown in a reverse

order so that the first shown failure is most recent.

The PREV and NEXT keys are used to see

the different pages of the PREVIOUS LEGS
REPORT.

Refer to Figure 45-18. ARCDU, System

Report/Test Page (Sheet 1 of 2).

Page 1 of 3 of the SYSTEM REPORT / TEST

pages has a menu for the selections of:

•• IFC 1
•• IFC 2
•• EIS
•• VHF NAV 1 SYS TEST
•• ARMS
•• ADU
•• AHRS
•• VHF NAV 2 SYS TEST.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-33

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

SYSTEM
SYSTEMREPORT / TEST 3/3
REPORT/TEST 3/3 EIS
EIS

< MLS
< MLS11 MLS2
MLS 2 >
> < PFD
PFD11 ED >
ED
SYS
SYS TEST
TEST SYS
SYS TEST
TEST

< ADF1
ADF 1 ADF 2>
ADF2 < PFD
< PFD22
SYS TEST
SYS TEST SYS
SYSTEST
TEST

< ATC 1 ATC 2 > < MFD1

< ATC1 ATC2 > < MFD 1
SYS TEST SYS TEST
SYS TEST SYS TEST
< PAA WXR CP > < MFD2
< PAA WXR CP > < MFD 2
SYS TEST SYS TEST
SYS TEST SYS TEST

I I

Figure 45-19.  ARCDU, System Report/Test Figure 45-21.  ARCDU, System Report/Test,
Page (Sheet 2 of 2) EIS Page

IFC
IFC11 ARMS
ARMS

<<FGM1
FGM1 << ARCDU1
ARCDU 1TEST
TEST

<<SPM1
SPM1 << ARCDU2
ARCDU 2TE TEST
TEST

< IOP1/IOM1/PPSM1 << RCAU

< IOP1/IOM1/PPSM1 RCAU TEST
TEST

< SPECIAL TEST

I I

Figure 45-20.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, Figure 45-22.  ARCDU, System Report/Test,
IFC Page Arms Page

45-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-19. ARCDU, System Refer to Figure 45-22. ARCDU, System
Report/Test Page (Sheet 2 of 2). Report/Test, Arms Page

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

Page 3 of 3 of the SYSTEM REPORT / TEST The side key adjacent to the ARMS on the
pages has a menu for the selections of: SYSTEM REPORT / TEST page is pushed to
show the ARMS menu selections:

SYSTEM
•• MLS 1 SYS TEST
•• ARCDU 1 TEST
•• ADF 1 SYS TEST
•• ARCDU 2 TEST
•• ATC 1 SYS TEST
•• RCAU TEST.
•• PAA SYS TEST
•• MLS 2 SYS TEST
•• ADF 2 SYS TEST
•• ATC 2 SYS TEST
•• WXR CP SYS TEST.

Refer to Figure 45-20. ARCDU, System

Report/Test, IFC Page.

The side key adjacent to IFC on the SYSTEM

REPORT / TEST page is pushed to show the
IFC menu selections:

•• FGM 1
•• SPM 1
•• IOP 1/IOM 1/PPSM 1.

Refer to Figure 45-21. ARCDU, System

Report/Test, EIS Page.

The side key adjacent to the EIS on the

SYSTEM REPORT / TEST page is pushed to
show the EIS menu selections:

•• PFD 1
•• PFD 2
•• MFD 1
•• MFD 2
•• ED.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-35

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

FGM
FGM11 FGM
FGM11
PREVIOUS LEGSREPORT
PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT
<
< LAST
LAST LEG
LEG
REPORT
REPORT

< PREVIOUS LEGS

REPORT
REPORT NOFAULT
NO FAULT REPORTED
REPORTED
< SYSTEM
< SYSTEM TEST
TEST

< MAINT
< MAINT

I I

Figure 45-23.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, Figure 45-25.  ARCDU, System Report/Test,
FGM 1 Page FGM 1 Previous Legs Report
Page

FGM
FGM11
LAST LEG REPORT
LAST LEG REPORT

NO FAULT
NO FAULT REPORTED
REPORTED

Figure 45-24.  ARCDU, System Report/Test,

FGM 1 Last Leg Report Page

45-36 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-23. ARCDU, System NOTES

Report/Test, FGM 1 Page.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The side key adjacent to FGM 1 on the
SYSTEM REPORT/TEST page is pushed to
show the FGM 1 menu selections:

SYSTEM
•• LAST LEG REPORT
•• PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT
•• SYSTEM TEST
•• MAINT.

NOTE
These selections are available
for all systems that have a type
1 interface with the CDS.

Refer to Figure 45-24. ARCDU, System Report/

Test, FGM 1 Last Leg Report Page.

The side key adjacent to LAST LEG REPORT

on the FGM 1 page is pushed to show the FGM
1 LAST LEG REPORT page.

Refer to Figure 45-25. ARCDU, System Report/

Test, FGM 1 Previous Legs Report Page.

The side key adjacent to PREVIOUS LEGS

REPORT on the FGM 1 page is pushed to show
the FGM 1 PREVIOUS LEGS REPORT page.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-37

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

FGM
FGM11 FGM
FGM11
SYSTEM
SYSTEM TEST
TEST SYSTEM
SYSTEM TEST
TEST

PULL FGM 1 CB (s)

WAIT
PULL 5 S CB
FGM1
WAIT
SET IN5CB
S
SET IN CB TEST IN PROGRESS 60S
THEN PRESS
PRESS CONTINUE
CONTINUE TEST IN PROGRESS 60 S
THEN
AFTER END OF POST
AFTER END OF POST

CONTINUE >
CONTINUE >

I I

Figure 45-26.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 System Test Page, Sheet 1

FGM 1
SYSTEM TEST

TEST OK

Figure 45-27.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 System Test Page, Sheet 2

45-38 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-26. ARCDU, System NOTES

Report/Test, FGM 1 System Test Page, Sheet 1.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The side key adjacent to SYSTEM TEST on
the FGM 1 page is pushed to show the FGM 1
SYSTEM TEST page.

SYSTEM
When the conditions to start the IBIT are set,
the side key adjacent to CONTINUE is pushed
to continue the sequence.

A TEST IN PROGRESS 60S message is shown

during the test.

Refer to Figure 45-27. ARCDU, System

Report/Test, FGM 1 System Test Page, Sheet 2.

If the IBIT is not satisfactory, the SYSTEM

TEST page shows the following parameters:

•• ATA of the line replaceable unit (LRU)

•• Class of malfunction, 1 or 2
•• Message.

If the test is satisfactory, TESK OK is shown.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-39

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

FGM 1
FGM1
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE

NO FAULT REPORTED
NO FAULT REPORTED

Figure 45-28.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, FGM 1 Maint Page

ADU
ADU ADU
ADU11
SYSTEM
SYSTEMTEST
TEST
< ADU11SYSTEM
< ADU SYSTEMTEST
TEST

< ADU
< ADU22SYSTEM
SYSTEMTEST
TEST
TEST IN PROGRESS 60 S
TEST IN PROGRESS 6 S

I I

Figure 45-29.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, ADU Page

45-40 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-28. ARCDU, System NOTES

Report/Test, FGM 1 Maint Page.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The side key adjacent to MAINT on the FGM 1
page is pushed to show the FGM 1 MAINT page.

SYSTEM
Refer to FigureFigure 45-29. ARCDU, System
Report/Test, ADU Page.

The side key adjacent to ADU 1 SYSTEM TEST

on the ADU page is pushed to start the IBIT.

The ADU 1 SYSTEM TEST page shows a TEST

IN PROGRESS 60S message during the test.

NOTE
These selections are similar for
all systems that have a type 2
interface with the CDS.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-41

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

ADU 1
ADU1 1/1
1/1 ADU 1
ADU1
SYSTEM TEST
SYSTEM TEST SYSTEMTEST
SYSTEM TEST
ATA ATA CLASS
CLASS
34-11-01 2
34-11-01 1
ADU SPEED RANGE
ADU1
TEST OK
TEST OK

I I

Figure 45-30.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, ADU 1 System Test Page

GPWS
VHFNAV1 GPWS
VHFNAV1
SYSTEM TEST
SYSTEM TEST SYSTEM TEST
WAIT 30 SEC
PULL GPWS CB
PULLWAIT
VHFNAV1
5 S CB
WAIT
SET IN5CB
S
IS TOO LOW TERRAIN
SET IN CB TEST IN PROGRESS 60 S
MESSAGE AVAILABLE
THEN PRESS CONTINUE
THEN PRESS CONTINUE EVERY 3 SEC ?

CONTINUE >
CONTINUE > < YES NO >

I I

Figure 45-31.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, VHF NAV 1 System Test Page

45-42 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-30. ARCDU, System NOTES

Report/Test, ADU 1 System Test Page.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

If the IBIT is not satisfactory, the SYSTEM
TEST page shows the following parameters:

SYSTEM
•• ATA of the line replaceable unit (LRU)
•• Class of malfunction, 1 or 2
•• Message.

If the test is satisfactory, TEST OK is shown.

Refer to Figure 45-31. ARCDU, System

Report/Test, VHF NAV 1 System Test Page.

The side key adjacent to VHF NAV 1 SYSTEM

TEST on the SYSTEM REPORT / TEST page
is pushed to show the VHF NAV 1 SYSTEM
TEST page.

The circuit breaker for the system is pulled and

then set in. The side key adjacent to CONTINUE
is then pushed to continue the sequence.

The VHF NAV 1 SYSTEM TEST page shows

A TEST IN PROGRESS 60S message during
the test.

NOTE
These selections are similar for
all systems that have a type 3
interface with the CDS.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-43

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

GPWS
VHF NAV2 1/1 GPWS
VHFNAV1
SYSTEM TEST SYSTEM TEST
ATA CLASS

34-51-01 1
VHF NAV2
TEST OK
TEST OK GPWS FAILED

I I

Figure 45-32.  ARCDU, System Report/Test, VHF NAV 1 System Test Page

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE 1/1 MAINTENANCE
MAINT
DATE TIME ATA
DATE TIME ATA
AUG
MAR7 05 1910
0831 34-53-01
34-11-01
DME2/FGM1
ADU1 SPEED RANGE
NO FAULT REPORTED
NO FAULT REPORTED

MAR 05 1902 34-11-01

ADU2 SPEED RANGE

I I

Figure 45-33.  ARCDU, Maintenance Page

45-44 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-32. ARCDU, System NOTES

Report/Test, VHF NAV 1 System Test Page.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

If the system test is not satisfactory, the
SYSTEM TEST page shows the following
parameters:

SYSTEM
•• ATA of the line replaceable unit (LRU)
•• Class of malfunction, 1 or 2
•• Message.

If the system is satisfactory, TEST OK is shown.

Refer to Figure 45-33. ARCDU, Maintenance

Page.

The MAINTENANCE page shows class 2

malfunctions sensed while the aircraft was
airborne.

It shows the following parameters:

•• Date
•• Time
•• ATA
•• Message.

Up to 2 malfunctions can be shown on the same

MAINTENANCE page.

At the start of a new leg when the CAS is more

than 50 knots, all class 2 messages are erased.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-45

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

LRU IDENT LRU

LRU IDENT
IDENT

< IFC 1 ARCDU1 > << FGM1

FGM1 PPSM1
PPSM1>>

< IFC 2 ARCDU2 > SPM1

<< SPM1

< IOP1
< EIS RCAU > < IOP1

< IOM1
< ADU AHRS > < IOM1

I I

Figure 45-34.  ARCDU, LRU Ident Pages Sheet 1

LRU IDENT LRU IDENT

< IFC 1 ARCDU1 > < PFD1 ED >

< IFC 2 ARCDU2 > < PFD2

< EIS RCAU > < MFD1

< ADU AHRS > < MFD2

I I

Figure 45-35.  ARCDU, LRU Ident Pages Sheet 2

45-46 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-34. ARCDU, LRU Ident Refer to Figure 45-35. ARCDU, LRU Ident
Pages Sheet 1. Pages Sheet 2.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The first LRU IDENT page has a menu for For the EIS, the LRU IDENT page has a menu
selections of: for the selections of:

SYSTEM
•• IFC 1 •• PFD 1
•• IFC 2 •• PFD 2
•• EIS •• MFD 1
•• ADU •• MFD 2
•• ARCDU 1 •• ED
•• ARCDU 2
•• RCAU
•• AHRS.

For the IFC 1, the LRU IDENT page has a menu

for selections of:

•• FGM 1
•• SPM 1
•• IOP 1
•• IOM 1
•• PPSM 1.

For the IFC 2, the LRU IDENT page has a menu

for selections of:

•• FGM 2
•• SPM 2
•• IOP 2
•• IOM 2
•• PPSM 2.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-47

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

LRU IDENT
LRU IDENT

< IFC 1 ARCDU1 >

PFD1:

<P/N:
IFCC19190AB04
2 ARCDU2 >

< EIS RCAU >

< ADU AHRS >

Figure 45-36.  ARCDU, LRU Ident Pages Sheet 3

OTHER SYSTEM 1/2 OTHER SYSTEM 2/2

< EMU ANTI-SKID > < FLAPS

< FCS ICE PROTECTION > < CABIN PRESS CONTROL

< ECS APU > < AUXILIARY

< TMCU 1 TMCU 2 >

I I

Figure 45-37.  ARCDU, Other System Page

45-48 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-36. ARCDU, LRU Ident NOTES

Pages Sheet 3.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The LRU IDENT page shows the part number
page for the LRU.

SYSTEM
Refer to Figure 45-37. ARCDU, Other System
Page.

Page 1 of 2 of the OTHER SYSTEM pages has

a menu for selections of:

•• EMU
•• FCS
•• ECS
•• TMCU 1
•• TMCU 2
•• ANTI-SKID
•• ICE PROTECTION
•• APU.

Page 2 of 2 of the SYSTEM REPORT / TEST

pages has a menu for the selections of:

•• FLAPS
•• CABIN PRESSURE CONTROL
•• AUXILIARY.

For fault retrieval and diagnostic detail of the

above systems, please refer to their relevant
ATA chapters in the Maintenance Training
Manual.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-49

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

AVIONIC DATA
AVIONIC DATA

<< AVIONIC
AVIONIC CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION

Figure 45-38.  ARCDU, Avionics Data Page

AVIONIC CONFIG
AVIONIC CONFIG 1/8
1/8 AVIONIC
AVIONIC CONFIG
CONFIG 2/8
2/8
ACM1
ACM1 ACM2 ACM1
ACM1 ACM2
ACM2
TCAS YESYES YES
YES HF1
HF 1 YESYES YES
YES
ACARS
ACARS YESNO YES
NO HF2
HF 2 NONO NO
NO
SELCAL
SELCAL YESYES YES
YES VHF 1EXT
VHF1 EXTRGE
RGE NONO NO
NO
MLS
MLS YESYES YES
YES VHF 2EXT
VHF2 EXTRGE
RGE NONO NO
NO
FMS1 YES YES VHF 3EXT
EXTRGE
RGE NONO NO
FMS1 NO NO VHF3 NO
FMS2 YES YES VHF 8.33 KHZ YES YES
FMS2 NO NO VHF 8.33KHZ NO NO
VHF COM3 NO NO DME2 YES YES
VHF COM 3 NO NO
NO
DME 2 YES YES
TACAN NO ATC2 YES YES
TACAN
UHF NO NO NO
NO ATC2
ADF2 YES
YES YES
YES
UHF FM
VHF NO NO NO
NO ADF2 YES YES
VHF FM NO NO

I I

Figure 45-39.  ARCDU, Avionics Config Sheet 1

45-50 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-38. ARCDU, Avionics Data NOTES

Page.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

The AVIONICS DATA page has a menu to show
the AVIONICS CONFIGURATION pages.

SYSTEM
Refer to:

•• F i g u r e 4 5 - 3 9 . A R C D U , A v i o n i c s
Config Sheet 1.
•• F i g u r e 4 5 - 4 0 . A R C D U , A v i o n i c s
Config Sheet 2.

Eight pages of the AVIONICS CONFIG pages

show YES or NO for the programming of the
aircraft configuration modules (ACM1 and
ACM2). It also shows the cyclic redundancy
checks (CRC1 and CRC2).

NOTE
A cyclic redundancy check
(CRC) is a non-secure hash
function designed to detect
accidental changes to raw
computer data. A CRC-enabled
device calculates a fixed-length
binary sequence, known as the
CRC code for each block of
data and stores it. When a block
is received the device repeats
the calculation; if the new
CRC does not match the one
calculated earlier, then the block
contains a data error and the
device takes corrective action
such as rereading or requesting
the block be sent again.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-51

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

AVIONIC CONFIG 3/8 AVIONIC CONFIG 4/8

ACM1 ACM2 ACM1 ACM2
APU YES YES AIRCRAFT TYPE :
DASH 8 - 400 400
SYSTEM

HUD NO NO
AUX NAV 1 NO NO
AUX NAV 2 NO NO ENGINE TYPE : PWC PWC
RA2 YES YES
IRS NO NO UNITS : KG KG
EGPWS YES YES L L
ALTERNATE ICP NO NO M M
COUPLED HEADING NO NO C C
FLT TEST A/C YES YES A/C NUMBER : 4001 4001

I I

AVIONIC CONFIG 5/8 AVIONIC CONFIG 6/8

ACM1 ACM2 ACM1 ACM2
AOA 1 CORRECTION : DISPLAY FORMAT :
+0.000 1CUE 1CUE

AOA 2 CORRECTION :
+0.000

I I

AVIONIC CONFIG 7/8 AVIONIC CONFIG

TONES: ACM1 ACM2 TONES: ACM1 ACM2
GPWS YES YES MAST WARN YES YES
TCAS YES YES MAST CAUTION YES YES
FIRE BELL YES YES
TO CONFIG YES YES
AP DIENG YES YES
PITCH TRIM YES YES
OVERSPEED YES YES CRC1 : XXXXXXXX
INCORRECT LD YES YES
ALTITUDE ALRT YES YES CRC2 : XXXXXXXX
BETA LOCKOUT YES YES
SELCAL YES YES

I I

Figure 45-40.  ARCDU, Avionics Config Sheet 2

45-52 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure 45-41. Maintenance Panel, The amber ON light adjacent to the knob
NVM Reset of Other Systems. illuminates.

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

It is usually necessary to clear the CDS Then, the NVM switch is pushed.
messages after they are seen on the ARCDU.

SYSTEM
The messages for the avionic systems are
NOTE
automatically reset when the defective system The CDS does not need to be
is repaired. set to maintenance mode to reset
messages for other systems. But,
A manual reset is necessary for other systems. the CDS maintenance mode
should be set to see that the
To reset the NVM of the other systems, the message is reset.
knob for the other systems is set from OFF to
a position that follows:

•• FLAP
•• PROP DEICE 2
•• PROP DEICE 1
•• AFR DEICE
A
•• FLT CTL
•• ECS
•• CPC.
FWD

AVIONICS RACK ELECTRICAL

NVM Rotary Switch NVM RESET Pushbutton Switch INSTALLATION

SYSTEM DOWNLOAD
PROP DEICE CAL J1 AVIONIC J3 AVIONIC J4 AVIONIC J5 APU
ENGINE MAINTENANCE CDS GND MAINT
RS422/A429 RS422/A429 A429 RS422
UNFEATHER
#1 #2
#1 #2 ECS AUTO NVM RESET LED TEST J2 AVIONIC
ON FAIL PSEU RS422/A429 PMAT DOWNLOAD RS422 PORTS DISABLED

RIG TRIM MAINT DISC

PSS PSEU ON A
OFF PWR ON
MAINT OPER ANVS SYS
FLAP
PAA RS232 STOP L/V
PROP TEST
DEICE 2
28 VDC PLAY SEL
PROP
DIGITAL PASSENGER
CPC TEAM ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM

DEICE 1
ECS AFR
FLT ANVS SYS
DEICE
CTL DEGRADED

Figure 45-41.  Maintenance Panel, NVM Reset of Other Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-53

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL
45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM

NVM RESET
GS1 110
109
CPC
108
ECS
107
FLT CTL
106
DECK 1
C
AFR DEICE 105

PROP DEICE 1 104

PROP DEICE 2 103
FLAP 102

S2
MODE
SELECTOR
DS3
SWITCH

DECK 2
C

CDS GND MAINT CDS

GND
MAINT
SWITCH

Figure 45-42.  CDS Operation, Maintenance Control Panel

45-54 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

OPERATION NOTES
Refer to Figure 45-42. CDS Operation,

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

Maintenance Control Panel.

A ground signal from the CDS GND MAINT

SYSTEM
switch is supplied to the two ARCDUs and the
IOP 1 to start the maintenance mode of the
CDS and make the ON light on the maintenance
control panel illuminate.

A ground signal is supplied through the NVM

RESET switch and mode selector switch to
reset the NVM of the unit.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-55

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

45-00-00 SPECIAL TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

•• DB9F to DB25M Cable, Download

•• DB25F Connector/Backshell, EMU-clear Hardware Interlock
SYSTEM

•• GBS Download Computer

45-00-00 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Refer to the Bombardier AMM PSM 1-84-2 for details on these maintenance procedures:

•• FIM 45-45-00-810-802 C
 entralized Diagnostics System (CDS) Fault Message Retrieval −
Fault Isolation
•• AMM 45-45-00-710-801 O
 perational Test for the Return−To−Service of the Maintenance
Panel
•• AMM 45-00-21-742-801 O
 perational Test for the Return−To−Service of the Maintenance
Panel
•• AMM 45-00-21-743-801 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Environmental Control System (ECS)
•• AMM 45-00-21-742-802 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Cabin Pressure Control System (CABIN PRESS CONTROL)
•• AMM 45-00-21-743-802 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) − Cabin
Pressure Control System (CABIN PRESS CONTROL)
•• AMM 45-00-27-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Flight Control System (FCS)
•• AMM 45-00-27-743-801 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) − Flight
Control System (FCS)
•• AMM 45-00-27-742-802 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Flaps System (FLAPS)
•• AMM 45-00-27-743-802 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) − Flaps
System (FLAPS)
•• AMM 45-00-30-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Timer Monitor Control Unit (TMCU)
•• AMM 45-00-30-743-801 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) − Timer
Monitor Control Unit (TMCU)
•• AMM 45-00-30-742-802 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) − Ice
Protection System (ICE PROTECTION)
•• AMM 45-00-30-743-802 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) − Ice
Protection System (ICE PROTECTION)
•• AMM 45-00-32-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Anti−Skid System (ANTI−SKID)
•• AMM 45-00-32-743-801 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) − Anti−
Skid System (ANTI−SKID)

45-56 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

 DASH 8 Q400 MAINTENANCE TRAINING MANUAL

•• AMM 45-00-34-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Avionics (AVIONICS)

45  CENTRAL DIAGNOSTIC

•• AMM 45-00-34-742-802 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Avionic Data (AVIONIC DATA)
•• AMM 45-00-49-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −

SYSTEM
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
•• AMM 45-00-49-743-801 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
•• AMM 45-00-73-742-801 R
 etrieval of Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Engine Monitoring (EMU)
•• AMM 45-00-73-743-801 E
 rase the Data from the Central Diagnostic System (CDS) −
Engine Monitoring Unit (EMU)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY 45-57